y,C-NRLF in^''-" .-; -i^i THE UNiVERSITY OF CHICAGO THE PRESIDENT'S REPORT ^^U\'%-^: THE PRESIDENT'S REPORT Cbe Tllntverslti? of (^btcaao FOUNDED BY JOHN D. ROCKEFELLER THE Presidents Report JULY, 1892— JULY, 1902 PART II CHICAGO Zbc inniverdftis of Cbicago pceea 1904 Copyright 1903 BY THE UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO \qo4- To the Trustees of the University of Chicago: I SUBMIT herewith, as a part of the Decennial Report of the President, the accompanying list of the publications of the members of the University, printed for convenience as a separate volume. The work of gathering and preparing the material and seeing the volume through the press has been performed by the Editorial Com- mittee of the Faculty which has had charge of the Decennial Publications as a whole. The aim has been to include the publications, from 1892 to 1902 inclusive, of all present and former members of the University staff, issued during the term of their connection with the University, including all contributions to the Decennial Publica- tions, and of all Graduate Students issued while in residence. All students have been added who have received from the University (down to October, 1902) the degree of Doctor of Philosophy, with the title of their theses even when still impublished. The regulations of the University require the publication of Doctors' theses within one year after the conferring of the degree ; but it has been found impossible always to enforce this regulation within the time limit. It was thought, however, that a thesis soon to be published might legitimately be regarded as a part of the work of a Department, and that a complete list of the Doctors and their subjects would in itself be a useful thing. But unpublished theses are always so designated. So far as possible the pres- ent positions of the Doctors of the University are also given, as well as of former members of the Faculties who now hold academic or professional positions. The date in square brackets after the name indicates the term of service of present and former members of the Faculties ; the dates after the names of Doctors, the year of receiving the degree. The explanation should be added that the School of Education, the Law School, and the Medical School were organized either towards the end of the decen- nium or at its close; this bibliography includes, therefore, only the Departments embraced under the Faculties of Arts, Literature, Science, and Theology. The bibliography is divided into two parts. Part I, "Departmental," is intended to include the publications which fall more especially within the lines of activity of a person as member of a departmental staff. The attempt has been made to insert under this head only such books, articles, and reviews as may be thought to have something more than an ephemeral value. The character of the medium of publication was here often the only guide. Some inequality in the selection of this material has naturally been unavoidable; the authors themselves are in the main responsible for the manner in which the Committee's instructions in this regard have been carried out. Brief abstracts, often rather in the nature of expanded titles, have been given in this Part so far as possible, that the lists might thereby gain in interest and value for the non-specialist. Part II, "Literary, Educational, Miscellaneous," requires little explanation. Elementary or secondary text books have been entered here, while reviews and newspaper articles have been omitted altogether. In some cases items which reached the editors too late to be included in Part I have been added here, I desire to express to the Editorial Committee my great appreciation of the important service rendered in the preparation of this voliime. William R. Habpee, President. ■24383 CONTENTS PART I. DEPARTMENTAL l_16i FACULTIES OF ARTS, LITERATURE, AND SCIENCE lA. Philosophy -- 3 IB. Education ---. _ ^2 II. Political Economy 23 III. Political Science 20 IV. History 24 V. Archeology 29 VI. Sociology and Anthropology 3q VII. Comparative Religion 33 VIII. Semitic Languages and Literatures 39 IX. Biblical and Patristic Greek 45 X. Sanskrit and Indo-European Comparative Philology - - . . 49 XI. Greek Language and Literature 51 XII. Latin Language and Literature 55 XIII. Romance Languages and Literatures 61 XIV. Germanic Languages and Literatures 62 XV. English 67 XVI. Literature in English 72 XVII. Mathematics 73 XVIII. Astronomy and Astrophysics 33 XIX. Physics JOI XX. Chemistry 1Q5 XXL Geology jl4 XXII. Zoology 125 XXIII. Anatomy 136 XXIV. Physiology 138 XXV. Neurology I43 XXVI. Pal-eontology . ... . 146 XXVII. Botany - - 148 XXVIII. Pathology and Bacteriology I54 FACULTY OF THEOLOGY XLI. Old Testament Literature and Interpretation 156 XLII. New Testament Literature and Interpretation 156 XLIII. Biblical Theology - 156 XLIV. Systematic Theology I57 XLV. Church History 158 XL VI. Homiletics, Chubch'Polity, and Pastoral Duties 160 XL VII. Sociology I61 PART II. LITERARY, EDUCATIONAL, MISCELLANEOUS - - - 163-182 INDEX - 183 PART I DEPARTMENTAL DEPARTMENTAL I A. PHILOSOPHY John Dewey [1894 — ], Professor and Head of the Department of Philosophy ; Director of the School of Education. The Psychology of Number. With the collabo- ration of J. A. MacLellan. 8vo, xiv + 309. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1895. A discussion of the psychological development of the number-consciousness as a basis for teaching elemen- tary mathematics. The Study of Ethics. A syllabus. Second edition. 8vo,lM. Ann Arbor, George Wahr, 1897. An analysis, from the psychological side, of the typical factors in conduct ; with bibliographical references. The Significance of the Problem of Knowledge. 8vo, 20. University of Chicago Contribu- tions to Philosophy, I, No. 3, 1897. The annual address of the honorary president before the Philosophical Society of the University of Michi- gan, devoted to interpreting the interest in epistemo- logical problems in terms of social development. School and Society. Three lectures. 12mo, 129. Chicago, University Press, 1899. (Second edition, 1900; third edition, 1900; both im- changed.) A discussion of changes in existing school methods, material, and organization necessary to adapt the school to contemporary social life. Psychology and Philosophic Method. Annual public address before the Philosophical Union of the University of California. 8vo, 23. Berkeley, University Press, 1899. The necessity of employing psychological data to con- struct a rational theory of human experience. The Educational Situation. 12mo, 109. Uni- versity of Chicago Contributions to Edu- cation, I, No. 3, 1902. A discussion of the contemporary situation and i)rob- lems of elementary, secondary, and college educations, resi)ectively, in the light of historical conditions and contemporary social demands. The Child and the Curriculum. 12mo, 40. Ibid., No. 5, 1902. An account of the conflicting contentions of two op- posed schools of pedagogic theory as to the proper basis of education, and an attempt to lecoucUe the opi>osed positions. Studies in Logical Theory. With the collabo- ration of members and fellows of the De- partment of Philosophy. University of Chicago Decennial Publications, Second Series, Vol. X. Austin's Theory of Sovereignty. Political Science Quarterly, IX (1894), 31-52. A criticism of the attempt rigidly to separate the legal and moral aspects of sovereignty. Emotional Attitudes. Psychological Review, I (1894), 533-569. An attempt to combine Darwin's and James's theories of emotion. The Ego as Cause. Philosophical Review, III (1894), 337-341. A criticism of one form of the free-will theory. The Significance of Emotions. Psychological Review, II (1895), 13-32. A continuation of the discussion of emotions with a view to showing their position in the reorganization of instincts and habits. Interest as Related to Will. Second Supple- ment to Herbart Yearbook, I (1895), 1-23. (Second edition, revised, 1899.) A psychological investigation of the nature of interest, with conclusions regarding its intellectual and moral use in education. The Metaphysical Method in Ethics. Psy- chological Review, III (1896), 181-188. A criticism of the attempt to found ethical theory upon metaphysical, as distinct from psychological and socio- logical, considerations. The Reflex- Arc Concept in Psychology. Ibid., 357-370. A discussion of sensori-motor co-ordination as the unit of psychological theory. The Culture Epoch Theory. Herbart Year Book, II (1896), 89-95. A criticism of the theory of the recapitulation of the life of the race by the child. Imagination and Expression. Kindergarten Magazine, IX (1896), 61-69. A discussion of the bearings of iDvestigation upon art instruction. Publications The Psychology of Effort. Philosophical Be- view, VI (1897), 43-56. An interpretation of efEort in terms of the reconstruc- tion of habits. The Psychologic Aspect of the School Curricu- lum. Educational Review, XIII (1897), 1-14. An attempt to show that psycholo^ is concerned with the subject-matter as well as with the method of instruction. The Interpretation of Child Study. Trans- actions of the Illinois Society for Child Study, II (1897), 17-28. An account of the social and scientific motives involved in the development of a science of genetic psychology. Ethical Principles Underlying Education. Her- bart Yearbook, III (1897), 1-14. A discussion of the relation of ethics, social life, and education, with a view to indicating the social, and hence ethical, forces operating in education. Evolution and Ethics. Monist, VIII (1898), 321-341. A criticism of Huxley's opposition of the natural and the ethical, together with an interpretation of the meaning of selection, survival, etc., in ethical terms. Social and Ethical Interpretations in Mental Development. New World, VII (1898), 504r-522. An account of the bearing of the social factors in indi- vidual development upon moral growth, based upon a criticism of Baldwin s theories. Some Remarks on the Psychology of Number. Pedagogical Seminary, V (1898), 427-434. A criticism of Phillip's investigations, together with an estimate of the place of the serial and rational factors in the number concept. Harris's Psychologic Foundations of Educa- tion. Educational Review, XVI (1898), 356-369. An estimate of various elements in rational and genetic psychology in their educational bearings. A Plan for the Investigation and Report upon Elementary Education. Proceedings of the National Educational Association, 1898, 335-343. An outline for a systematic co-operative study of pro- gressive phases of elementary education. Principles of Mental Development. Trans- actions of the Illinois Society for Child- Study, IV (1899), 65-83. A discussion of early infancy as exemplifying certain general principles or growth. Psychology and Social Practice. Psychologi- cal Review, VII (1900), 105-124. The president's annual address before the American Psychological Association, devoted to showing the bearing of psychological theory upon questions of social control. Some Stages of Logical Thought. Philosophi- cal Review, IX (1900), 465-489. An account, from the standxx)int of social psychology, ine of the various attitudes of inquiry which the race has progressively assumed, and the way in which thes6 have determined logical theories. Educational Psychology. A series of seven articles. Elementary School Record, I (1900), 12-15, 21-23, 48-52, 82-85, 111-113, 143-151, 199-203, 221-231. Discussions of play, attention, occupation work, mental development, etc. The Place of Manual Training in Elementary Course of Study. Manual Training Maga- zine, II (1901), 189-199. The value of constructive work in relation to its organi- zation into the school curriculum. The Situation as Regards the Course of Study. Educational Review, XXII (1901), 26-49. Also in Proceedings of the National Edu- cational Association, 1901, 332-348. An account of the conflict between the institutional organization of the present elementary-school system and the attempt to reform the subject-matter of in- struction. Simdry articles on the Schools of Philosophy and on Metaphysical Terms contributed to the Dictionary of Philosophy and Psy- chology, edited by J. Mark Baldwin. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1901, 1902. Interpretation of Savage Mind. Psychologi- cal Review, IX (1902), 217-230. The possibility and necessity of the interpretation of phenomena of savage life in terms of the mental dispo- sition or pattern generated in the pursuit of certain occupations. The Evolutionary Method as Applied to Mo- rality: Its Scientific Necessity. Philosophi- cal Review, XI (1902), 107-124. An attempt to show that the historical method is the analogue in the spiritual-social sciences of the experi- mental in the physical sciences. The Evolutionary Method as Applied to Moral- ity: Its Ethical Significance. /6td., 353-371. A continuation of the previous article, with special reference to showing that a scientific treatment of mo- rality, upon a genetic basis, does not affect moral interests unfavorably or even leave them indifferent, but supplies an additional moral motive and sanction through the joint rationalization and criticism it af- fords. The Logical Conditions of a Scientific Treat- ment of Conduct. The University of Chi- cago Decennial Publications, First Series, Vol. Ill, Part 2. Department op Philosophy Beviews of Baldwin, Mental Development. Philosophical Review, VII (1898), 398-409. A criticism of Baldwin's theory of the individual and social factors in development. Ibid., 629-630. A rejoinder to Baldwin's reply to the foregoing. Royce, The World and the Individual. Ibid., IX (1900), 311-324, and (second volume) ibid., XI (1902), 392-407. James Hayden Tufts [1892 — ], Professor of Philosophy. The Sources and Development of Kant's Tele- ology. 8vo, 48. Chicago, University Press, 1892. An attempt to consider Kant's teleology in its relations to previous thought, especially to that of Leibniz ; to trace the development of this teleolojary through Kant's works ; and, more particularly, to utilize recently pub- lished fragments which throw light upon certain stages of the development. A History of Philosophy, with especial refer- ence to the formation and development of its problems and conceptions, by Professor W. Windelband. Translated by James H. Tufts. Svo, xvii-}-659. Second edition, revised and enlarged, with additions by the translator, xv-|-726, 1901. New York and London, The Macmillan Co., 1893. The Individual and His Relation to Society, as Reflected in British Ethics. Part I: The Individual in Relation to Law and Institu- tions. With the collaboration of Helen B. Thompson. 8vo, 52. University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, No. 5, 1898. A study of British ethical writers, chiefly Hobbes, Cumberland, and Locke, with the purpose of showing how the new conception of the individual which was emerging in the life of the Renaissance and Reforma- tion found expression in their ethical and political theories. It is shown that this involved giving new meanings on the part of Hobbes to such social terms as "law," "right," etc., and that with Locke we find the individual^ coming to consciousness of the fact that the great institutions, law, church, and state, are really the product of the individual and subject to the author- ity of reason. The hedonistic theory of motives is shown to signify that, although the law may be imposed by an external authority, it must make its appeal to the individual for acceptance through the motives of pleasure and pain. Kant's Refutations of Idealism in the "Lose Blatter." Philosoph. Rev., V (1896), 51-8. An examination of the recently published fragments of Kant, in which the attempt is made to show that Kant's attitude toward idealism is not so unambiguous as has been assumed by most commentators. It is shown from these fragments that he explicitly stated that he proved the existence, not merely of a phenomenal object, but also of a thing-in-itself. Certain other fragments are found to contain an explanation of how such a twofold attitude on the part of Kant was impossible, and thus previous difficulties of Kant's critics are explained. Recent Sociological Tendencies in France. American Journal of Sociology, I (1896), 446-456. A summary, with criticism, of certain of the categories which are coming into use in sociological theory. Can Epistemology Be Based on Mental States? Philosophical Review, VI (1897), 577-592. An attempt to show that current discussions in episte- mology suffer from the fallacy of supposing that mental states, as such, exist. It is maintained that certain difficulties as to the evidence for the existence of an external world arise from failure to analyze what is meant by external and what is meant by the self ; an analysis of the conception of the self is undertaken. Sundry articles on Esthetics and the History of Philosophy, contributed to the Diction- ary of Philosophy and Psychology, edited by J. Mark Baldwin. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1901, 1902. On the Genesis of the -Esthetic Categories. The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, Vol. Ill, Part 2, 1-14. An examination of the commonly reco^ized aesthetic categories from the point of view of social psychology. The paper aims to show that such categories as "objec- tivity,''^ "universality," "disinterestedness," etc., receive their most satisfactory explanation from the standpoint of social, rather than from that of indi- vidual, psychology. Reviews of A. Riehl, Science and Metaphysics. Trans- lated by A. Fairbanks. Philosophical Re- view, IV (1895), 432^35. Reicke, Lose Blatter aus Kant's Nachlass, Heft II. Adickes's Kant-Studien. Ibid.y V (1896), 64r-69. Giddings, Principles of Sociology and Theory of Socialization. Psychological Review, IV (1897), 660-664. Analysis in particular of the author's principles of "consciousness of kind" and "sympathy," with the purp>ose of showing that, while these principles mark certain important conditions for socialization, they are yet not adequate principles. It is questioned whether the lower animals, or even primitive man, ever had consciousness of kind ; their relations are probably in many cases reflexes and in others are the result of familiarity as contrasted with strangeness. The term "sympathy" as used by the author seems to mean merely " imitation of emotions," and this falls short of what is needed for genuine unity of purpose. Publications Baldwin, Social and Ethical Interpretations. Ibid., V (1898), 314-321. A criticism of Baldwin's conception of the socius and general self. The author has not distinguished with suflBcient clearness between the two possible meanings of the social and general self as signifying either (1) a self or content in which the ego and the alter are not as yet set off against each other as representing con- flicting interests ; or (t) a self in which the interests of others have been really recognized as such and taken up and adopted as the end of desire. The ethical pro- cess is essentially a process of transition from the former of these selves to the latter. The further sug- gestion is presented that in efifecting this transition from the customary or unreflective self to the more reflective and conscious attitude, suflicient emphasis is not placed by the author upon other forces than those of imitation. Willmann, Geschichte des Idealismus. Phi- losophical Review, VII (1898), 523-526. A criticism of Willmann's position that the philosophy of the eighteenth century culminating in Kant was an absolute individualism. The " self " in Kant's doctrine of autonomy is not a purely individual conception. Patten, Development of English Thought. Ibid., VIII (1899), 518-524. An examination of the author's treatment of the philo- sophical writers, and an attempt to show, as against Patten's position, that Book I of Hume's treatise was not merely secondary to the following portions. Ormond, Foundations of Knowledge. Ibid., X (1901), 56-62. The author's criterion of knowledge contains two fac- tors which are not fully adjusted — the emotional and the cognitive. The term "intuition" as used by the author sometimes rests upon one of these supports and sometimes upon the other. Further, as against the author's claim that the demand for unity in knowledge is ultimately an aesthetic or emotional demand, and consequently that the ultimate logical criterion is emo- tional, it is maintained that the practical demand for the organization of knowledge is tne more fundamental, and has been historically the more efficient in shaping the constitution of mind, and thereby in establishing the criteria of logic and science. Graham, English Political Philosophy, from Hobbes to Maine. American Historical Review, VI (1901), 360-362. Kand, Life, Unpublished Letters and Philo- sophical Regimen of Anthony, Earl of Shaftesbury. Ibid., VI (1901), 610 f. James Kowland Angell [1894 — ], As- sociate Professor of Experimental Psy- chology. Reaction Time: A Study in Attention and Habit. With the collaboration of A. W. Moore, assisted by J. J. Jegi. Psychological Review, III (1896), 245-258. Reprinted in Vol. I of University of Chicago Contribu- tions to Philosophy. An account of experimentation, furnishing a reconcili- ation of the antagonistic theories of reaction, i. e., the Leipzig theory and the "type" theory. The experi- ments show that the rapidity and regularity of any special mode of reaction are a function of (1) organic structure, especially as regards the kind of imagery employed and the kind of co-ordination most readily executed ; and (2} practice. When experiments are con- ducted for considerable periods of time, it becomes possible to develop essentially any mode of reaction, and in almost all cases the extreme differences among the several possible methods of reacting give way to a high degree of uniformity. The Organic Effects of Agreeable and Dis- agreeable Stimuli. With the collaboration of S. F. MacLennan. Psychological Review, III (1896), 371-377. Reprinted in Vol. I of University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy. A report of pneumographic and plethysmographic ex- periments upon the peculiarities of respiration, pulse, and vaso-motor activities under pleasure-pain stimu- lations, showing that many other psychical conditions besides those recognizable as pleasure and pain are reflected by the circulatory and respiratory changes. Thought and Imagery. Philosophical Review, VI (1897), 646-651. A criticism of the view that certain ratiocinative thought processes are destitute of imagery. In defense of the contrary doctrine, evidence, both logical and psychological, is brought forward from the study of language as a medium of thought processes. Habit and Attention. Psychological Review, V (1898), 179-183. The function of attention as an adjuster of imperfect adaptations _ of the organism to environmental de- mands is pointed out, and the manner in which it re- sults in developing effective co-ordinations in response to these demands is exhibited. An Investigation of Certain Factors Affecting the Relations of Dermal and Optical Space. In collaboration with J. N. Spray and E. W. Mahood. Ibid., 579-595. Reprinted in Vol. I of University of Chicago Contribu- tions to Philosophy. A report of experimentation, showing that the under- estimation of dermal linear extents, when compared with visual, holds only for thermally indifferent stimuli. When the stimulus is rendered distinctly hot or cold, the underestimation gives way to overestimation. A Study of the Relations between Certain Or- ganic Processes and Consciousness. With the collaboration of H. B. Thompson. Psy- chological Review, VI (1899), 32-69. Re- printed in Vol. II of University of Chi- cago Contributions to Philosophy. The paper reports extensive experiments upon the be- havior of the heart, the vaso-motor processes, and the respiration under psychical conditions of the most vari- ous kinds. Numerous graphic records are presented to show that an intimate parallelism exists between the regularity or irregularity with which attention oper- ates and the steadiness or instability of these circula- tory-respiratory processes. Department of Philosophy Hypnotism and the Will. In a collection of essays entitled "Hypnotism and Hypnotic Suggestion." Kochester, New York State Publishing Co., 1900, pp. 246-255. Aff analysis of the elementary facts of volition, showing how hypnotic suggestion becomes effective in produ- cing movements, and also exhibiting its limitations and dangers. The Monaural Localization of Soimd. With the collaboration of W. Fite. Psychologi- cal Review, VIII (1901), 225-246. A report of experiments upon a man suffering from internal ear deafness in one ear, showing that he could localize complex sounds with remarkable accuracy by reason of the qualitative changes such sounds undergo, through the modifications of their partial tones, caused by the interposition of the bones of the head, the pinnae, etc. Pure tones he could not localize at all, because they change only in intensity, and such change may mean alteration of either direction or distance. The Monaural Localization of Sound. Science, New Series, XIV (1901), 775-777. A briefer and less technical account of the case re- ported in the previous paper. Further Observations on the Monaural Locali- zation of Sound. With the collaboration of W. Fite. Psychological Review, VIII (1901), 449^58. Four other cases of complete deafness in one ear are reported in this paper. The cases ranged from thirty years to one year in duration. The results of the first paper were fully confirmed, and the effects of adapta- tion and practice were clearly shown in the much greater accuracy in localization exhibited by the per- sons who had been longest deaf. New Apparatus. With the collaboration of W. Fite. /6ieriments ux>on the localization of sound. Ladd, Outline of Descriptive Psychology. Philosophical Review, VIII (1899), 204r-205. A comparison of the present work with the author's previous texts and a discussion of the prevalent tend- ency to introduce dynamic categories more extensively into psychology. Steffens, Experimentelle Beitrflge zur Lehre vom Okonomischen Lernen. Psychological Review, VII (1900), 522-524. A critical report of the author's experiments upon the memorizing of verse and similar subject-matter. Weir, Dawn of Reason. American Journal of Theology, IV (1900), 564-565. A criticism of the author's work as anachronistic and out of touch with contemporary points of view. Jastrow, Fact and Fable in Psychology. Dial, XXX (1901), 264-265. Chiefly a discussion of the merits of the controversy between exact science and the various modern forms of occultism. Titchener, Experimental Psychology, (1) In- structor's Manual, (2) Student's Manual. American Journal of Psychology, XII (1901), 596-600. A consideration of the desiderata at the present time in laboratory instruction and an expository examina- tion of the author's efiEort to meet these needs. Pierce, Studies in Space Perception. Psycho- logical Review, IX (1902), 397^1:01. Critical exposition of the author's theories of audi- tory and visual space. Addison W. Mooee [1895 — ], Assistant Professor of Philosophy. Reaction Time. In collaboration with Profes- sor James Rowland Angell. (See above.) The Representational versus the Functional Conception of Knowledge in Locke's Essay on the Human Understanding. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 75. University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, Vol. Ill, No. 1, 1902. An attempt to show that the main " difiBculties " and inconsistencies in Locke's Essay can all be traced to a confusion of two very different views of the nature and function of knowledge: the one regarding knowledge as a process of imagery copying or representing in alge- braic fashion a fixed, determined world of reality ex- ternal to the process of knowing; the other viewing knowledge as a process of imagery arising in response to, and having its sole validity in relation to, problems of action ; truth being the value — the efficiency of this imagery in meeting the problem; reality being the whole concrete process of experience in which knowl- edge arises and of which it forms a part. Existence, Meaning, and Reality in Locke's and in Present Epistemology. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publica- tions, First Series, Vol. Ill, Part 2. Edwabd Scribnee Ames [1896 — ], In- structor in Philosophy. Modern Agnosticism. An Historical and Crit- ical Study. Doctor's thesis. Unpubhshed. Agnosticism denies the power of human knowledge to solve certain questions concerning the ultimate nature of material substance, the soul, and God. This atti- tude has been maintained in various characteristic ways by English empiricism, Kantian criticism, and the modern scientific spirit. Recent psychology and logic tend to show that the difficulty lies in the nature of the questions rather than in the disability of reason. Warner Fite [1897 — ] , Instructor in Ex- perimental Psychology. Professor Patten's Psychological Doctrines. Journal of Political Economy, VII (1899), 384^391. A criticista of the theory of environmental influences contained in Patten's Development of English Thought. The Associational Conception of Experience. Philosophical Review, IX (1900), 268-292. An argument to show that the "order of experience" assumed by associational psychology is not the ob- served order of sensations, but the inferred order of sense-stimuli. Contiguity and Similarity. Ibid., 613-629. An argument to show that the law of contiguity is iden- tical with the law of association, and that association by similarity is incompatible with the fundamental assumptions of associational psychology. Art, Industry and Science: A Suggestion to- ward a Psychological Definition of Art. Psychological Revieiv, VIII (1901), 128-144. Monaural Localization. In collaboration with James Rowland Angell. (See above.) Depabtment op Philosophy 9 Further Observations on Monaural Localiza- tion. In collaboration with James Rowland Angell. (See above.) New Apparatus. In collaboration with James Rowland Angell. (See above.) Reviews of Kulpe, Introduction to Philosophy. Trans- lated by Pillsbury and Titchener. Psycho- logical Review, V (1898), 209-211. Ameri- can Journal of Theology, II (1898), 391. Halleux, L'6volutionnisme en morale. Psy- chological Review, IX (1902), 204-205. ChaelesA. Steong [1892-95], Associate Professor of Psychology; Lecturer on Psychology, Columbia University. A Sketch of the History of Psychology among the Greeks. American Journal of Psy- chology, IV (1891), 177-197. Mr. James Ward on Modern Psychology. Psy- chological Review, I (1894), 73-81. The Psychology of Pain. Ibid., II (1895), 329-347. Physical Pain and Pain Nerves. Ibid., Ill (1896), 64-68. Consciousness and Time. Ibid., 149-157. Sidney E. Mezes [1893-94], Instructor in Philosophy; Professor of Philos- ophy, University of Texas. Pleasiure and Pain Defined. Philosophical Review II (1895), 22-46. Amy Eliza Tanner [1899-1902], Asso- ciate in Philosophy. Association of Ideas. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 62. University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, Vol. II, No. 3, 1900. A criticism of the laws of association as usually stated, and a discussion of the movement of images in atten- tion. Simultaneous Sense Stimulations. In collabo- ration with Kate Anderson. Psychological Review, III (1896), 378-383. Reprinted in University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, I, No. 1. A study of the effect of a second sensation upon a first, barely perceptible, one. Simon F. MacLennan [1896-97], Assist- ant in Experimental Psychology; Pro- fessor of Philosophy, Oberlin College. Emotion, Desire and Interest: Descriptive. Psychological Review, II (1895), 462-474. The Organic Effects of Agreeable and Dis- agreeable Stimuli. In collaboration with James Rowland Angell. (See above.) The Impersonal Judgment : Its Nature, Origin, and Significance. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 49. University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, I, No. 3, 1897. Method in Child-Study, with Special Reference to the Psychological Aspect. Transactions af the Illinois Society for Child-Study, III, No. 1 (1897), 29-45. William Aethur Heidel [1895-96], Decent in Philosophy; Professor of Latin, Iowa College. The Necessary and the Contingent in the Aris- totelian System. 8vo, 46. University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, I, No. 2, 1896. Albeet F. Buck [1897-98], Assistant in Experimental Psychology; In- structor in Erasmus Hall High School, Brooklyn, N. Y. Observations on the Overestimation of Vertical as Compared with Horizontal Lines. Uni- versity of Chicago Contributions to Philos- ophy, II, No. 2, 7-11, 1899. A report of experiments tending to show that_ the com- mon phenomenon of overestimation of vertical lines does not depend exclusively upon the action of the eye muscles. 10 Publications Edward Sceibnee Ames, Ph.D., 1895. (See above.) Myron L. Ashley, Ph.D. 1901. Concerning the Significance of Intensity of Light in Visual Estimates of Depth. Psy- chological Review, V (1898), 595-615. An experimental investigation in which it is shown that, besides the well-known factors of convergence, accommodation, etc., the brightness of an object plays an important part in our estimates of its distance from us. Origin, Structure, and Function of the Hy- pothesis. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished, A short historical sketch introduces an attempt to show that the hypothesis is an essential factor, not only in scientific investigation, but also in the knowing pro- cess itself. Certain relations of the hypothesis to epis- temology and metaphysics are exhibited. Henry Heath Bawden, Ph.D. 1900; Professor of Philosophy, Vassar Col- lege. The Theory of the Criterion. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A critical examination of historical theories of the cri- terion, with a defense of the doctrine that a true cri- terion finds its test in its power satisfactorily to solve the problems of life. This theory of the criterion har- monizes opposing theories as to the ultimate seat of authority m thought and action. A Study of Lapses. 8vo, iv -f 122. Psycho- logical Review Supplement, No. 14, 1900. WiLLARD Clark Gore, Ph.D. 1901 ; As- sistant Professor of Psychology in the School of Education. The Imagination in Spinoza and Hume: A Comparative Study in the Light of Some Kecent Contributions to Psychology. Doc- tor's thesis. 8vo, 77. University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, II, No. 4. A discussion of antagonistic theories regarding the imagination found in the writings of Spinoza and Hume respectively, which aims to make explicit both the philosophical and the psychological bearings of the points at issue, and to develop a functional interpreta- tion of sense experience. Simon F. MacLennan, Ph.D. 1897. (See above.) Daniel Peter MacMillan, Ph.D. 1899; Psychologist in the Department of . Child Study and Pedagogic Investiga- tion, Chicago Public Schools. The Negative Judgment. Doctor's thesis. Un- published. An extended examination of the principal writers upon logic is employed to show that in logical theory the negative judgment has undergone development from a position of co-ordination in a limited and false sense to co-ordination in a fuller and more adequate import through an intermediary stage of complete subordina- tion. A Study in Habit. University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, II, No. 2 (1899), 11-19. This is a report of an experimental investigation of the building up and the breaking down of a typical habit. An eye-hand co-ordination in attempting to attain a prescribed end is the process investigated. The growth and decay of this process are reduced to a mathematical statement; and an attempt is made to describe and account for the psychological elements involved, e. g., the consciousness of the end in view and the means available for attaining it, the play of emotion in the process, etc. William Franklin Moncreiff, Ph.D. 1900; Professor of Mathematics, Win- throp Normal and Industrial College, Eock Hill, S. C. An Examination of Mill's Inductive Canons. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. An' exposition of Mill's philosophical and logical doc- trines is followed by an attempt to show how the logical canons must be interpreted and amended to make them applicable to the scientific methods of today. A con- structive theory is formulated of the relation of mod- ern inductive logic to present scientific procedure. Addison W. Moore, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) Ernest Caeboll Moore, Ph.D. 1898; Instructor in Education, University of California. A New Definition of Education. Report of San Joaquin Valley Teachers' Association (1898), 42-47. Different definitions of education are due to conflicting theories of knowledge. Education is defined as filling in by the empiricists. It is defined as drawing out by the rationalists. In keeping with prevailing philo- sophical criticism, education must be re-defined as the process of converting a given human energy to social uses. Department of Philosophy 11 The Kelation of Philosophy to Education in Greece. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The beginnings of higher education in Greece were synonymous with the beginnings of philosophy. The popularizing of philosophy in the Sophist movement and its effect upon education. Socrates and how he came to demand a more thorough education for men. Plato and Aristotle. The founding of the philosophical schools and their place in Greek education. The uni- versity of Alexandria and the spread of Greek philo- sophical education to the cities of Asia. Abthub Kenyon Kogees, Ph.D. 1898; Professor of Philosophy and Pedagogy, Butler College, Irvington, Ind. The Parallelism of Mind and Body from the Standpoint of Metaphysics. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 64. The University of Chicago Con- tributions to Philosophy, II, No. 1, 1899. A historical and critical account of the more impor- tant attempts to account for the relation of mind and body, and an analysis of the different forms which a theory of parallelism may take. This is followed by a constructive theory, based on a critical examination of the idea of causality. Henry Waldgrave Stuart, Ph.D. 1899; Instructor in Philosophy, University of Iowa. The Hedonistic Interpretation of Subjective Value. Journal of Political Economy, IV (1894), 64^84. Subjective and Exchange Value, I. Ibid., (1895), 208-239. II. Ibid., 352-385. Valuation and Standards of Value in Ethical and Economic Conduct. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Helen Bradford Thompson, Ph.D. 1900; Instructor in Philosophy, Mt. Holyoke College. A Study of the Relations between Certain Or- ganic Processes and Consciousness. In col- laboration with J. R. Angell. (See above.) Psychological Norms in Men and Women. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, vii + 188. Pamphlet. Chicago, 1903. Also in The University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, Vol. IV, No. 1. Amy Eliza Tanner, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) Kate Anderson, Graduate student. Simultaneous Sense Stimulations. In collabo- ration with Amy Eliza Tanner. (See above.) Kate Gordon, Graduate student. McDougall's Observations on Light and Color Vision. Psychological Review, IX (1902), 483^89. Spencer's Theory of Ethics in Its Evolutionary Aspects. Philosophical Review, XI (1902), 592-606. E. W. Mahood, Graduate student. An Investigation of Certain Factors Affecting the Relations of Dermal and Optical Space. In collaboration with J. R. Angell and J. N. Spray. (See above.) Haywood J. Pearce, Graduate student. Normal Motor Suggestibility. Psychological Review, IX (1902), 329-356. An experimental investigation in the ranges of touch, sight, and hearing, showing the intrinsic motor element in every stimulus. Jessie N. Spray, Graduate student. An Investigation of Certain Factors Affecting the Relations of Dermal and Optical Space. In collaboration with J. R. Angell and E. W. Mahood. (See above.) Louis Grant Whitehead, Graduate stu- dent. A Study of Visual and Aural Memory Pro- cesses. Psychological Review, III (1896), 258-269. Reprinted in The University of Chicago Contributions to Philosophy, I, No. 1. An experimental investigation showing greater rapidity in memorizing from visual stimuli as compared witn auditory, and an unquestioned co-ordination between the visual and auditory processes of retention. This co-ordination probably comes about throa^rh motor elements. 12 Publications IJ5. EDUCATION. John Dewey, Professor and Head of the Department of Education; Director of the School of Education. (For publications see above, p. 3.) Some Types of Modern Educational Theory: An Analysis of Five Educational Theories. 12mo, 70. Ibid., No. 6, 1902. The aim of this analysis is to find the basic elements common in these theories, to note the variations in the different constructs, and to show wherein each theory is a type of educational philosophy. Nathaniel Butler [1893-95; 1901—], Professor of Education. On the Educational Possibilities of University Extension Work and Methods in Relation to Regular University Studies and Univer- sity Degrees. Report of Proceedings of the University Extension Congress, Lon- don, June, 1894, 83-86. The same reprinted in the University Extension World, Janu- ary, 1895, 63-80. Inter-Collegiate University Extension. Uni- versity Extension World, II (1893), 211- 215. University Extension. Johnson^s Universal Cyclopedia. A detailed history of the movement, with a statement of its ideals as held in England and America. Aims and Methods in the Study of Literature. Education, XVI (1896), 529-589. Ella Flagg Young [1900 — ], Professor of Education. Isolation in the School: A Discussion of School Organization. Doctor's thesis. 12mo, 111. University of Chicago Contributions to Education, No. 1, 1901. A critical exposition of the theory that the school should be so highly organized that a department, or a group, would necessarily be directly concerned in the initiation aad the perfection of all lines of action in which it would be operative. A practical application of this doctrine is made to the teaching and supervis- ing corps in schools below the college. A Study of Some Every- Education. 12mo, 44. Ethics in the School Day Problems ii Ibid., No. 4, 1902. Various trying situations which develop in the school- room are projected and analyzed. Emulation, punish- ments, training of the will, and sympathy are chief among the topics discussed in the analyses. Chaeles H. Thurber [1899-1900], As- sociate Professor of Pedagogy. (Bibliography not furnished.) Julia E. Bulkley [1892-1900], Asso- ciate Professor of Pedagogy. Der Einfluss Pestalozzis auf Herbart. Zurich, 1896. Fred Warren Smedley [1895-1900], Lecturer in Pedagogy. A Report on the Measurements of the Sensory and Motor Abilities of the Pupils of the Chicago University Primary School and the Pedagogical Value of Such Measvirements. Transactions of the Illinois Society for Child Study, II, No. 2 (1896), 85-90. A report of the child-study investigation carried on at the laboratory for experimental psychology of the Uni- versity of Chicago. How to Test the, Senses. Annual Report of Charles R. Skinner, State Superintendent of Public Instruction, New York, 1897, 83-88. A statement of the import of sensory tests and the methods of making them. Report of the Department of Child-Study and Pedagogic Investigation. Forty-sixth An- nual Report of the Board of Education of the City of Chicago (1900), 35-116. A study of the growth and development of Chicago school children. William Arthur Clark, Ph.D. 1900; President of the Nebraska State Normal School, Peru, Neb. Suggestion in Education, Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The fundamental thesis is that " all educative guid- ance is through suggestion and reaction." Education is treated as aflSrmative guidance of life by the rational Department of Political Economy 13 nse of present life materials. Teaching is by the un- obtrusive suggestion of image centers, which are worked out into completed experiences through normal life- processes. Samuel Bower Sinclair, Ph.D. 1901; Vice-Principal of Normal School, Ot- tawa, Canada. The Possibility of a Science of Education. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The argument endeavors to establish the following theses: There is a science of education as there is a science of mathematics, of physics, of medicine, or of ethics; there are educational facts or principles, ca- pable of discovery and systemization, which are so fun- damental, universal, and important as to differentiate educational science from every other ; and, further, the study of educational science is of service to every teacher by furnishing him with instruments of insight which will be valuable in the determination of the true purpose of education and of ways and means to its attainment. Ella Flagg Young, Ph.D. 1900. (See above.) II. POLITICAL ECONOMY James Laurence Laughlin [1892 — ], Professor and Head of the Department of Political Economy. Facts about Money, Including a Debate with W. H. Harvey. 8vo, 275. Chicago, E. A. Weeks & Co., 1895. [Out of print.] a refutation of "Coin's Financial School" and the doctrine of free coinage of silver. The substance of the book was prepared from April 24 to June 20 in the form of signed editorials for the Chicago Times-Herald. The Indian Silver Currency. Translated from the German of Karl Ellstaetter. 8vo, x + 117. Economic Studies of the University of Chicago, No. 3, 1896. History of Bimetallism in the United States. Fourth edition, with new Appendices, a Study of the Fall of Silver since 1885, and the Experience of the United States with Silver to 1893. 8vo, xviii + 353. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1897. A continuation of the work issued in 1885. Report of the Monetary Commission of the Indianapolis Convention of Boards of Trade, Chambers of Commerce, Commercial Clubs, and Other Similar Bodies of the United States. 8vo, xiii + 608. Indianapolis, and The University of Chicago Press, 1898. A proi)osed reform of our monetary system, with an examination of the principles of money involved in our metallic and paper money, stated historically and theoretically; and a study of our banking system, its history, its present defects, and the advantages of note issues based upon commercial assets. The preparation of the extended report was assigned to the author by the commission which drew up the scheme of reform. Parts of the scheme have been enacted into law (March 14, 1900). The Elements of Political Economy, with some Applications to Questions of the Day. 12mo. xxiv + 384. New York, American Book Co. Revised and enlarged edition, 1902. The theory of final utility in relation to cost of produc- tion, and some explanations of large production, trusts, consumption, etc., have been added. Money: I. The Principles of Money. 8vo, xvii + 530. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1902. This is Volume I of a series intended to cover the sub- ject of money. The first volume treats of the principles common to all kinds of money. It emphasizes the dis- tinction between the standard and the medium of ex- change; offers a new constructive study on credit; collects all price tables ; gives the history of price the- ories; attacks the quantity-theory; proposes a true theory of prices; rewrites the economic statement as to the movement of specie in international trade; discusses contraction and the amount of money needed by a country ; gives the history and economic effects of legal tender ; and expounds the laws of token money and inconvertible paper. Reciprocity. Written in conjunction with Pro- fessor H. Parker Willis, of Washington and Lee University. 8vo, v + 350. New York, The Baker and Taylor Co., 1902. An examination of the earlier meaning of reciprocity; the experience under the Canadian and Hawaiian treaties ; the relation of reciprocity to the tariff policy of the United States; the sugar question and its effects on our legislation ; the relation of the sugar trust to the abandonment of reciprocity; reciprocity under the McKinley, Wilson, and Dingley acts; reciprocity with Cuba ; the Kasson treaties ; and the future pros- pects of reciprocity, are given. An extended bibliog- raphy is added. The Study of Political Economy in the United States. Journal of Political Economy, Vol. I (1892), 1-19. Editorial introduction of the Journal of Political Economy to the public, with a survey of the economic field. 14 Publications Indian Monetary History. Ibid., Vol. I (1893), 593-596. An account of the Indian Currency from 1835 to 1893. The Abundance of Gold. American Banker, November 29, 1893, 19-30. A statistical study of the production of gold, the de- mand for it, and its effect on the value of silver. Gold and Silver in Santo Domingo. Journal of Political Economy, II (1894), 536-560, 613-619. A description of the monetary situation in the repub- lic of Santo Domingo and a statement of the scheme drawn up by the author for that country, which was enacted into law in 1894, with an exposition of the reasons therefor and a copy of the law. The Baltimore Plan of Bank Issues. Ibid., Ill (1894), 101-105. A critical study of this proposal of an elastic bank currency. The Currency Problem. American Banker, October 31, 1894, 6-19. A study of the American monetary system, prepared for the Commercial Club of Chicago. « Coin's " Food for the Gullible. F&rum, XXI (1895), 573-585. A study of the psychological and economic conditions in which the silver mania flourished. Our Monetary Programme. Ibid., XXII (1896), 652-656. Traces the monetary disturbances in the United States to operations affecting the standard, rather than the media of exchange. Causes of Agricultural Unrest. Atlantic Monthly, LXXVIII (1896), 577-585. A political and economic analysis of the conditions of the agricultural classes. Francis Amasa Walker, with Bibliography. Journal of Political Economy, V (1897), 228-236. An estimate of the economic career of General Walker. The Monetary Commission. Forum, XXIV (1897), 303-312. The justification of an extra-Congressional scheme for reforming the currency. The McKinley Administration and Prosperity. Ibid., 554-563. An examination of the relations of government action to industrial and monetary disturbances, as illustrated by recent events. Some Practical Aspects of Socialism. Pro- ceedings of the Fifth Annual Convention of the Wisconsin Bankers' Association, 1897, 13-30. An economic study of the labor problem ; the appeal to the state is a confession of individual weakness. The Gold Standard in Japan. Journal of Political Economy, V (1897), 378-383. Bank Notes Secured by Commercial Assets. Address delivered before the Bankers' Club of Chicago. 8vo, 29. Pamphlet, 1898. An argument in favor of so-called " asset-currency." Socialism in the Price Question. Self Culture, VIII (1898), 129-136. The operation of socialistic theories in the tenets of those advocating the extended use of silver. David Ames Wells. Journal of Political Economy, VII (1899), 9a-95. Estimate of Mr. Wells as an economist. Commissions on Tariffs and Money. Self Cul- ture, IX (1899), 661-667. The proper function of permanent Commissions on Tariffs and Money is to secure equality of treatment and the aid of experts. The Gold Standard in India. Journal of Political Economy, VII (1899), 551-553. Explanation of the quasi-redemption of the Indian rupee in gold. Professor Dunbar. Ibid., VIII (1900), 234-238. Characterization as a teacher and economist. Recent Monetary Legislation. Ibid., 289-302. Intended to prove that the act of March 14, 1900, did not establish the gold standard in the United States. Criticism of Tolstoi's Money. Open Court, XIV (1900), 221-228. A refutation of the idea that the existence of money provides a means of enslaving men. Prices and the International Movement of Specie. Journal of Political Economy, X (1902), 514-536. Supposing the error of the quantity theory, a restate- ment is made of the principles affecting prices in inter- national trade. Credit. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, Vol. IV, 1-28. A constructive study of credit which tries to prove that normal credit does not. while abnormal credit does, change the general level of prices. Some Economic Effects of Legal Tender. Yale Review, X (1902), 371-389. Intended to show that the legal tender enactments have little or no influence on the value of money. They may, however, change the direction of demand. A. C. MiLLEE [1892-1902], Professor of Finance; Professor of Political Econ- omy, University of California. The Monetary Problem in the United States. 8vo, 20. Chicago, 1895. Pamphlet. The Incidence of Taxation. Journal of Po- litical Economy, I (1893), 450^68. Department of Political Economy 15 National Finance and the Income Tax. Ibid., Ill (1895), 255-289. Taxation in Massachusetts. Ibid., VI (1898), 225-247. Reviews of Bastable, Public Finance. Ibid., I (1892), 133-142. Seligman, Shifting and Incidence of Taxation. Ibid., (1893), 285-295. Howe, Taxation in the United States under the Internal Revenue System. American Historical Review, II (1897), 743-746. Adams, Science of Finance. Journal of Po- litical Economy, VII (1899), 269-275. William Hill [1893 — ], Assistant Pro- fessor of Political Economy. First Stages of the TariflF Policy. American Economic Association, VIII (1893), 452-614. State Railways in Australia. Journal of Po- litical Economy, III (1894), 1-23. Thorstein B. Veblen [1893 — ], Assist- ant Professor of Political Economy. The Science of Finance. By Gustav Cohn. Translation of Cohn's System der Fi- nanzwissenschaf t. 8vo, xi + 800. Economic Studies of the University of Chicago, No. 1, 1895. The Theory of the Leisure Class: An Eco- nomic Study of Institutions. 8vo, viii + 400. New York, The Macmillan Ck)., 1899. The Price of Wheat since 1867. Journal of Political Economy, I (1892), 68-103. The Food Supply and the Price of Wheat. Ibid. (1893), 365-379. The Army of the Commonweal. Ibid., II (1894), 456-461. Why is Economics Not an Evolutionary Sci- ence? Quarterly Journal of Economics, XII (1898), 373-397. The Instinct of Workmanship and the Irk- someness of Labor. American Journal of Sociology, IV (1898), 187-201. The Beginnings of Ownership. Ibid., 352-365. The Barbarian Status of Women. Ibid. (1899), 503-514. Mr. Cummings's Strictures on the " Theory of the Leisure Class." Journal of Political Economy, VIII (1899), 106-117. The Preconceptions of Economic Science. Three papers. Quarterly Journal of Eco- nomics, XIII (1899), 121-150, 396-426; XIV (1900), 240-269. Industrial and Pecuniary Employments. Pro- ceedings of the American Economic Asso- ciation, Thirteenth Annual Meeting, 1900 (1901), 190-235. Gustav Schmoller's Economics. Quarterly Journal of Economics, XVI (1901), 69-93. The Use of Loan Credit in Modem Business. The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, Vol. IV, 31-51. Henry Rand Hatfield [1898 — ], As- sistant Professor of Political Economy, Municipal Bonding: A Study of the Western Bond Market for the Years 1886-1895. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. a consideration of the elements which make mnnicipal bonds attractive to investors, and of the various feat- ures of bonding as they affect the issuing municipality. The general economic principles which should deter- mine the purpose, the amount, and the form of muni- cipal debt are considered, as well as the effect of the various statutory restrictions. A sketch is given of the operation of an early syndicate organized to control the western bond market. The material of this thesis is derived mainly from the private records of several bond dealers of the time. The Chicago Trust Conference. Journal of Political Economy, VIII (1899), 1-18. Reviews of Wordsworth Donisthorpe, Law in a Free State. Ibid., Ill (1895), 381-383. J. N. Norman, Universal Cambist, and The World's Exchanges in 1898. Ibid., VII (1899), 280-284. E. D. Jones, Economic Crises. Ibid., VIII (1900), 136-138. Baker, Monopolies and the People. Ibid., 271- 274. 16 Publications Wesley Clair Mitchell [1900-1902], Instructor in Political Economy; As- sistant Professor of Political Economy, University of California. The Quantity Theory of the Value of Money. Journal of Political Economy, IV (1896), 139-165. A discussion of the vulgar form of the quantity theory. " Greenbacks " and the Cost of the Civil War. Ihid,, V (1897), 117-156. An attempt to estimate the financial effects of the issues of the United States notes in 1862 and 1863. The Value of the "Greenbacks" during the Civil War. Ibid., VI (1898), 139-167. A study of the factors which affected the gold price of the United States notes, 1862-1865. The Suspension of Specie Payments, Decem- ber, 1861. Ibid., VII (1899), 289-326. A study of the financial policy of the federal govern- ment during the early months of the Civil War. History of the Legal Tender Acts of 1862 and 1863. Doctor's thesis. Chicago, 1903. Being chapters from the following volume : A History of Greenbacks, with Special Refer- ence to the Economic Consequences of their Issue. The University of Chicago Decen- nial Publications, Second Series, Vol. IX, 1903. An essay in financial history, showing the course of events that led to the adoption of the paper-money policy by the American Congress. John Cummings [1902 — ], Instructor in Political Economy; Graduate student, 1893-1894. Monetary Standards. Journal of Political Economy, II (1894), 349-368. The Poor Laws of Massachusetts and New York. Doctor's thesis. American Eco- nomical Association, X (1894), 477-611. An account of the development of the poor laws in these two commonwealths, based upon an extended examina- tion of the statutes and early records, with some ac- count of immigration laws, federal and state. The con- ditions of settlement are taken up and the methods of administering relief by state, county, and town, indoor and outdoor, assessment of rates, provision for defect- ives and the insane, and the like. Herbert Joseph Davenport [1897-98; 1902 — ], Instructor in Political Econ- omy. Outlines of Elementary Economics. 12mo, xiv+280. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1898. The Cost of Tariff. Journal of Political Economy, V (1897), 506-513. An analysis of statistics to_ show that the purely eco- nomic loss through protection is inconsiderable, the serious aspects of the case being rather political and social. The Franco-Prussian War-Fine: A Study in International Exchanges. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. An analysis of the methods by which France paid to Germany several fold more money than France had, this result being mostly wrought out through the sale, by French holders, of international securities to German gurchasers, the French investors replacing their old oldings by the new rentes; hence the creation of great balances in favor of Paris on Berlin. E. R. L. Gould [1895-96], Lecturer on Statistics. The Housing of the Working People. 8vo, 461. Issued by the Department of Labor, Wash- ington, 1895. Public Control of the Liquor Traffic. 8vo, viii + 100. Baltimore, The Friedenwald Co., 1895. Isaac Hourwich [1893-94], Docent in Statistics; United States Treasury De- partment, Washington, D. C The Rate of Profits under the Law of Labor- Value. Journal of Political Economy, II (1894), 235-250. A mathematical discussion of the pretended contradic- tion between the labor theory of value and the pre- sumed tendency of profits toward equalization. The solution is found in the proposition that the value of capital is equal to its capitalized earning capacity. Russia in the International Market. Ibid., 284-290. An analysis of Russian statistics of imports and ex- ports. John Cummings, Ph.D. 1894. (See above.) Herbert J. Davenport, Ph.D. (See above.) 1898. Katherine Bement Davis, Ph.D. 1900; Head of Women's Reformatory, Bed- ford, N. Y. The Modern Condition of Agricultural Labor in Bohemia. Journal of Political Econ- omy, VIII (1900), 491-524. Depabtment of Political Economy 17 The Interrelation of Standards of Living and Wages. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A comparative study of the standards of living and wages of industrial and agricultural laborers in Bohe- mia prior to the revolution of 1848 and at the present time, and a discussion of the condition of Bohemian laborers in the United States. Henbt Band Hatfield, (See above.) Ph.D. 1897. Simon James McLean, Ph.D. 1897; Pro- fessor of Economics and Sociology, University of Arkansas. The Railway Policy of Canada. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A critical descriptive account of the evolution of the railway policy of Canada. It describes the early move- ments leading to the adoption of a policy of govern- ment assistance; the relation between the railway system and the expansion of Canadian territory; the growing feeling in regard to the necessity of regulation of rates; experiments in government ownership; the later subsidy policy ; the relations of the Canadian rail- ways to the United States traffic, and the efEect of this on railway policy ; recent movements in the direction of making government sui)ervision in regard to rates and capitalization more effective. Harry Alvin Millis, Ph.D. 1899; Ref- erence Librarian, John Crerar Library, Chicago. The Law Relating to Immigrants and Tramps. Proceedings of the National Conference of Charities and Corrections, 1897, 356-361; also Charities Review, September, 1897, 587-594. A study of the settlement and vagrancy laws in force in the several American commonwealths. The Law Relating to the Relief and Care of Dependents. American Journal of Soci- ology, III (1897), 378-391, 479-489, 631- 648, 777-794; IV (1898), 51-68, 178-186. A History of the Finances of the City of Chi- cago. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A history of the finances of the city of Chicago from its earliest organization to the present time. Wesley Clair Mitchell, Ph.D. (See above.) 1899. Robert S. Padan, Ph.D. 1901. Prices and Index Numbers. Journal of Po- litical Economy, VIII (1900), 171-202. A criticism of existing systems of index numbers, with directions for curing their defects. J. B. Clark's Formulae of Wages and Interest. Ibid., IX (1901), 161-190. Attempts by mathematico-economical tests to show the fallacy of Professor Clark's theory. Studies in Interest. Doctor's thesis. Unpub- lished. 1. J. B. Clark resolves the question of the distribution of the product of industry into a problem of produc- tion, maintaining that the rates of interest and wages tend toward the marginal products due to the last unit of capital and to the last unit of labor. This theory is subjected to tests in a mathematical guise, and is dis- credited. 2. The versions of the abstinence theory of interest rep- resented respectively by WUliam Senior, Eugen Bohm- Bawerk, and T. N. Carver, and an attempt to show their weakness. 3. The doctrine that value is the fundamental consid- eration in the interest question is challenged. On the contrary, the increase of commodities or utUities is the foundation of interest. Worthy Putnam Sterns, Ph.D. 1900; Government Clerk, Treasury Bureau of Statistics. The International Indebtedness of the United States in 1789. Journal of Political Econ- omy, VI (1897), 27-53. Review of period from 1700 to 1789. Special study of expenditures by European countries in America, the development of the colonial marine, and the attempts to make the colonies a source of raw materials, esi)ecially of iron and naval stores. The Beginnings of American Financial Inde- pendence. Ibid. (1898), 187-208. Important effects of Napoleonic wars on United States commerce. Development of domestic manufactures through foreign repression of that commerce and our own tariff legislation. Excessive imports caused by ex- clusion of English manufactures from continental ports. Foreign investments in United States in 1820 probably little, if at all, in excess of American investment abroad. A New Standard and a New Currency. Ibid., 523-535. All banks to become national banks, associated in a national clearing-house association under the supervi- sion of the comptroller of the currency, the association guaranteeing all deposit, and restricting and expand- ing circulation by deposits with comptroller of what- ever amount is necessary to prevent undesirable exports of the precious metals. All currency to be issued by the government through the banks. 18 Publications The Foreign Trade of the United States, 1820 to 1840. Doctor's thesis. I. J6id.,VIII (1900), 34-57; II, ibid., 452^90; III, unpublished. Growth of national spirit ; improved interior transpor- tation ; development of manufactures ; the tarifp policy. Result of these causes — stagnation in foreign trade in first half of period. Concessions in tariff policy and remarkable growth in the wealth pi the country lead to a wonderful increase in imports in second half, result- ing in a considerable foreign debt. Exports increase rapidly because of growing demand for raw cotton abroad. George G. Tunell, Ph.D. 1897; Secre- tary to the President of the Chicago and Northwestern Railroad. Transportation on the Great Lakes. Doctor's thesis. Svo, 106. House Document No. 277, Fifty-fifth Congress, Second Session, 1898. A historical statement of the growth of lake commerce and a discussion of rail and water competition. The Legislative History of the Second Income- Tax Law. Journal of Political Economy, III (1895), 311-337. The Growth and Character of the Commerce of the Great Lakes. Ibid., IV (1896), 243-245. Transportation on the Great Lakes. Ibid., 332-351, 413-416. Professor Hadley's Chapter on Taxation. Ibid., 508-515. Lake Transportation and the Iron-Ore Industry. Ibid., V (1896), 23-39, 110-113. Hadley's Chapter on Taxation: A Rejoinder. Ibid., 88-91. The Diversion of the Flour and Grain Traffic from the Great Lakes to the Railroads. Ibid., 340-375, 413-420. The Taxation of Express, Telegraph, and Tele- phone Companies in Ohio. Ibid. (1897), 244^245. Henry Parker Willis, Ph.D. 1897; Pro- fessor of Political Economy, Washing- ton and Lee University. A History of the Latin Monetary Union: A Study of International Monetary Action. Doctor's thesis. Svo, xii + 332. Economic Studies of the University of Chicago, No. 5, 1901. Income Taxation in France. Journal of Po- litical Economy, IV (1894), 409-410. The French Income-Tax Bill of 1895. Ibid., 37-53. An account of the effort to introduce systematic income taxation in France. Belgian Monetary Legislation. Ibid., Ill (1895), 222-232. Bimetallism in France. Ibid., 356-362. An account of the early monetary history antecedent to the formation of the Latin monetary union. The History and Present Application of the Quantity Theory. Ibid., IV (1896), 417-448. Credit Devices and the Quantity Theory. Ibid., 281-308. A study of the theory of prices as affected by the mod- ern use of money-substitutes. The Vienna Monetary Treaty of 1857. Ibid., 187-207. A historical review of the attempt to form a German monetary union. Monetary Reform in Russia. Ibid., V (1897), 277-315. An account of Russian monetary history and the recent changes in the monetary system. The Austrian Postal Savings Bank. Ibid., 505- 506. A descriptive account of the Austrian government sav- ings bank. Foreign Clearing-House Bank Returns. Ibid., 516-518. A statistical summary and comparison with American figures. W. H. Allen, Graduate student. The Charter Tax of the Illinois Central Rail- way. Journal of Political Economy, VI (1898), 353-367. S. P. Breckinridge, Graduate student. Legal Tender. A Study in English and Ameri- can Monetary History. (See under Political Science.) Ward A. Cutler, Graduate student. Insolvent National Banks in City and Countrj. Journal of Political Economy, VIII (1899), 367-379. Depabtment of Political Economy 19 Kathebine Felton, Graduate student. Rousier's Theory of the Evolution of the La- borer. Journal of Political Economy, VI (1898), 380-395. Alfbed L. Fish, Graduate student. Dr. MacFarlane on "Complimentary Gods." Journal of Political Economy, IX (1900), 238-241. W. F. Habding, Graduate student. The State Bank of Indiana. Journal of Po- litical Economy, III (1895), 1-36. Sabah M. Habdy, Graduate student. The Quantity of Money and Prices. Journal of Political Economy, III (1895), 145-168. Robebt F. Hoxie, Graduate student. The Ck)mpensatory Theory of Bimetallism. Journal of Political Economy, I (1893), 273-276. The Silver Debate of 1890. Ibid., 535-587. The Adequacy of the Customs Revenue. Ibid., II (1894), 39-72. W. L. McKenzie King, Graduate student. The International Typographical Union. Jour- nal of Political Economy, V (1897), 458- 484. Trade Union Organization in the United States. Ibid., 201-215. S. V. LiNDHOLM, Graduate student. The Building Trades Conflict in Chicago. Journal of Political Economy, VIII (1900), 327-346. Trusts in Europe. Ibid., IX (1901), 600-606. Edwabd S. Meade, Graduate student. The Fall in the Price of Silver since 1873. Journal of Political Economy, V (1897), 316-339. Gold and Silver and Terms of Commodities. Ibid., 245-249. The Production of Gold since 1850. Ibid., VI, 1-26. The Deposit Reserve System of the National Banking Law. Ibid. (1898), 209-224. John W. Million, Graduate student. The Debate on the National Bank Act of 1863. Journal of Political Economy, II (1894), 251-280. State Aid to Railroads in Missouri. Ibid., Ill, 73-97. State Aid to Railroads in Missouri. 8vo, xvi + 264. Economic Studies of the University of Chicago, No. 4, 1896. Geobge C. Sikes, Graduate student. The Apprentice System in the Building Trades. Journal of Political Economy, II (1894), 397-423. Public Policy Concerning Franchise Values. Ibid., IX (1901), 527-539. H. W. Stuabt, Graduate student. A Scarcity of Gold. Journal of Political Econony, III (1895), 362-365. Subjective and Exchange Values, I. Ibid., IV, 208-239. Subjective and Exchange Values, II. Ibid., (1896), 352-385. The Hedonistic Interpretation of Subjective Value. Ibid. (1895), 6^^-86. Max West, Graduate student. The Teachings of Political Economists Defin- ing Direct and Indirect Taxes. 8vo, 38. New York, 1895. Henby K. White, Graduate student. Pacific Railway Debts. Journal of Political Economy, II (1894), 424-452. The History of the Union Pacific Railway. 8vo, iv + 129. Economic Studies of the University of Chicago, No. 2, 1895. 20 Publications Robert H. Whitton, Graduate student. The Assessment of Taxes in Chicago. Jour- nal of Political Economy, V (1897), 175- 200. A. P. Winston, Graduate student. The Tariff and the Constitution. Journal of Political Economy, V (1896), 40-70. III. POLITICAL SCIENCE Harry Pratt Judson [1892 — ], Pro- fessor of Comparative Politics and Di- plomacy and Head of the Department of Political Science. Europe in the Nineteenth Century. Svo, 343. Meadville, Pa., The Chautauqua Century Press, 1894. Revised edition: New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1901. The Mississippi Valley. Contributed to " The United States of America," edited by N. S. Shaler. I, 273-340. New York, Appleton & Co., 1894. The Growth of the American Nation. 8vo, 359. Meadville, Pa., The Chautauqua Century Press, 1895. Revised edition: New York, The Macmillan Co., 1901. What Should Congress Do About Money? Opinions of Professors of Political and Eco- nomic Science. Review of Reviews, VIII (1893), 153. Advocates the frank and explicit adoption of the gold standard. Municipal Government. Year Book of the Chicago Sunset Club, 1893, 143-148. Advocating definite responsibility, fixity of tenure, a non-administrative council, the municipal referendum. Is Our Republic a Failure? American Jour- nal of Sociology, I (1895), 28-40. A discussion of some of the dangers of a democratic republic : the distrust of legislative bodies, the tyranny of united wealth, the tyranny of united labor. The real question is not political, but social — is modern society a failure ? Political democracy is not an end in itself, but is merely a means to the end of social betterment. It cannot as yet be afiirmed that our republic has failed to meet the present perils. The Political Effects of the Teaching of Jesus. Biblical World, XII (1898), 229-238. The effect of the Christian church on the political philosophy of the Roman Empire, on the organization of society after its fall; the political status of the church in the Middle Ages, especially the effect of Chris- tian doctrine in disseminating the idea of democracy, which is the essence of political progress for the past four centuries. Om- Federal Constitution and the Government of Tropical Territories. American Monthly Review of Reviews, XIX (1899), 67-75. The power to acquire territory is no longer seriously questioned. The purposes of annexation are not limited by the constitution, but are at the discretion of the political branch of the government. It is not necessary that annexed territory should be destined for state- hood ; it may be held permanently as a colony, for pur- poses of national defense, or from economic considera- tions. It may be held in trust for the inhabitants. Meanwhile such territory is subject to the control of Congress. It is pointed out, with detailed reasons, that in the federal constitution the term "United States" refers solely to the states which form the union ; that federal territory is no part of the United States in any constitutional sense, but is wholly subject to federal authority. It is only in the international and geo- graphical sense that the " United States " may be said to include federal territory. The inhabitants of an- nexed territory do not by virtue of annexation neces- sarily all become citizens. It is not beyond question that any of them do. It is then shown that there are no constitutional limitations imposed upon Congress in the matter of taxation of annexed territories or as to the enactment of suitable navigation laws. Such per- sonal rights as the constitution guarantees within the whole jurisdiction of the nationalgovernment are such as would not seriously impede adequate control of fed- eral territory. The acquisition of tropical territories may or may not be in accordance with sound policy. The control of such territories presents few serious constitutional difficulties. The Constitution and the Territories. Ibid., XXI (1900), 451-456. Congress may not by statute " extend " the constitution over a given territory. Such terms as "cover," "ex- tend," are metaphors and unsafe in legal discussion. The questions to be discussed are rather these: 1. What power over the territories does the constitution vest in Congress? 2. What prohibitions does it place on Congress with respect to legislation for territories? In discussing the second point a distinction is made between qualified and unqualified prohibitions. The prohibition to pass a bill of attainder is unqualified, but that forbidding the suspension of the writ of habeas corpus is qualified. So, also, is the prohibition on lay- ing export duties. The requirement that customs du- ties shall be uniform throughout the union is a quali- fied prohibition — it applies only to the states. It is also contended that the so-called definition of citizenship in the fourteenth amendment does not necessitate citizenship for those born in territories. Such persons are not born in the "United States," in the sense of the constitution. As the Supreme Court has already held that there are two kinds of citizen- ship, federal and state, so there may easily be implied a third kind — territorial. Whether the personal im- munities of the first eight amendments are unqualified prohibitions or not is an open question. The weight of judicial construction thus far is in the affirmative, but of doubtful cogency and not certain to be sustained. Department op Political Science 21 The Essential Elements of a Written Consti- tution. Article in The University of Chi- cago Decennial Publications, First Series, Vol. IV, 1902. A study of the nature of organic law, with an analysis of a constitution of government. The attempt is made to develop the essentials of a complete constitution, showing the limits of variation for essentials and non- essentials. Reviews of Bryce, American Commonwealth. Current Topics, I (1893), 327-335. Pelham, Outlines of Koman History. Clas- sical Review, VIII (1894), 104:-106. Borgeaud, Adoption and Amendment of Con- stitutions. American Historical Review, I (1895), 154-156. Foster, Commentaries on the Constitution of the United States. Ibid., II (1896), 562-565. America and Europe: A Study of International Relations. American Journal of Sociol- ogy, II (1896), 474-476. Moses, Establishment of Spanish Rule in America. Journal of Political Economy, VII (1898) 135-136. Edmund Janes James [1895-1902], Pro- fessor of Public Administration ; Pres- ident of Northwestern University. Information Relating to the Territorial Laws of Illinois passed from 1809-1812. 8vo, 15. Publications of the Illinois State Histor- ical Library, No. 2. Springfield, 111., Phil- lips Bros., State Printers, 1899. An account of the early laws of Illinois territory which were never printed, and most of which were lost, based on a careful examination of records in Springfield and Washington. The Territorial Records of Illinois. 8vo, 50. Ibid., No. 3. Springfield, 111., PhilUps Bros., State Printers, 1901. First part of the territorial records of the state hitherto unprinted, with introduction and notes. The Charters of the City of Chicago. Part I, The Early Charters, 183a-37. 8vo, 76. 1898. Part II, The City Charters, 1838-51. 8vo, 111. Chicago, The University Press, 1899. The first two parts of a comprehensive work on the charter history of Chicago. They contain (1) introduc- tion dealing with historic development, (2) texts of the charters, (3) analysis and systematic presentation of the inain features of each charter, (4) comparative discus- sion of the chief peculiarities of each charter. Municipal Administration in Germany, as seen in the Typical Prussian City, Halle a. S. 8vo, 96. Chicago, University Press, 1901. An account of modern municipal government in Ger- many ; contains a description of the organization and functions of a typical German city, with continuous comparison with American conditions. An Early Essay on Proportional Representa- tion. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, VII (1896), 233-252. Published separately as No. 168 of the Publications of the American Acad- emy of Political and Social Science. Phi- ladelphia, 1896. A reprint and discussion of the first proposition made in this country, and perhaps in the world, for a scheme of proportional representation in the modern sense of the term — the plan devised by Thomas Gilpin, Esq., of Philadelphia. An Examination of Bryce's American Com- monwealth. Ibid., VII (1896), 377-^10. Published separately as No. 172 of the Pub- lications (1896). A critique of Brvce's exposition of American constitu- tional law and his work on the American Common- wealth ; showing wherein he misunderstands several important principles, and therefore gives a misleading exposition of the same. The First Apportionment of Federal Repre- sentatives in the United States. Ibid., IX (1897), 1-41. Pubhshed separately as No. 189 of the Publications (1897). A study of the first great constitutional dispute under the present federal government, a dispute leading to the first presidential veto exercised by Washington on the basis of a theory of constitutional law now aban- doned by all parties. The Place of the PoUtical and Social Sciences in Modem Education and their Bearing on Training for Citizenship. Ibid., X (1897), 359-386. Published separately as No. 216 of the Publications (1897). An investigation into the scientific and pedagogic claims of the so-called political and social sciences to a place in the college and university curriculum. The Growth of Great Cities in Area and Popu- lation. J6zd., XIII (1899), 1-30. Published separately as No. 243 of the Publications (1899). Philadelphia. A statistical study into the accuracy and adequateness of existing municipal statistics in various countries. The Government of a Typical Prussian City, Halle a. S. Annals of the American Acad- emy of Political and Social Science, XV (1900), 313-354. Published separately as No. 274 of the Publications (1900). A description of the organization and working of an average Prussian municipality. Noted on personal examination of the machinery of local government. 22 Publications Street Railway Policy in Berlin. Ibid., XV (1900), 437-440. A history of the most recent developments in the field of local control of public transportation. Notes on Municipal Problems in Berlin. Ibid., XV (1900), 477-480. Also p. 483. An account of the immediate and pressing problems of local administration in the greatest of German cities. Municipal Lighting in a Typical German City, Halle a. S. Municipal Affairs, IV (1900), 574-594. A historical account of the origin and development of the department of public lighting from technical, so- cial, economic, and administrative view-points. The City Council of Berlin. American Jour- nal of Sociology, VI (1900), 407-415. All exposition of the constitution and working of the city council, with a full explanation of the complicated three-class system of voting. Constitutionality of a National University. Educational Revieiv, XVIII (1900), 451^66. Examination of the constitutionality of the proposed national university at Washington, D. C, with a review of the history of the constitutional discussion. The Metropolitan Underground Railway in Paris. Report of the Street Railway Com- mission to the City Council of the City of Chicago, December, 1900, 124-136. Chi- cago, 1901. An account of the origin and development of the pres- ent scheme for a great system of underground railways for local traffic in Paris. The Street Railway Franchises of the City of Berlin. Journal of Political Economy, IX (1901), 260-270. History of the relation of the city to the street-car com- panies, with special account of new contracts between the city and the companies. " Protection " in the Encyclopedia Britannica, Times Edition, 1901; 12 pp. Systematic article on the doctrine and policy of pro- tection as shown in the history of modern nations. Reviews of Black, Hand-Book of American Constitutional Law. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, VII (1896), 475 ff. Examination of the fundamental positions taken by the author, with some comment on current misconcep- tions of the constitution. Barrington, Fallacies of Race Theories as Ap- plied to Race Characteristics. Ibid., VIII (1896), 167 S. Critique of the fundamental position assumed by the author that there are no such things as "racial peculi- arities." Ernst Freund, [1894 — ], Professor of Jurisprudence and Public Law. The Legal Nature of Corporations. 8vo, 83. Chicago, University Press, 1897. The Law of the Administration in America. Political Science Quarterly, IX (1894), 403- 425. Malice and Unlawful Interference. Harvard Laiv Review, XI (1898), 449^65. The Control of Dependencies Through Protect- orates. Political Science Quarterly, XIV (1899), 19-38. Amerikanisches Rechtsleben. Deutsche Ju- Hstenieitung, IV (1899), 369-373. Trans- lated under the title " Government and Law in America " by the American Law Review, XXXIV (1900), 16-27. The New German Civil Code. Harvard Law Review, XIII (1900), 627-637. Empire and Sovereignty. Article in The Uni- versity of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, Vol. IV, 1902. \. study of the constitution of t political systems which are not perfectly consolidated A study of the constitution of the supreme power in political systems which are not perfectly consolidated. The types examined are : the federal state, the autono- mous colony or dependency, and the protectorate, three forms of political connection characteristic of empires. Private Claims against the State. Political Science Quarterly, VIII (1893), 625-652. Charles Edward Merriam [1901 — ], Associate in Political Science. The Political Theory of Calhoun. American Journal of Sociology, VII (1902), 577-594. An analysis and estimate of the characteristic political ideas of Calhoun. The Political Theory of Jefferson. Political Science Quarterly, XVII (1902), 24-45. An analysis of the political theory underlying " Jeffer- sonian Democracy." State Government. New York State Library Bulletins, No. 72 (1902), 15-18. A review of legislation regarding state government during the year 1901. Reviews of Adolph Dock, Revolution imd Restauration liber die Souveranitat. Political Science Quarterly, XV (1900), 713-714. Department of Political Science 23 Herman Kehm, Allgemeine Staatslehre. Ibid., XVI (1901), 341-345. W. S. Lilly, First Principles in Politics. Ibid., 174^175. J. L. Windenberger, Essai sur le syst&me de politique 6trang6re de J. J. Rousseau. American Historical Review, VI (1901), 385-386. William A. Dimning, A History of Political Theories, Ancient and Mediaeval. American Journal of Sociology, VII (1902), 851-853. SoPHONiSBA P. Beeckinbidge [1901 — ], Docent in Political Science; Ph.D. 1901. A Study of Legal Tender in England. Doc- tor's thesis. Chicago, University Press, 1903. Being chapters from the following volume : Legal Tender : A Study in English and Ameri- can Monetary History. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, Second Series, VII, 1903. The history of the exercise of the legal-tender power by the governments of England and of the United States. Carl Evans Boyd [1897-8], Docent in Political Science; Ph.D. 1897. Constitutional History of Illinois to 1818. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpublished. Cases in Constitutional Law, edition of. 8vo, 678. Chicago, Callaghan and Co., 1898. Ethel Glover Hatfied, Ph.D. 1898. The Department of the Interior, its History, Functions, and Administration. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The history of the development of the Department of the Interior and of its many bureaus wiU illustrate the expansion of federal activities. The public lauds of the United States are shown to be the connecting link lietween most of the bureaus, as they were the main reason for the creation of the department in 1849. Some of the defects in our methods of legislation are clearly seen in laws concerning the department. The administration of the department is fully described, some much needed reforms are indicated, and the prob- able future of the department outlined. Annie Lucy Inskeep, Ph.D. 1899. Local Government in California to 1879. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpublished. 1. Spanish and Mexican rule, the missions. 2. The tran- sition period, 1846-49. 3. Local government as legally provided for in 1849-50, constitutional provisions there- for, work of the first legislature in passing a county act and general acts to incorporate cities and towns and in granting special charters. 4. The new govern- ment in practical operation ; the overlapping of judi- cial and_ executive powers. 5. Counties. 6. Districts — school^ irrigation, reclamation ; townships. The lim- ited significance of the town in California. 7. Town and city acts passed by the legislature from 1851-79. Samuel Chiles Mitchell, Ph.D. 1899; Professor of History, Richmond Col- lege. From Colony to Commonwealth in Virginia. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A Stricture on Schaff's Account of Servetus. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 450-459. Frederick A. Cleveland, Graduate stu- dent. Der Zug der Gesetzgebung in den Vereinigten Staaten hinsichtlich Kapital und Arbeit. Jahrbuch der internationalen Vereini- gungfilr vergleichende Rechtswissenschaft und Volkswirtschaftlehre zu Berlin, 1898. Growth of Democracy in the United States. 8vo, 540. Chicago, 1899. Final Report of the Monetary Commission. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, XIII (1899), 26 pp. Helen Honor Tunnicliff, Graduate student. The Municipal Code of Macomb, 111., compris- ing the Special Acts of the General Assem- bly of the State of Illinois relating to the City of Macomb, and the Ordinances of the Council, codified and revised. Published by Authority of the City Council. 8vo, 228. Macomb, 111., Journal Printing Co., 1897. Elizabeth Wallace, Graduate student. The Constitution of the Argentine Republic and the Constitution of United States of Brazil. 8vo, 95. Chicago, University Press, 1894. (See also under Romance.) 24 Publications IV. HISTOKY. John Feanklin Jameson [1901 — ), Pro- fessor and Head of the Department of History. Reviews of Hunt, Writings of James Madison, I, II. American Historical Review, VII (1902), 573-575. Hart, American History Told by Contempo- raries, IV. Ibid., 609-610. Bomme, Essays in Historical Criticism. Ibid., 745-747. Hamilton, Writings of James Monroe, V. Ibid., 781-783. Hermann Eduaed von Holst [1892 — ], Professor of History and Head of the Department from 1892 to 1900. Constitutional and Political History of the United States. Vol. VII, 1859-1861. Har- per's Ferry to Lincoln's Inaugmration. 8vo, xiv-f4:59. Chicago, Callaghan and Co., 1892. Constitutional and Political History of the United States. Vol. VIII. Index and List of Authorities by Ira Hutchinson Brainerd. 8vo, xxiii + 356. Chicago, Callaghan and Co., 1892. The French Revolution Tested by Mirabeau's Career. Twelve Lectures on the History of the French Revolution delivered at the Lowell Institute, Boston, Mass. 2 vols. 8vo, vi + 258, 264. Chicago, Callaghan and Co., 1894. Reviews of G. E. Howard, Introduction to the Local Con- stitutional History of the United States. Historische Zeitschrift, N. F., LXIX (1892), 366-369. E. C. Mason, The Veto Power. Ibid., 370- 372. Third Annual Report of the Society for the History of the Germans in Maryland. Ibid., 372-373. J. G. Bourinot, Manual of the Constitutional History of Canada. Ibid., 373-374. K. von Kalkstein, Zur Verfassungsgeschichte Nordamerikas. Ibid., LXX (1893), 175. J. F. Rhodes, History of the United States from the Compromise of 1850. Vols. I and II. Ibid., LXXVII (1896), 337-342. Benjamin Teeey [1892 — ], Professor of Mediaeval and English History. A History of England from the Earliest Times to the Death of Queen Victoria. 8vo, xii + 1100. 35 maps, 35 tables. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1901. The Place of the Mimicipium in the Roman Constitution. Annual Publication of the Oneida Historical Society, Utica, N. Y. (1894), 68-94. An attempt to show the importance of the local civitas in the Roman imperial system and to emphasize the federal nature of the Early Empire. Die Heimstatten-Gesetz-Bewegimg. Deutsch- Amerikanische Geschichtsbldtter, six num- bers, beginning in April, 1902: II, 2. 5, 1-10; 3. 5, 1-17; 4. 5, 1-11. Designed to show the political influence of the debates upon the homestead law, especially of the opposition of southern leaders from 1846 to 1861, in alienating the Northwest, more particularly the German settlers, from the Democratic ijarty and thus precipitating the new alignment of parties of 1856 and 1860. Reviews of Francis C. Lowell, Joan of Arc. American Historical Review, II (1896), 131-134. Paul Guiraud, Fustel de Coulanges. Ibid., IV (1899), 389-390. Seeley, Growth of British Policy. American Journal of Sociology, II (1897), 118-125. Adams, Law of Civilization and Decay. Ibid., 467-471. Goldwin Smith, The United Kingdom. Ibid., VI (1901), 419-422. Department of History 25 Leonard Courtney, The Working Constitution of the United Kingdom. American Histo- rical Review, VII (1901), 587-588. George Stephen Goodspeed [1892 — ], Professor of Ancient History. Outlines for Lectures on the History of the Hebrews. Printed for use in classes at the University. 8vo, 90. 1897. Israel's Messianic Hope to the Time of Jesus. 12mo, X + 315. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1900. A study of Hebrew messianic prophecy, in the large sense of the ideals of Israel, in its historical develop- ment. An Outline of Babylonian-Assyrian History. In Assyrian and Babylonian Literature, edited by Robert Francis Harper, 1901, LXIII-LXXXIIL A History of the Babylonians and Assyrians. 12mo, xiii + 422. New York, Charles Scrib- ner's Sons, 1902. Follows the history of these peoples from the begin- nings of our knowledge of human settlement in the Tigro-Euphrates valley to the capture of Babylon by Cyrus the Persian. The Book of Job in Other Literatures. Old and New Testament Student, XV (1892), 45-51, 105-114. A comparison of the solution of the problem of life found in Job, with other solutions of the same problem in the world's thought. The RetiuTi of the Exiles. Biblical World, I (1893), 40-48. A study of the first fifteen years of the post-exilic period of Jewish history. Haggai and Zechariah. Ibid., 124-133. The prophets and their messages are studied in the light of the historical situation from 521 to 516 B. C. Ezra and Nehemiah. Ibid., 208-219. The Book of Job. Ibid., 288-293. The book is interpreted in the light of the exile, and its essential teaching as a new revelation of God. The Book of Proverbs. Ibid., 365-370. The Book of Ecclesiastes. Ibid., 453-460. An attempt is made to discover the teachings of the book which are of permanent value. The Successors of Ezra the Scribe. Ibid., II (1893), 97-105. The inner life of Judaism in the fourth century B. C. A Sketch of Canaanitish History to about the Year 1000 B. C. Ibid., VII (1896), 459-471. A Sketch of Assyrian History with Special Reference to Palestine from about the Year 1000 B. C. Ibid., IX (1897), 401^14. The Foreshadowings of the Christ. Ibid., VIII, IX (1896-1897). Seven articles, en- larged and published as " Israel's Messianic Hope to the Time of Jesus." (See above.) Israel's Messianic Hopes. Ibid., XII (1898), 400436. The Persian Empire from Darius to Artaxerxes. Ibid., XIV (1899), 251-257. The main facts of Persian history in their bearing tiiKjn the life of the Jewish people. Sennacherib's Invasion of Judah. Cumberland Presbyterian Quarterly, I (1892), 93-108. A critical examination of the Old Testament narratives and a comparison of the Assyrian account with an attempt to combine the two. Oliver J. Thatcher [1894 — ], Associate Professor of History. A Sketch of the History of the Apostolic Church. 12mo, 304. Boston, Houghton, Mifflin & Co., 1894. Europe in the Middle Age. In collaboration with Ferdinand Schwill. 8vo, 681. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1896. Critical Work on the Latin Sources for the First Crusade. Annual Report of the American Historical Association, IV (1900), 396-412. An account of the Latin sources of the first rank and of the reconstruction caused by the modern process of shifting the emphasis from the secondary to the pri- mary sources. Kleine Mittheilung zu Otto von Freising, Gesta Friderici, II, 56. Mittheilungen des Insti- tuts fur dsterreichische Geschichtsfor- schung, XXII (1901), 659-661. A critical inquiry concerning the duration of the Peace of the Land proclaimed by Frederick I., 1156, for Ba- varia, with proof that it was not limited to a year, as has always been believed. Studies Concerning Adrian IV. The Univer- sity of Chicago Decennial Publications, Vol. IV, 1902. Ueber die Bedeutung des Wortes Tomeamen- tum, Otto von Freising, Gesta Friderici, I, 17. Mittheilungen des Instituts filr dster- reichische Geschichtsfoi'schung, XXIII (1902), 639-643. 26 Publications Francis Wayland Shepaedson [1892 — ], Associate Professor of American His- tory. Is the Puritan Element Overestimated ? Den- ison Quarterly, I (1893), 29-46. Keprinted as pamphlet. An Unfamiliar American Society. Ibid., Ill (1895), 80-100. Reprinted as pamphlet. Irregularities in Presidential CJounts. Ibid,, 215-231. Reprinted as pamphlet. A Historical Sketch of the University of Chi- cago. The President's Report, 1897-98, 1-29. Revised and expanded as a Docu- mentary History of the University of Chi- cago, 1890-1902, and pubUshed in The Uni- versity of Chicago Decennial Publications^ First Series, Vol. I. Suggestions from the Life of Abraham Lin- coln. Self Culture, VIII (1899), 648-653. The Old Granville and the New. New Eng- land Magazine, XX (1899), 97-117. A sociological study of American migration, describing the formation in Granville, Mass., of a church colony, which made an overland journey to Ohio and founded a new Granville. The special object was to show New England survivals after nearly a century and to indi- cate the nature of the modifications made in the wes- tern environment. Reviews of McMaster, History of the People of the United States, Vol. IV. Dial, XVIII (1892), 319-320. Lothrop, Life of William H. Seward. Ibid., XXI (1896), 282-283. Eggleston, The Beginners of a Nation. Ibid., XXII (1897), 83-81. Schofield, Forty-six Years in the Army. Ibid., XXIV (1898), 352-353. Thorpe, Constitutional History of the Ameri- can People. Ibid., XXV (1898), 220-222. Henderson, Stonewall Jackson; and Bache, George Gordon Meade. Ibid., XXVI (1899), 302-305. Rhodes, History of the United States from the Compromise of 1850, Vol IV. Jfttd., XXVII (1899), 312-314. Wise, The End of an Era; and Wise, Life of Henry A. Wise. Ibid. (1899), 418-420. Hart, Salmon P. Chase; Adams, Charles Francis Adams; and Storey, Charles Sum- ner. (American Statesmen Series.) Ibid., XXVIII (1900), 395-396. Schouler, History of the United States, Vol. VI. Ibid. (1900), 461^63. McMaster, History of the People of the United States, Vol. V. Ibid., XXIX (1900), 94-96. Cox, Military Reminiscences of the Civil War. Ibid., XXX (1901), 369-370. Edwin Eele Spaeks [1896 — ], Associate Professor of American History. The Expansion of the American People. Svo, 462. Chicago, Scott, Foresman «& Co., 1899. An attempt to describe the progress of the people from the Atlantic to the Pacific oceans, and at the same time to find the elements 'in their social development which have most contributed to nationality. The Men Who Made the Nation. Svo, 410. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1900. The Diary and Letters of Henry Ingersoll. American Historical Review, III (1898), 674-702. The Cumberland National Road as a Union- making Factor. Doctor's thesis. Unpub- lished. Reinew of McCrady, South Carolina in the Revolution. Annals of the American Academy, April, 1901, 501-502. Ferdinand Schwill [1892 — ], Assistant Professor of Modern History. Europe in the Middle Age. In collaboration with Oliver J. Thatcher. (See above.) History of Modern Evurope. 8vo, ix -f 444. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1899. Reviews of Bigelow, History of the German Struggle for Liberty. American Historical Review, II (1897), 519-521. Lazzarini, Marino Faliero: La Congiura. American Historical Review, III (1898), 208-209. Department op History 27 Robinson and Rolfe, Petrarch. Selected Let- ters. Ihid., IV (1899), 514-516. Henderson, A Short History of Germany. Ibid., VIII (1902), 110-112. George Emory Fellows [1895-1902], Assistant Professor of History; Presi- dent of the University of Maine. Constitutionalism. An article in Fimk and Wa^all's Encyclopedia of Social Re- forms, 1895, 334r-338. Ralph C. H. Catterall [1894-1902], Instructor in Modern History; Assist- ant Professor of History, Cornell Uni- versity. The First Six Years of the Second Bank of the United States. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 104. Chicago, University Press, 1902. Being chapters from the following volume : The Second Bank of the United States. 8vo, 538. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, Second Series, Vol. II, 1902. a full account of the bank in its relations to the govern- ment, to the currency, and to politics. Among other topics the following are fully discussed: the bank's control of the state banks; the nature of its circula- ting media ; its dealings in exchange ; the branch drafts ; the relations between the Jackson administra- tion and the bank ; the branch bank system of the bank, and the bank's work as a governmental agency. The Issues of the Second Bank of the United States. Journal of Political Economy, V (1897), 421^57. Discusses the nature and amount of the currency issued by the Second Bank of the United States. An Alleged Specie Circular of 1827. Nation, December 30, 1897. A critical examination of the question whether such a circular was issued under Adams. Some Recent Literature on Oliver Cromwell. Year-book of the Bibliographical Society of Chicago (1900-1901), 32-50. Brief critical notes on a number of recent books on Cromwell. A Suspicious Document in Whitelock's " Me- morials." English Historical Review, XVI (1901), 737-739. A note intended to point out the invalidity of a doca- ment hitherto accepted as authentic. Reviews of Haynes, Reciprocity Treaty with Canada. Journal of Political Economy, I (1893), 478-479. Rose, Revolutionary and Napoleonic Era. Ibid., Ill (1895), 384-386. Ingram, Critical Examination of Irish His- tory. American Historical Review, VI (1901), 779-781. James Westfall Thompson [1895 — ], Instructor in European History. The Development of the French Monarchy under Louis VI le Gros (1108-1137). 8vo, xii + 114. Doctor's thesis. Chicago, Uni- versity Press, 1895. An attempt to determine the nature, extent, and value of the intensive development of the French monarchy in the first half of the twelfth century. Some Suggestions Concerning the Needs and Methods of Historical Bibliography. Year- book of the Bibliographical Society of Chicago (1899-1900), 26-37. The Decline of the Missi Dominici in Pran- kish Gaul. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, Vol. IV, 1902. Reviews of Kiener, Verfassimgsgeschichte der Provence. American Historical Review, V (1900), 555-557. Perry, St. Louis of France. Ibid., VII (1901), 12&-130. Brette, La France au milieu du XVIP si^cle. Ibid., VII (1902), 556-557. Coville, Les premiers Valois et la guerre de cent ans. Ibid., VIII (1902), 119-121. Agnes M. Wergeland [1897-1902], Do- cent in History; Professor of History, University of Wyoming. Slavery in Germanic Society During the Mid- dle Ages. Journal of Political Economy, IX (1900-01), 98-120, 398-422; X (1902), 230-254. Referring to the opinion that slavery in its severest form ceased co exist with the beginning of the Middle 28 Publications Ages and Germanic rule, the article attempts to show that this was not the case. The subject is studied in its chief phases: (1) the reduction of the free man to slave, (2) the gradual amelioration of the state of the slave, and (3) the restitution to rights and liberty. The economic situation, rather than the social, is shown to be of chief importance. Reviews of Page, The End of Villainage in England. Journal of Political Economy^ IX (1901), 304^306. Cunningham, Essay on Western Civilization. Ibid., 464-468. Ernest Alanson Balch, Ph.D. 1898; Northwestern Mutual Life Insurance Co., Detroit. Recent Phases of Eeciprocity in the United States. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. After a rapid sketch of the reciprocity treaties from the revocation of that with Canada in 1866, the book discusses the part played by James G. Blaine and others in reciprocity measures, the events that led to the final adoption of the reciprocity clause of the tariff act of 1890, the history of that clause, its effects, its re- vocation by the tariff" act of 1894, the revival of reci- procity in the Dingley act of 1897, and the commercial results of reciprocity. James Fosdick Baldwin, Ph.D. 1897; Instructor in History, Vassar College. The Scutage and Knight Service in England. 8vo, XX + 119. Doctor's thesis. Chicago, University Press, 1897. Discusses the subject of the levy of scutage in the light of its bearing on the growth of the monarchy. Kalph C. H. Catteball, Ph.D. 1902. (See above.) James Walter Fertig, Ph.D. 1898; Instructor in History, Lewis Institute, Chicago. The Secession and Reconstruction of Tennes- see, Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 108. Chicago, University Press, 1898. Discusses the political history of Tennessee during the years 1860 to 1866 in four chapters, as follows : I. Seces- sion; II. Military Government; III. Reconstructed State Government ; IV. Federal Reconstraction. Frank George Franklin, Ph.D. 1900; Professor of History, Mount Union College. Naturalization in the United States, with Special Reference to the Legislative His- tory from the Declaration of Independence to the Civil War. Doctor's thesis. Unpub- lished. George Piebce Gabrison, Ph.D. 1896; Professor of History, University of Texas. Federal Control of Congressional Elections. Part I: The Genesis of the Constitutional Provision. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The argument is that the South Carolina delegates, whose attitude was in general nationalistic, fearing the possibility of federal interference with congres- sional elections in that state so as to impair the domi- nance of Charleston in South Carolina politics, sought to procure through^ Rutledge, chairman of the commit- tee of detail, a provision in the report of that committee which would leave the control of such elections to the states, and that the result was the first clause of the first paragraph in Art. I, Sec. 4. Part II is to contain the history of the efforts at statutory provision for fed- eral control of congressional elections. Texas. Article in Johnson's Universal En- cyclopedia, VIII (1895), 84^88. N. DwiGHT Harris, Ph.D. 1901; Pro- fessor of History, Lawrence University. The History of Negro Servitude and the Sla- very Agitation in Illinois. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Walter Flavius MoCaleb, Ph.D. 1900; Editor of the Gazetteer Department of the New International Encyclopedia. History of the Aaron Burr Conspiracy. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpublished. Some Obscure Points in the Mission Period of Texas History. Texas Historical Quar- terly, I (1898), 216-225. The First Phase of the Gutierrez-Magee Expe- dition. Ibid., II (1901), 218-229. A study from Spanish sources of the filibustering ex- pedition led into Texas in 1812-13. Depabtment of Aeoh^ologt 29 Paul Fredebick Peck, Ph.D. 1901 ; Pro- fessor of History, Bloomsburg, Penn- sylvania, State Normal School. The Development of the Theory of Succession under the Early Norman Kings. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. An attempt to ascertain the relative influence of the principles of hereditary right and of election in the succession of the several kings of England during the Early Norman Period. John W. Perrin, Ph.D. 1895; Profes- sor of History, Western Reserve Uni- versity. History of Compulsory Education in New England. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 71. Mead- ville, Penn., 1896. William Rullkoetter, Ph.D. 1899; Professor of History and German, Drury College. The Legal Protection of Woman among the Ancient Germans. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 96. Chicago, University Press, 1900. The investigation is confined to the facts relative to the status of woman in the early historic period, when purely Germanic ideas were still dominating the social life and determined its conditions. Henry Lawrence Schoolcraft, Ph.D. 1899 ; Professor of History, University of Illinois. The Genesis of the Grand Remonstrance from Parliament to King Charles I. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 45. University of Illinois Publications, New Series, I, No. 7. CoBA L. ScoFiELD, Ph.D. 1898 ; Instruc- tor in History, Wellesley College. A Study of the Court of Star Chamber largely based on Manuscripts in the British Museum and the Pubhc Record Oflfice. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, xxx + 82. Chicago, University Press, 1900. Geobge C. Selleby, Ph.D. 1901; In- structor in History, University of Wis- consin. The Suspension of Habeas Corpus During the Civil War. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. John Olaf Sethbe, Ph.D. 1901. The Political History of Minnesota Prior to Her Admission into the Union: A Study in American History. Doctor's thesis. Un- published. A discussion of the political phase of the territorial history of Minnesota, with a brief preliminary account of the early explorers and the first settlements of the territory. Edwin Eble Sparks, Ph.D. 1900. (See above.) James Westfall Thompson, Ph.D. 1895. (See above.) Chables Tbuman Wyckoff, Ph.D. 1897 ; Assistant Professor of History, Bradley Polytechnic Institute, Peoria, 111. The Feudal Relations Between the Crowns of England and Scotland Under the Early Plantagenets. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, xv-f 159. Chicago, University Press, 1897. The work (1) discusses the sources bearing on the sub- ject; C^) applies them to answer the question: Was the kingdom of Scotland in a state of legal and perma- nent dependence on the English crown from 9(24 to 1328T V. ARCHEOLOGY Fbank Bigelow Tabbell [1892 — ], Pro- fessor of Classical Archaeology. A History of Greek Art. Svo, xiii + 29b. Mead- ville, Penn., Flood & Vincent, 1896. Now published by The Macmillan Co., New York. The Direction of Writing in Attic Vase-Inscrip- tions. Studies in Classical Philology of the University of Chicago, I (1895), 114r- 123. The practice of writing from right to left, which in GreeK lapidary inscriptions became nearly extinct be- fore the end of the sixth century, B. C, was not wholly abandoned by the vase-painters till after the middle of the fifth century, B. C. 30 Publications A Signed Cylix by Duris, in Boston. Ameri- can Journal of ArchoRology, Second Series, IV (1900), 183-191. Heresy at Athens in the Time of Plato. The New World, II (1893), 687-694. A discussion of the question, how far conformity to a standard of religious orthodoxy, as distinguished from observance of religious ritual, was insisted upon in ancient Athens. A Greek Hand Mirror in the Art Institute of Chicago. With a half-tone plate. The University of Chicago Decennial Publica- tions, First Series, VI, 1-4. A Cantharus from the Factory of Brygos in the Boston Museum of Fine Arts. With two heliotype plates. Ibid., 5-9. James Henry Breasted, Associate Pro- fessor of Egyptology and the Semitic Languages. (See under Semitic Languages and Literatures.) VI. SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY Albion W. Small [1892 — ], Professor and Head of the Department of Soci- ology. An Introduction to the Study of Society. In collaboration with George E. Vincent. 8vo, 384. American Book Co., 1894. The Relation of Sociology to Economics. Jour- nal of Political Economy, III (1895), 169- 184. The Organic Concept of Society. Annals oj the American Academy, V (1895), 740-746. " Social " versus " Societary." Ibid., V (1895), 948-953. The Era of Sociology. American Journal of Sociology, I (1895), 1-15. Superiority and Subordination as Subject Mat- ter of Sociology. Translation from the German of Simmel. Ibid., II (1896), 167- 189, 392-415. Some Demands of Sociology Upon Pedagogy. Ibid., 839-851. The Sociologist's Point of View. Ibid., Ill (1897), 145-171. Present Status of Sociology in Germany. Translation from the German of Thon. Ibid., 718-736, 792-800. The Persistence of Social Groups. Transla- tion from the German of Simmel. Ibid., Ill (1898), 662-698, 825-836; IV (1898), 35-50. Methodology. Ibid., IV (1898), 113-144, 235- 256, 380-394. A Unit in Sociology. Annals of the American Academy, IX (1899), 81-85. The Scope of Sociology. Ibid., V (1900), 506- 526, 617-647, 778-873; VI (1900-01), 42-66, 177-203, 487-531; VIII (1902), 197-250. The Number of Members as Determining the Sociological Form of the Group. Transla- tion from the German of Simmel. Ibid., VIII (1902), 1-46, 158-196. The Significance of Sociology for Ethics. The University of Chicago Decennial Publica- tions, First Series, Vol. IV, 111-149. Reviews of Hobson, Evolution of Modem Capitalism ; Von Halle, Trusts; Dyer, Evolution of Industry. A comparative review. American Journal of Sociology, I (1895), 219-228. Giddings, Principles of Sociology. Ibid., II (1896), 288-305. Fairbanks, Introduction to Sociology. Ibid., 305-310. Schaflfle, Bau und Leben des socialen KOrpers. Ibid., 310-315. Barth, Die Philosophic der Geschichte als So- ciologie. Ibid., Ill (1898), 700-702. Stuckenberg, Introduction to the Study of So- ciology. Ibid. (1898), 855-859. Crowell, Logical Process of Social Develop- ment. Ibid., IV (1898), 257-266. Department op Sociology and Anthropology 31 Giddings, Elements of Sociology. Ibid. (1899), 543-554. Giddings, Inductive Sociology. Science, XV (1902), 700-706. Charles Kiohmond Henderson [1892 — ], Professor of Sociology. An Introduction to the Study of the Depend- ent, Defective, and Delinquent Classes. First edition, 12mo, x+277, 1893; second edition, X + 400, 1901. D. C. Heath & Co., Boston and New York. a descriptive, critical and technical discussion of the abnormal classes and of institutions of charity and correction. The Social Spirit in America. Svo, vii + 350. Flood and Vincent, Meadville, Penn., 1897. Second edition, Scott, Foresman & Co., Chicago, 1902. Illustrations of the functions and scope of voluntary associations for culture and philanthropy in the United States. Social Settlements. 16mo, iv + 196. New York, Lentilham & Co., 1899. Second edi- tion, 1902. History, purpose and methods of settlements. Social Elements. Svo, ix-f- 405 4- maps. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1898. Illustrations of the contributions of sociology to edu- cational aims and methods. The Christian and Civic Economy of Large Towns, by Thomas Chalmers. Abridged. Svo, xi -f 350. New York, Charles Scrib- ner's Sons, 1900. The introduction gives a summary and criticism of Dr. Chalmer's social teachings. Die ekonomische Lage der Collegien im Staate Illinois, Nord-Amerika. Svo, 59. Leipzig, 1901. Early Poor Laws in the West. Charities Review, III (1893), 85-88. Public Relief and Private Charity. Pro- ceedings of the International Congress of Charities, Correction, and Philanthropy, 1893, 8^-97. The Johns Hopkins Univer- sity Press. Outdoor Relief in the United States. Proceed- ings of the National Conference of Char- itien and Correction, 1894, 106-118. The Practical Issue of Studies of the Criminal. Proceedings of the National Prison Asso- ciation, 1894, 119-134. The Place and Function of Voluntary Organi- zations. American Journal of Sociology, I (1895), 327-334. Sociology and Theology. Ibid., I (1895), 381- 383. Business Men and Social Theorists. Ibid., I (1896), 385-397. The German Inner Mission. Ibid., 583-595. The Merit System in Public Institutions of Charity and Corrections. Annual Report of the Ohio State Conference of Charities and Correction, 1896, 382-391. Preventive Measures, Social and Educational. Proceedings of the National Prison Asso- ciation, 1896, 151-162. New Phases of Charity Organization. 16 pp. Published by Indianapolis Charity Organi- zation Society, 1897. The Poor Laws of the United States. Proceed- ings of the National Conference of Char- ities and Correction, 1897, 256-271. Das Armenwesen in den Vereinigten Staaten von Nord-Amerika. Jahrbucher filr Na- tionalCkonomie und Statistik, dritte Folge, LXX (1898), 18-37. Economy of Trained Service. Annual Report of the Ohio State Conference of Charities and Correction, 1898, 9-14. Politics in Charitable and Penal Institutions. Ibid., 237-246. Politics in Public Institutions of Charity and Correction. American Journal of Soci- ology, IV (1898), 202-234. The Relation of Philanthropy to Social Order and Progress. President's address before the National Conference of Charities and Correction, 1899. Proceedings, 1-15. Prison Laboratories. American Journal of Sociology VI (1900), 316-323. Also in Pro- ceedings of the National Prison Associa- tion, 1900, 232-246. 32 Publications The Manual Training School as a Factor in Social Progress. Proceedings of the East- ern Manual Training Association, 1900, 64-72. Also published in Manual Training Magazine, II (1900), 1-9. Neglected Children in Neglected Communities. Proceedings of the National Conference of Charities and Correction, 1901, 219-224. The Scope of Social Technology. American Journal of Sociology, VI (1901), 465-486. The Social Position of the Warden. Presi- dent's address before the National Prison Association, 1902. (In press.) Practical Sociology in the Service of Social Ethics. The University of Chicago Decen- nial Publications, First Series, III, 25-49. Eeviews of F. H. Wines, Punishment and Reformation. American Journal of Sociology, I (1896), 501-503. Enrico Ferri, Criminal Sociology. Ibid., 785- 788. Amory H. Bradford, Heredity and Christian Problems. Ibid., II (1896), 132-133. George Harris, Moral Evolution. Ibid., 132- 133. F. J. Stimson, Labor in Its Relations to Law. Ibid., 135-136. R. A. Woods, editor, The Poor in Great Cities. Ibid., 136-137. W. H. Mallock, Classes and Masses. Ibid., 472^73. J. Shield Nicholson, Strikes and Social Prob- lems. Ibid., 4:18-4:14:. A. Posada, Theories modernes sur les origines de la f amille, de la soci6t6, et de l'6tat. Ibid., (1897), 607-609. Lyman Abbott, Christianity and Social Prob- lems. J6td., 609-610. W. D. Morrison, Juvenile Offenders. Ibid., 737-739. Mrs. B. Bosanquet, Rich and Poor. Ibid., 874-875. S. Nitti, La population et le syst^me social. Ibid., 875-879. L. M. Salmon, Domestic Service. Ibid., Ill (1897), 114-115. A. Loria, Probl§mes sociaux contemporains. Ibid., 115-120. F. H. Wines and John Koren, The Liquor Problem in Its Legislative Aspects. Ibid., 265-266. J. S. Dennis, Christian Missions and Social Progress. Ibid., Ill (1898), 545-546, and V (1899), 125. Antonio Marro, La Puberty studiata nell' uomo e nella donna, etc. Ibid., 703-704. Sidney and Beatrice Webb, Industrial Democ- racy. Ibid., 850-855. E. Levasseur, L'ouvrier am6ricain. Ibid., IV (1898), 94^98. W. F. Willoughby, Workingmen's Insurance. Ibid., IV (1899), 695-696. S. and B. Webb, Problems of Modem Industry. Ibid., 843-844. G. F. Fairchild, Rural Wealth and Welfare. Ibid., VI (1900), 126-127. A. Drahms, The Criminal. Ibid., 274-275. Louis Skarzynski, Le progr^s social h la fin du XIX« siecle. Ibid., VII (1901), 131-132. B. S. Rowntree, Poverty: A Study of Town Life. Ibid. (1902), 848-849. Jane Addams, Democracy and Social Ethics. Ibid., VIII (1902), 136-138. A. C. Hall, Crime in its Relation to Social Progress. Ibid., 276-277. Chaeles Zueblin [1892 — ], Professor of Sociology. American Municipal Progress: Chapters in Mimicipal Sociology. 12mo, 380. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1902. Municipal sociology, transportation, public works, sani- tation, public schools, public libraries, public build- ings, parks, and boulevards, public recreation, public control, ownership, and operation. The Ethics of the Jewish Question. Interna- tional Journal of Ethics, II (1892), 462- 475. Depabtment of Sociology and Anthbopology 33 The Chicago Ghetto. Chapter in Hull House Maps and Papers, 91-111. T. Y, Crowell, 1895. England's Dominant Industrial Position. Jour- nal of Political Economy, V (1897), 216-227. Social Christianity in England. Methodist Review, LXXIX (1897), 51-64. A Sketch of Socialistic Thought in England. Journal of Sociology, III (1897), 643-661. Municipal Playgrounds in Chicago. Ibid., IV (1898), 145-158. The World's First Sociological Laboratory. Ibid., IV (1899), 557-592. Industrial Democracy. Journal of Political Economy, VII (1899), 182-203. Abolition of Grade Crossings. Municipal Af- fairs, V (1901), 817-828. Maeion Talbot [1892 — ], Associate Pro- fessor of Sanitary Science. Food as a Factor in Student Life. A Contri- bution to the Study of Student Diet. With the collaboration of Ellen H. Richards. 8vo, 26. Chicago, University Press, 1894. Home Sanitation: A Manual for Housekeepers. With the collaboration of Ellen H. Rich- ards. 12mo, 85. Boston, Home Science Publishing Co., 1898. Sanitation and Sociology. American Journal of Sociology, II (1896), 74-82. Review of Salmon, Domestic Science. Journal of Po- litical Economy, IX (1897), 639-641. Fredebick Stabr [1892 — ], Associate Professor of Anthropology. Notes on Mexican Archaeology. 8vo, 16; 4 plates and 12 illustrations. Chicago, Uni- versity Press, 1894. The Little Pottery Objects of Lake Chapala, Mexico. 8vo, 27; 43 illustrations. Chicago, University Press, 1897. The Mapa de Cuauhtlantzinco or Codice Cam- pos. 8vo, 38, veith illustrations. Chicago, University Press, 1898. Indians of Southern Mexico: An Ethnographic Album. 4to, 32, 141 plates. Chicago, Uni- versity Press, 1899. Recent Mexican Study of the Native Lan- guages of Mexico. 8vo, 19, with illustra- tions. Chicago, University Press, 1900. The Physical Characters of the Indians of Southern Mexico. The University of Chi- cago Decennial Publications, First Series, IV, 51-109. (Other items not furnished.) William I. Thomas [1894 — ], Associate Professor of Sociology. The Scope and Method of Folk-psychology. American Journal of Sociology, I (1896), 434^45. The relation of the study of mental development in the race to anthropology, ethnology, history, and sociology. On a Difference in the Metabolism of the Sexes. Doctor's thesis. Ibid., Ill (1897), 31-63. The differences between the physical, mental, and emotional characters of men and women, the relation of these to the characteristic organic processes of the two sexes, and the predisposition of men and women to different types of activity. The Relation of Sex to Primitive Social Con- trol. Ibid., 754r-776. The maternal system in early society furnishes the materials out of which a political organization is de- veloped, but is not itself political in nature. Sex in Primitive Industry. Ibid., IV (1899), 474-488. The industrial arts are begun by women, but are organ- ized and developed by men. Sex in Primitive Morality. Ibid., 774-787. Moral actions are of a nature beneficial to the group as a whole ; the morality of men tends to be an activity morality, and that of women a morality of the person. The Psychology of Modesty and Clothing. Ibid., V (1899), 246-262. Examination of the disgust theory of the origin of mod- esty, and a statement of a theory that modesty origi- nates in the observation of the effects of our own activities more immediately than in a disapproval of the actions of others. The Gaming Instinct. Ibid., VI (1901), 750- 763. The gaming instinct is an expression of the predacious instincts developed by man in the hunting period. 34 Publications Der Ursprung der Exogamie. Zeitschrift fiir Socialwissenschaft, V (1902), 1-18. The exogamous system of marriage is due to interest in the unfamiliar. The Relation of the Medicine Man to the Or- igin of the Professional Occupations. Ar- ticle in The University of Chicago Decen- nial Publications, First Series, IV. An examination of Spencer's theory that the artistic and learned occupations are developed by the medicine- man. The statement of a theory that an economic sur- plus, particularly in the form of patronage, is the most important condition to the development of the profes- sional occupations, and that this condition is furnished originally by the court rather than by the church. George Edgar Vincent [1894 — ], As- sociate Professor of Sociology. Introduction to the Study of Society. In col- laboration with Albion W. Small. 8vo, 384. American Book Co., 1894. The Social Mind and Education. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, ix + 155. New York, The Mac- millan Co., 1897. An attempt to interpret certain problems of education in terms of social or group psychology. The chief topics discussed are : the nature of the social mind ; the par- allelism between mental development in the individual and in the race ; the function of social philosophy in education; certain suggestions as to the college cur- riculum. A Scheme of Sociological Study. Educational Review, VIII (1894), 452-460. A plea for co-operation in the teaching of the social sciences in colleges and universities ; for a conscious efifort to shov? the unity and interrelations of econom- ics, history, political science, anthropology, ethnology, and sociology. It is further urged that a general intro- ductory, descriptive course in sociology should precede the detailed study of the special social sciences, which in turn should be followed by a synthetic course in social philosophy and social ethics. The Province of Sociology, American Jour- nal of Sociology, I (1895-96), 473-491. An outline in syllabus form of the history of social philosophy from Plato and Aristotle to Comte and Spencer. The material is grouped in such a way as to display the development of ideas as to the origin of society, as to social laws, the biological concept, the organic and psychological theories, etc. A Retarded Frontier. Ibid., IV (1898), 1-20. A descriptive article based upon a brief trip among the mountaineers of eastern Kentucky. Concrete illustra- tions of certain fundamental social laws, e. g., the influence of contour on social grouping, effects of iso- lation, methods of social control, survivals of tradi- tions, etc., are pointed out. The scientific study of a most interesting but rapidly passing type of frontier life is urged. Social Science and the Curriculum. School Review, X (1902), 183-194. A plea for the enrichment of the elementary curriculum with observation of industrial and social facts as a concrete basis for the later generalizations of history, economics, political science, and sociology. Ethical education as to the development of social instincts and the suggestion of social ideals is urged as a substitute for premature moral teaching by precept. Jerome H. Raymond [1901 — ], Associate Professor of Sociology. American Municipal Government: A study of the civic life of three American cities — New York, Philadelphia, and Boston. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Ira Woods Howerth [1895 — ], Assistant Professor of Sociology. The Present Condition of Sociology in the United States. Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science, V (1894), 112-121. A presentation of American opinion concerning the scope and aim of sociology, and its use as a college discipline. A Programme for Social Study. American Journal of Sociology, II (1896-97), 852- 872, and III (1897-98), 100-109, 248-257. An analysis of society accompanied by an outlined course of study and a bibliography. The Social Aim in Education. Fifth Year Book of the National Herbart Society, 1899, 69-108. Doctor's thesis, I. A critical analysis of the social and the individual aims in education with an attempt to show the subor- dinate relation of the individual or psychological aim. The Development of the Social Aim in Educa- tion. American Journal of Pedagogy, XII (1899), 230-242, and XIII (1900), 102-109, 173-184. Doctor's thesis, II. An historical presentation of American educational ideals. An Ethnic View of Higher Education. Educa- tional Review, XX (1900), 345-356. A consideration of the place and function of higher education from the standpoint of the race. Education and Evolution. Ibid., XXIII (1902), 60-80. An attempt to show the relation between the biological evolution of the individual and the artificial educa- tional process, with some suggested criticisms of mod- ern education. Department of Sociology and Antheopology 35 Education and Social Progress. Ibid., 355- 370. On the evolution of society and the place and function of education as a factor in conscious social evolution. Education and the Social Ideal. Ibid., XXIV (1902), 150-165. Some of the essential elements of a rational social ideal are pointed out and education is considered in the light of these elements. Education and the Individual. Journal of Pedagogy, XIV (1902), 311-324. The subordinate relation of the individual to the edu- cational process is shown, and the consequent necessity of considering in education primarily the needs of society. Basic Ideas of a Scientific Pedagogy. Edu- cation, XXIII (1902), 129-141. The ideas of social solidarity and social evolution are considered in their relation to modern educational thought. Max V^est [1893-95], Docent in Soci- ology and Municipal Institutions. The Theory of the Inheritance Tax. Political Science Quarterly, VIII (1893), 426-444. An examination of the various arguments by which the taxation of inheritances has been supported or op- posed. The Inheritance Tax. Columbia University Studies in History, Economics, and Public Law, IV (1893-94), 171-310. The Teachings of Political Economists Defin- ing Direct and Indirect Taxes. Svo, 38. New York, 1895. Submitted to the Supreme Court in the income-tax cases. The summary points out that while various criteria have been used to distinguish between direct and indirect taxes, an income tax is direct according to the definitions of all economists, except the physio- crats. Reviews of Clare, A, B, C of Foreign Exchanges. Jour- nal of Political Economy, II (1893), 105- 106. Ely, Outlines of Economics. Political Sci- ence Quarterly, IX (1894), 311-313. The division of the science into social economics and public economics is commended, and supported by ref- erences to other authorities. Addams and Others, Philanthrophy and Social Progress; Jones, Bibliography of College, University, and Social Settlements, and Forward Movements. Ibid., 566-567. Drummond, Lowell Lectures on the Ascent of Man. Ibid., X (1895), 343-344. The evolutionary explanation of the origin of altruism is accepted as a successful refutation of Kidd's thesis that altruism is of ultra-rational origin. Merton L. Miller [1897-1901], Associ- ate in Anthropology. A Preliminary Study of the Pueblo of Taos, New Mexico. Doctor's thesis. Svo, 48. Chicago, University Press, 1898. David Prescott Barrows, Ph.D. 1897; Chief of the Bureau of Non-Christian Tribes for the Philippine Islands. The Ethno-Botany of the Coahuilla Indians of Southern California. Doctor's thesis. Svo, 82. Chicago, University Press, 1901. An account of the plants used for food and medicine and in their arts by the Coahuilla Indians, together with some discussion of their linguistic and tribal relationships. Charles Joseph Bushnell, Ph.D. 1901; Professor of Social Science, Albany Col- lege. Some Social Aspects of the Chicago Stock- yards. Doctor's thesis. American Jour- nal of Sociology, VII (1901), 145-170, 289- 380, 433-474, 657-702. Hannah Belle Clark, Ph.D. 1897; Dean of Women, Knox College, Galesburg, 111. Sanitary Legislation Affecting Schools in the United States. Report of the Commis- sioner of Education (1893-1894), 1301-1349. Recent Investigations upon the Poisonous Properties of Expired Air. Journal of the American Medical Association, XXV(1895), 17-20. The Public Schools of Chicago: A Sociolog- ical Study. Doctor's thesis. Svo, 117. Chicago, University Press, 1896. 36 Publications Charles A. Ell wood, Ph.D. 1899; Pro- fessor of Sociology, University of Mis- souri. Some Prolegomena to Social Psychology. Doc- tor's thesis. 8vo, 47. Chicago, 1901. Pub- lished also in American Journal of Soci- ology, IV (1899), 656-665, 807-822; V, 98- 109, 220-227. A philosophical examination of the necessary presup- positions, categories, and principles of a social psy- chology, to determine the nature, task, and method of the science. I. The need of the study of social psy- chology. II. The fundamental fact in social psychol- ogy. III. The nature and task of social psychology. I V . The concept of the social mind. V. The theory of imitation in social psychology. Jacob Dorset Forrest, Ph.D. 1900; Pro- fessor of Sociology and Economics, But- ler College, Indianapolis. The Development of Industrial Organization. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A New Plan for the Control of Quasi -Public Works. American Journal of Sociology, III (1899), 837-847. John Morris Gillette, Ph.D. 1901; President of the Jacksonville Female Academy, Jacksonville, 111. Culture Agencies of a Typical Manufacturing Group: South Chicago. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 68. Chicago, University Press, 1901. Reprinted from American Journal of Sociology, VII (1901), 91-121, 188-215. Multiple After-images. Psychological Review, VIII (1901), 279-280. The Relation of Emotion to Mathematical Truths. Ibid., 602-606. Edward C. Hayes, Ph.D. 1902; Professor of Economics and Sociology, Miami University. The Sociologists' Object of Attention. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpublished. Ira VToods Howerth, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) Anne Marion MacLean, Ph.D. 1900. Factory Legislation for Women in the United States. American Journal of Sociology, III (1897), 183-205. Two Weeks in Department Stores. Ibid., IV (1898), 721-711. Homes for Working Women in Large Cities. Charities Review, IX (1899), 215-228. Factory Legislation for Women in Canada. American Journal of Sociology, V (1899- 1900), 172-181. The Acadian Element in the Population of Nova Scotia. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Merton L. Miller, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) Paul Monroe, Ph.D. 1897; Professor in the History of Education, Teachers Col- lege, Columbia University. English and American Christian Socialism. American Journal of Sociology, I (1895), 50-68. Sociology and the Common Schools. Inland ■ Educator, II (1896), 195-199. Unconscious Altruistic Forces. Altruistic Review, II (1895) 281-287. Profit Sharing in the United States. Doctor's thesis. American Journal of Sociology, I (1896), 685-709. An American System of Labor Pensions and Insurance. Ibid., II (1897), 501-514. Insurance Against Non-Employment. Ibid., 771-785. Some Possibilities of the Present Industrial System. Ibid., Ill (1898), 729-753. Profit Sharing and Co-operation. Ibid., IV (1898), 593-602, 788-806. Department of Sociology and Anthbopology 37 Reviews of Spahr, Present Distribution of Wealth in the United States. American Journal of Soci- ology, II (1897), 746-750. Gilman, A Dividend to Labor. Ibid., VI (1901), 416-419. Jebome Hall Raymond, Ph.D. 1895. (See above.) William I. Thomas, Ph.D. 1896. (See above.) Geobge Edgab Vincent, Ph.D. 1896. (See above.) Nellie Mason Auten, Graduate student. Some Phases of the Sweating System in the Garment Trades of Chicago. American Journal of Sociology, VI (1901), 602-645. Abthub William Dunn, Graduate student. An Analysis of the Social Structure of a Western Town: A specimen study accord- ing to the method outlined in Small and Vincent's Introduction to the Study of So- ciety. Svo, 53. Chicago, University Press, 1896. a brief, preliminary analysis of the material and psychical elements that entered into the composition and development of Galesburg, 111., and a partial classi- fication of the nature and functions of the social groups and organs of the community. Elma Gbaves, Graduate student. Municipal Art. American Journal of Soci- ology, VI (1901), 673-681. C. H. Hastings, Graduate student. Bibliography of Sociology. Ibid., Ill (1898), 129-137; 417-432; 7ia-728; 869-880. Also in separate form, 75 pp. Chicago, Univer- sity Press. H. F. Hegneb, -Graduate student. The Scientific Value of Social Settlements. American Journal of Sociology, III (1897), 171-182. Amy Hewes, Graduate student. Social Institutions and the Riemann Surface. American Journal of Sociology, V (189^ 1900), 392-403. a discussion demonstrating the possible use of the Biemann surface as a symbolic interpretation of the nature of the complex variable in the field of sociology and suggestive of the problems of sociological method- ology. Fbances a. Kellob, Graduate student. Experimental Sociology. Svo, 316. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1901. Besult of a laboratory study of criminals, with sugges- tions for establishment of laboratories and other ex- perimental social work. The Criminal Negro. Svo, 64. Industrial School Press, Lancaster, O., 1901. Sex in Crime. International Journal of Ethics, IX (1898), 74r-83. Relation of Criminal Sociology to Criminal Jurisprudence. Ibid., IV (1899), 51&-527; 630-648. Psychological and Environmental Study of Women Criminals. American Journal of Sociology, V (1900), 527-543; 671-682. Criminal Sociology: An Historical and Com- parative Study. Arena, XXIII (1900), 301, 516. The Criminal Negro: Comparative Study of White and Negro Criminals. Ibid., XXV (1901), 68-68; 190-197; 308-316; 417-428; 510-520; XXVI (1901), 56-66; 304-310; 521- 527. Association of Ideas. Pedagogical Seminary^ VIII (1901), 341-351. Tests for Education. Conservative Review, V (1901), 139-145. Value and Direction of Play in Children's In- stitutions. Charities Review, VI (1901), 297-300. Ralph G. Kimble, Graduate student. Contributions to the Comparative Study of Association. American Journal of Soci- ology, IV (1899), 666-680. A study in sociological theory. The writer's thesis is that the comparative method must be applied to the 38 Publications study of the associational activities just as it has been applied to the study of bodily and of psychical activi- ties, and that, therefore, the sociologist in his attempt to understand the associational activities as they pre- sent themselves at the level of the human animal inevi- tably finds himself compelled to study them as they present themselves at the level of the non-human ani- mal. The body of knowledge resulting from the study of associational activities after this method and from the proper standpoint would constitute a Comparative Sociology. Ernest Carboll Moore, Graduate stu- dent. Report on Social Aspects of the Saloon in the Nineteenth Ward of Chicago. KorerCs Economic Aspects of the Liquor Problem, 211-223. The Social Value of the Saloon. American Journal of Sociology, III (1897), 1-13. The saloon functions as a social center in the life of the workingman. It is his club, supplying him just the things which better-organized clubs supply their more fortunate members. Any attempt to combat the saloon must seriously consider this phase of its activity. (See also under Philosophy.) S. S. MacClintock, Graduate student. The Kentucky Mountains and their Feuds. Ibid., VII (1901), 1-28, 171-187. J. Howard Moore, Graduate student. Better- World Philosophy: A Sociological Syn- thesis. 8vo, IX+276. Chicago, The Ward Waugh Company, 1899. H. Francis Perry, Graduate student. The Workingman's Alienation from the Church. American Journal of Sociology, IV (1899), 621-629. A research giving the replies of laboring men to the (juestion why they do not attend church, and suggest- ing the remedies for non-attendance. The five indict- ments against the church are briefly answered. The Mission Sunday School as an Ethical and Social Lever. Bibliotheca Sacra, LXIX (1899), 481-5(M. A research from data gathered on the south side of the city of Chicago with a tentative program for enlarged work in health, wealth, sociability, knowledge, beauty, and righteousness. The Motive and Method of Christian Charity. Ibid., LXXI (1901), 641-669. An historical study of the charity of the Christian church, showing the changing motives and methods from the first to the twentieth century. Nina C. Vandewalker, Graduate student. Some Demands of Education upon Anthro- pology. American Journal of Sociology, IV (1899), 69-78. VII. COMPARATIVE RELIGION George Stephen Goodspeed [1892 — ], Professor of Comparative Religion and Ancient History. The Dead Religions — What Have they Be- queathed to the Living? The World's Par- liament of Religions, I (1893), 454-464. Comparative Religion and the Missionary Stu- dent. Presbyterian College Review, 1896. The Ideal Childhood in Non-Christian Reli- gions. Biblical World, IX (1897), 7-22. Semitic Religion. Progress, III (1898), 390- 401. Atonement in Non-Christian Religions. Bibli- cal World, XVII (1901), 22-31, 96-106, 191- 198, 297-306. (For publications in History see above, p. 2B.) John Henry Barrows [1895-1900], Has- kell Professorial Lecturer in Compara- tive Religion ; President of Oberlin Col- lege, 1898-1902. Christianity the World Religion. 8vo, 412. Chicago, A. C. McClurg & Co., 1897. Edmund Buckley [1895 — ], Docent in Comparative Religion; Ph.D. 1894. Universal Religion, edited by Edmund Buck- ley. 8vo, 774. Chicago, University Asso- ciation, Association Building, 1899. University Lessons in Fine Art, edited by Ed- mund Buckley. 8vo, 800. Chicago, Inter- national Art Association, 1901. An account of visual art comprehensive of its theory or science and of its history equally in architecture, sculp- ture, painting, and design, prepared by a staff of seven- teen specialists, mostly art instructors in leading American universities. Department of Semitic Languages and Litebatuees 39 "Die Chinesen," und "Die Japaner," two articles in Lehrbuch der Religionsgeschichte, edited by C. de la Saussaye, 2d ed. 8vo, 399 + 512. Leipzig, J. C. B. Mohr, 1897. Phallicism in Japan. Doctor's thesis. Svo, 34. Chicago, University Press, 1895. Gives an account of the extant monuments and ancient texts belonging: to phallicism in Japan. Shinto Pantheon. New World, V (1896), 719- 744. This article was the first to demonstrate the nature- types of the gods Susano and O Kuni Nushi, as respect- ively storm and moon. Mongolian Keligions. Progress, III (1897), 108-168. a sketch, with selections from their scriptures, compre- hensive of the Turko-Tartar, Finnic, Chinese, and Japanese religions. It corrects the prevailing error that the Chinese religion is exclusively politico-ethical, by exhibiting the mythical and magical nature or Taoism, which is not degenerated but a survival. Brahmanism and Hinduism. Ibid., 175-229. a sketch with selections from their scriptures. Buddhism. Ibid. (1898), 247-272. A sketch with selections from its scriptures. Science of Religion. Ibid., 761-772. Shows that religion is one of the five culturals — activi- ties proper and peculiar to man. As such it has fol- lowed the laws of human development. These include, as direct causes, heredity with variation, and environ- ment ; and, as indirect causes, interaction of the vari- ous culturals, and intercourse of the various peoples. The traits of such development are continuity, synthe- sis, differentiation, and classification. Relations Between Early Morality and Re- ligion, International Monthly, I (1900), 577-617. Shows that early morality and religion were independ- ent, and gods were of good, evil, or indifferent charac- ter. Since both morality and religion are functions of one mind, the two gradually interacted, with mutual benefit when each maintained its freedom, but with mutual injury when either lost it. Laetitia Moon Conabd, Ph.D. 1899. Ideas of the Future Life Held by Algonkin Indian Tribes, Doctor's thesis. Translated by L. Marillier and published under the title: "Les Id6es des Indiens Algonquins relatives h la vie d'outre-tombe." Revue de Vhistoire des religions, XLII (1900), 9-^9, 220-274. Algonkin rites and myths throwing light on the ideas of the future life are analyzed and interpreted and com- pared at various points with those of other peoples. An attempt is made to discover the origin of ideas of the future life, and various indications of the method of their growth are noted. A conspicuous likeness is traced between the present life of tribes and their expected future existence; but the thought of future life is found to have little or no moral value. VIII. SEMITIC LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES William Rainey Harper [1902 — ], Pro- fessor and Head of the Department of Semitic Languages and Literatures. The Utterances of Amos Arranged Strophically . 8vo, 19. Chicago, University Press, 1898. Reprinted from Biblical World. A reconstruction of the text of the book of Amos show- ing the poetical form of the prophet's addresses. Constructive Studies in the Priestly Element in the Old Testament. An Aid to Histori- cal Study, For Use in Advanced Bible Classes. 8vo, 151. Chicago, University Press. 1902. An inductive presentation of the Old Testament mate- rials on the subject of worship, with copious references to literature and suggestions as to order and method of procedure in a study of the subject. A Critical and Exegetical Commentary on the Minor Prophets. Vol. I: Amos, Hosea, and Micah. "The International Critical Com- mentary." New York, Charles Scribner's Sons. In press. Suggestions Concerning the Original Text and Structure of Amos 1:3-2:5. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 140-145. The Structure of Hosea 1:2-3:5. American Journal of Semitic Languages and Litera- tures, XVII (1900), 1-15. A reconstruction of the first three chapters of Hosea from the point of view of the original pKjetic form. The Structure of the Text of the Book of Micah. Article in The University of Chicago De- cennial Publications, First Series, Vol. V. Reviews of Cheyne-Black, Encyclopaedia Biblica, Vol. I, articles on " Old Testament Introduction." American Journal of Theology, IV (1900), 40 Publications 372-376; Vol. II, articles on "Hexateuch and Historical Literature." Ihid.^ V (1901), 745-747. Carpenter and Harford-Battersby, The Hexa- teuch. J6id., 133-136. Hastings, Dictionary of the Bible, Vol. Ill, articles on " Old Testament Introduction." J6td., 298-300. Iba Maubioe Price [1892 — ], Professor of Semitic Languages and Literatures. The Great Cylinder Inscriptions A and B of Gudea, copied from the original clay cylin- ders of the Telloh Collection preserved in the Louvre, autographed, signs listed, ten- tatively transliterated and translated, with Commentary and Notes. Assyriologische Bibliothek, Vol. XV, edited by Friedrich De- litzsch and Paul Haupt. Part I. Text and Sign List. 8vo. Leipzig, J. C. Hinrichs'- sche Buchhandlimg, 1899. Ill autograph plates and 1 photographic reproduction. The Monuments and the Old Testament: Ori- ental Light on Holy Writ. With maps and forty illustrations. 12mo, 321. Chicago, The Christian Culture Press, 1899; third edition, 1902. A Syllabus of Old Testament History: Out- Hnes and Literature for Private Study and the Class Room. 12mo, 202. Fifth edition, revised, 1900. Chicago and New York, F. H. Revell & Co. The Drift of Biblical Research, Past and Pres- ent. 12mo, 32. Philadelphia, Griffith & Rowland Press, 1900. Sundry articles on Semitic History and Archae- ology. Hastings's Dictionary of the Bible, Edinburgh, 1898-1902. Recent Thought on the Origin of the Cunei- form Writing. American Journal of Se- mitic Languages and Literatures, XVI (1899), 145-156. Notes on the Pantheon of the Gudean Cylin- ders. Ibid., XVII (1900), 47-53. Le Pantheon de Goud6a. Revue de Vhistoire des Religions, XLIII (1901), 298-307. Translation of twenty-four of the Tel-el-Amama Letters. Contributed to Assyrian and Babylonian Literature, edited by Robert Francis Harper, 1901, pp. 217-241. (See below.) A Cone Inscription of Rim Sim. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, Vol. V. Reviews of Thureau-Dangin, Recherches sur I'origine de r6critm:e cun6iforme. Supplement h la I'* partie. American Journal of Semitic Lan- guages and Literatures, XVI (1900), 189 ff. Zimmem, BeitrSge zur Kenntniss der babylo- nischen Religion, 1. Halfte, 2. Lieferung. /6id., XVII (1900), 60 ff. Radau, Early Babylonian History. Ibid., XVII (1901), 180-185. Geobge Stephen Goodspeed [1892 — ], Professor of Comparative Religion and Ancient History. (See under History, p. 25, and Comparative Rehgion, p. 38.) RoBEBT Fbancis Habpeb [1892 — ], Pro- fessor of Semitic Languages and Litera- tures. Assyrian and Babylonian Letters belonging to the Kouyunjik Collections of the British Museum : Part I, 8vo, xv-f 116 plates, 1892. Part II, 8vo, xv + 112 plates, 1893. Part III, 8vo, xv + 116 plates, 1896. Part IV, 8vo, xvi + 116 plates, 1896. Part V, 8vo, xvi + 120 plates, 1900. Part VI, 8vo, xv + 120 plates, 1902. Part VII, 8vo, xix + 120 plates, 1902. Part VIII, 8vo, xxx-f 120 plates, 1902. Chicago, University Press; London, Luzac &Co. Part VIII is issued as Vol. V, Second Series, of The University of Chicago Decen- nial Publications. It is the purpose (1) to publish all the letters in the Kouyunjik Collections of the British Museum on which the name of the scribe is to be found j (2) the best pre- served and most important of those without signatures ; and (3) a transliteration and either a tentative trans- Department of Semitic Languages and Liteeatures 41 lation, or a rSsumi of the contents, together with a glossary and introduction. The texts will occupy six- teen volumes and the critical and exegetical apparatus as many more. In other words, the purj>ose is to give a Corpus Epistolarum of the Kouyunjik Collections. Assyrian and Babylonian Literature. Selected Translations with a Critical Introduction. Royal 8vo, xc + 462. New York, D. Apple- ton & Cb., 1901. Translations were contributed to this volume by mem • bers of the Faculty and by Fellows of the University of Chicago (see under their names) and by Messrs. Barton of Bryn Mawr College, Johnston of the Johns Hopkins University, and Thompson of the British Museum. A-bi-e-su'=Ebisum. Hebraica, VIII (1892), 103-104. The Letters of the R" 2 Collection of the Brit- ish Museum. Zeitschrift fur Assyriologie, VIII (1893), 341-359. Assyriological Notes. I, Hebraica, X (1894), 196-201. II, American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XIII (1897), 209-212. Ill, ibid., XIV (1897), 1-16. IV, ibid., XIV (1898), 171-182. V, ibid., XV (1899), 12^144. Chiefly textual and lexicographical. The Officials Mentioned in the Assyrian and Babylonian Letters of the Kouyunjik Col- lections of the British Museum. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, Vol. V. Reviews of The Cuneiform Inscriptions of Western Asia, Vol. IV. Hebraica, VIII (1892), 244-246. Winckler, Sammlung von Keilschrifttexten. Zeitschrift fur Assyriologie, VIII (1893), 395-399. Peters, Nippur, or Explorations and Adventures on the Euphrates. American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XIV (1897), 38-44. Delitzsch, Assyrische Lesestucke. Fourth edi- tion. Ibid., XVII (1901), 172-174. James Henry Breasted [1892 — ], Asso- ciate Professor of Egyptology and Se- mitic Languages. Egyptian Grammar with Table of Signs, Bib- liography, Exercises for Reading and Glos- sary. Translated from the German of Adolf Erman. viii + 201 and 70*. Lon- don, Williams & Norgate, 1894. De Hymnis in Solem sub Rege Amenophide IV conceptis. Dissertatio inauguralis quam ad summos in philosophia honores in uni- versitate Berolinensi capessendos scripsit James Henry Breasted. Folio, 62. Bero- lini, typis expressit B. Paul, 1894. A New Chapter in the Life of Thutmose III. 4to, 31. Hinrichs, Leipzig, 1900. a long-known inscription on the walls of the great Earnak temple is shown to furnish a hitherto unnoticed account of this king's remarkable accession. Ramses II. and the Princes in the Kamak- Reliefs of Seti I. Zeitschrift fUr Aegyp- tische Sprache, XXXVII (1899), 130-139. Proves that the figure of prince Ramses in the Cam- paign of Seti I.'s first year is not original, and totally alters the chronology of the period immediately con- cerned. The Length and Season of Thutmose III.'s First Campaign. Ibid. (1899), 12a-129. Shows from hitherto unused data that an invasion of Syria-Palestine from Egypt, involving a difficult siege, several battles, a march as far north as the Lebanon region, and the return up the Nile to Thebes was accom- plished in a maximum of 175 days. The season is shown to be from April to October, viz., the dry season. The Monuments in the Inscriptions. Proceed- ings of the Society of Biblical Archceology (London), 1900, 88-95. Proves that the tomb of Thutmose I. was a cliff-tomb. The Annals of Thutmose III. and the Location of Megiddo. Ibid., 96-98. Proves the location of Megiddo at el-Lejjon to be cor- rect. King Harmhab and his Sakkara Tomb. Zeit- schrift fur Aegyptische Sprache, XXXVIII (1900), 47-50. Shows that a fragment of this tomb at Vienna fits one of the fragments of the same at Leyden ; the combina- tion proves for the first time the identity of King Harm- hab and the general, Harmhab. Varia. Proceedings of the Society of Biblical Archaeology, 1901, 236-243. Proves, among other things, the occurrence of two more expeditions to Punt in the sixth dynasty. The Wadi Haifa Stela of Senwosret I. (User- tesen I). 3 plates. Ibid., 1901, 230-235. All the fragments are put together and the stela is re- stored. Senwosret I. is shown to have conquered Nu- bia as far south as any of his successors in his dynasty, which explains the rising prestige of his name, as cor- rupted to Sesostris by the Greeks. 42 Publications The Philosophy of a Memphite Priest. 1 plate. Zeitschrift fUr Aegyptische Sprache, XXXIX (1901), 1-13. Reproduces in facsimile an Egyptian stela (No. 135*) in the British Museum, and shows that it bears a long re- ligious text, containing a philosophical system of great value, dating at least from the sixteenth century B. C. The Greek tradition of the origin of their philosophy in Egypt thus receives full support. The Obelisks of Thutmose III. and his Build- ing Season in Egypt. 1 plate. 76id., 55-61. Identifies the Constantinople Obelisk of Thutmose Til. for the first time and proves that he spent his winters building in Egypt, his summers being occupied in cam- paigning in Asia. Die Eigennamen auf dem VatikanskarabSus Amenhoteps III. With facsimile. Ibid., 65-66. The First Philosopher. Monist, April, 1902, 321-336. A further study of the above document (British Mu- seum 135*. " Philosophy of a Memphite Priest "), show- ing more fully its connection with early Greek ideas. The Battle of Kadish. Article in The Univer- sity of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, Vol. V. Bevieies of Davis, The Egyptian Book of the Dead. Na- tion, July 18, 1895. Petrie, A History of Egypt. Vol. II, The X Vllth and X Vlllth Dynasties. American Historical Review, II (1897), 324-327. In particular the author's theory of the Asiatic origin of the reform of Ikhenaton is disproved. Kurt Sethe, Sesostris. Ibid., VI (1901), 53&- 537. The author's identification of Senwosret I. with the Sesostris of the Greeks is supported and further evi- dence adduced; see above: Tne Wadi Haifa Stela of Senwosret I. William Muss-Arnolt [1893 — ], Assis- tant Professor of Biblical Philology. On Semitic Words in Greek and Latin. Trans- actions of the American Philological Asso- ciatio7i, XXIII (1892-93), 35-156. Survey of the subject from an historical and phonetic I)oint of view. Semitic loanwords grouped under twenty-five chapters. A Concise Dictionary of the Assyrian Lan- guage (Assyrian-English-German). 8vo. Parts i-xii (1-768). Berlin, Keuther & Keichard; New York, Lemcke & Btichner, 189^1901. To be completed in sixteen parts. The dictionary is primarily historical ; at the end of each word the views and translations of other scholars are given with copi- ous references to their works. It intends not only to be a catalogue of Assyrian and Babylonian words, but also to record the progress of Assyriology, thus making a historical study of the lexicon a comparatively easy task. The Cuneiform Account of the Creation and the Deluge. 8vo, 22. Chicago, University Press, 1894. Reprinted from the Biblical World, III (1894), 17-27, 109-118. On the Study of Patristic Literature. 8vo, 37. Louisville, Ky., 1896. Reprinted from Semi- nary Magazine, February-May, 1896. The Urim and Thummim: A suggestion as to their original nature and significance. 8vo, 32. Chicago, University Press, 1900. Reprinted from American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XVI (1900), 193-224. Theological Bibliography. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 88 pp. Semitic Bibliography. American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XIII (1896-97), 2, and XIV (1897-98), 1, 32 pp. Amos V (21)-26. Expositor, Dec., 1900, 513- 528. The original arrangement of the passage seems to have been : verses 21, 22, 23, 25, 24, 27. Written by Amos. The event which he had foreseen and foretold was not long in coming. Samaria succumbed. A later prophet, well acquainted with the utterances of Amos and the fate of the Israelites, described the religious assimilation of the exiles most succinctly in the words of vs. 26. adding them "on the margin," so to speak, whence tne final redactor incorporated the verso, with slight changes, into the text preceding vs. 27, at the same time trans- posing for the sake of clearness, as he thought, vss. 24 and 25. From Assyrio-Babylonian sources it is shown why the writer of this verse mentions SAG-KUD (t. e., Ninib), and his star kaimanu, in preference to others. Translation of Assyrian and Babylonian In- scriptions, contributed to Assyrian amd Babylonian Literature, edited by Robert Francis Harper. (See above.) Theological and Semitic Literature for 1898. American Journal of Theology and Ameri- can Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures (1898-99), 132 pp.; the same for 1899, ibid., 1899-1900, 144 pp.; the same for 1900, ibid., 1901, 108 pp.; the same for 1901, ibid., 1902, 112 pp. Also published sepa- rately as a pamphlet. Department op Semitic Languages and Litebatures 43 Notes on Assyrian Lexicography. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, Vol. V. Revievst of Rheinisches Museum, Vols. XLVI, XLVII. American Journal of Philology, XIV (1893), 392-395, 516-519; XV (1894), 382- 388. Journal Asiatique, Vols. XIX, XX. Ibid., XIV (1893), 510-516. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenldndischen Gesellschaft, Vols. XLVII, XL VIII. Ibid., XVI (1895), 384r-390, 521-524. Wendland, Die Therapeuten und die Philo- nische Sckrift vom beschaidichen Leben. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 1105-1106. Nestle, Philologica Sacra. Ibid., 1107-1108. Hippolytus' Werke, herausgegeben von Bon- wetsch und Achelis. Ibid., II (1898), 901- 904. Lietzmann, Catenen, Ibid., 904-906. Achelis, Hippolytstudien; Dieterich, DieGrab- schrift des Aberkios. Ibid., 948-950. Weidner, Theological Encyclopaedia and Methodology. Ibid., Ill (1899), 762-764. Loofs, Eustathius von Sebaste und die Chrono- logie der Basiliusbriefe. Ibid., IV (1900), 613-614. Origenes' Werke, 1. und 2. Band. Herausge- geben von Paul Koetschau. Ibid., IV (1900), 839-844. Thompson, Reports of the Magicians and As- trologers of Nineveh and Babylon. Ameri- can Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XVII (1900), 61-64. Jensen, Assyrio-Babylonian Myths and Epic Poems; Rosenberg, Assyrische Sprachlehre imd Keilschriftkunde. Ibid., XVII (1901), 121-125. Herbert L. Willett [1896 — ], Assis- tant Professor of Semitic Languages and Literatures. The Prophets of Israel. 16mo, 153. Chicago, Fleming H. Revell Co., 1899, 1901, 1902. a brief outline of prophetic history and literature, as embodied in the Old Testament. Hebrew Mourning Customs. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. John M. P. Smith [1899 — ], Associate in Semitic Languages and Literatures. The Day of Yahweh. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 32. Divinity Studies, II. Chicago, University Press, 1901. Reprinted from American Journal of Theology, V (1901), 505-533. A study of the origin of the idea, of the contributions made to it by successive prophets, of the relation of the idea to its historical environment, and of its in- fluence upon other Old Testament ideas. Translations of Assyrian and Babylonian In- scriptions, contributed to Assyrian and Babylonian Literatures, edited by Robert Francis Harper. (See above.) The Letters of Nabtl-b6l SumSte, belonging to the Kouyunjik Collections of the British Museum. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, V. George Ricker Berry [1895-96], Assis- tant in Semitic Languages and Litera- tures ; Professor of Semitic Languages, Colgate University. The Letters of the R" 2 Collection in the Brit- ish Museum, with transliteration, notes, and glossary. Doctor's thesis. American Jour- nal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XI (1895), 174-202. The Introduction gives an account of the work already done by various authors in the publication and trans- lation of the Assyrian and Babylonian letters. The body of the article considers fourteen letters, of ■which the cuneiform text was published by Robert Francis Harper in 1893 in Zeitschrift fUr Aasyriologie. A trans- 44 Publications literation, followed by notes, chiefly grammatical and lexicographical, and a glossary, in which each word found in these letters is defined and a list of its occur- rences there is given. Joseph K Arnold, Ph.D. 1899. The Balaam Oracles. Doctor's thesis, published. Un- A study of these oracles from the point of view of (a) history, (6) literature, (c) poetry, (d) theology, (c) language. EiJi ASADA, Ph.D. 1893; Professor of English Language and Literature, To- kyo School of Foreign Languages, To- kyo, Japan, and Professor of Old Testa- ment Literature and Semitic Languages, Aoyama Theological Seminary, Tokyo, Japan. The Hebrew Text of Zechariah 1-8, compared with the different ancient versions. Doc- tor's thesis. American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XII (1896), 173-196. Philip Castor Baird, Ph.D. 1897; Cler- gyman, Fort Dodge, la. The Methods of the Prophets. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. This thesis discusses the prophet's methods of teaching and preaching. It investigates his use of signs, sym- bols, figures of speech, gestures, events of history, etc., as a means of enforcing his message. Alois BArta, Ph.D. 1900; Clergyman, Saratoga, la. Syntax of the Sentences in Isaiah 40-66. Doc- tor's thesis. American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XVII (1900), 22^6. The dissertation contains an analysis of the various kinds of sentences with notes on doubtful and diflBcult passages, tables showing the results of the study, and some general observations of the syntax, style, and unity of the book. It confirms, from a different point of view, the critical conclusions set forth by recent exe- getes, esx>ecially by Duhm in his commentary on Isaiah. George Eicker Berry, Ph.D. 1895. (See above.) Fulton Johnson Coffin, Ph.D. 1898; Professor of Old Testament Literature and Comparative Keligion, Bible Nor- mal College, Hartford, Conn. The Third Commandment. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Biblical Literature, XIX (1900), 166-188. Includes the history of its interpretation, an inductive study of the word SITDi a study of related conceptions of the divine name among primitive peoples, and of the use of the name Yahweh in the Old Testament, and of the use and abuse of the divine name among the Hebrews, together with an investigation of the relation of the oath to the third commandment. Clifton Daggett Gray, Ph.D. 1901; Clergyman, Port Huron, Mich. The Samas Keligious Texts. Classified in the British Museum Catalogue as Hymns, Prayers, and Incantations. With twenty plates of texts hitherto unpublished, and a Transliteration and Translation of K. 3182. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 24 + 20 plates. Chi- cago, University Press, 1901. Being a reprint of the two following articles : A Hymn to Samas. American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XVII (1901), 129-145. Some Unpublished Religious Texts of Samas. Ibid., 222-243. Translations of Assyrian and Babylonion Lit- eratvire, contributed to Assyrian and Baby- lonian Literature, edited by Robert Francis Harper. (See above.) Lincoln Hulley, Ph.D. 1895 ; Professor of History and Biblical Literature, Bucknell University. The Decalogue — a Growth in Form and Ideas. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Haydn E. Jones, Ph.D. 1898; Assistant in History, Academy of the University of Chicago. Assyrian and Babylonian Letters selected from the texts of the Kouyunjik Collections of the Depabtment of Semitic Languages and Liteeatubes 45 British Museum. Doctor's thesis. Un- published. A transliteration and translation of several letter-texts published by Robert Francis Harper, with lexicographi- cal and historical notes and a complete glossary. indicate some definite results. 2. Separate discussions of the problems arising from the eccclesiastical and the civil material, with an attempt to distinguish between them. 3. A discussion of the questions of historicity. 4. A constructive essay on "The Import of the Chroni- cles as a Piece of Religio-Historical Literature." Feed T. Kelly, Ph.D. 1901; Instructor in Hebrew and Hellenistic Greek, Uni- versity of Wisconsin, The Strophic Structure of Habakkuk. Doc- tor's thesis. American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XVIII (1902), 94-119. After discussing the various views as to the integrity of the book, the question of its poetic form is treated and a system of strophes is presented for each of the sec- tions of the book. William Nelson Mebane, Ph.D. 1899; Professor of Latin, Hanover College, Hanover, Ind. Selected Assyrian Letters. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A transliteration, translation, and discussion of some Assyrian letters published by Robert Francis Harper, Emanuel Schmidt, Ph.D. 1902. The Temple of Solomon in the Light of Other Oriental Temples. Doctor's thesis. Small 4to, 65 -f 4 plates. Chicago, University Press, 1902. A comparison between the architecture and furniture of the typical Assyrio-Babylonian, Egyptian, and Phoe- nican temples and those of the Temple of Solomon. The first chapter deals with the foreign temples, the second with the preparations for Solomon's temple, the third with its plan and architecture, and the fourth with its furniture and decorations. Each topic is studied in the light of recent discoveries in Bible lands. The last chapter sets forth the chief result, that Solo- mon erected a typical Semitic temple. John M. P, Smith, Ph,D, 1899, (See above.) Theodoee G. Scares, Ph.D, 1894; Clergy- man, Oak Park, 111. A Contribution to the Criticism of the Books of Chronicles. Doctor's thesis. Unpub- lished. A discussion of the historical problems presented by Chronicles. 1. Areview of the criticism with an attempt to J. H. Stevenson, Ph.D. 1897; Professor of Hebrew, Vanderbilt University, Nash- ville, Tenn. Assyrian and Babylonian Contracts with Ara- maic Reference Notes. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 206. . Vanderbilt Oriental Series. New York, The American Book Co., 1902. The cuneiform text of forty-seven tablets copied in the British Museum, with transliteration and translation, and a critical study of the Aramaic inscriptions found on the same. Dean Augustus Walker, Ph.D. 1895; Clergyman, South West Harbor, Maine. The Semitic Negative with Special Reference to the Negative in Hebrew. Doctor's thesis. American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XII (1896), 230-267. a comparative table of all the forms of negative par- ticles or words used as such in the Semitic langruages ; a description of these forms according to origin in form, fundamental idea, and syntactical usage ; the relation of different particles to each other in the same language and in different languages ; the development and com- position of certain negatives from more primitive forms and ideas ; a discussion of some previous views as to origin and composition ; and some new explanations of forms. Hebbeet L. Willett, Ph.D. 1896. (See above.) Preston Pishon Bbuce, Graduate student. Three Inscriptions of Nabopolassar, King of Babylonia, American Journal of Semitic Languages and Literatures, XVI (1900), 178-186, Translations of Assyrian and Babylonian In- scriptions contributed to Assyrian and Babylonian Literature, edited by Robert Francis Harper. (See above.) 46 Publications IX. BIBLICAL AND PATRISTIC GREEK Ernest DeWitt Bueton [1892 — ], Pro- fessor and Head of the Department of New Testament Literature and Inter- pretation. Syntax of the Moods and Tenses in New Tes- tament Greek. Second edition, revised and enlarged. 12mo, xxii -f 215. Chicago, Uni- versity Press, 1893. Fourth edition, 1901. A Harmony of the Four Gospels for Historical Study. In collaboration with Wm. Arnold Stevens. 12mo, xii-|-238. Boston, Silver, Burdett & Co., 1894. Revised edition, 1902. An arrangement of the material of the four gospels, according to the English version of 1881, in parallel columns to facilitate their use as sources for the life of Jesus ; with appendix on the repeated sayings of Jesus. Records and Letters of the Apostolic Age. 12mo, xix -\- 238. New York, Charles Scrib- ner's Sons, 1895. An arrangement of the Acts, Epistles, and Apocalypse of the New Testament, according to the English ver- sion of 1881, in a manner to facilitate their use as sources for the history of the apostolic age ; with notes justifying the order of documents adopted. Handbook of the Life of Paul. 12mo, 86. Chicago, American Institute of Sacred Lit- erature, 1897. Second edition, 1900. Constructive Studies in the Life of Christ. In collaboration with Shailer Mathews. 8vo, 302. Chicago, University Press, 1900. Re- vised edition, 1901. The Purpose and Plan of the Four Gospels. 8vo, 20 -M5 + 20 + 30. Chicago, University Press, 1900. Saul's Experience on the Way to Damascus. Biblical JVorld, I (1893), ^23. An attempt to discover and state what was involved, mentally and morally, in Saul's change from Pharisee- ism to Christianity. Jewish Home Life. Ibid., VIII (1896), 445- 447. Are the Teachings of the Apostles of Equal Authority with those of Christ? Proceed- ings of the Baptist Congress, 1897, 8-17. Jesus as a Thinker. Biblical World, X (1897), 245-258. The Function of Interpretation in Relation to Theology. American Journal of Theology, II (1898), 52-79. A discussion of the extent to which, and the principles on which, the results of biblical interpretation can be scientifically employed by constructive dogmatic the- ology. The Politarchs. Ibid., 598-632. A collection, believed to be complete, of extant inscrip- tions containing the words TroAirapxis and no\LTapxfeI deriv- able from a study of the gospel itself. The Interpretation of Parables. American Journal of Theology, II (1898), 293-311. An attempt to formulate a method of interpreting par- idy of the method in wnii " they were used and interpreted by Jesus. ables from a comparative study of the method in which The Jewish Messianic Expectation in the Time of Jesus. Biblical World, XII (1898), 437- 444. A presentation of extracts from the most important material in the literature of Pharisaism illustrating the messianic hope of Judaism. The Social Teaching of Paul. Ibid., XIX (1902), 34-46, 113-120, 178-189, 279-287, 370-376, 433-442. The teaching of Paul on various matters of social eth- ics (e. g., the Christian fraternity ^he family, the state, wealth) discussed in the light of Pharisaic and Chris- tian messianism. Review of McGiflfert, The Apostolic Age. Ibid., X (1897), 350-365. An examination of the author's rearrangement of the chronology of the Apostolic period. Clyde Weber Votaw [1892 — ], Assistant Professor of New Testament Literature. The Use of the Infinitive in Biblical Greek. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 59. Chicago, 1896. A complete tabulation and classification of all infini- tive forms in the Septuagint and the Greek New Testa- ment, with a discussion of the influence of the Hebrew upon the use of the infinitive in the Greek Bible. The Transition from Judaism to Christianity. Biblical Literature Essays of the American Institute of Sacred Literature. 8vo, 20. Chicago, University Press, 1896. The Location of the Galatian Churches. lical World, III (1894), 456-462. Bib- A criticism of certain arguments advanced for the Soath-Oalatian hypothesis. Recent Discussions of the Chronology of the Apostolic Age. Biblical World, XI (1898), 112-119, 177-187. The Septuagint Greek Version of the Old Tes- tament. Ibid., XVI (1900), 186-198. The Sermon on the Mount. Article in Has- tings, Dictionary of the Bible, Supple- mentary Volume. 44 pp. The Autographic Text of the Synoptic Gospels. Article in The University of Chicago De- cennial Publications, First Series, Vol. V. Reviews of Briggs, Messiah of the Gospels. Biblical WorU, VI (1895), 72-76. Gould, Commentary on the Gospel According to St. Mark. Ibid., VIII (1896), 66-70. Abbott, Commentary on the Epistles to the Ephesians and Colossians. Ibid., XI (1898), 364^366. Somerville, The Pauline Conception of Christ. Ibid., XII (1898), 360-366. Swete, The Gospel According to St. Mark. Artierican Journal of Theology, III (1899), 779-781. Barde, Commentaire sur las Actes des Apotres. Ibid., 783-785. Davis, Dictionary of the Bible. Biblical W&rU, XIV (1899), 314-318. Edgar Johnson Goodspeed [1898 — ], Instructor in Biblical and Patristic Greek. The Ayer Papyrus: A Mathematical Fragment. American Journal of Philology, XIX (1898), 25-39. Plate. The Greek text with introduction and notes. The Washim Papyrus of Iliad 0, 1-68. Ameri- can Journal of Archaeology, Second Se- ries, II (1898), 347-356. Plate. Greek text and discussion. Berlin Papyri Nos. 810, 811. Aegyptische Ur- kunden aus den kOniglichen Museen zu Berlin : Griechische Urkunden, III (1899), 125-126. Greek texts. 48 Publications A New Fragment of Iliad E. American Jour- nal of Philology, XXI (1900), 310-314. Plate. Greek text and discussion. Papyri from Karanis. The University of Chi- cago Studies in Classical Philology, III (1900), 1-66. Plate. Greek texts of 91 Fayftm grain-receipts, mostly of 158 A. D., with discussion. Pappiscus and Philo. American Journal of Theology, IV (1900), 796-802. Description and collation of a new Dresden manuscript of the dialogue, with a discussion of the text. The Book of Thekla. The University of Chi- cago Historical and Linguistic Studies in Literature Related to the New Testa- ment, First Series, I, Part 1, 1-36. Plate. 1901. The Ethiopic text, from manuscripts in the British Museum, with introduction and translation. The Haskell Gospels. Journal of Biblical Literature, XXI (1902), 100-107. Description and collation of the Haskell MS.- of the Greek gospels, with discussion of its textual value. The Newberry Gospels. Doctor's thesis. The University of Chicago Historical and Lin- guistic Studies in Literature Related to the New Testament, First Series, II, Part 1, 1-29, with plate. 1902. A Martyrological Fragment from Jerusalem. American Journal of Philology, XXIII (1902), 68-74. Introduction and Greek text. Greek Papyri from the Cairo Museum, together with Papyri of Roman Egypt from Ameri- can Cbllections. The University of Chi- cago Decennial Publications, First Series, V, 1-80. Beviews of Lewis, Select Narratives of Holy Women. American Journal of Theology, V (1901), 568-571. Flemming and Radermacher, Das Buch Hen- och. Ibid., VI (1902), 147-149. William Muss-Arnolt. (See under Se- mitic Languages and Literatures, p. 42.) Theophilus Huntington Root [1892- 93 j , Tutor in New Testament Literature ; Clergyman, Alton, R. I. The Self-Consciousness of Jesus. Biblical World, 11(1893), 265-274,353-362, 412-420. Edgab Johnson Goodspeed, Ph.D. 1898. ■ (See above.) Henry Martyn IIerrick, Ph.D. 1899; Principal Port Byron Academy, Port Byron, 111. The Kingdom of God in the Writings of the Church Fathers. Doctor's thesis. The Uni- versity of Chicago Historical and Lin- guistic Studies in Literature Related to the New Testament, Second Series, I, Part 1, 1-115, 1903. The starting point is gained by an examination of the teaching of Jesus concerning the kingdom, as recorded in the canonical gospels, the other New Testament writings giving data as to the views of the apostles. Then follow in order the views of the patristic age, from Clement of Alexandria to John of Damascus. The Fathers are treated in groups of Greek and Latin, from the apostolic to the later post-Nicene. Tables show the number of references to the kingdom made by the several writers, together with the proportion of scriptural references and their distribution. An index to these references is added. Gerald D. Heuver, Ph.D. 1900; Clergy- man, Wenona, 111. The Teaching of Jesus Concerning Wealth. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A critical study (1) of the sources of the economic teaching of Jesus with special reference to the variant logia of Matthew and Luke : (2) of the formative influ- ences about Jesus; (3) of the economic condition of Palestine in his day ; (4) the content of his teaching concerning economic matters with a comparison of the same with those of the Old Testament and the rabbis : (5) the significance of his method and teachings for modern economic problems. Reviews of Zitslaff, Die wahre Bedeutung der Glaubens- rechtfertigung. Studien und Kritiken (1897), 489-577; American Journal of The- ology, I (1897), 1126-1129. Thomas Allan Hoben, Ph.D. 1901; Clergyman, Waupun, Wis. Wall-Maps of Palestine. Biblical World, XIII (1899), 412^22. A critical examination of thirty-seven wall-maps of Palestine, giving also names of publishersi, dimensions, and prices. Sanskrit and Indo-Eubopean Comparative Philology 49 A Study of the Virgin Birth in the Ante-Nicene Christian Literature. Doctor's thesis. Amer- ican Journal of Theology, VI (1902), 4:13- 506, 709-752. The New Testament attestation of the virgin birth and an interpretation of the stories as told by Matthew and Luke. The main body of the article, which takes upon chronological order the teaching of twenty of the ante- Nicene Fathers, beginning] with Ignatius and ending with Alexander of Alexandria. A brief conclusion is drawn from the study of the Fathers, and the general conclusion is stated at the close of the examination of the Fathers. The contribution of the apocryphal gos- pels to the study is briefly stated in an appendix. Clyde W. Votaw, Ph.D. 1896. (See above.) X. SANSKRIT AND INDO-EUROPEAN COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY. Carl Darling Buck [1892 — ], Professor of Sanskrit and Indo-European Com- parative Philology. Der Vokalismus der oskischen Sprache. Svo, xvi + 219. Leipzig, K. F. Koehler's Anti- quarium, 1892. A Latin Grammar, for Schools and Colleges. In collaboration with Wm. Gardner Hale. 12mo, viii -f 398. Boston, Ginn & Co. In press. An Oacan-Umbrian Grammar, with Selected Inscriptions and a Glossary. 12mo, ca. 300. Boston, Ginn & Co. In press. The Indo-European Root std (stand) in ItaHc. Proceedings of the American Philological Association, XXIV (1893), xlix-1. Do the Non-Labialized Velars Suffer Dentaliza- tion in Greek ? Indogermanische Forschun- gen, IV (1894), 152-158. It is argued that in the development of the labio-velars to dentals in Greek the labial element of the former, that is, the accompanying rounding of the lips, must be an essential condition to the change, since even the palatals, when followed by a full consonantal m, become dentals under the same conditions as the labio-velars. The view held by some, that the non-labialized velars ior simple velars in the terminology now used) also suf- er dentaUzation, is regarded as without foundation. Italic Languages. Article in Johnson's Uni- versal Cyclopcedia, VI, 369-372. Oscan-Umbrian Verb System. The Univer- sity of Chicago Studies in Classical Phi- lology, I (1895), 124-187. A general comparison of the Oscan-Umbrian verb-system with that of the Latin, in form and syntax, followed by a detailed discussion of the various formations. Some General Problems of Ablaut. American Journal of Philology, XVII (1896), 267- 288. statement of the author's position on certain contro- versial questions, in part introductory to the following : Brugmann's Law and the Sanskrit Vrddhi. Ibid., 445^72. On the much-disputed theory, commonly known as Brugmann's law, according to which an Indo-European short o in open syllables appears in Sanskrit as a. It is maintained that in these classes of forms, which furn- ish the chief support for the theory, the a can represent, either directly or by extension, an original long vowel. To show that the strengthened vowel-grades were not uncommon, considerable material is collected from Greek, Latin, Germanic, and Balto-Slavic. An excur- sus deals with the development of the Sanskrit vrddhi in secondary derivation. Note on the Oscan Word prUffed. Classical Review, X (1896), 194. Acceptance of 'Professor Allen's explanation of prdffed, and application of the same to aamanaffed. Notes on the Genetives TXaauifo and Ilao-iaSa/ro Classical Review, XI (1897), 190-191, 307. The usual explanation of the Corcyrean Tkairiafo as a false archaism is made improbable by the discovery of a similar form in an inscription of Gela. It is suggested that the f is a glide-sound developed before the o. Notes on Latin Orthography. Ibid., XIII (1899), 116-119, 156-167. A special study of the chronologry of certain changes in spelling and pronunciation. For example, in regard to Erepositional compounds, it is shown, mainly on the asis of a new collection of the inscriptional evidence, that in several classes of compounds, commonly thought to exhibit both assimilated and unassimilated forms (as '''■ adfero or affero," " inlii,8tris or illxutris" etc.), the assimilated form was almost or wholly unknown until the fourth or even the sixth century A. D. (e. g., in all the examples noted, extending into the sixth cent- ury A. D., always inlustris, never illustris). The Source of the Achaean-Doric /coin/. Ameri- can Journal of Philology, XXI (1900), 193-196. Seeks to establish that the Achaean-Doric icoii^, though based in the main upon the dialects of the northwest Greek group, is yet in a measure an artificial product for which tne Attic koivij has furnished, not only the suggestion, but also certain specific elements. Indo- (1901), Critical Notes to Oscan Inscriptions. germanische Forschungen, XII 13-22. Results of an examination, made in 1899, of the Oscao inscriptions in Naples, Pompeii, Capua, Nola, etc. 50 Publications Note on the Form 'AycuriX-^fov Revue ArcMo- logique, 3 series, XL (1902), 47-48. A Sketch of the Linguistic Conditions of Chi- cago. Article in The University of Chi- cago Decennial Publications, First Series, VL Reviews of Jackson, Avesta Grammar and Avesta Reader. American Journal of Philology, XV (1894), 374-378. Lord, Pronunciation of Latin. Classical Review, X (1896), 60-61. Brugmann, Griechische Grammatik. Ameri- can Journal of Philology, XXI (1900), 317- 322. John Jacob Meyer, [1900 — ], Associate in Sanskrit and Indo-European Com- parative Philology. Das Dagakumaracaritam, die Abenteuer der zehn Prinzen. Ein altindischer Schelmen- roman, zum ersten Mai aus dem Sanskrit ins Deutsche libersetzt, mit einer Einleitung und Anmerkungen. Doctor's thesis. Leip- zig, Lotos-Verlag, 1903. The first part of the introduction deals chiefly with robbers, thieves, rogues, hetairai. Some salient points in the character and life of the ancient Hindu are brought out. The second part treats_ of the Hindu parallels to the stories of the Dacakumaracaritam, the third of the author, his date, etc. The notes aim to give some further information on matters coming up m the narratives. Many of them are meant only for the general public. Two Twice -Told Tales. Article in The Uni- versity of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, VI. *Arthue W. Stratton [1895-1900], In- structor in Sanskrit; late Professor of Sanskrit, Oriental College, Lahore, India. History of Greek Noun Formation. I. Suffixes with m. The University of Chicago Studies in Classical Philology, II (1892), 115-243. The first of a series of studies in course of preparation, the aim of which is to arrive at a more definite under- standing of the types of nominal formation that began to be employed within historical times and thus help in determining what forms were inherited from earlier times. A portion of the preceding paper was offered as the writer's Johns Hopkins University dissertation under the title, "Chapters in the History of Greek Noun For- mation." Frank Hamilton Fowler, Ph.D. 1896; Professor of English, Lombard College, Galesburg, 111. The Negatives of the Indo-European Lan- guages. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 40. Chicago, University Press, 1896. A discussion of the relations existing between the nega- tives of the Indo-European lan^ages ; an attempt to explain the origin of the negative meaning of several particles ; a brief discussion of the syntax of the Indo- European negatives. Two Notes on Latin Negatives. American Journal of Philology, XVI (1895), 493-495. Nunquam and mtsquam have lost -c- through the influ- ence of nulliis. Mary B. Harris, Ph.D. 1900; Instructor in Latin and Greek, Dearborn Semi- nary, Chicago. Kalidasa's Treatment of Nature. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The inaccuracy of Hindu chronology ,_ and the uncer- tainty regarding the sequence of Kalidasa's works make a genetic study of Kalidasa's nature-feeling futile. The thesis, therefore, (1) organizes the material, furnished by the works admittedly Kalidasa's, under three heads: (a) plant-life, (6) animal-life, and (c) in- animate nature : and (2) interprets the material from two points of view: (a) the influence of nature upon man, and (6) man's sympathetic view of nature. Pre- ceding the discussion is a biographical sketch. An ap- pendix gives a table of the sounds, colors, and odors mentioned in Kalidasa's works. *Henry F. Linscott, Ph.D. 1895; late Professor of Latin, University of North Carolina. The Latin Third Declension: A Study in Meta- plasm and Syncretism. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 43. Chicago, University Press, 1896. A discussion of metaplasm and syncretism as forces in the development of language, with a treatment of the case-endings of the Latin third declension. John Jacob Meyer, Ph.D. 1900. (See above.) Department of Greek Language and Literature 51 Helen M. Searles, Ph.D. 1898; In- structor in Latin, Mount Holyoke Col- lege. A Lexicographical Study of the Greek In- scriptions. Doctor's thesis. The University of Chicago Studies in Classical Philology, II (1898), 1-114. a discussion of the new and rare words of the Greek dialect inscriptions. This work was intended as a pre- liminary study for a lexicon of the Greek inscriptions. It includes only material published before January, 1898. It is based on the CoUitz Sammlung der grie- chischen Dialekt-Inschriften, but includes also words from other published inscriptions with the addition of some from the Attic dialect. Edgar H. Sturtevant, Ph.D. 1901; Acting Professor of Greek, Maryville College, Tenn. Contraction in the Case Forms of the Latin io- and ja-stems, and of deus, is and idem. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 36. Dissertationes Americanae, Classical Philology, I, No. 2. Chicago, Scott Foresman & Co., 1902. Chapter I places the contraction of the genitive singn- lar of the jo-stems in the prehistoric period, and that of the nominative and dative-ablative plural of the io- and ia-stems at about 600 a. u. c. Chapter II dis- cusses the varying orthography of the nominative and dative-ablative plural of deus, is and ideni, and draws some conclusions as to pronunciation. Chapter III explains the short forms dx, dis, etc., as due to prehis- toric contraction. XI. GREEK LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE Paul Shorey [1892 — ], Professor and Head of the Department of the Greek Language and Literature. Horace, Odes and Epodes, edited with Intro- duction and Notes. 12mo, xxxvii + 487. Boston, Sanborn & Co., 1898. The Implicit Ethics and Psychology of Thucy- dides. Transactions of the American Phi- lological Association, XXIV (1893), 66-88. The Idea of Good in Plato's Republic. The University of Chicago Studies in Classical Philology, I (1895), 188-239. Articles on Aristophanes, Lucretius, and Plato. Warner^s Library of the World^s Best Lit- erature, II, 759-768; XXIII, 9304r-9312; XXIX, 11519-11530. 1896. Plato, Lucretius, and Epicurus. Harvard Stud- ies in Classical Philology, XII (1901), 201 f . Mind and Body: A Discussion. Psycholog- ical Review, II (1895), 43-53. Note on Themistius's Paraphrase of Aristotle's Physics, II, 9. Classical Review, X (1896), 328. Greek Life and Thought at the Culmination of the Age of Pericles. Lectiure Syllabus. 8vo, 10. Chicago, University Press, 1897. Aristotle's de Anima. American Journal of Philology, XXII (1901), 148-164. The Unity of Plato's Thought. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publi- cations, First Series, VI. Reviews of Jowett, The Dialogues of Plato, translated into English. American Journal of Phi- lology, XIII (1892), 349-372. Kalbfleisch, Galen. Classical Review, VII (1893), 267. Pater, Plato and Platonism. Dial, XIV (1893), 211-214. Lang, Homer and the Epic. Ibid., XV (1893), 15-17. Calderwood, Evolution and Man's Place in Na- ture. Ibid., 66-67. Jebb, Greek Poetry and Life. Ibid., XVI (1894), 107-110. B6nard, Platon: Sa philosophic. Philoso- phical Review, III (1894), 73-77. Holm, History of Greece, Vol. I. Nation, LIX (1894), 451. Jowett and Campbell, The Republic of Plato, Vol. I, Text; Vol. II, Essays; Vol. Ill, Notes. Ibid., LXI (1895), 82-84. 52 Publications Jowett and Campbell, Plato's Republic. Ameri- can Journal of Philology, XVI (1895), 223- 239. Hal6vy, Th6orie platonicienne des sciences. Philosophical Review, V (1896), 522-530. Bussell, School of Plato. Nation, LXII (1896), 474. Whibley, Greek Oligarchies. Ihid., LXIII (1896), 57. Zeller, Aristotle. Ihid., LXIV (1897), 344-345. Greenidge, Greek Constitutional History. Ihid., 269-270. Max Miiller, Contributions to the Science of Mythology. Ihid., LXV (1897), 265-266. Farnell, Cults of the Greek States. Ihid., 189 f . Harper's Classical Dictionary, edited by H. T. Peck. Dial, XXII (1897), 84-85. Frazer, Pausanias. Ihid., XXIV (1898), 310-320. Holm, History of Greece, Vols. II-IV. Nation, LXVI (1898), 447-448. Lutoslawski, The Origin of Plato's Logic. Ihid., LXVII (1898), 168-169. Also Monist, VIII (1898), 621-622. Benn, The Philosophy of Greece. Ihid., LXIX (1899), 56-57. Lawton, The Successors of Homer. Dial, XXVI (1899), 78-79. Campbell, Religion in Greek Literature. Ihid., XXVII (1899), 170-173. Hoffding, History of Modern Philosophy. Ihid., XXIX (1900), 225-227. Patin, Parmenides im Kampfe gegen Heraklit. Am. Jour, of Phil, XXI (1900), 200-216. Br6al, Semantic. Dial, XXX (1901), 298-301. Stephen, English Utilitarianism. Ihid., 396-398. Gomperz, Greek Thinkers. Ibid., XXXI (1901), 100-102. Jastrow, Fact and Fable in Psychology. Monist, XI (1901), 290-293. Fbank Bigelow Tarbell, Professor of Classical ArchsGology. (See under Archaeology, p. 29.) Edward Capps [1892 — ], Professor of Greek. From Homer to Theocritus : A Manual of Greek Literature. 12mo, viii + 329. Cleveland, Chautauqua Press, 1900. Second edition, revised, x + 476. New York, Charles Scrib- ner's Sons, 1901. Vitruvius and the Greek Stage. With five sketch-plans. The University of Chicago Studies in Classical Philology, I (1893), 93-113; preprint, 1892, 1-23. a refutation of Dyer's attempt to reconcile the DOrp- feld theory of the Greek stage with Vitruvius by means of an interpretation of the latter derived from the me- diaeval Italian architect, Giocondo. Giocondo's notes and plans do not support Dyer's interpretation, and find no warrant in the text of Vitruvius. A critical interpretation of the text of Vitruvius leads to results in harmony with those derived from the extant ruins. Excavations in the Eretrian Theater in 1894. With text figures and plate. American Journal of Archceology, First Series, X (1895), 338-346; Papers of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens, VI, 135-143. An account of the results of the excavations made un- der the writer's direction in the spring of 1894 by the American School, followed by a consideration of some of the architectural features of the building in their bearing upon matters of controversy. The Side-Entrances to the Greek Theatre. Classical Review, VIII (1894), 318-320. A defense against Haigh of some of the conclusions reached by Bodensteiner and the writer in their exami- nation of the extant dramas for information regarding the relative positions of actors and chorus and the use of the orchestra by the latter. Professor Christ on the Greek Stage. Ihid., 133-136. A criticism of some of Christ's views on the theater as presented in his article " Das Theater des Polyklit in Epidauros m seiner litterar- und kunst-historischen Bedeutung." The Chorus in the Later Greek Drama with Reference to the Stage Question. American Journal of Archceology, First Series, X (1895), 287-325; Papers of the American School of Classical Studies at Athens, VI, 392-430. An examination of the current opinion that the chorus in tragedy underwent important changes during the fourth century and soon after disappeared, and that in comedy it was abandoned early in the fourth century. Evidence is advanced to overthrow this opinion. The sources of the erroneous tradition are disclosed. The chorus was given up in comedy some time during the New Comedy; in tragedy and the satyr-drama it was Department of Greek Language and Literature 53 retained throughout. The functions which survived are those which are all-important_ for the stage question, and make against the assumption of any revolutionary change in the theater between the fifth and fourth cen- turies. The Dramatic Synchoregia at Athens. Ameri- can Journal of Philology, XVII (1896), 319-328. At attempt to determine with greater accuracy the his- tory of this modification of the choregic system. Aris- tophanes Ran. 404 is made to support the year 406 5 for the change, and inscriptional evidence is adduced to show that in 394 the synchoregia was discontinued for tragedy but not until some years later for comedy. Only the City Dionysia were affected by the change, not the Lenaea. The "Tragic Poet" Alcseus. Classical J?e- tjteic, XIII (1899), 384r-386. The source of the error in Suidas, 'AAKaio* 'A^volo* rpa- ytKos, is a misinterpretation of Aristophanes Thestn. 159-170, where the name is not, however, to be emended away. Remarks on Haigh's liist of the tragic poets are added. The Catalogues of Victors at the Dionysia and Lenaea. American Journal of Philology, XX (1899), 388-405. The thirty-two fragments of these catalogues, which originally gave all the poets and actors victorious at the two festivals for three centuries, are re-examined and reclassified, new readings reix)rted from a new in- spection of the stones, and many of the fragments for the first time identified. The most important result is the proof that the lists of comic poets hitherto assigned, after Bergk, to the Dionysia, refer to the Lenaea. The literary chronology of the fifth, fourth, and third cen- turies must in consequence be revised. Chronological Studies in the Greek Tragic and Comic Poets. Ibid., XXI (1900), 38-61. starting with the results reached in the preceding article, and with the help of new evidence found in literary and inscriptional sources, the chronology of the literary activity, and in some instances of the life, of the following poets is determined : Theodectas, Astyda- mas the elder, Astydamas the younger, ApoUodorus of G«la, ApoUodorus of Carystus, Cephisodotus (restored in Ijysias21, 4), Cephisodorus, Aristomenes, Antiphanes, Alexisj Menander. Incidentally a number of passages in Suidas, Anonymous II. (Kaib.) v. K'iTunishment of the members of the priesthood, and its history. The architecture of the Temple and of the Atrium of Vesta is discussed in the closing chapters. Abthur Tappan Walker, Ph.D. 1896. (See above.) XIII. ROMANCE LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES Karl Pietsch [1896 — ], Associate Pro- fessor of Romance Philology. Preliminary Notes on Two Old Spanish Ver- sions of the Disticha Catonis. The Uni- versity of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, VII, 1902. A discussion of the popularity of the Disticha in Spain as evidenced by the number of Latin manuscripts and early Latin prints, by allusions in old Spanish litera- ture, and by early translations into Spanish. Two of the translations are studied in detail, and liberal extracts are presented. T. Atkinson Jenkins [1901 — ], Associate Professor of French Philology. Alphonse Daudet: Selected Stories. Edited, with introduction, notes, and vocabulary. 16mo, 185. New York, American Book Co., 1901. The Espurgatoire Saint Patriz of Marie de France. With a text of the Latin original. The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, VII, 1902. The Latin text of the Tractatus de Purgatorio Sancti Patricii contained in the Harleian manuscript 3846 is printed for the first time, accompanied in parallel col- umns by the old French metrical translation of Marie de France, made at the end of the twelfth century. The precise version used by Marie de France has not been found. The Harleian manuscript represents this ver- sion more completely and accurately than any manu- script yet made accessible. The French text has been improved materially by the comparison made with the Latin original. The text of the Tractatus from another British Museum manuscript (Royal 13 B viii) is printed in full as an appendix. Review of E. C. Armstrong, Le chevalier h l'6p6e. Mod- ern Language Notes, XVII (1902), 52-53. George C. Howland [1892 — ], Assistant Professor of Italian Philology. Zaragusta, de Miguel Ramos Carri6n y Vital Aza. Edition, with notes and vocabulary. 12mo, 118. Boston, Silver, Burdett & Co., 1901. Theodore Lee Neff [1896 — ], Instructor in French. Ph.D. 1896. La Satire des femmes dans la po6sie lyrique frangaise au Moyen Age. Doctor's thesis. Svo, x + llS. Paris, 1900. The term Po6sie lyrique is used as including all short satirical poems. The testimony of these compositions must be taken with great reserve. They attribute to women all possible crimes and weaknesses, but the satire groups itself conveniently under four heads: marital disobedience, covetousness, deceit, impurity. In spirit it ranges from playful to vindictive. The writers are mostly prejudiced against women, looking for vices, not virtues. Tabulated statement of passages. Elizabeth Wallace [1897 — ], Instructor in French Literature. La Perfecta Casada, por el Maestro F. Luys de Leon. Texto del Siglo XVI. Reimpre- 8i6n de la tercera edici6n, con variantes de la primera, y un pr6logo. Svo, xxvii + 119. The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, Second Series, VI. H. Parker Williamson [1900 — ], Asso- ciate in French. Easy French Stories, with introduction and notes. WithB. Papot. 16mo, 196. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1901. 62 Publications Colomba, by M6rim6e. Edition, with intro- duction, notes, and vocabulary. 12mo, 199. New York, American Book Co., 1902. Lisi CiPEiANi [1901 — ]. Associate in French. Ph.D. 1898. Studies on the Chanson de Geste: "Guy de Bourgogne." Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Eugene Bergeeon [1892-96], Assistant Professor of French. Balzac, Eugenie Grandet. With introduction and notes. IGmo, xx + 280. Holt & Co., 1896. *Ren]& de Poyen Bellisle [1894-1900], Instructor in Romance Languages and Literatures. Ph.D. 1894. Les sons et les formes du Creole dans les An- tilles. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 63. Baltimore, John Murphy, 1894. The Laws of Hiatus i in Gallic Popular Latin. 8vo, 12. 1896. Printed privately. Totus in Old French and Provencal . American Journal of Philology, XVI (1895), 66-70. Boue, barboter, barbouiller. Ibid., XVII (1896), 88-89. Kreolische Sprache. Jahresbericht ilber die Fortschritte der romanischen Philologie, II (1896-97), 254-259. La litt^rature cr6ole. Ibid., IV (1898-1900), 2, 376-381. Isabelle Bronk [1900-1901], Assistant in Romance Languages and Literatures ; Professor of French, Swarthmore Col- lege. Ph.D. 1900. Antoine Fureti^re: A Study of his Life and Works. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. (1) Furetifere embodies diverse literary tendencies of his time. His biography is instructive. Studies of the minor works, viz., the travesty of ^neid, IV; poems: Nouvelle alligorique; Voyage de Mercure: metrical translation of gospel parables. Detailed study of the Roman bourgeois. (2) Furetifere's Dictionnaire univer- sel: account of the quarrel with the Academy, based upon a re-examination of the Factums. Frederick Ernest Beckmann, Ph.D. 1900; Instructor in Spanish and French, University of Minnesota. Spanish Influences in Eichendorff. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. (1) Influences which attracted Eichendorff toward the Spaniards. (2) Criticism of Spanish life and literature in EichendorfiE's writings. (3) Eichendorff as transla- tor of (a) Spanish ballads, (6) El Conde Lucanor, by Don Juan Manuel. The translations are compared with the originals and an appreciation is afforded of the degree of success attained by the translator. A. B^ziAT DE BoRDES, Ph.D. 1899; In- structor in French, University of Mich- igan. Le dialecte de Balansun, Basses Pyr6n6es. I, Phon^tique. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Classification of the 66arnais dialects, with compara- tive table of B6arnais and French sounds ; description of historical sources. _ The vowels and consonants are • then treated in detail. Appendices present (o) texts in phonetic transcription, which have been gathered from the lips of the older inhabitants ; (6) parts of the Chanson de Roland translated into the Balansun dia- lect by Palay, the B6arnais poet. Wilson D. Crabb, Ph.D. 1897. Culture History in the Chanson de Geste: "Aymeri de Narbonne." Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 122. Chicago, University Press, 1898. On the basis of the Demaison edition, the poem is studied as revealing interesting features of mediaeval French society. Analysis, bibliography, and geography. XIV. THE GERMANIC LANGUAGES AND LITERATURES Starr Willard Cutting [1892 — ], Pro- fessor of German Literature. Lessing's Minna von Barnhelm, edited with introduction and notes. 8vo, liii + 224:. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1899. The chief feature of the introduction is a study of Les- sing's dramatic theory as shown in his critical writings. Note to Goethe's Faust, 11. 712-719. Modern Language Notes, IX (1894), 98-99. The purpose of this note is to ur^ e the omission of the erroneous comma after und in line 719 (lar^e Weimar ed. XIV, p. 40) : " Und, war' es mit Gefahr, ins Nichts dahin zu fliessen," in order to express the intention of the poet. The punctuation objected to by the author leaves the infinitive fliessen co-ordinate with beweisen, beben, hinstreben, and entschliessen, and dependent upon Department op Germanic Languages and Literatures 63 the expression Hier ist es Zeit, a syntactical construc- tion that stultifies the pioet. The omission of the com- ma restores the dependence of the infinitive fliessen upon the concessive clause Und wCtr' es mit Oefahr, Der Konjunktiv bei Hartmann von Aue. 8vo, 1-53 + 25 statistical tables. The University of Chicago Germanic Studies, I, 1894. This investigation aims to give a complete exhibit of the actual subjunctive usage of Hartmann von Aue, as shown in all the works now ascribed to him. A greater refinement in the use of this mood is found in Hart- mann von der "Aue than in Wolfram von Eschenbach. The earlier concessive subjunctive is frequently repre- sented in Hartmann by the indicative with particles, whose long association with the concessive subjunctive seems to have lent them a concessive force, which they in turn had imparted to the indicative. The conces- sive conjunctions dock and so occur in Hartmann so rarely as to render probable the view that they were already obsolescent. Faust's First Monologue and the Earth Spirit Scene in the Light of Recent Criticism. Modern Language Notes, X (1895), 464r475. a re-examination and rejection of Scherer's views (Ooethe-Jahrbuch, VI, 2.31 sq.) concerning alleged inter- ruptions, omissions, and ill-concealed changes of plan on the part of the poet. The author presents his argu- ment in connection with a critical estimate of J. Col- lin's UntersuchuriQen Uber 'Joethe's Faust in seiner dltesten Gestalt, I, Der erste Monolog und die Erdgeist- szene. Oiessen, 1892. Note to Schiller's Wallenstein's Lager, 1. 1096. Ibid., XII (1897), 341-343. a suggested interpretation of the line in qaestion "Seine Ruhe lasst er an keinem Ort," referring seine, not to the trooper, but to Ort. Wallenstein's Lager, 1. 1096. Ibid., XIII (1898), 188-189. An extension of the argument of the preceding article. Concerning the Modem German Relatives, Das and Was, in Clauses Dependent upon Substantivized Adjectives. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, VII, 111-131. This article presents an examination of the distribu- tion and function of das (loelches) and was in the mod- ern German relative after substantivized adjective antecedents, undertaken in the light of numerous ex- amples selected from the writings of Hauptmann, Heyse, Keller, Meyer, Nietzschoj Raabe, Schopenhauer, Spielhagen, Sudermann, and Wildenbrach. Reviews of Milchsack, Historia D. Johannis Fausti des 2^uberers nach der Wolfenbiitteler Hand- schrift. Modern Language Notes, XIII (1898), 109-128. The review aims to show the general strength and specific weakness of the author's arguments for the scissors-and-paste-pot origin of the earliest Faust-book and for the dearth of genuine Faustgeschichten prior to the appearance of the chap-book. The reviewer also presents arguments, based chiefly upon the Vorrede, for the earlier origin of the Wolfenbttttel MS. as com- pared with that of the Spiess chap-book. Calvin Thomas, Goethe's Faust, Vol. II. Jour- nal of Germanic Philology, II (1898), 106- 118. An exposition of the editor's work as a whole with numerous strictures upon his interpretation of indi- vidual passages. Camillo von Klenze [1893 — ], Associ- ate Professor of German Literature. Deutsche Gedichte. 8vo, xiii + 331. New York, Holt & Co., 1895. A collection of German lyrics, giving a survey of the evolution of German lyrical poetry from Ganther to Geibel. Emilia Galotti, II, 6. Modem Language Notes, IX (1894), 427^31. An attempt at explaining some apparent inconsisten- cies in EmUia's character as a result of certain dra- matic principles taught by Lessing in the Dramaturgie. Literature on the Nature-Sense. Journal of Germanic Philology, II (1898), 239-265. A bibliography of articles on the treatment of land- scape in literature and art not mentioned in two bibli- ographies published by Alfred Biese. The Treatment of Nature in the Works of Nikolaus Lenau: An Essay in Interpreta- tion. The University of Chicago Decen- nial Publications, First Series, VII, 27-109. A detailed study of the part which landscape plays in the letters, diaries, and the poetical works of the Aus- trian poet, Lenau. Comparison with contemporary poets like Byron, Shelley, Lamartine, Hugo, Tieck, Novalis, Heine, and others, proves him on the whole the most significant exponent of the " romantic " atti- tude toward nature. Reviews of Kelle, Geschichte der deutschen Litteratur. Modern Language Notes, VIII (1893), 406- 408. Koch, Geschichte der deutschen Litteratur. Ibid., IX (1894), 246-248. Bolte-Schmidt, R. Kohler, AufsStze uber MSr- chen und Volkslieder. Ibid., XI (1896), 508- 510. Weissenfels, Goethe im Sturm imd Drang. Ibid., XII (1897) 176-181. Blume, Goethes Gedichte. Ibid., 365-372. Francke, Glimpses of German Culture. Ibid., XIV (1899), 502-505. Biese, Paedagogik und Poesie. Ibid., XV (1900), 494-495. Rod, Essai sur Goethe. Journal of Germanic Philology, III (1900), 100-108. Rod completely misunderstands Goethe. The book is the expression of dislike, based on superficial knowl- edge. 64 Publications Roustan, Lenau et son temps. Ibid., 248-262. The author, on the whole, does justice to Lenau. He fails, however, adequately to treat certain works, like the Don Juan, and he neglects Lenau's treatment of landscape. Woerner, Henrik Ibsen. Modern Language Notes, XVI (1901), 314-316. H. Sohmidt-Wartenbeeg [1893 — ], As- sistant Professor of Germanic Philology. Rousselot's Phonetical Apparatus. Proceed- ings of the American Philological Associ- ation, XXVI (1895), Iv-lvi. A discussion of the apparatus and the methods used by the Abb6 Rousselot in his phonetical investigations. Abstract of a paper read before the American Philolo- gical Association at the meeting in Cleveland, 1895. A Physiological Criticism of the Liquid and Nasal-sonant Theory. American Journal of Philology, XVII (1896), 217-223. An experimental investigation of the much-mooted question concerning the existence of liquid and nasal sonants. An examination of the material gathered in difEerent countries leads to a rejection of the theory. Zur Physiologie des litauischen Akzents. Indogermanische Forschungen, VII (1897), 211-223. For the first time the attempt is here made to solve an Indo-European accent controversy experimentally. Beside the Lithuanian broken and slurred accent qualities the quantities are investigated ; the existence of the assumed semi-long quantity must be denied so far as the southeastern dialect is concerned. Phonetical Notes. I. On R- Vibrations. II. The Quantity of Labials in Finnic Swedish. Journal of Germanic Philology, I (1897), 71-75. Article I contains a discussion on the vibrations of the r varieties, supporting the theory of a spontaneous de- velopment of the later guttural r. The second article proves experimentally the reduction of geminated con- sonants in Swedish as spoken in Finland. Inedita des Heinrich Kaufringer. 8vo, xvi + 56. The University of Chicago Ger- manic Studies, III, 1899. An edition of ten unpublished poems of Heinrich Kau- fringer, contained in the Berlin Teichner codex, fol. 564. The Berlin Fragment of the Madelghijs. Jour- nal of Germanic Philology, I (1897), 239- 246. Publication of a fragment of 342 verses, found in the Sammelmappe, fol. 923, in the Royal Library of Berlin, and identified as part of a Low Franconian translation of the Maugis d'Aigremont. Conrad Vollstatter's Gedicht von des Teufels Tochtern. Ibid., I (1897), 249-251. Publication of a poem on a much treated theme, found in codex MS. germ., fol. 564, in the Royal Library of Berlin. Zum Speculum Humanae Salvationis. Publi- cations of the Modern Language Associa- tion of America, XIV (1899), 137-168. A treatise on the High and Low German versions of the mediaeval Latin poem. Phonetische Untersuchungen zum lettischen Akzent. Mit 34 Abbildungen. Indoger- manische Forschungen, X (1899), 117-144. A detailed description of the Lettic accent, containing an account of a new accent variety — the falling accent — which has meanwhile been proven by J. Endzelin (Ueber den lettischen Silbenaccent, Bezzenberger's Bei- trdge, XXV, 259), as original in the older type of the language. Das Newberry Manuskript von James Thom- sons Jugendgedichten. Anglia, Neue Folge, XI (1900), 12^152. The manuscripjt preserved in the museum of the New- berry Library in Chicago is shown to be the original copy of the poet from which some poems were pub- lished in the Aldine edition of 1830. The article fur- nishes a history of the manuscript, and the hitherto unpublished portion of the text, together with a colla- tion of the other poems. Further Contributions to the Lithuanian Ac- cent Question. Proceedings of the Ameri- can Philological Association, XXXII (1901), xxiv-xxvi. An experimental investigation based on Kurschat's Schriftsprache. Reviews of Victor Henry, Precis de grammaire compar6e de I'Anglais et de I'Allemand, rapport6s h leur commune origine et rapproch6s des langues classiques. Modern Language Notes, IX (1894), 361-364. Wilhelm Braune, Gothische Grammatik. Vierte Auflage. Ibid., XI (1896), 52-53. W. Streitberg, Urgermanische Grammatik. Einftihrung in das vergleichende Studium der altgermanischen Dialekte. Ibid., XII (1897), 229-232. W. Streitberg, Gothisches Elementarbuch. Ibid., XII (1897), 498^99. Gebhardt-Thoroddsen, Geschichte der islSn- dischen Geographie, I, II. Ibid., XIV (1899), 62-63. Department op Gebmanio Languages and Litebatubes 65 J. E. Wackemell, Altdeutsche Passionsspiele aus Tirol, mit Abhandlungen liber ihre Ent- wicklung, Composition und litterarhisto- rische Stellung. Americana Germanica, II (1899), 96-98. One of the manuscripts of the Tyrolese cycle (the Amerikaner Passion), treated in extenso by Wacker- nell, was edited by the reviewer in the Publications of the Modern Language Association, V (1890), I-XI, 1-127. Gustav-Roethe, Die Reimvorreden des Sachsen- spiegels. Modern Language Notes, XVI (1901), 47^9. Paul Oskab Kern [1895 — ], Assistant Professor of Germanic Philology. Das starke Verb bei Grimmelshausen. Ein Beitrag zur Grammatik des Fruhneuhoch- deutschen. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Germanic Philology, II (1898), 33-99. All of Grimmelshausen's works, as far as they are ac- cessible through reprints, are examined. The first part of the article treats of the endings, especially the disappearance of the unaccented e; the second part treats of the ablaut as compared with the Middle High German forms. Philip Schuyler Allen [1898 — ], In- structor in German Literature. Wilhelm Mtiller and the German Volkslied. I, Introduction. Journal of Germanic Phi- lology, II (1899), 283-322; p, Nature Sense in the Volkslied and in Miiller. Remin- iscences of the Volkslied in Miiller, ibid., Ill (1900), 35-91 ; III, Diction of the Volkslied and of Muller, ibid., 431-491. Reprinted as doctor's thesis. Diary and Letters of Wilhelm Muller. In col- laboration with J. T. Hatfield. Chicago, University Press. In Press. The diary, hitherto unpublished, is an intimate and detailed account of Mailer's life and thoughts from his twenty-first birthday, August 7, 1815, until the close of the following year, and in it there is found a naive dis- cussion of his idealistic beliefs, with interesting side- lights upon the talented literary and musical society of Dresden and Berlin. Wilhelm Muller and Italian Popular Poetry. Modern Language Notes, XIV (1899), 329- 331. The sources of nine of Mailer's songs are discovered to be in Italian popular lyric verses. Martin Opitz and Wilhelm Muller. Ibid., XIV (1899), 425-427. Opitz's well-known Lebenslust the source of Mailer's Geselligkeit. A Volkslied as Source of Two of Wilh. Miiller's Songs. Ibid., XVI (1901), 73-76. a Moravian popular ballad the prototyi)e of Thrdnen und Rosen and Abrede. Lewis and Zschokke. Ibid., XVII (1902), 61-62. The Bravo of Venice a paraphrase of Zschokke's Abel- lino, and not a very successful one. Unpublished Sonnets of Wilhelm Muller. Journal of Germanic Philology, IV (1902), 1-9. Written while the young poet was in Brussels with the Prussian Army of Occupation (1814). Certain of them undoubtedly memorials of his attachment to Th6r6se. Studies in Popular Poetry. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, VII, 133-156. I. Nature-Introductions and Vivification in the Older German Volkslied develops the hypothesis that the beginning with the description of a bit of nature, which is so common to early popular song, is not unconscious and instinctive, but the last survival of a proethnic hymn to nature in one of its chief manifestations. II. Old Ballads Newly Expounded is a discussion of two American versions of Lord Randal and Lord Thomas and Fair Annet, in which it is found that the text of the former is a corrui)ted one, but that that of the lat- ter is nearer the original structure of the ballad than any corresponding variation of the same type included in Child's English and Scottish Popular Ballads. III. Heine and the SchnaderhUpfel is the presentation of the thesis that the poet found the prototype of his ironic antithesis in the epigrammatic endings of the south-German popular dance-rimes. Reviews of Marriage, Poetische Beziehungen des Men- schen zur Pflanzen- und Tierwelt im heu- tigen Volkslied auf hochdeutschem Boden. Modern Language Notes, XIV (1899), 311- 313. Petsch, Neue BeitrSge zur Kenntnis des Volks- ratsels. Ibid., XV (1900), 1-27. Hermann Benjamin Almstedt [1895- 1901], Instructor in German; Assistant Professor of Germanic Languages and Literatures, University of Missouri. Das mittelniederdeutsche Laiendoctrinal. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpublished. A critical studv of this manual of 6,550 lines as a con- tribution to the cultural and lin^istic side of the Middle Low German. The manual is continued in the Blankenburg MS. 127a in the ducal library at Wolfen- battel, and is a translation into Middle Low German of a " Brabant-dudisch " original, made by an unknown hand, presumably in the fifteenth century. 66 Publications Bert John Vos [1892-93], Instructor in German; Associate Professor of Ger- man, Johns Hopkins University. Review of Learned, The Saga of Walther of Aquitaine. Modern Language Notes, VIII (1893), 377- 380. Philip Schuyler Allen, Ph.D. 1897. (See above.) Hermann Benjamin Almstedt, Ph.D. 1900. (See above.) Max Batt, Ph.D. 1901; Instructor in German, Parsons College, Iowa. Schiller's Attitude Towards the French Revo- lution. Journal of Germanic Philology, I (1897), 482-493. From an examination of Schiller's letters and works the following conclusions are derived: (1) That Schil- ler took a lively interest in the Revolution, but from the very beginning did not consider it as the realization of his ideal; (2) that his interest reached its highest point when he began to write the defence of Louis XVI ; and (3) that he looked upon the Revolution as a failure. The Treatment of Natvire in German Literature from Giinther to the Appearance of Goethe's Werther. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 112. Chi- cago, University Press, 1902. German literature, letters, and travels within the period mentioned in the title reveal a marked change of atti- tude toward nature. Indications of this are traceable before and especially about the middle of the century. To follow this change in detail is the purpose of the investigation. Review of Cooke, The Development of the Nature Sense in the German Lyric. Modern Language Notes, XVI (1901), 487^90. Carl Edgar Eggert, Ph.D. 1901; In- structor in German, University of Michigan. The Middle Low German Legend of Mary Magdalen. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Germanic Philology, IV (1902), 132-21B. The investigation aims to establish the sources as well as to determine the dialect of the Life of 8. Mary Mag- dalen, contained in Folia 60t> to 73^ of Helmstedt Codex 894, hitherto unpublished. The growth of the legend is traced to its final form, as found in the northern tradi- tion of the Speculum Historiale of Vincent de Beau- vais and in the southern of the Legenda Aurea of Jacobus a Voragine. The weight of evidence indicates the French poem, written between 1200 and 1220 by Guil- laume de Clerc de Normandie. as the direct source of the German version. An analysis of the language and meter proves the great debt of the Low German author to Hign German literary models, and points to Bruns- wick as his probable home. The text of the poem, punctuated, normalized, and corrected, accompanies the work. Otto Heller, Ph.D. 1900; Professor of German Language and Literature, Washington University. Goethe and the Philosophy of Schopenhauer. Journal of Germanic Philology, I (1897), 348-360. An argument that Goethe was one of the determinative factors in the construction of Neo-Pessimism, based ui)on the high regard for each other's personality en- tertained by Goethe and Schopenhauer, upon striking points of resemblance in their world-views, and upon direct evidence derived from their writings and their lives. Goethe's Faust II, 11. 106-108. Ibid., XIII (1898), 283-284. A new interpretation of the lines. Goethe and Wordsworth. Ibid., XIV (1899), 262-265. Some close parallelisms between certain pantheistic utterances of the two poets, ascribed by the author rather to the prevailing pantheistic drift of the Lake School than to direct influence of Goethe upon Words- worth. Die Ahaswerussage in der neueren Litteratur. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A study in comparative literary history, including an attempt to trace in the dififerent modern literatures certain recurring types of treatment that_ have been accorded to the legend. A comprehensive bibliography is an important feature of the work. Review of Adams, Keller's Komeo und Julia auf dem Dorfe. Ibid.. XVII (1902), 27-33. Johannes Benoni Edward Jonas, Ph.D. 1899; Assistant Professor of German Language and Literature, Brown Uni- versity. Hillern's Hoher als die Kirche. Edition with notes and vocabulary. 12mo, VIII + 124. Boston, Allyn & Bacon, 1901. Unpubhshed Poems of Heinrich der Teichner. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A critical edition, with studies of the metre, language, and life of the poet. Department op English Language and Literatube 67 Review of Adolf Hausrath, Alcander und Luther auf dem Reichstag zu Worms. American Journal of Theology, III, 187-189. Jessie Louise Jones, Ph.D. 1897; In- structor in German, Lewis Institute, Chicago. The Phonology of the Elis Saga. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, iv +35. Chicago, 1897. Pri- vately printed. A study of an old Norwegian mannscript of the second quarter of the thirteenth century. The dialect is found to be West Norwegian. Paul Oskar Kern, Ph.D. 1897. (See above.) Frederick Otto Sohub, Ph.D. 1901; In- structor in Latin and German, High School, Galveston, Texas. Text Criticism of Four Middle Low German Poems, and Investigations concerning the Middle Low German Literary Language. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A critical study of the language of the poems (hitherto in manuscript form) , which aims to establish a normal text and dialect criteria and to determine the causes of the mixed dialect. A further purpose of the investi- gation is to determine the characteristics and the ex- tent of the influence of the Middle Low German literary language, and also to discover the sources of the poems. Ora Philander Seward, Ph.D. 1899; Professor of Modem Languages, Uni- versity of Utah. The Middle High German Negative Strength- ened by the Specification of Something of Small Size or Value. Doctor's thesis. Jour- nal of Germanic Philology, III (1901), 277-334. a systematic study of the comparative frecjuency of the use of the strengthened negative in various authors, periods, and localities during the time indicated in the title. Francis Ashbury Wood, Ph.D. 1895; Professor of the German Language and Literature, Cornell College, Iowa. On the Origin of i and w in Aorist-Presents in Germanic. Modern Language Notes, X (1895), 94^97. A criticism of Hirt's article in P. B. B., XVIII, 522 ff., showing that the vowel-length is not due to the disap- pearance of a nasal. Apparent Absence of Umlaut in Old English. Ibid., 347-350. Two cases are considered : (1) The absence of the um- laut in appearance only, and (2) the real absence where it would be expected. Gothic haipi. Ibid., 444. Suggested etymology of the Gothic word. I, Vemer's Law in Gothic. II, The Redupli- cating Verbs in Germanic. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 43. The University of Chicago Ger- manic Studies, II, 1895. Part I gives a, practically complete list, with discus- sion, of Gothic forms affected by the Germanic sound- shifting. Part II discusses the so-called reduplicating preterits without reduplication, showing that they rep- resent ablauting forms and are therefore to be sepa- rated from the reduplicating preterits in Gk>thic. XV. ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE John Matthews Manly [1898 — ], Pro- fessor and Head of the Department of English. Omissions and Insertions in Shakespeare's Plays. Article in The University of Chi- cago Decennial Publications, First Series, VII. An attempt to determine from metrical peculiarities whether the differences between the quarto and folio versions of Hamlet are due to insertions or omissions, and to make some inferences in regard to Shakespteare's attitude toward life and his methods of composition. Review of Brandl, Quellen des Weltlichen Dramas in England vor Shakespeare. Journal of Ger- manic Philology, II (1899), 389-428. William DarnallMacClintock [1892-], Professor of English. Some Paradoxes of the English Romantic Movement of the Eighteenth Century. The 68 Publications University of Chicago Decennial Publica- tions, First Series, VII, 329-351. An attempt to re-enforce the doctrine of a single and continuous movement in the literature of the later eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries by showing the essential harmony in a group of apparently contra- dictory features. Francis Adelbeet Blackburn [1892 — ], Associate Professor of English. The Christian Coloring in the Beowulf. Pub- lications of the Modern Language Associa- tion of America, XII (1897), 205-225. Is the "Christ" of Cynewulf a Single Poem? Anglia, XIX (1897), 89-98. An argument in support of the thesis that the so-called " Christ " is really three different poems on three dif- ferent subjects. Teutonic " eleven " and " twelve." Journal of Germanic Philology, I (1897), 72-76. The Husband's Message and the Accompany- ing Riddles of the Exeter Book. Ibid., Ill (1900), 1-13. Reviews of Gurteen, Epic of the Fall of Man. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 186-188. Wyatt, Elementary Old English Grammar. Journal of Germanic Philology, I (1897), 369-371. Trautmann, Cynewulf, Bischof und Dichter. American Journal of Theology, III (1899), 791-792. -] , Assistant Pro- Myra Keynolds [1895- fessor of English. The Treatment of Nature in EngUsh Poetry between Pope and Wordsworth. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, x + 290, Chicago, University Press, 1896. English Studies, No. 4. An attempt to trace in the eighteenth century the sources of the nineteenth century attitude towards Nature. (1) Chief characteristics marking treatment of Nature in the English classical poets. (2) The new conception of Nature in certain eighteenth century poets. (3) Brief studies in the treatment of Nature in landscape gardening, fiction, books of travel, and the painting of the eighteenth century. The Poems of Anne, Countess of Winchilsea. From the original edition of 1713 and from unpublished manuscripts, edited, with an introduction and notes. 8vo, cxxx + 432. Chicago, University Press, 1902. The Uni- versity of Chicago Decennial Publications, Second Series, IV. The Countess of Winchilsea wrote during the years 1680-1720. A portion of her work appeared in 1713, in a volume now become rare. Her unpublished poems are in two manuscripts, one in the possession of the Earl of Winchilsea and the other in that of Mr. Edmund Gosse. This volume contains all the available extant work of Lady Winchilsea. A biographical sketch com- piled from original sources appears in the introduc- tion, pointing out in detail the characteristics in which her poems were not in harmony with contemporary tendencies. Albert Harris Tolm an [1893 — ], Assist- ant Professor of English Literature. Julius Caesar, by William Shakespeare. Edited with introduction and notes. Eight illustrations. 12mo, Ixvi + 158. New York and Chicago, Globe School Book Co., 1901. An introduction to the study of Shakespeare and an edi- tion of this play. Among the subjects receiving especial treatment are : The life of S. ; the periods in S.'s career as a playwright ; the structure of a Shakespearean play ; the stage of S. s day, and some modern adaptations; the characters and the action ; S. and democracy ; the verse ; questions for study. Select Bibliography of the English Drama before Elizabeth, with a Comparative Table of the Four English Cycles of Religious Plays, by Ella Adams Moore. 8vo, 16. Pri- vately printed. Chicago, 1896. A Brief Bibliography of the Theory of the Drama. 8vo, 11. Privately printed. Chi- cago, 1897. A Brief Bibliography of the Theory of Fiction. 8vo, 10. Privately printed. Chicago, 1898. A Brief Bibliography of Epic Poetry. 8vo, 15. Privately printed. Chicago, 1899. Hamlet's " Woo't Drinke up Esile? " Modem Language Notes, IX (1894), 241-244. The word Esile (vinegar) is shown to contain an allu- sion to the draught of vinegar and gall offered to Christ, conceived as a crowning torture. English at the University of Chicago. Dial, XVI (1894), 356-357. Also in " English in American Universities," 86-91. Boston, D. C. Heath & Co., 1895. English Surnames. Transactions of the Wis- consin Academy of Sciences, Arts, and Letters, X (1895), 1-14. Presents the general facts concerning the origin of English surnames, and points out that the sound- changes have often been re^lar in surnames when not so in the same word in ordinary speech ; e. j;., Read vs. red. Department op English Language and Liteeature 69 The Expressive Power of English Sounds. Atlantic Monthly, LXXV (1895), 478-485. Discusses how far the sounds of th'6 English lan^age have each peculiar expressional value, natural signifi- cance. Four forms of sound symbolism are distin- guished : muscular imitation, muscular analogy, sound imitation, and sound analogy. The accepted meanings of words should not be tampered with in an effort to secure expressive sound-effects. The significant use of sounds is an important element in poetry. A delicate use of sound-symbolism is one of the innermost secrets of style. Notes on Macbeth. Publications of the Mod- ern Language Association of America, XI (1896), 200-219. Points out that the "weird sisters" (= the sister Fates) speak to Macbeth and Banquo in character as the Norns of the Past, Present, and Future. Other topics are: Did Shakespeare represent the weird sis- ters as witches? the views concerning the composition of Macbeth ; the words of the sleep-walking scene. A View of the Views about Hamlet. Ibid., XIII (1898), 155-184. A classification, summary, and criticism of the various views concerning the character of Hamlet. Was Poe Mathematically Accurate? Dial, XXVI (1899), 18^190. Points out mathematically impossible statements in two of Poe's stories. The Endless Epic Question. Ibid., XXVII (1899), 94-97. Discusses the English translation of Comparetti's work on the Kalevala and Lang's introduction to the same, and points out the significance of Radloff's testimony concerning the "contemporaneous epic" of the Turkish tribe known as the Kara-Kirghis. The Revival of English Grammar. School Review, X (1902), 157-165. Discusses some of the fundamental problems in the teaching of English grammar, and characterizes fifteen recent text-books in this subject. What Has Become of Shakespeare's Play "Love's Labour's Won" ? The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, VII, 157-190. Lovers Labour's Won is the only play of Shakespeare in the list of Francis Meres (1598) that is not known to us. The different theories concerning this drama are taken up in the following order : (1) That Love's Labour's Won has disappeared; (2) that it is to be identified with Love's Labour's Lost; (3) with A Midsummer-Night's Dream; (4) with The Tempest; (5) with All's Well that Ends Well; (6) with Much Ado about Nothing; (7) with The Taming of the Shrew. A neglected piece of evi- dence favors the view that Love's Labour's Won is no longer extant. The more common opinion among Shakespearean scholars has been that All's Well is the comedy concerned : but this seems improbable. If the play has come down to us, it is probably either Much Ado or The Taming of the Shrew. The strength of the argument in favor of The Taming of the Shrew has not been appreciated. Reviews of Parsons, English Versification. Modern Lan- guage Notes, VIII (1893), 21^222. Corson, A Primer of English Verse. Ibid., 245-247. Woodbridge, The Drama, Its Law and Its Technique. Jahrbuch der Deutschen Shake- speare- Gesellschaft, XXXV (1899), 295-297. Inconsistencies are pointed out in Miss Woodbridge's use of the terms "rise" and "fall" as applied to a dramatic action Manly, Edition of Shakespeare's "Macbeth." Ibid., 328-329. Arber, British Anthologies [of Lyric Poetry]: III, The Spenser Anthology, 1548-1591; IV, The Shakespeare Anthology, 1592-1616; V, The Jonson Anthology, 1617-1637. Ibid., XXXVII (1901), 262-263. Frederic Ives Carpenter [1895 — ], As- sistant Professor of English. Metaphor and Simile in the Minor Elizabethan Drama. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, xvi + 217. English Studies, No. 3. Chicago, Univer- sity Press, 1895. A general study, with special analysis, of the formal imagery of Gorbodu^, Lyly, Peele, Marlowe, Kyd, Greene, Tourneur, Webster, Chapman, and Jonson. English Lyric Poetry, 1500-1700. 8vo, Ixv + 276. London, Blackie & Son, Ltd., 1897. (The Warwick Library.) An anthology, with a critical and historical introduc- tion. Leonard Cox, The Arte or Craf te of Khethoryke. 8vo, 117. English Studies, No. 5. Chicago, University Press, 1899. A reprint of the first English Rhetoric (c. 1530), with an Introduction presenting new material on the career of Cox, a bibliography, a discussion of Cox's Rhetoric and of the history of early English rhetoric, a reprint of Melanchthon's " Institutiones Rhetoricae," 1521 (Part I), the source from which Cox translates, Notes and Glossarial Index. Selections from the Poetry of Lord Byron. 8vo, lviii + 412. New York, Henry Holt & Co., 1900. (English Readings.) Selections, with critical Introduction discussing in some detail Byron's career, mind, and art, especially as revealed in his prose letters and journals; and Notes presenting brief general introductions to each poem as well as annotations in detail. Ben Jonson's The Case is Altered. Edited from the original edition, with a brief intro- duction. 8vo, viii + 90. Chicago, Univer- sity Press, 1902. 70 Publications The Life and Repentaunce of Marie Magdalene, by Lewis Wager. A morality play, re- printed from the original edition of 1566- 1567, edited with an Introduction, Notes, and Glossarial Index. 8vo, xxxvi + 91. The University of Chicago Decennial Publica- tions, Second Series, I. The first modern reprint of a sixteenth-century drama of considerable historical interest. It continues in morality form the long line of literature in which the Magdalen legend is treated, and occupies a unique po- sition in the nistory of the drama in its curious mixture of type — morality, historical play, and biblical play in one. In the introduction are discussed its generart class and the history of Magdalen literature, as well as questions relating to its date and analysis, staging, diction and versification, sources, and the like. An Outline Guide to the Study of Spenser. 8vo, 24. Chicago, 1894. Privately printed. Condensed classifications, with references to aid in the study of Edmund Spenser, his work, and his position in literary history. The Elizabethan Attitude toward Insanity. Modern Language Notes, XI (1896), 186- 188. A slight addition to the discussion of the subject in Wendell's William .Shakspere and in Corbin's The Elizabethan Hamlet". In corroboration. An Outline Guide to the Study of English Lyric Poetry. 8vo,54. Chicago, 1897. Pri- vately printed. Classifications, notes, and references, covering the defi- nition of the lyric, the sources of English lyric poetry, the history of the English lyric, leading lyric kinds and types, the development of lyric form, miscellaneous studies, etc. Spenser's Cave of Despair. An Essay in Liter- ary Comparison. Modern Language Notes, XII (1897), 257-273. The mediaeval treatment of this theme in theology, lit- erature, and art, studied as a source for a famous pas- sage in the Faerie Queene (Book I, Canto IX). Later treatments, especially Tennyson's Two Voices, and their dependence upon Spenser. Additions to the Spanish Tragedy. Ibid., XIII (1898), 60-62. A precise indication of the additions (ascribed to Ben Jonson) made in later editions of the bpanish Tragedy, to the original edition of c. 1594. Leonard Cox and the First English Rhetoric. Ibid., XIII (1898), 292-294. That the source of the first English Rhetoric was in Melanchthon, from whom Cox translates the greater part of his work. Thomas Watson's Italian Madrigals Englished, 1590. Journal of Germanic Philology, II (1899), 323-358. A reprint, with critical introduction, of the only Eng- lish production of Watson heretofore inaccessible in modern reprint ; tracing out and reproducing in every case also tue Italian originals. Notes on the Anonymous Richard II. Ibid., Ill (1900), 138-142. Annotations, mainly textual (drawn from the writer's transcript or the MS.), on this play as printed in Vol. XXXV of the Shakespeare-Jahrbuch. The Elizabethan Play in Chicago. Dial, XXXII (1902), 372-374. Apropos of the performance of Ben Jonson's The Case is Altered, May 17, 1902. Reviews of Courthope, History of English Poetry, Vol. II. Journal of Germanic Philology, I (1897), 361-368. Bfandl, Supplement to Dodsley. Modern Language Notes, XIV (1899), 268-280. General criticism, with specific annotations (textual and historical), partly based on the writer's collations of the original texts. Schelling, Ben Jonson and the Classical School. Jahrbuch der deutschen Shakespeare- Gesellschaft, XXXV (1899), 344. Churchill, Richard the Third up to Shake- speare. Modern Language Notes, XV (1900), 501-509. Various reviews in the Nation (unsigned) in the field of criticism (theory of) and literary history. Sundry reviews in the Dial. William Vaughn Moody [1895 — ], As- sistant Professor of English Literature. Milton, Complete Poetical Works. Edited, with introduction and notes. 8vo, xxxiv + 417. Boston, Houghton, Mifflin & Co., 1899. (The Cambridge edition.) A History of English Literature, In collabo- ration with Robert Morss Lovett. 8vo, x -f 433. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1902. KoBERT Morss Lovett [1893 — ], Assist- ant Professor of English. A History of English Literature. In collabo- ration with William Vaughn Moody. (See above.) Department of English Language and Literatube 71 Oscar Lovell Tbiggs [1892 — ], Instruc- tor in English. Old and Middle-English Versification. Chap- ter in MacLean's Old and Middle English Keader. 12mo,292. Macmillan & Co., 1893. Assembly of Gods, by John Lydgate. An edition from the original MSS., with intro- duction and notes. 8vo, 192. Chicago, University Press, 1895. Doctor's thesis. Selections from the Prose and Poetry of Walt Whitman. Edited with introduction and bibliography. 8vo,258. Boston, Small, May- nard & Co., 1898. The Complete Writings of Walt Whitman. Ten volumes. In collaboration with the literary executors. 8vo, 3022. New York, G. P. Putnam's Sons, 1902. The preparation of the variorum readings, etc., in Vol. Ill; the essay on "The Growth of Leaves of Grass" and the Bibliograpy in Vol. X. Eleanor Prescott Hammond [1898 — ], Docent in English. Lydgate's Dance Macabre. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A study of the two recensions existing in English, with a historical introduction. London Lickpenny. AngUa,XX (1898), 404r-20. Lydgate's Mumming at Hertford. Ibid., XXII (1899), 364-374. The Artistic Devices of Coleridge's Ancient Mariner. Poet-Lore, X (1898), 425-429. On the Text of Chaucer's Parlement of Foules. The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, VII, 1-26. In the course of a careful discussion of the genealogical relations and intrinsic worthof the existing manuscripts of this poem, it is shown that no text as yet printed is strictly critical and that the critical text will be found to contain metrical features which, if discovered in other reconstructions of Chaucerian originals, will compel a readjustment of current theories as to the poet s metre. It is demonstrated that the Cambridge manuscript hitherto so admired by editors is an un- trustworthy authority, aud that the archetype is more nearly reflected in the pair of manuscripts, Fairfax 16 and Bodley 638 of the Bodleian Library in Oxford. The Use of Episode in the Teaching of Fiction. Modem Language Notes, XVII (1902), 65-71. The Tent Scene in Richard III. Ibid., 257-262. Edwin Herbert Lewis [1894-99], Asso- ciate Professor of English ; Professor of English, Lewis Institute, Chicago. The History of the English Paragraph. Doc- tor's thesis. 8vo, 200. Chicago, Univer- sity Press, 1894. A discussion of the development of English prose- structure, with particular reference to the evolution of the paragraph. Are the Hackman-Reay Love Letters Genuine? Modern Language Notes, X (1895), 8. A contention, based on internal evidence, that the Hackman-Reay letters, published 1779, republished 1895, are in part spurious, especially certain letters and paragraphs attributed to James Hackman. Metrical Changes in A Midsummer Night's Dream. Poet-Lore, IX (1897), 110-117. Mary Bowen, Ph.D. 1896; Instructor in English, Wellesley College. The Influence of Petrarch upon the Elizabethan Sonnet. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. a preliminary account of the origin of the sonnet in Italy ; a study of the form and material of Petrarch's sonnets: an account of Elizabethan references to Petrarch ; a study of the Elizabethan sonnet from Tot- tel's Miscellany to Shakespeare's Sonnets, showing the Petrarchan influences upon form, language, and mat- ter. With an appendix of rhyme-schemes of all Eliza- bethan sonnets. Some New Notes on Sidney. Modern Lan- guage Notes, X (1895), 236-246. Some new readings of Sidney's poems, including an unpublished.stanza, from MS. Rawl. Poet. 85, Bodleian Library, Frederic Ives Carpenter, Ph.D. 1895. (See above.) Eleanor Prescott Hammond, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) Edwin Herbert Lewis, Ph.D. 1895, (See above.) Alice Edwards Pratt, Ph.D. 1897; Instructor in English, State Normal School, San Diego, California. The Use of Color in the Verse of the English Romantic Poets. 8vo, x-fll8. Chicago, University Press, 1898. Doctor's thesis. An examination, classification, and discussion of the color vocabulary and of color usages of Chaucer, Lang- 72 Publications land, Gower, Spenser, Shakespeare, Milton, Pope, Thomson, Gray, Cowper, Scott, Coleridge, Wordsworth, Byron, Shelley, and Keats, with esjjecial reference to the last six of the poets named, and to the character- istics of their school, in contrast with earlier poetic schools, in respect to the observation and use of pure colors, tints, and shades. Myra Keynolds, Ph.D. 1895. (See above.) Martha Edith Kickert, Ph.D. 1899. Emare: A Middle English Romance. Doctor's thesis. To appear in the Publications of the Early English Text Society, 1903. An edition based upon the manuscript, with introduc- tion, notes, and glossary. The introduction includes, in addition to a brief study of the language, metre, and style of the poem, a more extended investigation into the sources of the story. Oscar Lovell Triggs, Ph.D. 1895. (See above.) Malcolm William Wallace, Ph.D. 1899 ; Professor of English, Beloit College. The Influence of Plautus on the English Dra- matic Literature of the Sixteenth Century. Doctor's thesis. Svo, 172. Dissertationes Americanae, English, I, No. 1. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1903. The thesis is in the nature of an introduction to an early seventeenth-century play— The Birth of Hercules — the manuscript of which is in the British Museum and here printed for the first time. The play is based on the Amphitruo of Plautus. The introduction con- sists of a review of the history of classical study in England, followed by an examination into the sources and extent of the Plautine influence upon the English drama. The study is carried down to the end of the sixteenth century. Vernon P. Squires. Graduate student. Milton's Treatment of Nature. Modern Lan- guage Notes, IX (1894), 454^74. The Influence of Milton on Wordsworth. Poet- Lore, IX (1897), B40-551. XVI. LITERATURE (IN ENGLISH) Richard Green Moulton [1892 — ], Pro- fessor of Literature (in English) . Shakespeare as a Dramatic Artist: An Illus- tration of the Principles of Scientific Criti- cism. Third edition, Svo, x + 443. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1893. An exposition of inductive criticism, and its applica- tion in the field of romantic drama. The Ancient Classical Drama: A Study in Literary Evolution. Second edition, Svo, XX + 480. Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1S98. An application of evolutionary ideas to literature, illustrated in the field of classical drama. The Literary Study of the Bible. An account of the leading forms of literature repre- sented in the Sacred Writings. Second edition, 12mo, xvi-f 569. Boston, D. C. Heath & Co., 1899. A discussion of first principles of literary morphology, and illustration of them in the field of sacred litera- ture. The Modern Reader's Bible. A series of works from the Sacred Scriptures, presented in modern literary form. With introduction and notes. Twenty-one small ISmo volimaes. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1895-98. A practical application of the preceding work : the whole Bible and part of the Old Testament Apocrypha exhibited in strict morphological structure. A Short Introduction to the Literature of the Bible. Svo, vi-f374. Boston, D. C. Heath & Co., 1901. This is intended for the general reader. It includes an apiwndix on Progressive Study in Biblical Litera- ture. Department op Mathematics 73 XVII. MATHEMATICS Eliakim Hastings Mooee [1892 — J, Pro- fessor and Head of the Department of Mathematics. Concerning Triple Systems. Mathematische Annalen, XLIII (1893), 271-285. In the Galois theory of equations and in applications to problems of geometry, one meets arrangements of things or letters in triples such that every pair of let- ters enters precisely one triple. The number t of let- ters involved in such a triple system is of the form Gm + 1 or 6»« + 3. The question arises as to the essen- tially distinct triple systems in a given number t of let- ters. The paper proves the existence for every number t of proper form_ greater than 13, of at least two essen- tially distinct triple systems, and the methods of con- struction are of such flexibility that one infers that the number of distinct systems increases very rapidly with t. A Doubly-Infinite System of Simple Groups. Bulletin of the New York Mathematical Society, III (1893), 73-78. Mathieu exhibited in 1860 by use of the Galois imagi- nary numbers substitution groups on ^" + 1 letters which are generalizations of (the case » = 1) the groups arising in connection with the equations of transforma- tion of prime order p of the theory of elliptic functions. The structure of the latter groups was recognized by Galois. The paper is an abstract of a paper, read be- fore the International Mathematical Congress held in Chicago in 1893, in which the structure of the general- ized groups is determined. The Group of Holoedric Transformation into Itself of a Given Group. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, I (1894), 61-66. Definition, with application to the abelian group of order 2' of type (1, 1,1), whose group of transformation is the simple group of order 168 on seven letters. Concerning the Definition by a System of Functional Properties of the Fimction : einirz . Annals of Mathematics, IX fiz) (1895), 43-49. The function / (z) is fully characterized by the system of properties ; (A) f{z) is a transcendental integral function of the complex variable z, having as its complete system of zeros^ « = »i = 0, ±1, ±2 . . . . each zero being simple, and unity being the limit as z approaches of /(£) . (5)/(2«)/(V4) = 2/(2)/(z + H); (C)/(-z) = -/(2). The proof depends upon the lemma : The most general function h (z) with the properties {A), (B) is ^"giz), where g (z) is any particular function with those Sroperties and where a is an arbitrary constant. — ■ tne functions g(z), h{z) satisfy also (C), the con- stant a is 0. Only for this purpose does the property (O enter the system. It may be replaced by (C ) l_dz " z jz=o Application of the theorem is made to the determina- tion of the external exponential factor in the expression of the function / (z) as a Weierstrassian infinite product. Concerning Triple Systems. Rendiconti del Circolo Matematico di Palermo, IX (1895), 86. On a Theorem Concerning p-rowed Character- istics with Denominator 2. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, (2), I (1895), 252-255. Concerning Jordan's Linear Groups. Ibid., (2), II (1895), 33-43. Determination of Jordan's linear homogeneous substi- tution group of degree p" as the group of holoedric trans- formation into itself of the abelian group of order p» and of type (1, 1 . . . .1). Determination of this group and its associated linear and linear-fractional groups as the groups leaving invariant respectively certain three tactical configurations. A Doubly-Infinite System of Simple Groups. Mathematical Papers read at the Interna- tional Mathematical Congress held in connection with the World^s Columbian Exposition, Chicago, 1893. Papers Pub- lished by the American Mathematical So- ciety, I (1896), 208-242. The latter is the complete paper of which the abstract was published in 1893. A Twofold Generalization of Fermat's Theorem. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society (2), III (1896), 189-199. Fermat's theorem that modulo p a prime bP and 6 are congruent, where b is any integer, may be stated thus : The two binary forms, the determinant XoX^ — x^x^, and the product X, (a:, +Xo) (X, -f 2 Xo) . . . (X, -f (p - 1) Xo) . Xo , are in the letters Xo x, formally congruent modulo p. This statement (for Xg = 1) and its generalization from the system of p integers modulo p to the system of p" marks of the Galois field of rank n are well known. An additional concurrent generalization is effected by the use of suitable determinant and product forms in any number I of letters (i > 1). Tactical Memoranda, I-III. American Jour- nal of Mathematics, XVII (1896), 264- 303. General definitions with many examples. Concerning Transcendentally Transcendental Functions. Mathematische Annalen, XLVIII (1896), 49-74. Definitions and fundamental properties connected with the notion of a function-theoretic realm of rationality. 74 Publications Anew proof of Holder's theorem that every analytic function integral ix), *l> (x) of the respective func- tional equations (X + 1)=(x) satisfies no algebraic differential equation whose coef- ficients are rational functions of x, that is, is a tran- scendentally transcendental function with respect to the realm of rationality R [x]. Exhibition of two new transcendentally transcendental functions with respect to the respective realms B [x, log x], B [x, e"]. Concerning the Abstract Groups of Order k ! and ^k! Holohedrically Isomorphic with the Symmetric and the Alternating Substi- tution-Groups on k Letters. Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society, XXVIII (1897), 357-366. Abstract generational determinations of the symmetric and alternating substitution groups. The Decomposition of Modular Systems of Rank n in n Variables. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, (2) III (1897), 372-380. Kronecker in 1882 established certain theorems con- cerning the decomposition of modular systems of rank n in n variables with non-vanishing discriminant, this decomposition depending upon the equivalence of the modular system with the modular system whose ele- ments are the coefficients of the resolvant form of the first system. The paper establishes by purely arith- metic process, and whether or not the discriminant vanishes, the decomposition of the two modular sys- tems_ in question, in such a way that in case the dis- criminant does not vanish, the two systems are thereby recognized as equivalent. Concerning Regular Triple Systems. Ibid., (2), IV (1897), 11-16. Triple systems whose substitution groups are regular groups with specified abstract group>-theoretic proper- ties. A Universal Invariant for Finite Groups of Linear Substitutions: With Application in the Theory of the Canonical Form of the Linear Substitution of Finite Period. Mathe- matische Annalen, L (1896), 213-219. A finite group of n-arv linear homogeneous substi- tutions leaves absolutely invariant an n-ary positive Hermitian form which by proper linear transformation of the group is a;, a;, 4- . . . . -\-xnXn. This theorem (discovered also by Loewy and Fuchs) generalizes one of Klein's for the case n = 2. Concerning Abelian Regular Transitive Triple Systems. Ibid., L (1898), 225-240. Triple systems whose substitution groups are regular groups with specified abstract group-theoretic proper- ties. Concerning the General Equations of the Sev- enth and Eighth Degrees. Ibid., LI (1898), 417-444. A purely tactical group-theoretic discussion of the in- terrelations of the general equation of the eighth degree after the adjunction of the square root of its discrimi- nant and its total resolvant equation of the fifteenth degree, and likewise of the interrelations of the gen- eral equation of the seventh degree after the adjunc- tion of the square root of its discriminant and its total resolvant equation of the fifteenth degree. The holo- edric isomorphism of the alternating group on eight letters and the linear homogeneous quaternary congru- ence group modulo 2. Theory of the Kirkman fifteen school-^irls problem connected with the linear triple system in fifteen elements. On Certain Crinkly Curves. Transactions of the American Mathematical Society, I (1900), 72-90. Investigation by interplaying graphic and analytic methods of the continuous surface-filling curves of Peano and Hilbert and of the continuous tangentless curves connected with Peano's curve. Either of the latter curves meets every ordinate in one point, has at no point a progressive or a regressive non-vertical tangent, and has at no point both a progressive and a regressive vertical tangent. The points at which it has either a pro- gressive or a regressive vertical tangent are definitely characterized by the presence in the base 3 development of their abscissae of definite limit properties. Com- parison of its tangential properties with those of the standard Weierstrass curve. A Simple Proof of the Fundamental Cauchy- Goursat Theorem. Ibid., 499-506. Simplification of Goursat's proof of the Cauchy-Gour- sat theorem with respect to boundary curves inclosing a simply connected region, the curves being supposed to satisfy a certain general condition satisfied in par- ticular by the usual curves of integration. The Cross-Ratio Group of n ! Cremona Trans- formations of Order n-3 in Flat Space of n-3 Dimensions. American Journal of Mathematics, XXIII (1900), 279-291. The binary n-ic form has as an absolute irrational invari- ant the cross-ratio of any four of its roots. These cross- ratios are expressible rationally in terms of any n-3 independent ones. If any particular system of ii-3 inde- pendent ratios be associated with a particular order of the n roots, by varying the order of the n roots, we shall have in all n! conjugate systems: these systems are expressible rationally in terms of the original sys- tem, and exactly so in terms of any system of the set. Hence arises, to speak geometrically, a group of n! Cremona transformations in flat space of n-3 dimen- sions. The various Cremona groups so obtained from the various initial systems are Cremona transforma- tions of one another. One of the simplest of these Cre- mona groups is studied in this paper. It is projectively determined in flat space of n-3 dimensions by a set of n-1 independent points. The fixed points of the trans- formations are related to binary n-ic forms with trans- formations into themselves. Concerning Klein's Group of (w-f-1)! w-ary Collineations. Ibid., 336-342. Determination for six well-known geometric forms of the abstract symmetric group on n letters of the corre- sponding partitions of the respective spaces into n! regions. Application to the generational determina- tion of the abstract symmetric and alternating groups. A Fundamental Remark Concerning Deter- minantal Notations with the Evaluation of an Important Determinant of Special Form. Annals of Mathematics, (2), I (1900), 177- 188. A determinant of order t is uniquely defined by the unique definition of its t' elements in the form auv where the suffixes « v run independently over any (the same) set of t distinct marks of any description what- ever (and not necessarily the set t = 1, 2, .... , n). Depabtment op Mathematics 75 Concerning du Bois-Reymond's Two Relative Integrability Theorems. Ibid., II (1901), 153-158. "A continuous function of properly integrable functions is integrable." Extension of the realm of values of the limit and sum. "An integrable function of an integ- rable function is integrable." Proof by exhibition of a simple example that this statement is incorrect. Concerning Hamack's Theory of Improper Definite Integrals. Transactions of the American Mathematical Society, II (1901), 296-330. Reconstruction in detail of the elements of Hamack's theory of improper definite integrals. On the Theory of Improper Definite Integrals. Ibid., 459-475. Critique of the four current types of improper definite integrals. Exhibition of a system of types containing these four types. The elements of the theory of the general type. On the Projective Axioms of Geometry. Ibid., Ill (1902), 142-158. Exhibition of a new system of projective axioms of geometry. Development of the theory, especially with respect to the order-relations of four collinear points, to fc-dimensional flat loci or fc-spaces and to the figure determined by fc + 1 independent points in a fc-space. Proof of the redundancy in Hilbert's system of projec- tive axioms I, II of the axiom II 4. Determination of the rOle in that system of the axioms I 3, 1 4, 1 5. The Subgroups of the Generalized Finite Modular Group. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, IX. OsKAB BoLZA [1893 — ], Professor of Mathematics. Ueber Kronecker's Definition der Gruppe einer Gleichung. Mathematische Annalen, XLII (1893), 253-256. A discussion of the connection between Kronecker's definition of the group of an equation as given in Crelle's Journal, XCII, and the definitions of Galois and Jordan, Ueber die linearen Relationen zwischen den zu verschiedenen singularen Puncten gehO- rigen Fundamentalsystemen von Integralen der Riemann'schen Differentialgleichung. Ibid., 525-536. The object of the paper is to obtain the relations in question in a symmetric form and to simplify them as much as possible by a proper normalization of the fundamental integrals. On the Transformation of Linear Differential Equations of the Second Order with Linear Coefficients. American Journal of Mathe- matics, XV (1893), 26^273. Reduction of the differential equations in question to canonical forms by invariantive methods. On Weierstrass's Systems of Hyperelliptic Integrals of the First and Second Kind. Chicago Mathematical Congress Papers, 1893, 1-12. An exposition of the theory of these integrals based on Riemann's methods. Ueber das Analogon der Function p u im all- gemeinen hyperelliptischen Fall. Gottinger Nachrichten, mathematisch-physicahsche Klasse, 1894, 268-271. On the First and Second Logarithmic Deriva- tives of Hyperelliptic o-Functions. Ameri- can Journal of Mathematics, XVII (1895), 11-36. In these two papers some theorems concerning the functions i u and p u are extended to hyperelliptic func- tions. Die cubische Involution und die Dreiteilung tmd Transformation dritter Ordnimg der elliptischen Functionen. Mathematische Annalen, L (1897), 68-102. An investigation of the connection between the theory of the Cubic Involution and the theory of Elliptic Func- tions based upon the interpretation of the cubic involu- tion upon a conic. Zur Reduction hyperelhptischer Integrale auf elliptische mittels einer Transformation dritten Grades. Ibid., 314-324. Solution of the reduction-problem p = 2, fc = 3 inde- pendently of a canonical form by means of theorems on cubic involutions. The Partial differential Equations for the Hyperelliptic 6- and o-Functions. Ameri- can Journal of Mathematics, XXI (1899), 107-125. The object of the paper is to establish Wiltheiss's re- sults concerning the partial differential equations of the hyi)erelliptic 0. and ecially the determination of their invariant forms. On Systems of Six Points lying in Three Ways in Involution. Annals of Mathematics, X (1895), 22-34. Septuples of points of the above kind occur in the theory of the dihedron for n = 3, in multiple per- spective triangles, in Clebsch's hexagon and other geo- metrical and analytic researches. Of special interest is the metharmonic case, where the 6 points are such that (15) (24), (26) (35), (34) (16) form harmonic quad- ruples. The Representation of Finite Groups, especi- ally of the Rotation Groups of the Regular Bodies of Three- and Four-dimensional Space, by Cay ley's Color Diagrams. Ameri- can Journal of Mathematics, XVIll (1895), 156-188. By a general deduction, based principally on Analysis- situs-methods, all those two-colored color groups of a finite number of fundamental points whose diagrams constitute a convex polyhedron on the sphere are de- termined in the paper. The diagrams so obtained are closely connected with the regular three-dimensional bodies. An extension of the method leads to some other three-dimensional figures and to the four-dimen- sional regular bodies. Ueber die Darstellimg endlicher Gruppen durch Cayley'sche Farbendiagramme. Nachrich- ten der koniglichen Gesellschaft der Wis- senschaften zu Gottingen, mathematisch- physikalische Klasse, 1896, Heft 1, 1-5. Asymptotic Lines on a Circular Ring. Bulle- tin of the American Mathematical Society (2), II (1895), 19-21. The equation of the asymptotic lines of a tore as well as the expression of the length of the arc of these curves leads to elliptic functions. The formulas appear in a remarkably simple form, if Weierstrass's notation is used. Die Reduction linearer homogener Substitu- tionen von endlicher Periode auf ihre kano- nische Form. Mathematische Annalen, L (1897), 220-224. Ueber den arithmetischen Character der Co- efficienten der Substitutionen endlicher linearer Substitutionsgruppen. Ibid., 492- 498. A theorem is proved in the paper which gives some insight into the nature of irrationalities entering into the coefficients of the groups in question. Bestimmung aller ternarer und quaternarer Collineationsgruppen, welche mit symme- trischen und alternirenden Buchstabenver- tauschungsgruppen holoedrisch isomorph sind. Ibid., LI, 253-298. The method is based upon the generators of the ab- stract letter-permutation-groups and upon the repre- sentation of substitution-groups in the Mormitian nor- Department op Mathematics 77 mal form. All known groups are obtained in a simple form, and the imryossibility of existence of ternary and quaternary groups of higher orders is proved. Beweis des Satzes, dass diejenigen endlichen linearen Substitutionsgruppen, in welchen einige durchgehend verschwindende Coef- ficienten auftreten, intransitiv sind. Ibid., LII (1898), 359-368. The theorem is proved in the paper that under the con- ditions mentioned in the title every substitution of the groups can be broken up into at least two sets of substitutions, each set containing variables which are substituted only among themselves. Note on the Unilateral Surface of Moebius. Transactions of the American Mathemat- ical Society, I (1900), 39. A ruled surface of the third order is constructed, con- taining as a part the unilateral paper-strip of Moebius. A New Method of Determining the Diflferen- tial Parameters and Invariants of Quadratic Differential Quantities. Ibid., 197-204. A symbolic method is given, in close analogy with the symbolism used in the algebraic theory of invariants. Invariants and Covariants of Quadratic Diffe- rential Quantities of n Variables. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, IX. The symbolic method given in the previous paper is develo_ped in detail for the case of n variables. The most inaportant result is the symbolic expression of Christoffel's quadrilinear covariant. Review of Harkness and Morley, A Treatise on the The- ory of Functions. Bulletin of the New York Mathematical Society, III (1894), 155-167. Jacob William Albebt Young [1892 — ], Assistant Professor of the Pedagogy of Mathematics. The Elements of the Differential and Integral Calculus. In collaboration with C. E. Line- barger. 8vo, xvii -\- 410. New York, D. Ap- pleton & Co., 1900. Based on " Kurzgefasstes Lehrbuch der_ Differential und Int ' ■ A. SchO und Integralrechnung," by Professors W. Nemst and "es, of the University of GOttingen. The Teaching of Mathematics in the Higher Schools of Prussia. 8vo, xiv + 141. New York, Longmans, Green & Co., 1900. A brief sketch of the general organization of these schools, their curricula and the training of their teach- ers, together with a more detailed consideration of the scope and methods of the instruction in mathematics. On the Determination of Groups whose Order is a Power of a Prime. American JouTmal of Mathematics, XV (1893), 124r-178. A general method applied in the determination of all groups of orders p'', p', &ndp*. Zur mathematischen Lehrbucherfrage. Eine Schulstatistische Untersuchung. Zeitschrift fur mathematischen und naturwissenchaft- lichen Unterricht, XXIX (1898), 410-414. Concerning the text-books in mathematics in use in the Prussian higher schools. The Undergraduate Mathematical Curriculum. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society (2), VII (1900), 22-24. Concerning the collegiate preparation of prospective teachers of mathematics in secondary schools. Reviews of Bachmann, Die Elemente der Zahlentheorle, Bulletin of the New York Mathematical Society, III (1894), 215-222. Borel et Drach, Introduction h I'^tude de la th6orie des nombres et de I'alg^bre sup6ri- eure. Bulletin of the American Mathe- matical Society (2), III (1896), 97-105. Lagrange, Lectures on Elementary Mathe- matics, translated by Thomas J. McCormack. Ibid., VI (1899), 262-264. Heebebt Ellswobth Slaught [1894 — ], Assistant Professor of Collegiate Math- ematics. The Cross-Ratio Group of 120 Quadratic Cre- mona Transformations of the Plane. Part I, Geometric Representation. American Jour- nal of Mathematics, XXII (1900), 343-388. A study in detail for the case n = 5 of the general cross- ratio group Gn!, in particular the divison of the plane into fundamental regions. The Cross-Ratio Group of 120 Quadratic Cre- mona Transformations of the Plane. Part II, Complete Form-System of Invariants. Ibid., XXIII (1901), 99-138. Parts I and II together reprinted as doctor's thesis. * The definition and properties of invariants under quad- ratic transformation and a complete determination of the form-system of such invariants under Gn!, 78 Publications Leonard Eugene Dickson [1894-96; 1900 — ] , Assistant Professor of Mathe- matics. Linear Groups with an Exposition of the Ga- lois Field Theory. 8vo, x + 312. Teub- ner's Sammlung von Lehrbiichem auf dem Gebiete der mathematischen Wissenschaf ten mit Einschluss ihrer Anwendungen, Band VI. Leipzig, B. G. Teubner, 1901. Part I gives an exposition of the chief properties of finite fields and incorporates, usually in generalized fotm, the work of Galois, Dedekind, Serret, Jordan, Pellet, Moore, and Dickson. Part II presents a syste- matic treatment of the theory of linear groups in a Galois field. Aside from chapter xii, which presents tho investigations of Moore and Wiman on the sub- groups of the linear fractional group, the subject-mat- ter is drawn from the writer's published articles, among which occur generalizations of the work of earlier writers on the subject, as well as new developments. College Algebra. A text-book for colleges and technical schools. Svo, vii -f- 214. New York, John Wiley & Sons, 1902. Lowest Integers Representing Sides of a Right Triangle. Arnerican Mathematical Monthly, I (1894), 6-11. On the Number of Inscriptible Regular Poly- gons. Bulletin of the New York Mathe- matical Society, III (1894), 123-125. The Inscription of Regular Polygons. Ameri- can Mathematical Monthly, I (1894), 299- 301, 342-345, 376-377, 423-425; II (1895), 7-9, 38^0. An elementary treatment of the subject without the use of the customary complex numbers. On the Inscription of Regular Polygons. An- nals of Mathematics, IX (1894-95), 73-84. This treatment avoids, not only complex numbers, but also trigonometry, being based solely upon geometrical principles. Gergonne's Pile Problem. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, I (1895), 184^186. Some Fallacies of an Angle Trisector. Ameri- can Mathematical Monthly, 11(1895), 71-72. Cyclic Numbers. Quarterly Journal of Pure and Applied Mathematics, XXVII (1895), 366-377. The paper determines all numbers of D digits, when written to any given base, which possess D distinct multiples whose digits are precisely those of the initial number and in the same cyclic order. A Quadratic Cremona Transformation Defined by a Conic. American Mathematical Monthly, II (1895), 218-221. A Quadratic Cremona Transformation Defined by a Conic. Rendiconti del Circolo Mate- matico di Palermo, IX (1895), 1-4. The two preceding papers give respectively an analytic and projective treatment of a birational point-trans- formation of the plane which is defined by means of Pascal's theorem on a hexagon inscribed in a conic. The corresponding line-transformation is defined by means of Brianchon's theorem on a hexagon circum- scribed about a conic. Analytic Functions Suitable to Represent Sub- stitutions. American Journal of Mathe- matics, XVIII (1896), 210-218. Previously Betti and Hermite had obtained analytic representations of all substitutions on 5 and 7 letters. Attacking the problem from a different point of view, the writer determined all functions of degree less than 7 which are suitable to represent substitutions on p letters, p being a prime number. The Analytic Representation of Substitutions on a Power of a Prime Number of Letters, with a Discussion of the Linear Group. Doctor's thesis. Annals of Mathematics, XI (1896-97), 65-120, 161-183. By employing the general Galois Field, a generaliza- tion of Hermite's theorem is obtained. By its aid and certain devices, a complete determination is made of all quantics of degree less than 7 which are suitable to represent substitutions on pn letters (for a particular or general integer » and prime number p), with the ex- ception of sextics for 2" letters. As many as 24 such quantics are found, of which the majority are limited to certain values of p«, while others possess an infinite range of suitability. The second part deals with the linear homogeneous group in a Galois field and ex- hibits a triply-infinite system of simple groups which includes as special cases the two doubly-infinite sys- tems of E. H. Moore and of C. Jordan, respectively. Linear Substitutions Commutative with a Given Substitution. Proceedings of the London Mathematical Society, XXXII (1900), 165- 170. Determination of an Abstract Simple Group of Order 2'. 3®. 5.7 Holoedrically Isomorphic with a certain Orthogonal Group and with a certain Hyperabelian Group. Transac- tions of the American Mathematical So- ciety, I (1900), 353-370. The Alternating Group on Eight Letters and the Quaternary Linear Congruence Group Modulo Two. Mathematische Annalen, LIV (1901), 564r-569. Department op Mathematics 79 Distribution of the Ternary Linear Homogen- eous Substitutions in a Galois Field into Complete Sets of Conjugate Substitutions. American Journal of Mathematics^ XXIII (1901), 37-40. A sequel to an earlier paper, ibid., XXII (1900), 121-137. Canonical Forms of Quaternary Abelian Sub- stitutions in an Arbitrary Galois Field. Transactions of the American Mathemat- ical Society, II (1901), lOa-138. Concerning the Abelian and Related Linear Groups. Proceedings of the London Mathe- matical Society, XXXIII (1901), 313-325. Concerning Real and Complex Continuous Groups. Bulletin of the American Mathe- matical Society, VII (1901), 340-350. Th6orie des groupes lin6aires dans im domains arbitraire de rationaMt6. Comptes rendus des stances de V Academic des Sciences, CXXXII (1901), 1547-1548. A r6sum6 of two memoirs presented to the American and London Mathematical Societies, in which is de- veloped a theory of linear groups in an arbitrary field, finite or infinite, and, in particular, exhibiting systems of simple groups which include Lie's systems as special cases. Representation of Linear Groups as Transitive Substitution Groups. American Journal of Mathematics, XXIII (1901), 337-377. A general method is obtained and applied to the gen- eral linear group, the orthogonal groups, the abelian linear group, and the two hypoabslian groups, as well as to their simple quotient-groups. For each group is determined the minimum number of letters for the vari- ous representations obtained. Theory of Linear Groups in an Arbitrary Field. Transactions of the American Mathemat- ical Society, II (1901), 363-394. The paper lays the foundation of a general theory which correlates various branches of analytic group theory. It exhibits four infinite systems of groups which give simple groups in every field. For the par- ticular case of the field of all complex numbers, they become the simple continuous groups of Sophus Lie. Linear Groups in an Infinite Field. Proceed- ings of the London Mathematical Society, XXXIV (1901), 185-205. The paper obtains two new infinite systems of simple groups in an arbitrary field, related to the hyperabe- lian groups and a system of groups defined by a certain invariant quadratic form. A Class of Groups in an Arbitrary Realm Con- nected with the Configuration of the 27 Lines on a Cubic Surface. Quarterly Jour- nal of Mathematics, XXXIII (1901), 145- 173. For the case of continuous field, the group is the isola- ted, simple, continuous group of 78 parameters previ- ously studied by Killing, Engel, and Cartan. The Known Systems of Simple Groups and their Inter- Isomorphisms. Comptes rendus des travaux dii Congrhs international des Mathimaticiens, 1901. The Configurations of the 27 Lines on a Cubic Surface and the 28 Bitangents to a Quartic Curve. Bulletin of the American Mathe- matical Society, VIII (1901), 63-70. On Systems of Isothermal Curves. American Mathematical Monthly, VIII (1901), 187- 192. Factors of a Certain Determinant of Order Six. Ibid., IX (1902), 66-68. The Order of a Senary Linear Group. Ihid., 14&-152. The Hyperorthogonal Groups. Mathematische AnnaUn, LV (1902), 521-572. Various representations are obtained for this group and its simple quotient-group as a transitive substitu- tion-group. The characteristic equation of a hyperor- thogonal substitution is investigated at length. The results are applied to the reduction of hyperorthogonal substitutions to canonical forms within the group. Canonical Form of a Linear Homogeneous Transformation in an Arbitrary Realm of Rationality. American Journal of Mathe- matics, XXIV (1902), 101-108. The Groups of Steiner in Problems of Contact. Transactions of the American Mathemati- cal Society, III (1902), 38-45. On the Group Defined for any Given Field by the Multiplication Table of any Given Finite Group. Ibid., 285-301. A generalization of Burnside's work for continuous frroups leads to an analogous theory of groups in an arbitrary field, and the investigation depends only upon rational processes. Theorems on the Residues of Multinomial Coeflficients with Respect to a Prime Mo- dulus. Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, XXXIII (1902), 378-384. A Class of Simply Transitive Linear Groups. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, VIII (1902), 394-401. 80 Publications Ternary Orthogonal Groups in a General Field. The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications^ First Series, IX, 27-34. An investigation for an arbitrary field (realm of ration- ality) of a subject previously treated for a continuous field by Weber, and for a Galois field by the writer. The Groups Defined for a General Field by the Rotation Group. Ibid., 35-52. A contribution to the theory of group-determinants and group-characters due to Frobenius and Burnside for continuous fields, and to the writer for arbitrary fields. Review of Cahen, Elements de la th6orie des nombres. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society, VII (1902), 257-260. James Harrington Boyd [1893 — ], In- structor in Mathematics. Briot and Bouquet's Elements of Analytical Geometry of Two Dimensions. Fourteenth edition, translated and edited. 8vo, 581. New York, Werner School Book Co., 1896. A College Algebra. 8vo, xxi + 782. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1901. A Study of Certain Special Cases of the Hyper- geometric Differential Equation. Annals of Mathematics, VII (1893), 145-186. This paper presents the results of a study of certain cases of the hypergeometric differential equation made at GOttingen under the direction of Professor Klein. The cases are those in which the hypergeometric differ- ential equation has a single algebraic solution. The solutions are regarded as functions defined after the manner of Riemann, by the requirement that the con- formal representation which they determine be certain generalized triangles; these triangles are made the starting point of the discussion and are classified geo- metrically, and the classification of the equation is determined from that of the triangles. The Determination of the Apparent Position of the Companion of a Double Star from Certain Observations. Ibid., IX (1895), 85-87. Harris Hancock [1892-1900], Instructor in Mathematics; Professor of Mathe- matics, University of Cincinnati. Eine Form des Additionstheorems fur hyper- elliptische Functionen erster Ordnung. 4to, 43. Berlin, 1894. Berlin doctor's thesis. Reduction of Kronecker's Modiilar Systems. Quarterly Journal of Mathematics, XXVII (1895), 147-183. Introduction and General Remarks on the Cal- culus of Variations. Annals of Mathe- matics, IX (1895), 179-190. Calculus of Variations, II. Ibid., X (1896), 81-88. On the Number of Catenaries that May be Drawn through Two Fixed Points. Ibid., 159-174. On Minimal Surfaces. Mathematical Review, I (1896), 81-87, 127-140. The Historical Development of the Abelian Functions up to the Time of Rieman. Or- dered by the General Committee of the British Association for the Advancement of Science. Reports of the British Associa- tion for the Advancement of Science (1897), 246-286. Derivation of Some of the Fundamental Weier- strassian Formulae in the Calculus of Vari- ations. Annals of Mathematics, XI (1897), 20-32. Further Discussion of the First Variation and the Solution of the Differential Equation G—0 for Several Interesting Examples. Ibid., XII (1898), 33-44. Canonical Forms for the Unique Represen- tation of Kronecker's Modular Systems. Crelle's Journal fiir reine und ange- wandte Mathematik, CXIX (1898), 148- 170. M6thode de decomposition des polynomea entiers h plusieurs variables en facteurs irr^ductibles. Annales scientifiques de VJ^cole Normale Supirieure (3), XVII (1900), 89-102. On the Reduction of Kronecker's Modular Sys- tems whose Elements are Functions of Two or Three Variables. Crelle's Journal fiir reine und angewandte Mathematik, CXXII (1900), 265-298. M6moire sur les syst^mes modulaires de Kron- ecker: A thesis offered for the Dr. Sc. degree Department of Mathematics 81 at the UniversiW of Paris. Annates scien- tifiques de VEcole Normale Supirieure, Supplement 1, 1-116. Remarks on Kronecker's Modular Systems. Comptes rendus des travaux du Congr^s international des MatMmaticiens, 1900, 161-193. Gilbert Ames Bliss, Ph.D. 1900; In- structor in Mathematics, University of Minnesota. The Motion of a Heavenly Body in a Resisting Medium. Popular Astronomy, VI (1898), 20-29. The writer assumed a law of resistance and showed that for that law the position of the orbit plane is un- changed under resistance ; the direction of the major axis and the mean epoch oscillate : and that the major axis and eccentricity constantly diminish. The Geodesic Lines on the Anchor Ring. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpublished. The form of the geodesic lines on the anchor ring is discussed and its points classified according to a scheme devised by Mangold. The classification depends upon the existence of conjugate points upon the geodesic lines. George Lincoln Brown, Ph.D. 1902; Professor of Mathematics and Astrono- my, South Dakota Agricultural College, Brookings, S. D. The Ternary Linear Transformation Group G3.360 and its Complete Invariant System. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The problem of verifying the existence of the coUinea- tion group Gsco and of finding its complete invariant system was suggested by H. Valentiner's determination of this group. The Gs.seo is proved isomorphic with the group of even permutations of six things, its operators being those of the collineation group with the three cube roots of unity as multipliers. By a simple process the invariants of Gs.seo are reduced to four independent expressions, of the sixth, twelfth, thirtieth, and forty- fifth degrees respectively. In conclusion, the preced- ing results are compared with those given by A. Wiman in an article published a very short time after the work of which this is an outline was completed, and the two invariant systems are found to be essentially identical. Leonard Eugene Dickson, Ph.D. 1896. (See above.) William Findlay, Ph.D. 1901 ; Tutor in Mathematics, Barnard College, New York. The Sylow Subgroups of the Symmetric Group on A; Letters. Doctor's thesis. Unpub- lished. The discussion is reduced to the case where fc is a power (l)«) of a prime (p). The various groups of substitutions upon the systems of jmprimitivity induced by the sub- stitutions of the main group are seen to be themselves Sylow subgroups of the corresponding symmetric groups. Enumerations are made of the substitutions of periods p and ;?" and the conjugacy relations of the latter set or substitutions are discussed. The group is found to be invariant. William Gillespie, Ph.D. 1899; In- structor in Mathematics, Princeton University. On the Reduction of Hyperelliptic Integrals (j3=3) to Elliptic Integrals by Transforma- tions of the Second and Third Degrees. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 41. GOttingen, L. Hofer, 1900. In abstract, under the same title, American Journal of Mathematics^ XXII (1900), 259-278. Determination of all hyperelliptic integrals of the first kind of genus 3, which are reducible to elliptic integrals by a transformation of the second or third degree. John Irwin Hutchinson, Ph.D. 1895; Instructor in Mathematics, Cornell Uni- versity. On the Reduction of Hyperelliptic Functions {p=2) to Elliptic Functions by a Transfor- mation of the Second Degree. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 44. Gottingen, 1897. a determination is made of the conditions and cases in which the reduction is possible, together with the ex- E licit formulae for the reduction of the integrals of the rstkind. The first, and most general, case is then studied in detail, the reduction formulae for the integ- rals of the second and third kinds and for the sixteen hyperelliptic sigma functions being deduced. The sig- ma equations of the Kummer surface are deduced, and the special forms of the surface determined in the first case of reduction. Derrick Norman Lehmer, Ph.D. 1900; Instructor in Mathematics, University of California. Concerning the Tractrix of a Ciurve with Plani- metric Application. Annals of Mathemat- ics (2), I (1899), 14-20. 82 Publications Rational Triangles. Ibid. (1900), 97-102. Asymptotic Evaluation of Certain Potient Sums. Doctor's thesis. American Journal of Mathematics, XXII (1900), 293-335 John Hector McDonald, Ph.D. 1900; Instructor in Mathematics, University of California. On the System of a Binary Cubic and Quadratic and the Reduction of Hyperelliptic Inte- grals of Genus Two to Elliptic Integrals by a Transformation of the Fourth Order. Doctor's thesis. Transactions of the Amer- ican Mathematical Society, II (1901), 437- 459. A solution of the problem independently of a special system of variables, by using theorems on biquadratic involutions and a methodical deduction of the second integral from the first. Some properties of the form system of a cubic and quadratic are studied and it is found to contain a second cubic and quadratic which have relations with the ground forms which are mutual. The Number of Representations of a Number as the Sum of Two Squares, Special Biqua- dratic Involutions, and the Transformation of Elliptic Integrals. The Twisted Biqua- dratic Curve of the first Species. Trans- actions of the Royal Society of Canada (2), VI (1900), 76-84. Proof of Dirichlet's result, a theorem concerning Her- mite's biquadratic transformation of elliptic integrals, and a proof of the cross ratio property of the twisted biquadratic curve. John A. Miller, Ph.D. 1899; Professor of Mechanics and Astronomy, Indiana University. Concerning Certain Elliptic Modular Functions of Square Rank. Doctor's thesis. Unpub- lished. A study of the modular functions X^ {u/w-i , to,) , defined by Professor Klein, when n, the rank, is a square num- ber. Two systems consisting of an infinite number of forms, the one in ta, the other in wa, where t and u are functions derived from X„ were found, which were in- variant under the substitutions of two groups respect- ively, viz., GfAS and (?192. The elements of these groups and their operational character were derived from a consideration of the X-fuuctions and the «r;^ „-func- tions. The bases of these systems of forms were found and expressed as rational functions of the invariants of the elliptic functions. The case n = 4 was similarly treated. Thomas Milton Putnam, Ph.D. 1901 ; In- structor in Mathematics, University of California. Distribution of the Quaternary Linear Homo- geneous Substitutions in a Galois Field into Complete Sets of Conjugate Substitutions. American Journal of Mathematics, XXIII (1901), 41-48. A complete list of canonical forms is set up and the periods of substitutions belonging to each form is de- termined. The number of sets of conjugate substitu- tions is found for each canonical form, or type, and the number of substitutions in each of these sets is calcu- lated. On the Quaternary Linear Homogeneous Group and the Ternary Linear Fractional Group. Doctor's thesis. American Journal of Mathematics, XXIV (1902), 319-366. The groups here considered are those of all substitu- tions of determinant unity taken in an arbitrary Galois Field. The fractional group is a simple group and is further important in that it is simply isomorphic with certain groups defined by quadratic invariants. Ernest Brown Skinner, Ph.D. 1900 ; As- sistant Professor of Mathematics, Uni- versity of Wisconsin. Ternary Monomial Substitution Groups of Finite Order with Determinant ± 1. Doc- tor's thesis. American Journal of Mathe- matics, XXV (1903), 17-59. A study of the principal ternary monomial groups and some of their more important subgroups. Every ter- nary monomial group not involving a permutation of the variables is holoedricaUy isomorphic with an Abolian group with two independent elements and conversely. The most general ternary monomial group is then found by combining these two elements with the two elements of the symmetric group of order six. The system of invariant forms is given for each group studied and for most of the groups the complete form systems together with the relations between the forms of the complete system are worked out. Herbert Ellsworth Slaught, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) Depabtment of Astbonomy and Astbophysios 83 XVni. ASTRONOMY AND ASTROPHYSICS Geobge E. Hale, [1892 — ], Professor of Astrophysics and Director of the Yer- kes Observatory. The Study of Stellar Evolution. A popular account of modern methods of astrophyslcal research. The University of Chicago De- cennial Publications, Second Series, X. The Ultra- Violet Spectrum of the Solar Prom- inences, II. Astronomy and Astrophysics, XI (1892), 602. Second list of lines discovered in the spectrum of the chromosphere. Photographs of Solar Phenomena Obtained with the Spectroheliograph of the Kenwood Astrophyslcal Observatory. Ibid., XI (1892), 603-601. Eeproductions of photographs of the chromosphere, prominences, and faculae, with descriptive text. Photograph of the Occultation of Mars by the Moon (July 11, 1892), made at the Kenwood Astrophyslcal Observatory. Ibid., 610-611. Beproduction of photograph, with description of new photographic telescope. A Remarkable Solar Disturbance. Ibid., 611- 612. Account of a new type of solar eruption, photographed on July 15, 1892, with the spectroheliograph. The Ultra- Violet Spectrum of the Solar Promi- nences. Astronomy and Astrophysics, XI (1892), 618. Also Memorie delta Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiani, XXI (1892), 160-161. Supplementary list of lines discovered in the spectrum of the chromosphere. Photographic de la chromosphere, des protube- rances, et des facules solaires, h, I'Observa- toire d'astronomie physique de Kenwood, Chicago. Comptes rendus de VAcad4mie des Sciences, CXV (1892), 106-109. Description of the spectroheliograph and of the results obtained with its aid. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Astronomy and Astrophysics, XI (1892), 790-793. Announcement of Mr. Yerkes's gift and general plan of work. Some Results and Conclusions Derived from a Photographic Study of the Sun. Ibid., 811- 815. Besults of solar research with the spectroscope and spectroheliograph. The Ultra-Violet Spectrum of the Solar Prom- inences, III. Ibid., 821-822. Third list of lines discovered in the spectrum of the chromosphere. On the Condition of the Sun's Surface in June and July, 1892, as compared with the Rec- ord of Terrestrial Magnetism. Ibid., 917- 925. A discussion of photographs taken with the si>ectro- heliograph, with illustrations of the remarkable erup- tion of July 15, 1892. La probability de coincidence entre les ph6no- m^nes terrestres et solaires. Comptes ren- dus de VAcadimie des Sciences,CXYl (1893), 210-243. Also Astronomy and Astrophys- ics, XII (1893), 167-169. A test of Marchand's views regarding the relationship between terrestrial and solar disturbances. Les raies H et K dans le spectre des facules solaires. Comptes rendus de I'Acaddmie des Sciences, ibid., 170-172. Discussion of a method proposed by M. Deslandres foe determining the rotation period of a star. The Spectroheliograph. Astronomy and As- trophysics, ibid., 241-257. Critical discussion of various forms of spectrohelio- graphs. Photographic de la couronne solaire sans 6clipse totale. Comptes rendus de V Aca- demic des Sciences, ibid., 623-625. Also Astronomy and Astrophysics, ibid., 260- 263. Description of a method of photographing the corona without an eclipse. Note on Photography of the Corona without an Eclipse. Ibid., 364-365. Advantages of using the dark K line for this purpose. Spectroscopic Notes from the Kenwood Ob- servatory. Ibid., XII (1893), 450-455. Prominences and faculffi of April 16, 1893. Size and dis- tribution of faculae. Calcium spectrum in flames, arc, spark, sun-spots, faculee, chromosphere, prominences, stars. Applications of the spectroheliograph. 84 Publications Some Recent Photographic Investigations of the Sun. Technology Quarterly, VI (1893), 262-272. Account of solar researches at the Kenwood Observa- tory, read before the Boston Society of Arts, October 25, 1893. Astrophysical Researches at the Kenwood Observatory. Observatory, XVI (1893), 395- 396. Address before the Royal Astronomical Society of Lon- don, November 10, 1893. Researches in Solar Physics. Verhandlungen der physikalischen Gesellschaft zu Berlin^ XIII (1894), 1-2. Address before the Physikalische Gtesellschaft zu Ber- lin. The Solar Faculae. Knowledge, XVII (1894), 18-22. Discussion of the H and K reversals and the nature of faculee. Best dispersion for spectroheliographs. Sur les facules solaires. Comptes rendus de VAcaddmie des Sciences, CXVIII (1894), 1175-1177. Reply to an article by M. Deslandres. On the Mounting of Large Telescopes . Knowl- edge, XVII (1894), 145-146. Discussion of a new form of mounting proposed by Sir Howard Grubb. On Some Attempts to Photograph the Solar Corona without an Eclipse. Astronomy and Astrophysics, XIII (1894), 662-687. Details of exp>eriments made at Chicago, Pike's Peak, and Mount Etna, with description of instruments and history of previous attempts. On a New Method of Mapping the Solar C!o- rona without an Eclipse. Astrophysical Journal, I (1895), 318-334. Description of a differential method involving the use of a bolometer or radiometer. A Large Eruptive Prominence. Ibid., 433-434. Photographic observations of the eruptive prominence of March 25, 1895. On a Photographic Method of Determining the Visibility of Interference Fringes in Spectroscopic Measurements. Ibid., 435- 438. Experiments in photographing interference fringes. Astrophysical applications of the interferometer. Preliminary Note on the D3 Line in the Spec- trum of the Chromosphere. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXXXVIII (1895), No. 3302, 227-230. Physical characteristics and wave-lengths of the com- ponents. Note on Schmidt's Theory of the Sun. Astro- physical Journal, II (1895), 73-74. Spectroscopic objections to the theory. Note on the D3 Line in the Spectrum of the Chromosphere. Ibid., 165-166. Discovery of the duplicity of the D3 line in the chromo- sphere and prominences, with measures of the compo- nents. On the Wave-Length of the D3 Line in the Spectnun of the Chromosphere. Ibid., 384-385. Discussion of the results obtained by different observers. Note on the Application of Messrs. Jewell, Humphreys, and Mohler's Results to Cer- tain Problems of Astrophysics. Ibid., Ill (1896), 156-161. Discussion of Jewell's observations of the reversals of solar lines. Bearing of wave-length changes due to pressure on the determination of stellar velocities in the line of sight. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 1. Ibid., 215-219. Organization and work of the Yerkes Observatory. The Effect of a Total Eclipse of the Sun on the Visibility of the Solar Prominences. Ibid., 374-387. Comparison of eclipse (April 16, 1893) photographs with those taken with a spectroheliograph. Discussion of Tacchini's observations of " white prominences." The Modern Spectroscope. In collaboration with F. L. O. Wadsworth. The Objective Spectroscope. Ibid., IV (1896), 55-78. Discussion of various forms of objective spectroscopes. On the Comparative Value of Refracting and Reflecting Telescopes for Astrophysical In- vestigations. Ibid., V (1897), 119-131. Advantages of reflecting telescope in (1) freedom from chromatic aberration ; (2) relatively small absorption ; (3) possible large angular aperture ; (4) small cost ; (5) possible large linear aperture. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. I. Selection of the Site, ibid., 165-180. II. The Building and Minor In- struments, ibid., 254-267. III. The Instru- ment and Optical Shops, and the Power House, ibid., 310-317. IV. The Forty-inch Telescope, Dome, and Rising Floor, ibid., VI (1897), 37-47. Description of the buildings and equipment of the Yer- kes Observatory. Note on a Form of Spectroheliograph Sug- gested by Mr. H. F. Newall. Ibid., V (1897), 211-213. Critical discussion of the proposed instrument. Department of Astbonomy and Astbophysics 85 The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 2. Ibid., \I (1891\ 147-153. First observations with the Yerkes telescope. Accident to the rising-floor. Latitude and longitude of the ob- servatory. Programme of the dedication. Note on the Relative Frequency of the H and K Lines in the Spectrum of the Chromo- sphere. Ibid., 157-158. Constant presence of the H and K lines in the chromo- spheric spectrum. The Aim of the Yerkes Observatory. Ibid., 310-321. Address delivered at the astronomical conference held in connection with the dedication. Note on the Level of Sun-Spots. Ibid., 366- 369. Suggestion that sun-spots may be depressions in ele- vated regions of the photosphere. On the Presence of Carbon in the Chromo- sphere. Ibid., 412-414. Discovery of the bright lines of the green carbon fluting in the spectrum of the chromosphere. On the Spectra of Stars of Secchi's Fourth Type. Ibid., VIII (1898), 237-240. Preliminary report on a spectrographic study of red stars. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 6. Parallax of the Andromeda Nebula. Ibid., IX (1899), 184- 186. Parallax of the Andromeda nebula found by Professor E. E. Barnard to be inappreciable. Spectrographic proof of the presence on the ball of Saturn of a dense atmosphere which is apparently absent from the rings. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 7. Spectra of Stars of Secchi's Fourth Type. Ibid., 271-272. Order of development of the red stars. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 9. Comparison of Stellar Spectra of the Third and Fourth Types. Ibid., 273-274. Discovery of a relationship between the two great classes of red stars. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 10. Period and Elongation Distance of the Fifth Satellite of Jupiter. Ibid., 358-360. Measures of the satellite by Professor Barnard. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bidletin No. 11. Heat Radiation of the Stars. Ibid., 360-362. Detection of stellar heat radiation by Professor E. F. Nichols. On the Spectra of Stars of Secchi's Fom-th Type. In collaboration with Ferdinand Ellerman. L /ftid., X (1899), 87-112. Results obtained by previous observers. Description of instruments employed in present research. Methods of measuring and reducing the photographs. Bright lines in fourth type spectra. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 12. Carbon in the Chromosphere. Some New Forms of Spec- troheliographs. Ibid., 287-289. Discovery of the yellow fluting of carbon in the spec-- trum of the chromosphere. Two simple forms of spec- troheliographs. Solar Eclipse Problems. Ibid., XI (1900), 47- 66. Suggestions for eclipse observers. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 13. Variable Star Observations with the 12-inch and 40-inch Refractors. Ibid., XII (1900), 52-54. Observations of faint variable stars by Mr. J. A. Park- hurst. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 14. Observations of the Total Solar Eclipse of May 28, 1900, at Wadesboro, N. C. Ibid., 80-89. Preliminary report of the results obtained by the Yer- kes Observatory party. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 15. Photographs of Star Clusters Made with the 40-inch Visual Telescope. Ibid., 161-164. Photograph of Messier 13 made by Mr. G. W. Bitchey with a color screen. On Some Attempts to Detect the Solar Corona in Full Sunlight with a Bolometer. Ibid., 372-375. Account of experiments made during the years 1895-1900. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 16. The New Star in Perseus. Ibid., XIII (1901), 173-176. Spectroscopic, photometric, and photographic observa- tions of Nova Persei. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 17. Changes in the Spectrum of Nova Persei. Ibid., 238- 240. Further spectroscopic and photometric observations of the A ova. The Yerkes Observatory of the University of Chicago. Bulletin No. 18. Latitude and 86 Publications Longitude of the Yerkes Observatory. Ibid., XIV (1901), 146-148. Determination of the latitude and longitude by the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. Note on the Spark Spectrum of Iron in Li- quids and in Air at High Pressures. Ibid., XV (1902), 132-135. Description of the spectroscopic phenomena observed in the electric discharge between iron poles in liquids, in which it is shown that iron lines may be changed from bright to dark and shifted in position by changing the constants of the electric circuit or by the use of salt solutions. Selective Absorption as a Function of Wave- Length. Ibid., 221 -22S. Showing that the law of selective absorption, as illus- trated by the reversal of spark lines in water, resembles the law of general absorption of light. The presence of both bright and dark hydrogen lines in stellar spec- tra may be explained in this way. Article " Spectroscopy." Encyclopaedia Brit- tanica. New Volumes. The Spectra of Stars of Secchi's Fourth Type. In collaboration with Ferdinand Ellerman and John Adelbert Parkhurst. Seven plates. Article in The University of Chicago De- cennial Publications, First Series, VIII. A three-prism spectrograph has been used with the 40-inch Yerkes telescope in photographing the spectra of a number of these stars. The paper includes tables of the wave-lengths of several hundred bright and dark lines recorded on photographs, conclusions as to the chemical origin of the lines, and a discussion of the evolution of these stars, their distribution in the heav- ens, and their relationship to stars of other spectral types. Spark Spectra in Liquids and Gases, and their Bearing on the Spectra of Temporary Stars. In collaboration with Norton Adams Kent. Five plates. Ibid. The spectroscopic phenomena of the electric spark in liquids depend upon a variety of conditions, such as the length of the spark, the diameter of the poles, the capacity of the condenser, the nature of the liquid, and, in particular, upon the inductance in the sparlc circuit. By varying the inductance a series of photographs was obtained, passing by slow degrees from a bright line spectrum, similar to that given by a spark in air, to a spectrum in which most of the more refrangible lines are dark. Similar phenomena were obtained in air at pressures ranging from one to twenty atmospheres. The parser contains the results of measurements of the photographs, with a discussion of their bearing on the theory of temporary stars and other celestial phe- Reviews of Publications of the Lick Observatory, Vol III. Astrophysical Journal, I (1895), 180-188. Young, The Sun. Ibid., Ill (1896), 235-240. Deslandres, Observations de I'^clipse totale du soleil du 16 avril, 1893. Ibid., IV (1896), 160-166. Lockyer, Total Eclipse of the Sun, April 16, 1893. Ibid., V (1897), 220-226. Annales de I'observatoire d'astronomie phy- sique de Paris. Ibid., X (1899), 369-374. Huggins, An Atlas of Representative Stellar Spectra. Ibid., XII (1900), 291-297. Annals of the Astrophysical Observatory of the Smithsonian Institution, Vol. I. Ibid., XIII (1901), 280-288. Ambronn, Handbuch der astronomischen In- strumentenkunde. Ibid., XV (1902), 347- 349. Sherburne Wesley Burnham, [1892 — ], Professor of Astronomy and Astronomer in the Yerkes Observatory. A General Catalogue of 1290 Double Stars Discovered from 1871 to 1899, arranged in order of Right Ascension, with all the Micro- metrical Measures of each Pair. 4to, xxvii 4- 296. Publications of the Yerkes Ob- servatory, I, 1900. The Motion of ^ Cancri. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LIII (1892), 40-44. The New Star in Auriga. Ibid., 58-60. The Binary Star S 1785. Ibid., 60-64. The Double Star 02 224. Astronomy and As- trophysics, XI (1892), 661-662. The Double Star % 1216. Ibid., 662-663. The Proper Motion of 2 1604. Ibid., 870-872. The Orbit of t Cygni. Monthly Notices, LIII (1893), 43^-443. The Motion of 21819. J6id., 474r478. The Orbit of 40 Eridani, 2518. Ibid., 478- 482. The Orbit of Sirius. Ibid., 482-483. The Orbit of y Andromedae. Ibid., LI V (1893), 119. The Motion of 6 Eridani. Astronomy and Astrophysics, XII (1893), 587-588. The Orbit of 70 Ophiuchi. Ibid., 585-586. The Orbit of /3 416. Ibid., 792-793. Department of Astronomy and Astrophysics 87 The Period of 20 Persei {fi 524). Ihid., 404- 407. The Period of % 1785. Ibid., 397^00. The Orbit of 9 Argus. Ibid., 494^499. The Orbit of OS 285. Ihid., 586-587. Astronomy in Russia. Ibid., 595-596. The Double Star 95 Ceti. Ibid., 681-683. The System of t, Cancri. Ibid., 872-874. How to Find the Orbit of a Double Star by a Graphical Method. Popular Astronomy, I (1894), 243-248 and 348-358. The Proper Motions of Double Stars. As- tronomy and Astrophysics, XIII (1894), 14r-19. The Orbit of 9 Argus. Ibid., 290-291. The Poulkowa Double Star Measures. Ibid., 354-356. The Proper Motion of Procyon. Ibid., 434r-437. The Orbit of 9 Argus. Ibid., 14. The Binary Systems. Popular Astronomy, IV (1896), 16^177. New Elipsograph and Protractor. Ibid., 181- 184. The Orbit of Castor. Ibid., 286-289. The Orbit of rOphiuchi. Ibid., IV (1897), 347-351. The Orbit of X Cygni. Ibid., 397-400. The Orbit of ^ Aquarii. Ibid., 474-475. The Orbit of 02215. Ibid., 543-544. The Orbit of 35 Comae (2 1687) and OS 4. Ibid., V (1897), 125-126. The Orbit of 2 1216. Ibid., 450. The Orbit of 2 2107. Ibid., 449. The Orbit of 44 Bodtis. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LVII (1897), 393-398. The Orbit of 8 Cygni. Ibid., 449-452. The Orbit of 5:iVfMs. /6fd., 453-456. The Orbit of /x Draconis. Ibid., 547-550. The Double Star t, Bodtis. Ibid., LVIII (1898), 83. The Orbit of 02 400. Ibid., 87. The Relative Motion of the Components of y Leonis. Ibid., 387-391. The Double Star fi 107. Popular Astronomy^ VII (1899), 1-3. Note on the Double Star )3107. Ibid., YIU (1900), 528-530. The Proper Motion of /8182. Ibid., 530-531. Note on the (Companion to /? Cassiopeiae. Ibid., 540. Measures of Double Stars Made with the 40-inch Refractor of the Yerkes Observatory in 1900 and 1901. The University of Chicago De- cennial Publications, First Series, VIII, 1-75. Reviews of See, Researches on the Evolution of Stellar Systems. Popular Astronomy, IV (1897), 471-474. Hussey, Measures of the 02 Double Stars. Ibid., IX (1901), 55^-555. Doolittle, Measiires of 900 Double and Mul- tiple Stars Made with the 18-inch Refractor of the Flower Astronomical Observatory. Ibid., X (1902), 129-130. Edward Emerson Barnard [1895 — ], Professor of Practical Astronomy and Astronomer in the Yerkes Observatory. On a Photographic Search for a Satellite to the Moon. Illustrated. AstrophysicalJournal, II (1895), 347-349. Photographs made during a total Innar eclipse sho\red that if such a body existed it must be below the 10th or 11th magnitude or very close to the moon and hence in the shadow with it at the time. Photograph of the Nebula N. G. C. 1499 near the star $ Persei. Illustrated. Ibid., 350. This remarkable nebula, which is excessively faint with any telescope, was shown to be full of singular details not seen with the telescope, but easily photographed. Celestial Photographs with a " Magic Lantern Lens." Illustrated. Ibid., 351-353. It is shown that valuable discoveries can be made with the most inexpensive lenses in photographing the sky, an ordinary child's magic lantern lens having revealed the existence of great beds of gaseous matter in the heavens not previously known. 88 Publications On the Exterior Nebulosities of the Pleiades. Knoivledge, XVIII (1895), 282. An account of the discovery by photography of a vast region of nebulous matter covering one hundred square degrees and surrounding the Pleiades. Photographic and Visual Observations of Holmes' Comet. Illustrated. Astrophys- ical Journal, III (1896), 41-46. The comet underwent most extraordinary changes in form and brightness, from a faint diffused mass scarcely discernible in a telescope to a bright star-like body almost visible to the naked eye in what must have been a few hours' time. The photograph shows an append- age to the comet not visible in the telescope. Filar Micrometer Measures of the Fifth Satel- lite of Jupiter. Astronomical Journal, XVI (1896), 49-50. Measures are given of this difficult object and correc- tions noted to the ephemeris. Micrometrical Measures of the Four Satellites of the Planet Uranus, and Measures of the Diameters of Uranus. Ibid., 73-78. Positions of all four of the satellites are given. In the measures it was found that the apparent disc of Uranus was decidedly elliptical. The position angles of this ellipticily measured. The diameter measures of the planet in two directions also clearly showed the ellipti- city. Comparison of Three Celestial Photographs Made with a 6-inch Portrait Lens with Sim- ilar ones Made with a 20-inch Reflector. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronom- ical Society, LVI (1896), 377-381. This paper deals with the relative values of photo- graphs made with the ordinary portrait lens and with a large reflector. It is shown that the two instruments have their special fields of work that are mutually sup- plementary. Note on the Diameters and Ellipticity of Uranus. Astronomical Journal, XVI (1896), 109. It is shown that the measured diameters previously printed and the direction of ellipticity were in accord with measures made some years before by Professor C. A. Young. Micrometrical Measures of the Annular Nebula of Lyra {Mhl). Astronomische Nachrich- ten, CXL (1896), 283-286. The various dimensions of the nebula were measured on a number of nights. Note on Saturn. Ibid., CXLI (1896), 79-80. A statement as to the non-visibility of various markings reported to have been discovered on the planet Saturn, Extended Nebulosity in the Region of Antares. Illustrated. Knowledge, XIX (1896), 205. A description of a great region of nebulosity in the neigh- borhood of Antares, Rho Ophiuchi, and Nu Scorpii, dis- covered by photography. On the Comparison of Reflector and Portrait Lens Photographs. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LVII (1896), 10-16. Microscopical Measures of the Ball and Ring System of the Planet Saturn, and Diameters of his Satellite Titan, with Some Remarks on Large and Small Telescopes. Ibid., LVI (1896), 163-172. The diameters of the ball and the various rings of the planet were measured. They are in close agreement with previous measures of Professor A. Hall at Wash- ington in 1884-87, and show no change in the dimensions of the rings, as had been reported from previous obser- vations. The diameter of the brightest satellite, Titan, was also measured on a number of nights. The November Leonids of 1896. Astronomical Journal, XVII (1896), 40. A few observations of these bodies were secured through clouds. The Milky Way near the Tail of the Scorpion, and the Cluster Messier 35. Illustrated. Astrophysical Journal, V (1897). These two photographs show remarkable regions of the sky. The first shows the bright cloud regions near the lower part of Scorpio, the second shows the beau- tiful cluster M 35. There is no text except what is on the photographs. Note on Professor Campbell's Observations of Nova Aurigae. Ibid., 277-278. It is shown that though the Nova was affected by a I)eculiarity of focus due to its light, that when properly focused it still appeared nebulous. Physical and Micrometrical Observations of the Planet Venv^. Illustrated. Ibid., 299- 304. The diameter of Venus was measured on a large num- ber of nights with the great telescope of the Lick Observatory. The physical appearance of the planet was almost always unsatisfactory and nothing definite was obtained in reference to its surface features. At one observation markings were seen, but they were unlike some of those shown by other observers in recent years. Measures of the Diameters of Mars and the Positions of his Satellites in 1894. Astro- nomical Journal, XVII (1897), 145-147. The equatorial and polar diameters of Mars were measured on a number of nights and gave an ellipticity of about iJh. The positions of the satellites were meas- ured and estimations of their relative brightness made. The Gegenschein or Zodiacal Coimterglow. Ibid., 151-152. New observations of the position of the Gegenschein are given. It is shown that the position varies slightly from exact opposition to the sun, but this is accounted for by atmospheric absorption. Department of Astbonomy and Astrophysics 89 Observations of the Partial Solar Eclipse of July 29, 1897. Ibid., XVIII (1897), 23. This eclipse was observed with the 12-inch refractor and the times of contacts recorded, as also the times of con- tacts of the moon with the sun-spots. The Great Nebula of p Ophiuchi and the Small- ness of the Stars Forming the Groundwork of the Milky Way. Illustrated. Popular Astronomy, V (1897), 227-232. This nebula was discovered by photography. It seems to associate itself with the bright and faint stars in its region, implying that they are at the same distance from us, and that the apparent smallnessof the majority of the stars of the Milky Way is due to their being really relatively small bodies. Photograph of an August Meteor. Astronom- ical Journal, XVIII (1897), 128. This meteor was photographed with two cameras. Its entire path is shown on the two plates. On the Photography of Meteors. Illustrated. Popular Astronomy, V (1897), 281-284. Meteors are frequently photographed with portrait lenses while engaged in photographing the sky. The use of such lenses shown to be adapted for the photog- raphy of the November meteor shower. A Micrometrical Determination of the Dimen- sions of the Planets of the Solar System. Ibid., 285-302. The diameters of all the planets and satellites that were measurable in the great telescope of the Lick Ob- servatory were measured and their dimensions given in angular and linear value. On the Companions of Vega. Astronomical Journal, XVIII (1897), 46. Positions of these small stars are given, and attention is called to the fact that they are not physically con- nected with Vega. On the Third and Fourth Satellites of Jupiter. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXLIV (1897), 321-330. Illustrated. Observations of the surface features of these two moons, and measures of white polar caps similar to those on Mara. The paper also refutes the statements made as to rapid changes in the forms of these bodies and of the existence of a network of thin lines on their sur- faces. An Astronomical Coincidence. Ibid., 331. Showing cal yroT Showing how the improbable may happen in astronomi- rk. On an Instrument for accurately Photograph- ing an Unseen, Moving, but Known Celes- tial Body. Ibid., 332. An instrument is here suggested whereby, with a me- chanical motion of the eye piece, the telescope can be made to move with the unseen body by guiding with a fixed star, the unseen and moving body thus being kept stationary on the plate. Small Stars near Sirius. Astronomical Jour- nal, XVIII (1897), 93. Some small stars are measured to show the proper mo- tion of Siritis. The Leonids of 1897. Ibid., 107. Nebulae near Castor. Ibid., 112. Some small nebulae were found within a degree of the star Castor. On Another Astronomical Coincidence. Astro- nomische Nachrichten, CXLV (1898), 237. Showing that the improbable happens more frequently than would be supposed. Observations of the Companions of Procyon and of y8883. Astronomical Journal, XIX (1898), 23-24. Measures of the Satellite of Neptune with the 40-inch Refractor of the Yerkes Observa- tory, with some Remarks on the Great Tele- scope. Ibid., 25-29. These are the first measures of the satellite made with the great telescope. A description of the telescojje and micrometer, of the dome and elevating floor are given, with remarks on the performance of the object glass. Filar Micrometer Observations of Comet C 1898 (Coddington). Ibid., XIX (1898), 55. The Development of Photography in Astron- omy. Proceedings of the American As- sociation for the Advancement of Science, XLVII (1898), 33 pp. Reprinted in Popu- lar Astronomy, VI (1898), 425-455. An address, as vice-president and chairman of section A, before the section of mathematics and astronomy, American Association for the Advancement of Science, Boston meeting, fiftieth anniversary, August, 1898. Note on Some Variable Stars of the Cluster Mb. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXLVII (1898), 243-246. These observations verify the discovery of a great num- ber of variable stars in this cluster by Professor Bailey at Arequipa, Peru. The periods of several are de- termined with the 40-inch refractor. The Great Nebula of Andro7neda. Astro- physical Journal, VIII (1898), 226-228. A reported change in the nucleus of the nebula having been telegraphed to this country, is disproved by fre- quent observations with the great telescope about that time. Measures are given of the position of the nucleus with reference to several stars. Portrait-Lens Photography. Ibid., 240. Details the advantages of the ordinary portrait lens for making celestial photographs. Observations of the Leonids of November 14, 1898. Monthly Notices of the Royal As- tronomical Society, LIX (1898), 107-108. Being a letter to Dr. G. Johnstone Stoney on the subject. 90 Publications Note on the Exterior NebuJosities of the Plei- ades. Ibid. (1899), 155. Attention is called to the fact that the discovery of a vast region of nebulosity about the Pleiades is verified by photographs made at Arequipa, Peru, by the Har- vard Colleere Observatory Station and by photographs made by Dr. Wilson at Northfield, Minn. New Variable Star {S. X>. — 45381). Astro- nomical Journal, XIX (1899), 193. This star was found to be variable while observing the planet Eros. The variability is verified by photo- graphs taken at Harvard College Observatory and the period found from them to be about 150 days. Photographs of Comets and of the Milky Way, March, 1899. Illustrated. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LIX (1900), 354-370. An historical account of the work done with the 6-inch Willard lens of the Lick Observatory in photographing the Milky Way and the various comets. Observations of the Leonid Meteors of 1898. Astrophysical Journal, IX (1899), 151-156. A considerable display of these meteors was seen. Pho- tographic ijlates were exposed in several cameras to the sky during the display but no meteors secured. Photograph of the Milky Way near the Star Theta Ophiuchi. Illustrated. Ibid., 157- 158. This region of the sky was shown to be very remark- able, the Milky Way breaking up into great black rifts or vacant chasms, as if a segregation were taking place. Attention was called to the singular feature of spaces free of stars that yet had darker holes in them, suggest- ing che presence here of a nebulous substratum to the Milky Way. Observations of Hind's Variable Nebula in Taurus (N. G. C. 1555) Made with the 40-inch Kefractor of the Yerkes Observatory. Illustrated. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LIX (1899), 372-376. A further account of observations of this remarkable nebula in which it is shown to have again become faintly visible. The observations show that T Tauri, the variable star close to the nebula, was a nebula itself about 1890, and that it subsequently lost the apparent nebulosity, though the great telescope still shows slight traces of it. The Variable Star S. Lyncis. Two New Double Stars. Anderson's Variable near B. D. + 55?3011. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXLIX (1899), 167-170. Contains measures of the positions of the two variable stars. Two new double stars were found during the work. The Gegenschein or Zodiacal Counterglow. Illustrated. Popular Astronomy, VII (1899), 169-179. This phenomenon had been observed through sixteen years and the many positions obtained of it showed that it kept on the ecliptic exactly opposite the sun. Its changes of shape described, and the theories to account for it shown to be unsatisfactory. The paper contains a complete collection of all the writer s ob- servations of its position in the sky. Note on Mr. Evershed's Paper on the Gegen- schein. Ibid., 290. Objections are brought forward to Mr. Evershed's ex- planation of the Gegenschein. Micrometrical Measures of the Satellite of Neptune During the Oppositions 1898-99 with the 40-inch Kefractor of the Yerkes Observatory, with some Remarks on the Temperature Changes of the Object-Glass. Astronomical Journal, XX (1899), 41^4:. More measures of the satellite are given, extending from August 29, 1898, to April 19, 1899. It is also shown that the focus of the great glass varies greatly with the changes of temperature. Measures had been made through a range of 102° (F.). Through this great range the focus changed about ^ of an inch, shortening up as the temperature lowered. Micrometrical Measures of the Companion of of Procyon. Ibid., 44. Measures of this difficult object made with the 40-inch. The Double Head of Comet a 1899 (Swift). Ibid., 60. The head of this comet was distinctly double on a num- ber of dates. Position angles and distances were meas- ured. One of the components was smaller than the other. Position Angles of the North Polar Cap of Mars 1898-99. Ibid., 124. The position of the Polar Cap was determined on twenty-seven nights. Micrometrical Measures of the Fifth Satellite of Jupiter, and on the Motion of the Line of Apsides of the Orbit of the Satellite. Ibid., 125-130. A long series of measures were obtained of the satellite at the oppositions of 1898 and 1899 with the 40-inch. From these measures and the ones obtained in 1892. 1893, and 1894, it was shown that Tisserand's value or the motion of the line of apsides of the orbit (+ 882' annually) is erroneous. A new determination makes this value closely -t- 900° per year, or + 2?465 daily. Periodical Changes in the Form of the Gegen- schein. Ibid., 131-132. These observations verify the changes that take place in the form of the Gegenschein in October of each year. Small Stars near Sirius. Ibid., XX (1900), 166, 188. Note on the Companion of Sirius. Ibid., 167. Measures of the companion are given, with a compari- son with the ephemeris. The Double Star ^8883. Ibid., 170. On the Probable Motion of the Annular Nebula of Lyra (if 57) and the Peculiarities in the Focus for the Planetary Nebulae and their Depabtment of Astbonomt and Astbophysics 91 Nuclei. Illustrated. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society LX (1900), 245-257. A series of measures was made of the surrounding stars and the nucleus and discrepancies from previous meas- ures made by Professor Burnham suggests that possi- bly the nebula has moved perceptibly in the past eight or ten years. The Exterior Nebulosities of the Pleiades, with a Drawing from the different Photographs, and on the Appearance of the Involved Neb- ulosities of the Cluster with the 40-inch Kefractor. Ibid., 258-261. Illustrated. A further proof of the existence of a region of at least one hundred square degrees of nebulosity surrounding the cluster of the Fleiades. On the Diameters of Ceres and Vesta. Ibid., 261-262. Additional measures of these planets made with the 40-inch, in close accord with those previously made at the Lick Observatory by the writer. A Small Planetary Nebula near the Star B. D. -f 34° 732. Astronomische Nachrichten, CLI (1900), 355-356. Measures of a planetary nebula discovered in 1890 at the Lick Observatory. Filar Micrometer Measures of the Position of the Star B. I>.+37?4131 for Parallax. Ibid., XXI (1900), 12-14. Professor Schur having announced a parallax to this star greater than that of 61 Cygni, measures were made to determine accurately this parallax. The result showed the star has no parallax. Micrometrical Measures of the Companions of Procyon. Ibid., 16. The measures show that the small star has a direct motion of about 5° annually, while the distance in- creases about ri4 a year. • Observation of Eros. Ibid., XXI (1900), 21. Observations of the Stars Krueger 60 and /3 1291. Ibid., 64:. The star p 1291^ though a small star, has a large proper motion. A series of measures was made of it and sur- rounding stars to determine this motion. Some Abnormal Stars in the Cluster M 13 Her- culis. Astrophysical Journal, XII (1900), 176-181. A few stars are found in the cluster which shine with a bluer light than the others, and which make a stronger impression on the photographic plate than ujKm the eve. Some of these, though relatively bright on the photographs, are extremely faint in the telescope. It is suggested that these are of the nature of planetary nebulae. Discovery and Period of a Small Variable Star in the Cluster M13 Herculis. Ibid., 182- 184. Also Popular Astronomy, VIII (1900), 486-488. While measuring the stars in this cluster with the 40- inch, this star was found to be variable with a period of 5<12h24ni, varying from the 14th to the 13th magnitude. Observations or its light are given on a number of dates. The Diameter of the Asteroid Juno Determined with the Micrometer of the 40-inch Re- fractor of the Yerkes Observatory, with Re- marks on Some of the Other Asteroids. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomi- cal Sosiety, LXI (1900), 68^9. Additional measures of the diameter of Juno made at the close opposition of 1900, which verify the measures made previously at the Lick Observatory in 1894 by the writer. Micrometrical Observations of the Satellite of Neptune and of Stars near the Planet. Astronomical Journal, XXII (1901), 27-31. A series of two years' measures of the satellite, with some measures of the diameter of Neptune. The planet was also measured on a number of dates with respect to surrounding stars. Micrometrical Measures of Moesting A, Ptole- maeus A, and Triesnecker B. Ibid., 33. Measures of the positions of three lunar craters to be used as a standard of comparison in lunar investiga- tions by Professor Saunder, of England. Pecularities of Focal Observations of the Plan- etary Nebulae, and Visual Observations of Nova Persei with the 40-inch Telescope. Astrophysical Journal, XIV (1901), 151- 157. It is shown that on account of the difference in the nature of the light of a nebula and a star the focus for the nebulae, when viewed with a refracting telescope, is about a quarter of an inch farther away from the object glass than for a star. A table for such difference is given. Attention is called to peculiarities in the ap pearance of Nora Persei, marking it as very distinctly different in appearance from the ordinary star. Meas- ures of surrounding stars are given. Recent Observations of Nova Aurigae. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronom- ical Society, LXII (1901), 61-65. Presents new measures of the position of this star and shows that it has not changed its position sensibly since its appearance in 1892, but that it has faded greatly in recent years. Further Observations of Nova Aurigae. Ibid., 65. Observations are here given of the magnitudes of the Nova and surrounding stars which have been micro- metrically measured. On a Method of Handling Large Photographic Plates to be Used at the Total Eclipse of the Sim in Sumatra, May 18, 1901. Popular 92 Publications Astronomy, IX (1901), 269-271. Reprinted from Camera Craft, San Francisco. It is proposed to support the largest plate, forty inches square, in a vertical sliding frame suitably counter- poised so that it can be raised or lowered into position like a window sash. Total Eclipse of the Sun in Sumatra. With 15 half-tone engravings. Ibid., 527-544. Lunar Phenomenon, January 19, 1902. Na- ture, LXVI (1902), 5-6. This remarkable phenomenon consisted of two great haloes, one symmetrical with respect to the moon, the other cutting through the moon with its center near the zenith. No satisfactory explanation of the phe- nomenon has been offered. On the Dimensions of the Planets and Satel- lites, and on the Surface Features of Some of These Bodies. Astronomische Nach- richten, CLVII (1902), 261-268. A collection of all the writer's determinations of the diameters of the planets, satellites, and asteroids of the solar system, made with the 36-inch refractor of the Lick Observatory and with the 40-inch refractor of the Yerkes Observatory. Brief accounts are given of the surface appearance of the planets Mercury and Venus. An attempt was made to determine the amount of the effect of irradiation on the diameter measures of the planet Venus by a series of observations made in the day time and a similar series made at night. The dif- ferences between the night and day measures show that the former are larger than the latter by about J4-second of arc. It is suggested that if with such a brilliant object as Vemts this value is so small, it can have no sensible effect on the apparent sizes of the images of the satellites and asteroids. Micrometrical and Visual Observations of Nova Cygni (1876) Made with the 40-inch Re- fractor of the Yerkes Observatory. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LXII (1902), 405^19. A series of micrometer measures was made of the posi- tion of the star with reference to nine stars near it. These showed considerable discordances when com- pared with measures of the same stars made twenty- five years before by Copeland and Lohse, which might imply motion in the Nova. Comparisons were then made with certain known stars and the position of the Nova accurately determined ; this position, compared with meridian observations made when the Nova was bright in 1876, showed a discordance of only 0.06 in R. A and f 36 in S, thus proving that no measurable motion had occurred in the position of Nova in a quarter of a century. The present brightness of the Nova from these observations is below 15th magnitude. On the Probable Motion of Some of the Small Stars of the "Dumb Bell" Nebula {M 27, N. G. C. 6853). Ibid., 466-468. The present paper gives micrometer measures of these stars made with the 36-inch telescope of the Lick Ob- servatory and the 40-inch of the Yerkes, which verify the photographic measures. It is suggested that in all probability there has been no actual displacement of the stars since the time of Struve, but from the method of measurement used by Struve in this case, large errors had occurred which would account for the differences. Observations of Nova Persei, 1901. Illustrated. Astronomische Nachrichten, CLIX (1902), 49-58. A series of eighty micrometer determinations of the position of the Nova with reference to fourteen small stars near it, made with the large telescope. These measures, extending from July 30, 1901, to March 25, 1902, show no certain motion of the Nova nor any parallactic displacement. The paper also contains a long list of determinations of the brightness of the Nova, which show that in the first part of August, 1901, it was of the 66 magnitude, and that it had faded to the 9.0 magni- tude by April 15, 1902. Micrometrical Measures of the Position of the Minor Planet Eros for the Determination of the Solar Parallax. The University of Chi- cago Decennial Publications, First Series, VIII, 77-116. One thousand, five hundred and six measures in right ascension and declination were made on seventy-three nights with the 40-inch. These are to be used in com- bination with measures made in Europe and elsewhere at the same time for a new determination of the dis- tance of the sun. Review of Burnham, General Catalogue of 1290 Double Stars Discovered from 1871 to 1899 by S. W. Burnham. Astrophysical Journal, XII (1900), 228-236. Edwin Brant Frost [1898 — ], Professor of Astrophysics and Astrophysicist at the Yerkes Observatory. Note on New Gases in the Earth's Atmosphere. Astrophysical Journal, VIII (1898), 121- 122. Variable Velocity of Polaris. Ibid., X (1899), 184-185. On Titanium for a Comparison Spectrum. Ibid., 207-208. Corrections to Determinations of Absolute Wave-Length. Ibid., 283-285. Notes on the Reduction of Stellar Spectra. Science, New Series, X (1899), 845. The Astronomical and Astrophysical Society of America. Ibid., 785-795; 841-849. The report by the acting secretary of the first meeting of the society. Spectroscopic Results Obtained at the Total Eclipse of May 28, 1900. Astrophysical Journal, XII (1900), 307-351. A description is given of the apparatus employed and of the methods used for the redaction of (he measure Department of Asteonomy and Astrophysics 93 ments of the plates obtained. Measures of the wave- lengths of 3S2 bright lines in the "flash-spectrum " are detailed in tables, and it is shown that these correspond to the stronger dark lines of the ordinary solar spec- trum, with certain exceptions. The existence of a thin "reversing layer" at the base of the solar chromo- sphere is thus confirmed. Nova Persei. Astronomical Journal, XXII (1901), 104. Notes on the Visual Spectrum of Nova Persei. Ibid., 114-115. The Bruce Spectrograph of the Yerkes Ob- servatory. Astrophysical Journal, XV (1902), 1-27. A description of this new accessory of the 40-inch tele- scope, which is designed for the determination of the velocities of the stars in the line of sight from the dis- placements of the lines in stellar spectra. The guiding principles in the design and construction of the instru- ment (chiefly accomplished in the observatory shops) are detailed, together with an account of the mode of measurement and reduction, with an example. The Spectroscopic Binary yS Cephei. Ibid., S40- 341. A statement of the observations leading to the discov- ery of the binary character of this stellar system, with the Bruce si)ectrograph. Radial Velocities of Twenty Stars Having Spectra of the Orion Type. In collabora- tion with Walter Sidney Adams. 3 plates. The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, VIII, 143-253. Revietcs of Vogel and Wilsing, Spectra von 528 Stemen. Astrophysical Journal, X (1899), 362-367. McClean, Comparative Photographic Spectra of Stars. Ibid., 367-368. McClean, Spectra of Southern Stars. Ibid., 368-369. Scheiner, Photographische Himmelskarte, I. Ibid., XII (1900), 297-303. Scheiner, Strahlung und Temperatur der Sonne. Ibid., 303-305. Huggins, Representative Stellar Spectra. /Sci- ence, N. S., XIII (1901), 222-224. Andr6, Astronomie Stellaire. Ibid. ,618-619. Lockyer, Inorganic Evolution as Studied by Spectnmii Analysis. Ibid., XV (1902), 584- 586. Kurt Laves [1893 — ], Assistant Profes- sor of Astronomy. Der Coeflficient der sogenannten lunaren Gleich- ung der Erdbewegung und die Verwerth- barkeit derselben fiir die Kenntniss des Hauptglieder der Nutation. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXXXII (1893), 177-188. The conclusion is reached that through the lunar equa- tion the mass of the moon may be advantageously determined. This finally leads to a determiaation of the constant of nutation. On the Determination of the Principal Term of the Nutation. Astronomical Journal, XIV (1894), 33-36. In reply to a criticism of Professor Simon Newcomb it is shown by an inspection of the original manuscripts of Le Verrier that the contention of the author with regard to the definition of the constant of the lunar equation is proved to be correct. The probable error or the constant of nutation is shown to be = f012. On the Formulas of Precession for the Equa- torial and Ecliptical Co-ordinates. Ibid., XV (1895), 57-60. W. Foerster's derivation of the formulas of precession for equatorial co-ordinates are transformed so as to be applicable to the case of ecliptical co-ordinates. Definitive Determination of the Orbit of Comet 1879, V. Ibid., XVI (1896), 9-16. A set of 123 complete observations of the comet were available, from which, by a method of least-squares reduction, the most probable elements were derived. On the Integration of the Differential Equa- tions of Motion in the Problem of Two Bodies. Ibid., XVII (1897), 73-76. Jacobi's principle of the last multiplier is studied for the case of elliptic motion when rectangular co-ordi- nates are employed and its meaning shown for polar co-ordinates. The Ten Integrals of the Problem of n Bodies for Forces Involving the Co-ordinates and their First and Second Differentials. Ibid., XIX (1898), 97-104. When "effective potential forces" are considered in the problem of n-bodies it is shown that the ten inte- grals of motion will be admissible only if certain condi- tions are placed on the nature of these forces. The electrodynamical laws of Weber, Riemann, and Clau- sius are studied in particular; it is shown that the former two will fulfil the required conditions, whereas Clausius's law admits but seven integrals of absolute motion. On Some Modern Attempts to Replace New- ton's Law of Attraction by Other Laws. Popular Astronomy, V (1898), 513. 3p; and the actual observations of some of the planets are Certain discrepancies between the tabulated positions plai pointed out. It is shown that they cannot be made to disappear by the assumption of any known law of uni- versal gravitation. 94 Publications On the Adjustment of the Equatorial Tele- scope. Ibid., VIII (1900), 424-437; 535-540. The object of the paper is to furnish the mathematical theory of the errors of the equatorial to one familiar with plane trigonometry. An introduction to spherical trigon >metry is given and therefrom the principal ques- tions are derived. The errors of the instrument are set forth and methods are explained to correct the obser- vations for their influence. An Ancient Astronomical Instnunent. Ibid., 492-493. Calls attention to a primitive ancient instrument by means of which differences of latitude were measured. Maupertius' Princip der kleinsten Wirkung ftir Krafte, die ein effectives Potential zulassen. Astronoynische Nachrichten, CLII (1900), 861-366. A continuation of the study of effective potential forces, for which the principle of least action is proved to hold. On the Rotary Motion of a Body of Variable Form. Astronomical Journal, XXII (1901), 61-72. Note on my Article in No. 445 of the Astro- nomical Journal. Ibid., 62-63. A Kinematic Study of Hansen's Ideal Co-ordi- nates. Science, XV (1901), 296-297. On the Computation of Laplace's CoeflScients by means of Gyld6n's Tables. Ibid., 297. The Orbit of the Planet 334 Chicago. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, VIII. The expressions for the perturbative function, and its derivative with respect to the major axis, are given, up to and including the fourth degree of small quanti- ties in the periodic terms, and up to and including the sixth degree in the secular terms. It is hoped that the paper will be useful in a twofold way : that it will con- tribute a check for future theories of orbits of this type of small planets that will not start from the Keplerian ellipse as a first approximation, and that it will lead toward a redetermination of the mass of Jupiter. FoEEST Eay Moulton [1896 — ], In- structor in Astronomy. Introduction to Celestial Mechanics. Royal 8vo, XV +384. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1902. On the Best Method of Solving the Markings of Judges of Contests. American Mathe- matical Monthly, V (1898), 67-73. The law of individual error is investigated, and then the best means of combining the results. The conclu- sion is that the arithmetical mean of the markings of all the judges is the best result in the case of each con- testant. Theory of the Influence of a Resisting Medium upon Bodies Moving in Parabolic Orbits. Astronomical Journal, XIX (1898), 32-38. After developing the theory of the effect of a resisting medium, an application is made in determining an upper limit to the density of the solar corona from the resistance to the motion of the great comet of 1882. The conclusion is reached that, at a distance of 300,000 miles from the sun's surface, the density of the corona must be less than one 4,750,000th of that of the nucleus of the comet. Theory of the Determination of the Elements of a Parabolic Orbit from two Observations of Apparent Position and one of Motion in the Line of Sight. Astrophysical Journal, X (1899), 13-21. The Limits of Temporary Stability of Satellite Motion, with an Application to the Question of the Existence of an Unseen Body in the Binary System F. 70 Ophiuchi. Astro- nomical Journal, XX (1899), 32-37. A criterion of temporary stability is developed and an application is made to the supposed dark body in the binary system F. 70 Ophiuchi. It is found that a dark star covud not have existed in the system as lias been supposed. A Graphical Method of Finding the Elements of a Parabolic Orbit. Popular Astronomy, VII (1899), 192-201. The Spheres of Activity of the Planets. Ibid., 280-285. A planet's sphere of activity is defined as that sphere within which it can i)ermanently retain a satellite. A mathematical expression is developed for the radius of this sphere, and it is computed for each of the planets and the moon. Next the greatest angular distance, as seen from the earth, which a permanent satellite can have is computed for each of the planets and the moon. On a Class of Particular Solutions of the Prob- lem of Four Bodies. Transactions of the American Mathematical Society, I (1900), 16-29. The case is considered in which there are three finite bodies and one infinitesimal body, the finite bodies mov- ing according to one of the Lagrangian solutions of the Problem of Three Bodies. It is then proved that there are twenty-eight, and no more, solutions such that the position of the infinitesimal body is always the same with respect to the finite bodies. An Attempt to Test the Nebular Hypothesis by an Appeal to the Laws of Dynamics. Astrophysical Journal, XI (1900), 102-130. The methods of testing the theory are divided into three categories : (1) comparison of observed phenomena with those which result from the expressed or implied con- ditions maintained by the hypothesis; (2) answers to the question whether the supposed initial conditions could have developed into the existing system ; (3) com- parison of those properties of the supposed initial sys- tem with the one now existing, which are invariant un- der all changes resulting from the action of internal Department of Astronomy and Astrophysics 95 forces. Every test points to a condition of much greater original heterogeneity than has heretofore been sup- posed, and that the nebular hypothesis can be accepted only with radical modifications. A Meteoric Theory of the Gegenschein. As- tronomical Journal, XXI (1900), 17-22. It is shown that, under proper initial conditions, a par- ticle will describe a closed curve around a point op- posite to the sun at a distance of 920,000 miles from the earth. If the necessary initial conditions are approxi- mately fulfilled the particle will revolve around the point for a considerable time. It is suggested that the Gegenschein is due to a multitude of meteors which are circulating around this point. A General Method of Determining the Ele- ments of Orbits of all Eccentricities from Ibid., XXII (1901), Three Observations. 43 52. The features of this investigation are : (1) its complete generality; (2) its mathematical rigor; and (3) its revity. The conditions (1) and (2) have not been pre- viously fulfilled. This method is only about one-fifth as long as those in ordinary use by computers. A Simple Non-Desarguesian Plane Geometry. Transactions of the American Mathemat- ical Society, III (1902), 192-195. This investigation proves some important theorems an- nounced by Hilbert in his Grundlagen der Geometrie in a very simple manner and avoids an error which ap- peared in Hubert's method. On Certain Rigorous Methods of Treating Problems in Celestial Mechanics. The Uni- versity of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, VIII, 117-142. The object of this paper is to show how some of the most impKjrtant problems in celestial mechanics may be treated by methods which are rigorous, at least un- der specified conditions. These problems depend upon the solution of differential equations; consequently the principal methods of integration are treated, and the manner of applying them to astronomical problems is shown. George Willis Ritchey [1897 — ], In- structor in Practical Astronomy and Superintendent of Instrument Construc- tion, Yerkes Observatory. A Support System for Large Specula. Astro- physical Journal, V (1897), 143-147. A description of a new form of support system for the mirrors or si)ecula of large reflecting telescopes, by which "flotation" or uniform support, to prevent flex- ure of the mirror, and at the same time a high degree of stability of iwsition of the mirror in its cell, is secured. Celestial Photography with the 40-inch Visual Telescope of the Yerkes Observatory. Ibid., XII (1900), 352-360. An account of the method of photographingstar-clusters and the moon with the 40-inch • isual telescope, by the aid of yellow color screens and photographic plates sensitized for yellow light. A description of the pho- tographic attachment, and an account of some of the results secured, are included. It is shown that the astronomical photographs obtained by this method are equal, if not superior, in sharpness, to the best results which are obtained with the great photographic refrac- tors. Nebulosity about Nova Persei. Ibid., XIV (1901), 167-168. An account, with illustrations, of the first photograph obtained with the 2-foot reflector of the nebula about the new star. The Two-foot Reflecting Telescope of the Yerkes Observatory. J6id., 217-233. An illustrated description of the new reflector ; its con- struction, and its use in the photography of nebulae. A brief account of the methods of testing the optical parts of this telescope. Mention is made, and an illus- tration given, of the 5-foot reflecting telescope, the optical parts of which are nearly finished. Changes in the Nebulosity about Nova Persei. Ibid., 293-294. An account, with illustrations, of the discovery of rapid change of form of this remarkable nebula, as shown in the photographs obtained with the 2-foot reflector. The nebula is shown to be expanding rapidly in all directions. Later Photographs of the Nebula about Nova Persei. Ibid., XV (1902), 129-131. A preliminary discussion of the thirteen negatives of the nebula about Nova Persei obtained with the 2-foot reflector between September 20, 1901, and March 5, 1902. Illustrated with five plates. Astronomical Photography with the 40-inch Refractor and the Two-foot Reflector of the Yerkes Observatory. With 16 plates. Ar- ticle in The University of Chicago Decen- nial Publications, First Series, VIII. Ferdinand Ellerman [1892 — ], Instruc- tor in Astrophysics at the Yerkes Ob- servatory. On the Spectra of Stars of Secchi's Fourth Type. In collaboration with George EUery Hale. (See above.) The Spectra of Stars of Secchi's Foiuih Type. In collaboration with George Ellery Hale and John Adelbert Parkhurst. (See above.) Walter S. Adams [1898-1900; 1901—], Assistant at the Yerkes Observatory. The Polar Compression of Jupiter. Astro- nomical Journal, XX (1899) 133. A theoretical determination of the compression pf the planet from observations of the motion of the line of aijsides of the fifth satellite made by Professor Barnard with the Yerkes telescope. 96 Publications The Variable Velocity of c Leonis in the Line of Sight. Astrophysical Journal, XI (1900), 307-308. Announcement of the variation of velocity of this star from photographs of its spectrum. The Curvature of the Spectral Lines in the Spectroheliograph. Ibid., 309-311. Derivation of the equations of the curves assumed by the spectral lines on emergence from prisms of consid- erable height, and comparison of the computed results with those observed in the case of the prisms of the Yerkes spectroheliograph. Observations of the Earlier Spectrum of Nova Persei. Ibid., XIV (1901), 158-166. Discussion of the results obtained from the measure- ment and reduction of the Yerkes Observatory photo- graphs of the spectrum of this star. Some Results with the Bruce Spectrograph. Ibid., XV (1902), 214-217. Announcement of the variable radial velocities of o Persei and S Librae. Also measures of the radial ve- locity of Sirius and determination of the parallax of the star from a comparison of these results with those obtained at Potsdam in 1890. Finally, a derivation of the wave-length of the Mg line at A 4481 from fifteen photographs of the spectra of stars in which the line occurs. Radial Velocities of Twenty Stars Having Spectra of the Orion Type. In collabora- tion with Edwin Brant Frost. (See above.) John A. Parkhurst [1901 — ], Assistant at the Yerkes Observatory. Determination of the Wedge Constant of a Stellar Photometer. Astrophysical Jour- nal, XIII (1901), 249-259. In preparing for co-operation with other American observatories in the work of determining "Standards for Faint Stellar Magnitude," the wedge constant of the photometer to be used was determined by the methods of (1) wheel photometer, and (2) standard stars. Maximum of the Variable Star 2815 U Gemi- norum. Astronomical Journal, XXII (1902), 155. Contains photometric magnitudes of this variable star at normal light, also through the maximum of April, 1902 ; with photometric magnitudes of the comparison stars, and micrometer measures of the three nearest faint comparison stars. The Spectra of Stars of Secchi's Fourth Type. In collaboration with George Ellery Hale and Ferdinand Ellerman. (See above.) Norton Adams Kent [1901 — ], Assistant at the Yerkes Observatory. Spark Spectra in Liquids and Gases, and their Bearing on the Spectra of Temporary Stars. In collaboration with George Ellery Hale. (See above.) Frank L. O. Wadsworth [1896-98], Associate Professor of Astrophysics; Director of the Allegheny Observatory. On a New Form of Mounting for Reflecting Telescopes, Devised by the Late Arthur Cowper Ranyard. Astrophysical Journal V (1897), 132-142. A Note on a New Form of Fluid Prism. Ibid., 149. Thermal Measurements with the Bolometer by the Zero Method. Ibid., 268-276. Tables of the Practical Resolving Power of Spectroscopes. Ibid., VI (1897), 27-36. On the Resolving Power of Telescopes and Spectroscopes for Lines of Finite Width. Memorie della Societd, degli Spettroscopisti Italiani, XXVI (1897), 2-22. Also Philo- sophical Magazine, XLIII (1897), 317-343. The Application of the Interferometer to the Measurement of Small Angular Deflections of a Suspended System. Physical Review, IV (1897), 480-497. Ueber das AuflOsungsvermOgen von Femrohren und Spectroskopen f tir Linien von endlicher Breite. Annalen der Physik und Chemie, LXI (1897), 604-630. On the Conditions which determine the Lim- iting Time of Exposure of Photographic Plates in Astronomical Photography. As- tronomische Nachrichten, CXLIV (1897) 97-110. The Effect of the General Illumination of the Sky on the Brightness of the Field at the Focus of a Telescope. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LVII (1897), 586-589. Department of Astronomy and Astrophysics 97 A Note on Spider Lines. Ibid., 589-591. On the Conditions which Determine the Ulti- mate Optical EflSciency of Methods for Ob- serving Small Rotations, and on a Simple Method of Doubling the Accuracy of the Mirror and Scale Method. Philosophical Magazine, XLIV (1897), 83-97. On the Conditions of Maximum Eflficiency in Astrophotographic Work. Part I: General Theory of Telescopic Images of Different Forms of Radiating Sources. Astrophys- ical Journal, VI (1897), 119-135. A Note on the Effect of Heat on Phosphor- escence. Ibid., 153-155. Note on the General Theory of Telescopic Images. Ibid., 463. A Comparison of the Photographic and of the Hand and Eye Methods of Delineating the Surface Markings of Celestial Objects. Popular Astronomy, V (1897), 200-206. Astronomical Photography. Knowledge, XX (1897), 193-195; 218-221. Sur le pouvoir s6parateur des lunettes et de spectroscopes pour les raies de largeurfinie. Journal de physique, VI (1897), 409. A Determination of the Specific Resistance and Temperature Coefficient of Oil in Thin Films and the Application of these Results to the Measurement of the Thickness of Oil Films in Journal Bearings. Physical Review, V (1897), 75-97. On the Photography of Planetary Surfaces. Observatory, XX (1897), 333-341; 365-370; 404-410. On the Conditions Required for Attaining Max- imum Accuracy in the Determination of Specific Heat by the Method of Mixtures. American Journal of Science, IV (1897), 265-282. On the Effect of the Size of an Objective on the Visibility of Linear Markings on the Plan- ets. Astronomical Journal, XVIII (1897), 41^5. On the Reduction of Observations. Observa- tory, XX (1897), 390-392. On the Theory of Lubrication and the De- termination of the Thickness of the Film of Oil in Journal Bearings. Journal of the Franklin Institute, CXLIY (1897), 442-462; CXLV (1898), 61-71. On the Conditions of Maximum Efficiency in Astrophotographic Work. Part II: Effect of Atmospheric Aberration on the Intensity of Telescopic Images. Astrophysical Jour- nal, VII (1898), 70-76. A Note on the Discovery of an Error in the Papers of Struve and Lord Rayleigh Deal- ing with the AppUcation of the Principles of the Wave Theory to the Determination of the Intensity of the Images of Fine Lines and Extended Areas at the Focus of a Tele- scope. Ibid., 77-85. A Note on the Figuring and Use of Eccentric and Unsymmetrical Forms of Parabolic Mir- rors. Ibid.,U6-U9. Notes on the Use of the Grating in Stellar Spectroscopic Work. Ibid., 198-208. A Note on an Error in the Expression for the Intensity of Illumination at the Focal Plane of a Telescope due to an Infinitely Ex- tended Luminous Area. Astronomical Journal, XVIII (1898), 124-126. A Note on a New Form of Mirror for Reflecting Telescopes. Popular Astronomy, V (1898), 518-524. On the *' Worthlessness " of Methods of Geo- metrical Optics in Dealing with the Prob- lems Relating to the Definitive and the Delineating and Resolving Power of Tele- scopes. Ibid., 528-536. A Note on the Result Concerning Diffraction Phenomena Recently Criticised by Mr. New- all. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astro- nomical Society, LVIII, 286-291. Review of Braun, Die Gravitations Constante, die Masse imd mittlere Dichte der Erde. Astrophys- ical Journal, VI (1897), 157-163. (See also under Physics, p. 103.) 98 Publications Thomas Jefferson Jackson See [1892- 98 ] , Instructor in Astronomy ; Professor of Mathematics, United States Naval Observatory, Washington, D. C. Researches on the Evolution of the Stellar Systems. Vol. I: On the Universality of the Law of Gravitation, and on the Orbits and General Characteristics of Binary Stars. 4to, 258, with 50 full page plates. Lynn, Mass., Nichols Press, 1896. Explanation of the Mystery of the Egyptian Phoenix. Astronomy and Astrophysics, XI (1892), 457-461. Concluding Note on the Color of Sirius. Ibid., 550-552. Eight Hundred Measures of Double Stars Made with the Double-Image Micrometer of the 9-inch Refractor of the Royal Observa- tory, Berlin. Beobachtungsergebnisse der koniglichen Sternwarte zu Berlin, VI (1892), 25-33. Die Entwickelxmg der Doppelstem-Systeme. 4to, 60, with 8 lithographic plates. Berlin, R. Friedlander & Sohn, 1892. Evolution of the Double-Star Systems. As- tronomy and Astrophysics, XII (1898), 289- 302. On the Orbit of ^ Sagittarii. Ibid., XII (1893), 510-511. On a Graphical Method of Deriving the Ap- parent Orbit of a Double Star from the Ele- ments. Ibid., 581-585. On the Spectroscopic Application of Doppler's Principle to the Motion of Binary Stars as a Means of Improving Stellar Parallaxes and Orbits, and as an Ultimate Means of Testing the Universality of the Law of Gravi- tation. Ibid., 812-815. On a Practical Method of Determining Double Star Orbits by a Graphical Process, and on the Elements fi and X. Ibid., 865-871. On the Orbits of Double Stars. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXXXIII (1893), 67-68. On the Orbit of a Centauri. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LIV (1893), 102-117. The Secular Perturbations of Uranus Arising from the Action of Neptune, Determined by the Method of Gauss. Astronomical Jour- nal, XIV (1894), 25-28. The Locus of the Center of Gravity for a Ho- mogeneous Ellipsoid of Revolution Differ- ing but Little from a Sphere. Astronomy and Astrophysics, XIII (1894), 627-632. A General Method for Facilitating the Solu- tion of Kepler's Equation by Mechanical Means. Monthly Notices, LV (1895), 425- 429. Observations of Sirius in Ancient Times. Pop- ular Astronomy, II (1895), 193-198. On the Stability of the Equilibrium of the Oceans. Ibid., Ill (1895), 178-182. The Study of Physical Astronomy. Ibid., 249-255; 289-295; 337-343. Provisional Elements of the Orbit of F. 4 Aquarii='^2129. Astronomical Journal, XV (1895), 33-35. Peculiar Illumination of the Moon during the Total Eclipse of March 10. Ibid., 38. Researches on the Orbit of 02285. Ibid., 161-162. Elements of the Orbit of S 3121. Ibid., 101- 102. Researches on the Orbit of y Virginis. Ibid., 129-132. Researches on the Orbit of ^ Herculis. Ibid., 169-171. Researches on the Orbit of /8 Delphini. Ibid., 171-173. Elements of the Orbit of k Pegasi=ft 989. Astronomische Nachrichten, CX XXVII (1895), 360-361. New Elements of the Orbit of 9 Argrws =/8 101. Ibid., CXXXVIII (1895), 149-152. Researches on the Orbit fj,^ Bo6tis='S, 1938. Ibid., 345-350. Department of Astronomy and Astrophysics 99 Kesearches on the Orbit of 2 2173. Ibid., 369- 372. Researches on the Orbit of y Coronae Austra- lis. Ibid., CXXXIX (1895), 169-172. Theory of the Determination, by Means of a Single Spectroscopic Observation, of the Absolute Dimensions, Masses and Paral- laxes of Stellar Systems whose Orbits are Known from Micrometrical Measurements; with a Rigorous Method for Testing the Universality of the Law of Gravitation. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXXXIX (1895), 17-26. On the Theoretical Possibility of Determining the Distances of Star Clusters and of the Milky Way, and of Investigating the Struc- ture of the Heavens by Actual Measure- ment. Ibid., 161-164. Elements of the Orbit of S Equulei - 02 553. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXXXVIII (1895), 25-28. Researches on the Orbit of ^ Bodtis='S, 1888. Ibid., CXXXIX (1895), 341-344. Researches on the Orbit of rj CassiopeicB='S,&). Astronomical Journal, XV (1895), 54-56. Micrometrical Measures of Double Stars Made with the 26-inch Refractor of the Leander McCormick Observatory of the University of Virginia from April 11 to May 5. Ibid., 97-98. Researches on the Orbit of ^ Sagittarii. Ibid., 156-157. Perturbations in the Motion of F 70 Ophiuchi. Ibid., 180. Micrometrical Measures of Double Stars Made with the 40-cm. Refractor of the Washburn Observatory of the University of Wisconsin. Ibid., 188-191. Rediscovery and Measurement of the Com- panion to Sirius at the Lowell Observatory. Ibid., XVII (1896), 1-2. Orbit of 42 Comae Berenicis. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LVI (1896), 511-515. A Sketch of the New 24-inch Refractor of the Lowell Observatory. Popular Astronomy, IV (1896), 297-300. Researches on the Orbit of 70 Ophiuchi and on a Periodic Perturbation of the System aris- ing from the Action of an Unseen Body. AstronomicalJournal, XVI (1896), 17-23. Researches on the Orbit of 99 Herculis. Ibid., XVI (1896), 41^2. New Elements of the Orbit of pi\Q=Lac. 7215. Ibid., 92-93. Researches on the Orbit of y Coronae Borealis. Ibid., 125-127. Results of the Researches on the Orbits of 40 Binary Stars. (Read before the National Academy of Sciences at the Washington Meeting, April 22, 1896.) Ibid., 137-140. Discovery of Three Brilliant Stellar Systems in the Southern Hemisphere. Ibid., XVII (1896), 93-94. Researches on the Orbit of toLeonis. Astro- nomische Nachrichten, CXXXVIII (1896), 373-378. Researches on the Orbit of ^ Ursae Majoris. Ibid., CXXXIX (1896), 163-170. Researches on the Orbit of 85 Pegasi= fi 133. Ibid., CXL (1896), 33-35. Researches on the Orbit of cr Coronae Borealis. Ibid., 35-40. Researches on the Orbit of y Centauri. Ibid., 40-44. Researches on the Orbit of rj Coronae Borealis 2 1937. Ibid., CXLI (1896), 7-12. Discovery of a Companion to Scorpii. Ibid., CXLII (1897), 43-44. On the Magnitude of the Variable Star ri Ca- rinae in 1897. Astronomical Journal, XVII (1897), 119. Note on the Double Star /t Velorum (Russell 155.) J6id., 119. On a new Binary of Short Period in the Con- stellation Dorado =/i 3683. Monthly No- tices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LVII (1897), 398-401. 100 Publications Micrometrical Measures of the Double Stars in the Great Nebulae and Cluster Surround- ing -q Carinae, made with the 24-inch Re- fractor of the Lowell Observatory. Ibid., 541-547. On a New Binary Star with a Period of 5^ Years. Ibid., 577-583. Discovery of Three Close Southern Binaries, ^Velorum, Welorum and \Lupi, Made with the 24-inch Refractor of the Lowell Observatory. Astronomische Nachrichten, CXLIII (1897), 59-60. New Double Stars in the Southern Hemisphere Discovered at the Lowell Observatory. Ibid., 413-416. Atmospheric Conditions Essential to the Best Telescopic Definition. Ibid., CXLIV (1897), 81-86. On the Cause of Certain Rays and Fringes Noticed about Images of the Fixed Stars. Ibid., 85-88. On the Cause of the Failure of Photography to Depict Delicate Phenomena which are Projected into a Luminous Field. Ibid., 267-270. The Physical Significance of the Rotation Pe- riods of Mercury and Venus, established by Mr. Lowell's Recent Observations. Pop- ular Astronomy, IV (1897), 533-535. The Study of Planetary Detail. Ibid., 550- 555. The Aims of Stellar Astronomy. Ibid., V (1897), 194-200. On the Study of Astronomy and on Educa- tional Ideals. Ibid., 429-434. Micrometrical Measures of 70 Ophiuchi, with Remarks on the Perturbations of the Sys- tem. Astronomical Journal, XVII (1897), 180-181. Remarks on the Rediscovery of the Companion of Sirius, and on the Elements of the Orbit. Ibid., XVIII (1897), 75-77. Measures of the Fifth Satellite of Jupiter. Ibid., XIX (1898), 52. Researches on the System of Procyon. Ibid., 57-61. Discoveries and Measures of 500 Double and Multiple Stars in the Southern Hemisphere, made with the 61 -cm. Refractor of the Lowell Observatory. Astronomical Jour- nal, XVIII (1898), 181-218. On the Nature of the Small Air Waves Visible in Currents Observed through Telescopes. Ibid., 353-356. On the Cause of the Scintillation of the Fixed Stars. Ibid., 355-360. Researches on the Orbit of the New Binary yS 395 = 82 Ceti. Ibid., 359-362. On the Nature of the Orbit of y Lupi. Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, LVIII (1898), 15-18. Micrometrical Measures of the Double Stars P 883, Sirius, and Procyon. Ibid., 385-387. Further Researches on the Orbit of y Lupi. Ibid., 450-453. Comparison of the Atmospheric Conditions in the Central and Eastern Portions of the United States with those in the High Pla- teaus of the South West. Popular As- tronomy, VI (1898), 65-70. Jupiter's Satellites Visible to the Naked Eye. Ibid., 257-261. Micrometrical Measures of Double and Mul- tiple Stars in the Southern Hemisphere, Made with the 61-cm. Refractor of the Lowell Observatory. Astronomische Nach- richten, CXLVI (1898), 225-294. FoBEST Ray Moulton, Ph.D. 1899. (See above.) S. A. Mitchell, Graduate student. The Direct Concave Grating Spectroscope. Astrophysical Journal, X (1899), 29-39. A continuation of work begun in the Johns Hopkins University, in applying Rowland's concave grating to photographing stellar spectra. Measures made on the ultra-violet hydrogen series, and on the spectrum of the nebula of Orion. Department op Physics 101 Stanley C. Reese, Graduate student. The Field of the Reflecting Telescope. As- trophysical Journal, XII (1900), 219- 227. A purely theoretical study of the curvature of field and the shape of star-images in a reflecting telescope. The analytical methods suggested by Kirchhoff are adapted to the case of the paraboloid of revolution, and general formulae are derived for the location of the foci of a pencil of light incident on any portion of the reflecting surface. Deductions are made against the proposed use of curved photographic plates. William H. Wright, Graduate student. A Method of Correcting the Ciurvature of Lines in the Spectroheliograph. /6.,V (1897), 325-7. It is suggested that the monochromatic light used be returned through the prism train, or sent through an- other one suitably arranpred, the unused parts of the spectrum having been diaphragmentahalides are devised and described, as well as very simple experiments which show the influence of an excessof one ion in a case of electrolytic dissociation on the ion of opposite charge. Ammonium hydroxide is shown to be a weaker base in the presence of an ammonium salt, e. g., the chloride, than it is in its absence. Notes on Nitrogen Halogen Derivatives. In collaboration with E. E. Slosson. Proceed- ings of the Chemical Society (London), XVI (1900), 1-2. Progress is reported on the work of nitrogen halogen derivatives and attention is called to the striking sta- bility of some of the chlorimidoesters as compared with other nitrogen halides. Die Constitution der Acylhalogenalkylamide. In collaboration with E. E. Slosson. Be- richte der deutschen chemischen Gesell- schaft, XXXIV (1901), 1613-1616. Chemists have assumed that the above compounds con- tain the halogen atom attached to the nitrogen atom, without having any direct experimental proof of the 108 Publications correctness of the assumption. Positive evidence is brought, proving the question, by preparing acetylchlor- amylamin, CHaCOCNClC.H,,), both from acetylamyl- amid and hypochlorous acid and from amylchloramin, CbH,,NHC1, and acetic anhydride. On Positive and Negative Halogen Ions. Jour- nal of the American Chemical Society, XXIII (1901), 797-799. The view, presented for some years at the University, is now published, that the three halogens, chlorine, bromine, and iodine, form positive as well as negative halogen ions, and notably hypochlorous, hypobromous, and nypoiodous acid give positive chlorine, bromine, and iodine ions. The action of hydrochloric acid on hypochlorous acid is considered an ionic one : HO + CI + HOCl + H + CI ±5 CI, + H,0, etc., hypochlorous acid, like aluminium hydroxide, ionizing both as a base and as an acid. Attention is called, for the first time, to the important fact that Jakowkin's experiments, proving that the hydrolysis of chlorine takes place according to HOCl + H + CI ±^ H,0 + Cl„ etc., also may be said to actually prove the existence of posi- tive chlorine ions. On the " Beckmann Rearrangement." The Uni- versity of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, IX, 73-88, The various interpretations of this characteristic mo- lecular rearrangement, including the one advanced by the author, are discussed critically in the light of ex- perimental facts, especially of new ones established by the author's work with a number of collaborating stu- dents. The actual facts are found to agree best with the author's theory of the reaction. Studies on Chemical Equilibrium and Reaction Velocities by Conductivity Methods. In collaboration with Ira H. Derby and H, T. Upson, Fellow in Chemistry. The Univer- sity of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, IX. The determination, by conductivity methods, of the conditions of equilibrium in the hydrolytis of salts of weak bases (anilines) and strong acids in the presence of an excess of the acid was studied experimentally and theoretically. The results were applied to a de- termination of the reaction velocities of the rearrange- ment of o-aminophenylcarbonates into oxyphenylure- thanes. Review of H. C. Jones, The Elements of Physical Chem- istry. Journal of the American Chemical Society, XXIV (1902), 588-591. Objection is raised in the review to the persistency of the writers of our best modern books on physical chem- istry (Ostwald, Nernst, Walker, Jones, etc.) in accept- ing Ostwald's theory of the cause of the change of color of the indicators for acids and alkalies, and in paying no heed to developments in organic chemical research, which make Ostwald's theory untenable. Whereas Ostwald seeks to explain the change of color on the basis of a change simply from the non-ionized to the ionized condition and vice versa, the real cause of the change of color, as must follow from Bernthsen and others' work on phenolphtalein, etc., must lie in a change of constitution of the molecule, affecting a chromophoric group. This view is in far better accord with our whole knowledge of the cause of color in organic compounds than Ostwald's is. John Charles Hessleb [1899 — ], In- structor in Chemistry. Alkyl Malonic Nitriles and their Derivatives. Doctor's thesis. American Chemical Jour- nal, XXII (1899), 169-198. A study of ethyl and benzyl malonic nitriles and allied substances. The sodium and silver salts of these nitriles give, when decomposed, sodium cyanide and silver cyanide, respectively. This fact shows that tho metal is probably bound to nitrogen. Herbeet Newby McCoy [1901 — ], In- structor in Chemistry. Die Einwirkung von Aluminiumchlorid auf die Chloride von Carbodiphenylimide, I and II. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesell- schaft, XXX (1897), 1090-1094 and 1682- 1693. In these two papers the constitution of a condensation product of carbodiphenylimide is completely deter- mined. The condensation throws light on the nature of salts of carbimide bases. On the Hydrochlorides of Carbophenylimide Derivatives. Doctor's thesis. American Chemical Journal, XXI (1899), 111-167. The question as to the constitution of salts of imido bases was investigated experimentally as follows : (1) The hydrochloride of brommethenyl o-aminophenol, BrC ( = NCsHtO — ) , was found to be identical with the hydrobromide of chlormethenyl o-aminophenol, C1C(= NCgH^O — ). Excluding molecular rearrange- ment, which IS very unlikely under the conditions of the experiment, the constitution of the salt must be represented by ClBrC ( NHCeHiO- ), both halogen atoms being attached to carbon. (2) The salts of the bases iust mentioned were proved to be true salts, i. e., capable of ionization, by converting them into other salts — nitrates, chlorplatinates. etc. (3) The behavior of the hydrochlorides of carbodiphenylimide, C.HgNs C = NCaHj, toward aluminium chloride is very simply explained if these salts are considered as salts of carbon bases. The constitution of the condensation f products resulting from the action was definitely estab- ished, and these products, anilido quinazoline bases, were exhaustively studied. An Apparatus for Determining Molecular Weights by the Boiling-Point Method. Ibid., XXIII (1900), 353-360. Landsberger's method was modified by combining the functions of the boiling vessel and the jacket. The new apparatus has all the advantages of that of Lands- berger's. In addition, it is more compact and to a great extent prevents the excessive condensation of the solvent in the solution. This allows many determina- tions to be made with the same portion of the dissolved substance. Determinations were made of the molecu- lar weights of various substances in a number of sol- vents. The results were very satisfactory. Notiz liber die Einwirkung von Phenylhydra- zine auf einige 1 : 4 Diketone. In collabora- tion with Alexander Smith. (See above.) Depabtment op Chemistbt 109 Equilibrium in the System Composed of Sodium Carbonate, Sodium Bicarbonate, Carbon Dioxide, and Water. The Univer- sity of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, IX, lOa-122. The equilibrim between sodium carbonate and sodium bicarbonate in water solution in contact with a vapor phase of variable carbon dioxide content was studied theoretically and experimentally. From the results so obtained the degree of hydrolytic dissociation in a solution of sodium carbonate was calculated, and the ionization constant of sodium bicarbonate, as an acid, determined. Lauder W. Jones [1897 — J, Instructor in Chemistry. On Salts of Nitroparaffins and Acylated De- rivatives of Hydroxylamine. Doctor's thesis. American Chemical Journal, XX (1898), 1-51. Confirms the work of Nef on nitroparaffins. The action of benzoylchloride on sodium isonitroethane leads to the formation of benzoylacethydroxamic acid, CeHjCOjNH. CO. CH3, arising probably from the pri- mary reaction product, CH3CH = NO. OCOCeHj, by in- tramolecular oxidation. The above acid is in part con- verted by further action of the acylchloride into the two isomeric dibenzoylacethydroxamic acids, CsHbCOjN. (CeH.CO) (CH3CO) and C.H„CO,N = C (CH,) (OCOC^Hj). Formhydroxamic acid and some of its derivatives were also studied. Nitromethane was con- verted quantitatively through a _ basic mercury salt into fulminate of mercury and a simple explanation of the reaction was presented. The behavior of oxyme- thane toward alkyliodides and benzoylchloride is described. Willis B. Holmes [1900 — ], Research and Laboratory Assistant in Chemistry. On Amorphous Sulphur. In collaboration with Alexander Smith. (See above.) Iba H. Debby [1901 — ], Research and Laboratory Assistant. Studies on Chemical Equilibrium and Reaction Velocities by Conductivity Methods. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. (See above.) Henby N. Stokes [1892-93], Assistant Professor of Chemistry ; United States Geological Survey, Washington, D. C On Diamido-Orthophosphoric and Diamido- Trihydroxylphosphoric Acids. Am^erican Chemical Journal, XVI (1894), 123-154. Two amido-phosphoric acids are described, one dia- mido orthophosphoric acid, PO(OH) (NH,),, derived from common orthophosphoric acid, the other, diamido- trihydroxylphosphoric acid, P(OH)3 (NH,),, derivable from the hypothetical pentabasic acid, P{0H)5. Well characterized salts of the second acid were prepared ; the free acid, however, was found to be unstable, pass- ing at once on liberation into the ortho compouna. Note on Monamido-phosphoric Acid. Ibid., 154^156. By the action of dry ammonia at 0* on ethyl monochlor- phosphate and saponification of the ether formed, pri- mary sodium amido-phosphate was obtained. Edwabd a. Schneideb [1892-94], Assist- ant Professor of Inorganic Chemistry. Einwirkung von Phosphortrichlorid auf Mag- nesium Nitrid. Zeitschrift fur anorgani- sche Chemie, VII (1894), 358. The attempt is described to prepare a phosphorus nitride by the action of phosphorus trichloride on magnesium nitride at red heat. The attempt was un- successful. Zur Kenntniss des colloidalen Silbers. Ibid., 339-340. The action of a series of organic solvents on the alcohol solution of colloidal silver was studied. No general rules were discernible for the formation or non-forma- tion of a precipitate of coagulated silver. Ueber einige Methoden zur Abscheidung dei Phosphorsaure als phosphorsaures Alkali aus den Phosphaten des Kalkes und Eisen- oxydes. Ibid., 386-391. A method for the technical separation of phosphoric acid from natural phosphates, etc., is developed from a study of the properties of solutions of ferric phosphates in ferric chloride and sulphate solutions. Kritische Studien auf dem Gebiete der Chemie des Titans. Ibid., VIII (1895), 85-97. The product prepared from xx>tassium titanium fluoride by reduction with sodium in a stream of hydrogen con- tains oxygen, and, besides other impurities, hydrogen. It could not be determined whether the product is a hydride or a hydroxide or whether it contains the hydrogen simply in solution. The facts are against the supposition that the reduction product consists exclu- sively of a suboxide of titanium. Two nitrides of tita- nium probably exist. The higher, indigo-blue nitride, goes at a white heat into a lower yellow and stable nitride. A crystallized sulphide of titanium was ob- tained, but no titanium chloroform. Felix Lengfeld [1892-1901], Assistant Professor of Inorganic Chemistry. Inorganic Chemical Preparations. 8vo, xviii + 55. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1899. A laboratory manual for advanced students of inorganic chemistry. Derivatives of Nitrogen Halogen Compounds. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. 110 Publications American Chemical Journal^ XV (1893), 215-222; 504-518. The determination of the constitution of the products formed by the action of sodium methylate on succini- mide bromide, showed that bromine had been replaced by the methoxy group, but only after a " Beckmann rearrangement of the molecule, urethanes, etc., re- sulted. On Nitrogen Halogen Compounds. Ihid., XVI (1894), 370-372. A continuation of the above. The Action of Phosphorus Pentachloride on Urethanes. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. Ihid., 70-78. This gave a convenient niethod for converting urethanes into ureas, and the easiest known method for prepar- ing aromatic ureachlorides. The action of hydrogen chloride on chloro-formjihenylimidoethers was studied with results which promise to be of importance relative to the constitution of carbimido salts and in connec- tion with the general theory of saponification and esterification. Ueber Alkylisoharnstoff e (Imidocarbaminsaure- ather). In collaboration with Julius Stieg- litz. Berichte der deutschen chemischen GeselUchaft, XXVII (1894), 926-927. Describes the preparation of a new class of interesting bases. Ueber die Ester der SSure H2S2O2 (Thioschwe- fligesaure). Ibid., XXVIII (1895), 449-451. Esters of thiosulphurous acid were made and studied. Ueber Thiamine. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. Ibid., 575-576; 2742-2744. Tetraethyl thiodiamine and a polymerized thiethyla- mine were obtained and described. They contain sul- phur bound to nitrogen in a very simple form. On Imidoethers of Carbonic Acid. In collab- oration with Julius Stieglitz. American Chemical Journal, XVII (1895), 93-113. More evidence of the constitution of the salts of imido- ethers was obtained in spite of the fact that the salts themselves proved too unstable to be isolated in all cases. Sur un nouveau carbure de zirconium. In col- laboration with H. Moissan. Comptes rendus, CXXII (1896), 651-656. Work begun in Paris in Professor Moissan's laboratory and finished here. Zirconic oxide was obtained by a new method and a new carbide of zirconium prepared in the electric furnace and studied. ' The Action of Ammonia and Amines on Chlo- ride of Silicon. American Chemical Jour- nal, XXI (1897), 531-537. A systematic study of the reactions of silicon chlorides and nitrogen compounds, in which it is shown that ammonia reacts with silicon chloride to form ammo- nium chloride and silicon tetramide ; the latter loses ammonia and gives silicon diimide. Ethylamine and silicon tetrachloride give silicon tetretbylamiue. On Gold Halides. Ibid., 324-332. Some new observations on aurous chloride and bromide and on aurous bromaurate and bromauric acid are given. The Influence of Electrical Waves on Chemical Action. In collaboration with J. H. Ran- som. Journal of Physical Chemistry, V (1901), 502. It was shown that long electric waves (300m) do not perceptibly affect the action of hydrogen and chlorine or of hydrogen and oxygen. A New Proof of the Formula ^ ±^^?^=. ibid., 499-501. A simpler proof of the above formula than that given by van't Hoff is developed. It is shown that the spe- cific heat of a liquid must be greater than that of its solid or vai>or, within the same range of temperature. Some Applications to Chemistry of J. J. Thom- son's Work on the Structure of the Atom. Ibid., 639-642. The work of Thomson on the structure of the atom is used to elucidate some generally accepted theories, more particularly the ionic theory, the solution tension theory^ and the periodic law. Applied to the ionic theory, the dissociation products of sodium chloride in aqueous solutions consist of chlorine atoms plus a corpuscle and sodium atoms minus a corpuscle. The chlorine ion has therefore a greater mass, the sodium ion a smaller mass, than the corresponding atom. It is thought that tnis theory explains the heavy charges of the ions, whose origin has seemed the weak spot of the ionic theory. Applied to the periodic system, Thomson's theory sug- gests to the author that the arrangement of the cor- guscles in an atom is that of Mayer's group of magnets oating in a magnetic field. Of the thousands of pos- sible atoms, comparatively few were stable under the conditions of formation. They were formed and are our elements. Some readily lose or take up one, two, or more corpuscles and form the univalent, bivalent, etc., elements. Others neither take nor give up cor- puscles and may form the helium-argon group. Accept- ing the Mayer arrangement, each atom is made up of a nucleus and a periphery. The group properties might depend on the nucleus, e. g., chlorine, bromine, and iodine might have the same nucleus. Richard S. Curtiss [1894-97], Decent in Chemistry; Professor of Chemistry, Union College, Schenectady. On Some Experiments with Acetylacetone and Acetoacetic Ether. American Chemical Journal, XVII (1895), 435-443. Silver acetylacetone gives with ethyl iodide equal amounts of ethylacetvlacetone ether, CH3COCH = C(OCoHb)CH3. and of the isomeric acetyl ethylacetone, CH3CO .C(C2H5)=C(0H)CH3. Acetoacetic ether gives, with alcohol alone or in the presence of hydrogen chlo- ride, as primary product ethoxyisocrotonic ether, CH3C(OC,H„) = CH.C02C3H5. An experimental dis- cussion of the action of bromine on acetoacetic ether is included in the paper. On Some Malonic Acid Derivatives. Ibid., XIX (1899), 691-701. By the action of aniline on ethyl brommalonate, the ha- logen is replaced by the anilido-group without affecting Department op Chemistby 111 the carbethoxyl ^oups, ethyl anilido malonate result- ing. The oxidation of this body by mercuric oxide led to the unexpected formation of ethyl dianilido malon- ate, (C.H NH)., C(COOC,Hb),. These bodies, as well as ethyl diethoxy malonate, are described and discussed. Adolph Bebnhard [1894-98, 1899-1900], Assistant in Chemistry. Ueber die Einfuhrung von Acylen in den Ben- zoylessigather. Doctor's thesis. Liebigs Annalen der Chemie, CCLXXXII (1894), 15a-191. A study of the action of acyl-chlorides on salts 9f benzoylacetic ether. The action of acetic and benzoic anhydrides on benzoylacetoacetic ether, benzoylacetic ether, and oxalacetic ether is investigated and found to give evidence in favor of the phenole-like character of the compounds. Proof is brought forward that the diacylated substitution products of the compounds, E-COH [R=CH3 or C.Hs; R =CH3, C.H, or OC,Hg], II H-C-COR contain one acyl bound to oxygen, and the other bound to the carbon atom. Henry Chalmers Biddle [1900-01], Assistant in Chemistry; Instructor in Chemistry, University of California. Ueber Derivate des Isuretins der Formhydrox- amsSure und ihre Beziehungen zur Knall- sfiure. Doctor's thesis. Liebigs Annalen der Chemie, CCX (1900), 1-29. Addition products of the as yet unknown fulminic ethers, RON = C, were obtained and studied, for in- instance, the isuretinethers, RON : CH .NH,, and the formhydroximic ethers. C6H5CH,ON = CH(OC.H,) and CaH.CHjON = CHfO .COCH,). Each of the last two bodies was obtained in two stereoisomeric modifi- cations. The study of the alkyl and acyl derivatives of formylchloroxime, R0N=CHC1, proved particularly interesting. In contrast to formylchloroxime it?elf, which breaks down with great reacliness into hydrogen chloride and fulminic acid, its alkylated and acylated derivatives are exceedingly stable: they boil without decomposition and no reagent was fi und which would cause the loss of hydrogen chloride and the formation of the unknown fulminic ethers. The acetate, CH3COiN= CHCl, gives, however, with silver nitrate silver fulmi- nate, AgON— C. Thus the relations of formhydroxamic acid to fulminic acid was established experimentally. The Reduction of Copper by Solutions of Fer- rous Sulphate. American Chemical Jour- nal, XXVI (1901), 377-382, A study of the chemical conditions for the genesis of the native copper deposits. The conclusion was reached that the precipitation of metallic copper by ferrous salts is a reversible reaction, whose course is conse- quently dependent in every case on the relative concen- trations of ferrous, ferric, and copper ions. Massuo Ikuta [1892-99], Instructor in Chemistry. Metamidophenol and its Derivatives. Ameri- can Chemical Journal, XV (1893), 39-44. Adolph Bebnhard, Ph.D. 1894. (See above.) Henry Chalmers Biddle, Ph.D. 1900, (See above.) Frank Burnett Dains, Ph.D. 1898; Pro- fessor of Chemistry, Washburne Col- lege, Topeka, Kas. On the Isoureaethers and other Derivatives of Ureas. Doctor's thesis. Journal of the American Chemical Society, XX (1899), 136-192. The methods of preparing aromatic isoureaethers and the properties of these compounds were investigated. it was found that by replacing the alkyl (E) of the imidoethers, RC(:N Alph)0R, by a basic anilido group to form the isonrea, (Alph NH) C( : N Alph)OR , the character of the molecule is profoundly modified, these isoureas having lost the marked reactivity of the imidoethers toward water and toward amines. If, however, the alphyl groups are replaced by the more negative carbethoxy groups, most of tha reactivity of the imido-ethers is regained. Otto Knute Folin, Ph.D. 1898; Chemist and Physiologist, McLean Hospital, Waverly, Mass. On Urethanes. Doctor's thesis. American Chemical Journal, XIX (1897), 323-352. The negative or positive character of the alkyl group (R) in acid broraamides, RCONHBr, was shown not to affect the "Beckmann rearrangement." which takes place equally well with either kind of alkyl. This is evidence against Hoogewerff and Van Dorp's interpreta- tion of this interesting rearrangement. The action of acid chlorides, especially phosgene, on urethanes is investigated. _ The silver salt of carbonyl-diurethane is described, which is important for the theory of the salts of acid amides and especially of the salts of uric acid. James H. Garner, Ph.D. 1897 ; Professor of Chemistry, V7abash College, Ind. Condensations with Benzoin by Means of So- dium Ethylate. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 28. Chicago, 1897. An experimental investigation was made of the action of sodium ethylate on benzoin in the presence of ethyl alcohol. Ketoles were condensed with benzalacetone, cinnamic aldehyde, and benzalacetophenone. Berhard C. Hesse, Ph.D. 1896; Chem- ist, Badische Anilin- und Soda-Fabrik, New York, On Malonic Nitrile and Some of its Derivatives. Doctor's thesis. American Chemical Jour- nal, XVIII (1896), 72a-751. The object of the investigation was to study some of the derivatives of malonic nitrile and to ascertain, if 112 Publications possible, whether in its salts the metal is bound to nitrogen or to carbon. To this purpose the action of alkylhalides on the silver and sodium salts was studied. The results were in favor of the assumption that the metal is bound to nitrogen in the salts, a conclusion which was in accord with Nef's work on the salts of prussic acid, of the nitro-paraffins and of acetoacetic ether and its congeners. John C. Hessler, Ph.D. 1899. (See above.) Elizabeth Jeffreys, Ph.D. 1898; High School, Clyde, 111. Ueber die Darstellung der hOheren Amine der aliphatischen Reihe: Pentadecylamin. Be- richte der deutschen chemischen Gesell- schaft, XXX (1897), 898-901. The work improves very materially the preparation of such amines from acid amides according to Hofmann's method. Pentadecylamine and some of its derivatives are described. On the Preparation of the Higher Aliphatic Amines: Undecyl- and Pentadecyl-Amine. Doctor's thesis. American Chemical Jour- nal, XXH (1899), 14rA6. The paper describes in detail (see previous paper) a new method for preparing primary amines by the action of bromine and sodium methylate on acidamides in methyl alcohol solution and subsequent decomposition of the urethanes thus formed by distillation with lime. The_ resulting amines were proved to be primary by their conversion into the corresponding isocyanates, mustard oils, and alcohols. Two new amines of the normal aliphatic series were especially studied, namely, undecyl- and pentadecyl-amine. From the former a new normal alcohol, n-undecylalcohol, was prepared. Incidentally it was shown that the formation of acyl- ureas, when bromine and sodium methylate act on acidamides, under certain conditions, is not, without closer investigation, in accord with the theory that isocyanates are intermediate products of the "Beck- mann rearrangement " (see p. 107). Lauder W. Jones, Ph.D. 1897. (See above.) Herbert N. McCoy, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) Ralph Harper McKee, Ph.D. 1901 ; As- sistant Professor of Chemistry, Lake Forest University. Ueber die Darstellung von Alkylisoharnstoffen aus Cyanamiden. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. (See above.) Ueber die Sauerstoffather der Harnstoffe: Methylisoharnstoff. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. (See above.) Ueber Methylisoharnstoff. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. (See above.) On the Oxygen Ethers of the Ureas: Methyl- and Ethylisourea. Doctor's thesis. Ameri- can Chemical Journal, XXVI (1901), 209- 264. This article gives the results of a systematic investiga- tion of the simple and asymmetrically substituted isourea ethers, and it includes a study of the methods of preparation (see the three previous papers), the action of water on the isoureas, of hydrochloric acid, amines, acylchlorides, and phenylisocyanate. A proxi- mate quantitative determination of the amount of hydrolysis of the hydrochlorides was carried out. William McPherson, Ph.D. 1899; Pro- fessor of Chemistry, University of Ohio. Ueber die Natur der Oxyazo-KOrper. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, XXVIII (1895), 2414-2418. The study of the action of monoacylated phenylhydra- zines on benzoquinone has led to results which prove that the free oxyazo-compounds, their salts and esters possess the constitution : HO .CeH* N,CeH., MO .CgH^N, C, H, and AO .CeH* N, CeH.. On the Nature of the Oxyazo Compounds. Doctor's thesis. American Chemical Jour- nal, XXII (1899), 364-383. The experiments leading to the conclusion mentioned in the abstract of the previous paper are more fully described. The action of a-acylated and a-alkylated phenylhydrazines on paraquinonea and on /3-naphto- quinone-hydrazone is studied. The preparation and reactions of quinonebenzoylphenylhydrazone and de- rivatives of P-naphtoquinonebenzoylphenylhydrazone are described. James H. Ransom, Ph.D. 1899 ; Instructor in Chemistry, Purdue University, La- fayette, Ind. Ueber die Reduktion von Athyl-o-Nitrophenyl- carbonat und iiber o-Oxyphenylurethan. Be- richte der deutschen chemischen Gesell- schaft, XXXI (1898), 1055-1066. The substance obtained by Bender in the reduction of theabovenitro body is proved to possess the constitution HO .CsH* .NHC0,C,H., or O .C,H«NHC(OH)OCaH.. A preliminary study of its aoyl derivatives favors the latter constitution. On the Molecular Rearrangement of o-Amino- phenylethylcarbonate to o-Oxyphenylur- Department op Chemistby 113 ethane. Doctor's thesis. American Chem- ical Journal, XXIII (1900), 1-50. On reducing ethyl o-nitrophenylcarbonate in acid solu- tion a molecular rearrangement leads to the formation of o-oxyphenylurethane. The constitution of the latter was found to be that of a true phenol, HO .CsH* NHCOOCjHb, by the action of diazomethane. The first product of the reduction, aminophenylcarbonate, was successfully isolated and it was found to rearrange spontaneously and completely in a few hours into the above urethane. The bearing of the work on the con- stitution of salts of carbimide bases is discussed. Ueber o-Oxyphenylurethane und o-Aminophe- nylathylcarbonate. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft, XXIII (1900), 199- 205. (See the previous paper.) The Influence of Electrical Waves on Chem- ical Action. In collaboration with Felix Lengfeld. (See above.) Waeben Kufus Smith, Ph.D. 1894; Pro- fessor of Chemistry, Lewis Institute, Chicago, 111. On the Addition Products of Aromatic Isocy- anides. Doctor's thesis. American Chem- ical Journal, XVI (1894), 372-393. A study was made of paratolylisocyanide and its addi- tion products on the basis of Nef's work on phenyliso- cyanide. Addition products were obtained with chlo- rine, sulphur, hydrogen sulphide, mercaptans, alcohols, hydrogen, amines, and acylchlorides. Samuel Ellis Swaetz, Ph.D. 1896; Broadus Classical and Scientific Insti- tute, Clarksburg, W. Va. The Action of Sodium Ethylate on Broma- mides. Doctor's thesis. American Chem- ical Journal, XIX (1897), 295-321. The action of dry sodium methylate and of sodium ethylate in ethyl alcohol solution on a number of brom- amides was studied. In every case a "Beckmann rearrangement" took place. A number of new ure- thanes, isocyanates and ureas were studied. John L. Bbidge, Graduate student. Ueber die Ather des Chinonoxims (p. Nitroso- phenols). Liebigs Annalen, CCLXXVII (1893), 59-78. Nitrosophenole-salts give with alkyliodides and acyl chlorides derivatives of quinone oxime, O : C.H* : NOR. These compounds behave like quinone and form dibro- mides and dichlorides O : GeH^X, : NOR, which dissoci- ate with remarkable ease. F. W. Bushong, Graduate student. On Benzimidomethyl- and Benzimidoethyl- ethers. American Chemical Journal, XVIII (1896), 490-491. The paper describes the properties of the free imido- ethers mentioned in the title ; they were obtained pure, distilled and analyzed for the first time. Walteb Dilthey, Ph.D. Kesearch stu- dent. Trockene Destination fettsaurer Salze. Be- richte der deutschen chemischen Gksell- schaft, XXXIV (1901), 2115-2125. The products of the dry distillation of calcium isova- lerianate were determined as consisting of the gases isobutylene, in quantity, small quantities of propjrlene, ethylene, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, nydrogen, methane and ethane, and of the liquids valeral, metnyl- isobutylketone, a ketone, CtHhO, valerone and an iso- mer and large quantities of higher ketones. These are formed, most liiely, by the action of the olefines on the lower ketones. William E. Henderson, Ph.D. Research student. Reaction of Orthodiazobenzoic Acid with Sul- phurous Acid and Copper Powder. Ameri- can Chemical Journal, XXI (1899), 206- 210. The investigation had as its object the purjxjse of test- ing the truth of the statement frequently found that sulphonic acids result from the decomposition of diazo compounds in the presence of sulphurous acid and cop- per powder. The experiments showed that such sul- phonic acids do not result from this reaction ; in one case dithiosalicylic acid was isolated as the chief product of the action. Edwin E. Slosson, Graduate student. Ueber die Einwirkung von unterbromiger und imterchloriger Saure auf Sam-eanilide. Be- richte der deutschen chemischen Gesell- schaft, XXVIII (1895), 3265-3270. The paper describes the preparation of acid bromani- lides and reserves the study of these compounds in con- nection with the study of the " Beckmann rearrange- ment." Notes on Nitrogen Halogen Derivatives. In collaboration with JuHus Stieglitz. (See above.) Die Constitution der Acylhalogenalkylamide. In collaboration with Julius Stieglitz. (See above.) 114 Publications Henry L, student. Wheeleb, Ph.D. Kesearch On the Action of Benzimidomethylether on Aromatic Ortho-Compounds. American Chemical Journal, XVII (1895), 397-403. Benzimidomethylether is described and its action on orthoumidophenol, orthoamidothiophenol, orthophe- nylenediamine and orthotoluylenediamine. These reac- tions resulted in the formation of anhydro bases. On Halogen Addition Products of the Anilides. Ibid., 612-617. The paper contains a description of the bromination of m-nitroacetanilide. A comparatively stable bromine addition compound was isolated as the first product of the action of bromine on the anilide. By loss of hydro- bromic acid the so-called substitution product is ob- tained. This is the first halogen addition product that has been obtained in the case of anilides. On the Action of Bromine on Metanitraniline. Ibid., 697-704. The paper contains a study of the action of bromine on m-nitraniline under various conditions. K. W. Wood, Graduate student. The Action of Salts on Acids. American Chemical Journal, XV (1893), 663-670. Diastase is an excellent indicator for weak acids and bases, and it was used to show the extent of hydrolysis of salts and the weakening of weak acids by their salts. The Affinity Constants of Weak Acids and the Hydrolysis of Salts. Ibid., XVI (1894), 315- 335. The hydrolysis of salts as described in the previous paper was more fully determined, as well as the affinity constants of some weak acids. XXI. GEOLOGY Thomas Chrowder Chamberlin [1892-], Professor and Head of the Department of Geology. Glacial Studies in Greenland. The Univer- sity of Chicago Decennial Publications, Second Series, Vol. XIII. A detailed description of about fifteen Greenland ice tongues, and of a portion of the main ice cap. dwelling especially upon the significant features, followed by a chapter on generalizations, a chapter on experiments, a chapter on theoretical deductions, and a chapter on the applicability of the generalizations and deductions to the great ice invasions of the past. Some Additional Evidences Bearing on the In- terval between the Glacial Epochs. Bulle- tin of the Geological Society of America, X, I (1892), 469-480. Also Transactions of the Wisconsin Academy of Science, Arts, and Letters, VIII, 1892. Cites evidences that the altitude of the continent was low at the close of the earlier glacial epoch, as then recognized; that in the interglacial epoch it became higher, and that during the later epoch the glacial drainage was carried down ample trenches cut during the interval. On the Kelationship of the Pleistocene to the Pre-Pleistocene Formations of the Missis- sippi Basin South of the Limit of Glacia- tion. In collaboration with RoUin D. Salis- bury. Abstract. American Naturalist, XXVI (1892), 48-49. Glacial Succession in the United States. Ab- stract. American Geologist, XII (1892), 227-228. Paper read before the World's Congress of Geology. The Horizon of Drumlin, Osar, and Kame For- mation. Journal of Geology, I (1893), 255- 268. Defines the term "englacial," and describes the move- ments of englacial material rrom the bottom of the ice sheet to limited heights and the agents of its transpor- tation. Describes the drumlin area of Wisconsin, and the bowlder trains and bowlder belts of Ohio, Indiana, and Illinois. Concludes that the osars and kames or the latter region are formed of basal material. The Nature of the Englacial Drift of the Mis- sissippi Basin. Ibid., 47-61. Discusses the cause of the movement of basal material upward into the body of a glacier. Describes the course of several bowlder belts through Indiana, their rela- tions to terminal moraines, and the characters that distinguished them from the average bowlders of the till, and concludes that they represent englacial and superglacial transportation. The Diversity of the Glacial Period. Ameri- can Journal of Science, Third Series, XLV (1893), 171-200. A rejoinder to a paper on "The Unity of the Glacial Period," by G. F. Wright, in the same journal. Classification of Pleistocene Deposits. Con- gr^s giologique international, compte rendu, fifth session, 1893, 176-192, 207. Discusses the classification of Pleistocene glacial de- posits, based upon the origin of the formations. Further Studies of the Drainage Features of the Upper Ohio Basin. In collaboration Department of Geology 115 with Frank Leverett. American Journal of Science, Third Series, XL VII (1894), 247- 283; 483. Describes the drainage features and erosion of the Upper Ohio tributaries, the old fluvial floors, drift, and terraces. Gives a summary statement of four hypothe- ses and describes and illustrates by diagrams the ratios of work done. Pseudo-Cols. Journal of Geology, II (1894), 205-206. Presented in substance before the Geological Society of America at Boston, December 31, 1893. Explains how a false divide in preglacial topography may be developed, and its liability to misinterpretation. Proposed Genetic Classification of Pleistocene Glacial Formations. Ibid., II (1894), 517- 539. Describes the author's method of classifying the Pleis- tocene glacial formations, based on the origin of the formations. Glacial Studies in Greenland. Ibid., 649- 667, 768-789; III (1895), 61-70, 198-219, 469- 481, 565-583, 668-682, 833-844; IV (1896), 582-593; V (1897), 229-241. A series of papers giving detailed descriptions of gla- ciers in northern Greenland. Relation of Deformation to Ore Deposition. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, V (1894), 32. Formation of Karnes, Eskers, and Moraines. Ibid., 85. Recent Glacial Studies in Greenland. Ibid., VI (1895), 199-220. Presidential address before the Geological Society of America reviewing salient phenomena of glaciers of northern Greenland, and the theoretical inferences to be drawn from them. The Classification of American Glacial De- posits. Journal of Geology, III (1895), 270-278. Describes the Kansan, Aftonian, Iowa, Toronto, and Wisconsin formations and the later deposits, and the basis for their discrimination and classification. Notes on the Glaciation of Newfoundland. Abstract. Bulletin of the Geological Soci- ety of America, VI (1895), 467. Brief description of some of the glacial phenomena of the eastern and northern part of the island. Alternative Interpretations. (Discussion of History of Lake Agassiz.) Monograph XXV, United States Geological Survey. 1896, 244-251. A statement of certain interpretations of phenomena discussed in the monograph which were not entertained by the author, Mr. Warren Upham, but which were thought worthy of recognitio charge of the Pleistocene work thought ^worthy of recognition by the geologist in Nomenclature of Glacial Deposits in the Mis- sissippi Valley. Editorial. Journal of Geology, IV (1896), 872-876. Discusses the use of the terms Kansan, low an, Wiscon- sin, Aftonian, and Albertan, with remarks on their correlation. Note on the Former Extension of the Inland Ice Sheet of Greenland. Ibid., V (1897), 81-85. Reviews certain interpretations of the author's views on this subject. A Group of Hypotheses Bearing on Climatic Changes. Ibid., 653-684. Discusses the grounds for questioning current views of the early gaseous and molten states of the earth based on the kinetic theory of gases and other considerations, and offers hypotheses of the origin and early states of the earth, and of the enrichment and depletion of the atmosphere, and discusses the relations of these to climatic states. Former Extension of Greenland Glaciers. Science, New Series, V (1897), 400-401; 748- 753. Discusses Professor Tarr's statements on this subject. The Former Extension of Ice in Greenland. Ibid., 516. Discusses briefly the indications of glaciation by topog- raphy. Method of Multiple Working Hypotheses. Journal of Geology, V (1897), 837-849. A study in scientific methodology. Supplementary Hypotheses Respecting the Origin of Loess of the Mississippi Valley. Ibid., 795-803. Summarizes the essential facts to be explained and the difliculties that attend both the eolian and aqueous hypotheses taken alone, and proposes a composite hypothesis assigning a part of the loess to aqueous, and a part to eolian action. The Ulterior Basis of Time Divisions and the Classification of Geologic History. Ibid., VI (1898), 449^63. Cites the grounds for believing that the history of the earth proceeds by rhythmical rather than uniform progress, and urges that in these the true basis for time divisions must be found. The nature of the sup- posed cycles is indicated. A Systematic Source of Evolution of Provin- cial Faimas. Ibid., 597-609. Discusses the relations of earth movements, especially such as modify the relations of sea to land, to the evolution of marine and land faunas. The conditions favorable to general expansyinal evolution and to restrictional evolution, involving the evolution of cos- mopolital faunas and provincial faunas respectively, are indicated. The Influence of Great Epochs of Limestone Formation upon the Constitution of the Atmosphere. Ibid., 609-622. Discusses the efiFect of the formation of limestone on the amount of carbon dioxide in the atmosphere. 116 Publications An Attempt to Frame a Working Hypothesis of the Cause of Glacial Periods on an At- mospheric Basis. Ibid., VII (1899), 545- 585; 667-686; 751-788. An elaborate development of a working hypothesis of the cause of changes of climate, with especial reference to the periods of glaciation and aridity, on the basis of changes in the constitution of the atmosphere arising mainly from its contact with the rock surface corre- lated with internal and external sources of supply. On Lord Kelvin's Address on the Age of the Earth as an Abode Fitted for Life. Science, New Series, IX (1899), 889-901; X, 11-18. Also Smithsonian Report for 1899, 223-216. A criticism of the grounds of Lord Kelvin's contention relative to the limited age of the earth, consisting essentially of pointing out the insecurity of his funda- mental assumptions, and proposing alternative assump- tions, perhaps equally well grounded, to which his arguments are inapplicable. An Attempt to Test the Nebular Hypothesis by the Kelations of Masses and Momenta. Journal of Geology, VIII (1900), 58-74. An application of certain criteria drawn chiefly from the relations of masses and momenta as tests of the Laplacian hypothesis of the origin of the solar system, with adverse results. On the Habitat of the Early Vertebrates. Ibid., 400-413. Cites the suddenness of the early api)earance of the fishes and the remarkable diversity of their deploy- ment, the sporadic character of the previous hints of their earlier existence, and the parallel facts relative to certain great crustaceans, and gives reasons for assigning a freshwater origin to both classes. Certain Kecent Attempts to Test the Nebular Hypothesis. In collaboration with F. R. Moulton. Science, XII (1900), 201-208. A synopsis of the results (more fully set forth in previ- ous papers) of applying the molecular velocities of gases and certain criteria drawn from the relations of masses and momenta to the Laplacian form of the Nebular Hypothesis. De la determination des faits fondamentaux et des principes qui doivent servir de bases h la classification g6ologique. Compte rendu du VHP congrhs g6ologique inter- national, 1900, 12 pp. Offers reasons why a permanently endowed interna- tional organization is needed to correlate existing and forthcoming geologic knowledge, and to develop the fundamental doctrines of geology on a broad basis as a preliminary step to final classification and nomencla- ture. Proposed International Geologic Institute. Journal of Geology, VIII (1900), 596-610. Essentially the same as the above. On a Possible Function of Disruptive Ap- proach in the Formation of Meteorites, Comets, and Nebulae. Astrophysical Jour- nal, XIV (1901). Also Journal of Geology, IX (1901), 369-393. Cites Roche and Maxwell relative to the fragmentation of small bodies within certain distances of large dense bodies, and applies this to the hypothetical disruption of asteroid-like bodies into meteorites; considers the fitness of such disruption to explain the peculiar fea- tures of observed meteorites; discusses the conditions that might lead to the necessary close approach, and extends the doctrine to large, hot, solid bodies and to gaseous bodies, leading to an hypothesis of a possible origin of certain spiral and other nebulae by the dis- ruptive approach of suns, A Contribution to the Theory of Glacier Mo- tion. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, IX. A theory of glacier motion based primarily on (1) the growth of the glacier granules, or ice crystals, as a result of the melting and refreezing of the water de- veloped either at the surface or by internal stresses ; and (2) the rotation and sliding of the granules on one another. The theory is opposed to the current theory of viscosity. While the fundamental elements on which this theory is based have been suggested before as elements in glacier motion, the attempt is made to bring out their relations to one another, to glacier movement, and to the various phases of glacier activity, in some detail. Reviews of G. F. Wright and W. Upham, Greenland Ice- fields and Life in the North Atlantic, with a New Discussion of the Causes of the Ice Age. Journal of Geology, IV (1896), 632- 638. G. F. Wright, The Age of the Second Terrace on the Ohio at Brilliant, Ohio. Ibid., 219- 221. T. G. Bonney, Ice Work, Present and Past. Ibid., 636-638. Also Science, New Series, IV (1896), 406-408. I. C. Russell, Glaciers of North America: a Reading Lesson for Students in Geography and Geology. Journal of Geology, V (1897), 302-303. R. S. Tarr, Former Extension of Cornell Gla- cier near the Southern End of Melville Bay. Ibid., 303-307. Geological Survey of Canada, Annual Report, Vol. VIII, 1895. Ibid., 642-644. Iowa Geological Survey, Vol. VI, Report on Lead, Zinc, Artesian Wells, etc. Ibid., 642- 644. Geology and Natural Resources of Indiana, Twenty-first Annual Report. Ibid., 644- 646. Depabtment of Geology 117 H. McCalley, Report on the Valley Regions. Fart II, On the Coosa Valley. Ibid., 646- 647. G. H. Barton, Glacial Observations in the Umanak District, Greenland. Ibid., 650- 651. W. Upham, The Glacial Lake Agassiz. Ibid., 851-853. J. D. Dana, Revised Textbook of Geology. Edited by WilHam North Rice. Ibid., VI (1898), 435^36. R. E. Peary, Northward over the Great Ice. A Narrative of Life and Work along the Shores and upon the Interior Ice-cap of Northern Greenland in the Years 1886 and 1891-1897. Ibid., ^38-441. S. W. McCallie, A Preliminary Report on the Artesian Well System of Georgia. Ibid., VII (1899), 722. W. Andrews, The Diutumal Theory of the Earth; or Nature's System of Ck)nstructing a Stratified Physical World; and J. H. Hobart Bennett, Genesis of Worlds. Ibid., VIII (1900), 79-81. F. H. King, Principles and Conditions of the Movement of Ground Waters; and Chas. S. Slichter, A Theoretical Investigation of the Motion of Ground Waters. Ibid., 89-91. F. H. King, Irrigation and Drainage Principles and Practice of their Cultural Phases. Ibid., 100. H. Pjetursson, The Glacial Palagonite-forma- tion of Iceland. Ibid., 280-283. F. Leverett, The Illinois Glacial Lobe. Ibid., 362-369. G. H. Stone, The Glacial Gravels of Maine and their Associated Deposits. Ibid., 373-375. W. M. Davis, The Freshwater Tertiary Forma- tions of the Rocky Mountain Region. Ibid., 379-382. W. M. Davis, Glacial Erosion in France, Swit- zerland, and Norway. Ibid., 568-573. E. Haworth, Mineral Resources of Kansas, 1899. Ibid., 577-678. J. C. Branner, Results of the Branner-Agassiz Expedition to Brazil. Ibid., 578-579. H. M. Ami, On the Subdivisions of the Car- boniferous System in Eastern Canada, with Special Reference to the Union and Rivers- dale Formations of Nova Scotia, Referred to the Devonian System by some Canadian Geologists. Ibid., 667-668. RoLLiN D. Salisbury [1892 — ], Professor of Geographic Geology. Certain Extra-morainic Drift Phenomena of New Jersey. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, III (1892), 173-182. Describes the deposits found in different localities which indicate that glaciation extended beyond the limit heretofore assigned to it. It is suggested that the ice period may have been divided into three epochs. The oldest sheet of drift has no frontal moraine, the second is limited by morainal ridges, and the third by terminal moraines of more pronounced character. On the Northward and Eastward Extension of the pre-Pleistocene Gravels of the Missis- sippi Basin. Abstract. Ibid., 183-186. Refers to previous publications by the author on the re- lationships of the Mississippi valley non-glacial gravels to the glacial drift, and gives the results of recent ob- servations. It is thought that the gravels are pre- Pleistocene and that the gravels of the driftless area in Wisconsin and south-eastern Minnesota are to be correlated with those of the Ohio and lower Missis- sippi basins. The Drift of the North German Lowland. American Geologist, IX (1892), 294-319. Describes the differences of glacial phenomena of Ger- many and America and reviews the paper by Dr. F. Wahnschaffe on " Die Ursachen der Oberfl&chenge- staltung des norddeutschen Flachlandes." Surface Geology, Report of Progress, 1892 (New Jersey). Report of the State Geo- logist of New Jersey (1892-93), 37-166. Abstract, Am,erican Geologist, XII (1893), 336-337. Gives a general description of glacial deposits. De- scribes the till, extra-morainic till deposits, the termi- nal moraine, eskers, kames, overwash plains and valley trains, Trenton gravels outside of the Delaware val- lej[, glacial phenomena of glacial Lake Passaic, wind drift and residuary products, and the Yellow Gravel in New Jersey. Distinct Glacial Epochs and the Criteria for their Recognition. Journal of Geology, I (1893), 61-84. Abstract, American Geol- ogist, XI (1893), 171-172. Defines the term "glacial epoch" and describes the phenomena which would indicate the existence of dis- tinct glacial epochs. 118 Publications The Older Drift in the Delaware Valley. American Geologist, XI (1893), 360-362 (Correspondence). Refers to an article by A. A. Wright on the same subject. On the Relationship of the Pleistocene to the Pre-Pleistocene Formations of the Missis- sippi Basin South of the Limit of Glacia- tion. In collaboration with Thomas Chrow- der Chamberlin. (See above.) Super-glacial Drift. Journal of Geology, II (1894), 613-632. Describes the character of superficial drift of alpine glaciers, piedmont glaciers, and of a continental ice sheet. The Drift: Its Characteristics and Relation- ships. Ibid., 708-724; 837-851. Defines drift and describes the thickness, lithologic composition, and structure of the drift, the topography of the drift and drift-covered areas, the relation of the drift to the underlying rock, and the characteristics of the rock underlying the drift. Surface Geology: The Yellow Gravel. Report of the State Geologist of New Jersey, 1893 (1894), 39-72. Describes the deposition and distribution of the Yel- low Gravel. Discusses the evidences as to the age of these beds. Surface Geology: Extra-morainic Drift. Ibid., 73-123. Describes the character and distribution of the extra- morainic drift on the Triassic formation and on the area to the north of it. Surface Geology: The Terminal Moraine. Ibid., 124-151. Describes the course of the terminal moraine in New Jersey as shown on the map which accompanies the report. Siirface Geology: Drift Deposits Made under the Influence of Stagnant Ice. Ibid., 152- 156. Describes a peculiar type of terraces formed between a valley ice lobe and the bounding rock slope of the valley. On the Twofold Division of the Columbia For- mation. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, V (1894), 24. A discussion of a paper by N. H. Darton on " Cenozoic History of Eastern Maryland and Virginia." Time Break between the Lafayette and Colum- bia Formations. Ibid., 100. A discussion of a paper on the " Succession of Pleis- tocene formations in the Mississippi and Nelson River Basins," by Warren Upham, A Phase of Superficial Drift. Abstract. Pro- ceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, XLII (1894), 180. Raises the question whether certain stoneless loams, overlying the glacial drift, may not represent dust blown up on the ice. An Illustration of the Effect of Stagnant Ice in Sussex County, New Jersey. Abstract. Ibid., 180. Surface Geology: Lake Passaic, an Extinct Glacial Lake. In collaboration with Henry B. Ktimmel. Report of the State Geolo- gist of New Jersey, 1893 (1894), 225-328. Discusses the classification of shore features and lacus- trine deposits and describes the shores of Lake Pas- saic, its lacustrine deposits, the history of the lake, and the deformation of its basin. Surface Geology: Drift Phenomena of the Pal- isade Ridge. In collaboration with Charles E. Peet. Ibid., 157-224. Describes the topographic relations of the ridge, the glacial striee and erosion, the perched blocks, and other glacial phenomena. Surface Geology: Report of Progress (New Jersey). Ibid., 1894 (1895), 1-150. Describes the distribution and character of the drift deposits of the northern portion of New Jersey, the dis- tribution and direction of the glacial striee, the changes of drainage, and the lithologic character and succes- sion of certain deposits of non-glacial origin. Includes geologic sections and map showing the course of ice movement in the last glacial epoch. Surface Formations of Southern New Jersey. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, VI (1895), 483-488. Describes the distribution, composition, thickness, and age of the Beacon Hill. Pensauken, and Jamesburg for- mations, which constitute "the post-Cretaceous surface materials south of the Triassic belt of New Jersey." Agencies which transport Materials on the Earth's Surface. Journal of Geology, III (1895), 70-97. Discusses the evidences of the action of the wind, water, water and ice co-operating, and ice, in transporting materials on the earth's surface. Pre-glacial Gravels on the Quartzite Range near Baraboo, Wisconsin. /6id., 655-667. Describes the charactorof these gravel deposits and names the fossils found in the pebbles. Discusses the evidence as to the age of the gravels and their relation to the high-level gravels of adjacent states. The Greenland Expedition of 1895. Ibid., 875-902. Describes the coastal topography of Greenland in lati- tude 64° 30', and to the north, and the general features of the glacial phenomena. Discusses the evidences of past glaciations drawn from the nature of the rock surfaces, and the evidence of recent changes of leveL Dbpabtment op Geology 119 Lake Passaic: An Extinct Glacial Lake (New Jersey). In collaboration with H. B. Ktim- mel. Report of the State Geologist of New Jersey, 1894 (1895), 225-328. Describes the iwsition and character of the lake basin, the existing shore features, its lacustrine deposits, and the different outlets. Discusses the evidences of the various stages of its history. Surface Geology: Keport of Progress, 1895 (New Jersey). Ibid. (1896), 3-16, Plates I- III. Describes the occurrence and character of the Miocene, Pensauken, and Jamesburg formations in certain por- tions of the state. Presents a map showing the distri- bution of the Pensauken formation in New Jersey. The Philadelphia Brick Clays et al. Science, New Series, III (1896), 480-481. Discusses briefly the evidence as to the age of these clays, forming a part of the Columbia formation. Loess in Wisconsin Drift Formation. Journal of Geology, IV (1896), 929-937. Describes the characters and relation of the loess in central Wisconsin. Salient Points Concerning the Glacial Geology of North Greenland. Ibid., 769-810, 33 figures. An account of many of the more striking characteris- tics of the glaciers of North Greenland, visited by the writer in 1895. Stratified Drift. /6id., 948-970. Describes the origin and formation of stratified drift deposits and discusses their relations to unstratified drift beds. Volcanic Ash in Southwestern Nebraska. Sci- ence, New Series, IV (1896), 816-817. Describes volcanic ash beds near Ingham and Orleans, Nebraska. On the Origin and Age of the Relic-bearing Sand at Trenton, New Jersey. Ibid., VI (1897), 977-981. Discusses the evidence as to the age of these beds. Drift Phenomena in the Vicinity of Devil's Lake and Baraboo, Wisconsin. In collab- oration with Wallace W. Atwood. Journal of Geology, V (1897), 131-147, Figures 1-7. Surface Geology: Report of Progress (New Jersey). In collaboration with George N. Knapp. Report of the State Geologist of New Jersey, 1896(1897), 1-23, Plates I-VII. Describes the character, distribution, and correlation of the Pensauken formation, and the character and distribution of the Beacon Hill formation, and of the road materials in certain i)ortions of the state. In- cludes a geologic map. The Physical Geography of New Jersey. Ibid., Final Report (1898). 8vo, 170 pp., 16 plates, 37 figures. Describes the topographic features of the state and the process of their development. Surface Geology: Report of Progress (New Jersey). Ibid., 1897 (1898), 1-22, Plate I. Includes notes on the Paleozoic, Juratrias, Cretaceous, Tertiary, and Pleistocene formations, and a geologic map of the state. Report on Surface Geology (New Jersey). Ibid., 1898 (1899), 1-41, Plate I, Figures 1-8. Describes the origin of some of the soils of the state. The Geography of Chicago and its Environs. In collaboration with W. C. Alden. Bul- letin I of the Geographic Society of Chi- cago (1899), 1-64, Plates I-II, 30 figures. A history of the development of the topography and surface formations about Chicago. The Local Origin of Glacial Drift. Journal of Geology, VIII (1900), 426-432, Figures 1-3. Discusses the several conditions upon which the local origin of glacial drift is dependent. Certain Late Pleistocene Loams in New Jersey and Adjacent States. Abstract. Proceed- ings of the American Association for the Advancement of Science, XLIX (1900), 192- 193. Also Science, New Series, XII (1900), 995. The Geography of the Region about Devil's Lake and the Dalles of the Wisconsin, with some Notes on its Surface Geology. In collaboration with Wallace W. Atwood. Bulletin of the Wisconsin Geological and Natural History Survey, Bulletin V (1900), X -f- 151, Plates I-XXXVIII, Figures 1-47. Describes the physiography, the general character and distribution of tho Paleozoic formations, the develop- ment of erosion features, and the glacial history and deposits of the region. Glacial Work in the Western Moimtains in 1901. Journal of Geology, IX (1901), 718- 732. A summary of the work done by the writer and several small parties under his direction. The work of these parties was at the east base of the Rockies in north- western Montana, in northeastern Washington, in the Wasatch mountains of Utah, and in the mountains near Santa r6, New Mexico. The Glacial Geology of New Jersey: Final Report of the State Geologist (1902). 8vo, XXV + 802, Plates I-LXVT, 102 figures. A full description of the glacial formations of New Jersey, and an account of the glacial period, so far as it concerned this state. 120 Publications The Principal Elements in the Pleistocene Ge- ology of the Northern Part of the Atlantic Coastal Plain. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, IX. The Pleistocene geology of this region includes a com- plex combination of stream, estuary, ocean, and wind activities, under the varying conditions occasioned by repeated secular changes of level. Reviews of E. A. Smith, Report on the Geology of the Coastal Plain of Alabama. Journal of Geology, III (1895), 101-108. C. F. Marbut, Physical Features of Missouri. Ibid., IV (1896), 887-888. W. B. Scott, An Introduction to Geology. Journal of Geology, V (1897), 398-399. W. B. Clark, Maryland Geological Survey, I. Ibid., 760-761. H. B. Kummel, The Newark System or RedT Sandstone Belt. Ibid., VI (1898), 659-661. R. T. Hill, The Geological History of the Isth- mus of Panama and Portions of Costa Rica. Ibid., 661-668. I. C. Russell, Rivers of North America: A read- ing lesson for students of Geography and Geology; J. Geikie, Earth Sculpture or the Origin of Land Forms; W. M. Davis, Phys- ical Geography. Ibid., VII (1899), 511-516. R. T. Hill, The Geology and Physical Geog- raphy of Jamaica: Study of a Type of An- tillean Development. Ibid., 815-821. F. P. Gulliver, Shoreline Topography. Ibid., 827-829. A. Delebecque, Les lacs frangais. Ibid., VIII (1900), 91-97. G. E. Ladd, A Preliminary Report on the Clays of Georgia; H. Ries, Preliminary Re- port on the Clays of Alabama. Ibid., 479- 480. W. S. Tangier Smith, A Topographic Study of the Islands of Southern California. Ibid., 780-782. F. Nansen, Norwegian Polar Expedition, 1893 to 1896: Scientific Results, Vol. I. Ibid., IX (1901), 87-90. H. W. Turner, The Pleistocene Geology of the South Central Sierra Nevada, with especial Reference to the Origin of the Yosemite Valley. Ibid., 90-91. F. A. Forel, Handbuch der Seenkunde: All- gemeine Limnologie. Ibid., 199-200. W. C. Knight, Report of the Artesian Basins of Wyoming: A Preliminary. Ibid., 200- 202. A. Penck, Die vierte Eiszeit im Berichte der Alpen. Ibid., 202. F. C. Matthes, Glacial Sculpture of the Big Horn Mountains, Wyoming. Ibid., 465- 466. W. C. Bregger, Om de senglaciale og post- glaciale NivSforandringer i Kristianiafeltet (Moluskfaunan). Ibid., X (1902), 323-324. Joseph Paxson Iddings [1892 — ], Pro- fessor of Petrology. The Quantitative Classification of Igneous Rocks, Based on Chemical and Mineral Char- acters, with Systematic Nomenclature. By Whitman Cross, Joseph P. Iddings, Louis V. Pirsson, and Henry S. Washington. 8vo, 286. Chicago, University Press, 1903. The Volcanic Rocks of the Andes. Journal of Geology, I (1893), 164-175. A review of the report of Richard Kllch on the volcanic rocks of Colombia, with a discussion of the chemical data furnished, a comparison of the rocks with those of North America and a statement of the inference that may be drawn from the report, namely ^ that the general differentiation of the magma supplying the lavas of the Andes has not reached its final stage, and that it appears to be in a much less advanced condition than that of the magmas supplying the lavas of Central America and Mexico, or than those of the United States. The Dissected Volcano of Crandall Basin, Wy- oming. Ibid., 606-611. Brief description of the geology and petrography of the region. Genetic Relationships among Igneous Rocks. Ibid., 833-844. A statement of the grounds upon which the theory of consanguinity, or the genetic connection, of igneous rocks in one locality has been based, Livingston Folio, Montana. In collaboration with W. H. Weed. Folio I, Geologic Atlas Dbpabtment op Geology 121 of the United States, United States Geo- logical Survey, Washington, D. C, 1894. The geology of the quadrangle is represented on the map and described briefly in the text, which includes geography and topography of region, general geology, descriptions of the sedimentary rocks, and of the igne- ous rocks, the crystalline schists, and economic geology. George Huntington Williams. Journal of Geology, II (1894), 759-767. A biographical sketch. Absarokite-Shoshonite-Banakite Series. Ibid., Ill (1895), 935-959. Petrographical description of certain igneous rocks in the region of the Yellowstone National Park, and their comparison with similar rocks from neighboring re- gions. Their contrast with a frenetic series of igneous rocks in Norway and its bearing on the classification of igneous rocks. George Huntington Williams. Privately printed, 1896. A Memorial by Friends for Friends. Chapter, " His Publications," 87- 116. A summary of the scientific writings of Professor Wil- liams, with comments. Extrusive and Intrusive Kocks as Products of Magmatic Differentiation. Quarterly Jour- nal of the Geological Society of London, LII (1896), 606-617. A sketch of the geology of the igneous rocks in the region of the Yellowstone National Park with a discus- sion of their contribution to the theory of magmatic differentiation. Yellowstone National Park Folio. In collabo- ration with Arnold Hague and W. H. Weed. Geologic Atlas of the United States, United States Geological Survey. Folio 30, 1896. Geological map and descriptive text, particularly the igneous rocks. On Rock Classification. Journal of Geology, VI (1898), 92-111. A discussion of the essential characteristics of igneous rocks with reference to their classification. Chemical and Mineral Relationships in Igneous Rocks. Ibid., 219-237. A statement of the interdependence of the minerals on one another and on the chemical composition of the magma. Bysmahths. Ipid., 704-710. A modification of laccoliths. Geology of the Yellowstone National Park. Part II, Descriptive Geology, Petrography, and Paleontology. In collaboration with Arnold Hague, W. H. Weed, C. D. Walcott, G. H. Girty, T. W. Stanton, and F. H. Knowlton. Monograph XXXII, United States Geological Survey, 1899, 1-164; 21&- 439. Embracing the following: Chap. I. — Descriptive Geology of the Gal- latin Mountains (with W.H. W^eed), 1-59; Chap. II. — The Intrusive Rocks of the Gal- latin Moim tains, Bunsen Peak, and Mount Everts, 60-88; Chap. III. — The Igneous Rocks of Electric Peak and Sepulchre Mountain, 89-148; Chap. IV. — Descriptive Geology of the Nor- thern End of the Teton Range (with W. H. Weed), 149-164; Chap. VII. — The Dissected Volcano of Cran- dall Basin, Wyoming, 215-268; Chap. VIII. — The Igneoiis Rocks of the Absaroka Range and two Ocean Plateaus and of outlying poi-tions of the Yellow- stone National Park, 269-325; Chap . I X . — Absarokite-Shoshonite-Banakite Series, 326-355; Chap. X.— The Rhyolites, 356-432; Chap. XI.— Recent Basalts, 433-439. Chemical Composition of Igneous Rocks, ex- pressed by Means of Diagrams with Refer- ences to Rock Classification on a Quantitative Chemico-mineralogical Basis. Article in The University of Chicago Decennial Pub- lications, First Series, IX. Includes a notice of various diagrammatic methods eilready employed for expressing the chemical compo- sition of groups or series of igneous rocks. The method proposed is shown to accord with certain chemico- mineralogical relationships prominent in igneous rocks which have been made the basis of their quantitative classification in the system recently proposed by Cross, IddingSj Pirsson, and Washington. These relationships are exhibited by means of diagrams which at the same time present graphically the great variability in the chemical composition of igneous rocks. The relative proportions of seven or eight variable chemical com- ponents in each rock considered are expressed. The diagrams also exhibit the chemical character of the magmatic divisions established by the quantitative system of classification just mentioned. Stuaet Welleb [1895 — ], Assistant Pro- fessor of Palseontologic Geology. A Circum-Insular Palaeozoic Faima. Journal of Geology, III (1895), 903-917. Discusses the composition and origin of the kinderhook fauna in the Mississippi valley. Petalocrinus mirabilis (n. sp.) and a new Ameri- can Fauna. In collaboration with A. D, Davidson. Ibid., IV (1896), 166-173. Describes a new genus and species of crinoid, and dis- cusses the correlation of the Niagaran faunas of the interior of the North American continent with those of Europe. 122 Publications The Bates ville Sandstone of Arkansas. Trans- actions of the New York Academy of Sci- ence, XVI (1897), 251-282, Plates 19-21. Describes the fauna of the Batesville sandstone, near Batesville, Arkansas, and discusses the correlation of the Mississippian section of northern Arkansas with the typical section along the Mississippi river. Correlation of the Devonian Faunas in South- ern Illinois. Journal of Geology, V (1897), 625-635. Discusses the correlation of the Devonian fannas at the "Devil's Bake Oven" in Jackson county, Illinois, with the Devonian faunas of the typical New York section. On the Presence of Problematic Fossil Me- dusae in the Niagara Limestone of Northern Illinois. JfeM., 744-751. Cryptodiscus, Hall. Ibid., 803-808. These two papers discuss the nature of the peculiar fossils described by Hall as Cryptodiscus, and show them to be the terminal plates of the anal tube of the crinoid Callicrinus. Description of a New Species of Hydreionocri- nus from the Coal Measures of Kansas. Transactions of the New York Academy of Science, XVI (1898), 372-374, Plate 36. Classification of the Mississippian Series. Jour- nal of Geology, VI (1898), 303-314. Discusses the basis of a natural classification^ of geo- logic formations, with an application of the principles to the formations of the Mississippian.series. The Silurian Fauna Interpreted on the Epi- continental Basis. Ibid., 692-702. Discusses the relationship of the Niagaran faunas of the interior of North America with the Silurian faunas of northern Europe, and the probable pathway of com- munication between the two provinces. Descriptions of Devonian Crinoids and Blas- toids from Milwaukee, Wisconsin. Annals of the New York Academy of Science, XI (1898), 117-126, Plate 14. Describes two new and one old species of Melocrinus, also two new varieties, and one new and one old species of Pentremitidea. Osage vs. Augusta. American Geologist, XXII (1898), 12-16. A plea for the retention of the name "Osage" for one of the Mississippian time divisions, rather than the substitution of "Augusta." A Bibliographic Index of North American Carboniferous Invertebrates. Bulletin of the United States Geological Survey, No. 153 (1898), 1-653. Kinderhook Faunal Studies: I, The Fauna of the Vermicular Sandstone at Northview, Webster County, Missouri. Transactions of the St. Louis Academy of Science, IX (1899), 9-51, Plates 2-6. Describes the fauna of the Vermicular sandstone at Northview, Mo., and discusses its correlation. A Peculiar Devonian Deposit in Northeastern Illinois. Journal of Geology, VII (1899), 483-488. Describes a deposit of Devonian sediments, character- ized by numerous fish teeth and other fossils, filling crevices in the Niagaran limestone, eighteen feet below its upper surface. Studies for Students: A Centxiry of Progress in Palaeontology. Ibid., 496-508. Discusses the development and differentiation of the science of palaeontology during the nineteenth century. Kinderhook Faimal Studies: II, The Fauna of the Chonopectus Sandstone at Burlington, Iowa. Transactions of the St. Louis Acad- emy of Science, X (1900), 57-129, Plates 1-9. Describes the fauna of the second member of the Kin- derhook series at Burlington, Iowa, and discusses the correlation of the Kinderhook formations at Burling- ton. Report on the Fossils from the Wichita Moun- tains. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, XI (1900), 142-144. The fossil faunas recognized are referable to three horizons, the lowest is Cambrian, the two higher are lower and middle Ordovician. A Preliminary Report on the Stratigraphic Palaeontology of Walpack Ridge, in Sussex County, New Jersey. Annual Report of the Geological Survey of New Jersey, 1899 (1900), 1-46. The geologic formations of the area with their con- tained fossils are discussed. The formations recog- nized are of Silurian and Devonian age, and they are correlated with the formations of similar age in New York and Pennsylvania. Description of Cambrian Trilobites from New Jersey, with Notes on the Age of the Mag- nesian Limestone Series. Ibid., 47-53, Plate 1. One new species, Liostracus? jerseyensis, is described and the Cambrian age of the whole Magnesian lime- stone series is suggested. The Palaeontology of the Niagaran Limestone in the Chicago Area: The Crinoidea. Bul- letin of the Natural History Survey of the Chicago Academy of Science, No. IV (1900), 1-153, Plates 1-15. The relationship between the Niagaran faunas of the interior of North America and the Silurian faunas of northern Europe is discussed, then, after chapters on the morphology and classification of the crinoids, the crinoids of the Chicago fauna are described. Sixty- eight species are recognized altogether, twenty-seven of which are described as new. One new genus is also recognized and described as Chicagocrinus. Department of Geology 123 The Succession of Fossil Faunas in the Kin- derhook Beds at Burlington, Iowa. Iowa Geological Survey, X (1900), 6a-79. The succession of faunas in the Kinderhook formations at Burlington is described, and their correlation with other Kinderhook faunas is discussed. Correlation of the Kinderhook Formations of Southwestern Missouri. Journal of Geol- ogy, IX (1901), 130-148. The Kinderhook formations of southwestern Missouri are described, with lists of the species of fossils con- tained in them. These faunas are compared with the Kinderhook faunas elsewhere and a correlation of the formations is attempted. The Palaeozoic Limestones of Kittatinny Valley, New Jersey. In collaboration with H. B. Ktimmel. Bulletin of the Geological So- ciety of America, XII (1901), 147-164. The limestone formations of the Kittatinny valley are described and lists of their contained fossils are given. The great mass of the Magnesian or Kittatinny lime- stone is shown to be Cambrian in age, at one locality only have fossils of lower Ordovician age been detected in the higher beds of the formation. Lying abqvethe Kittatinny limestone and unconformable with it, is a non-magnesian limestone formation with a basal lime- stone conglomerate in its lower beds. This formation is abundantly fossiliferous and is shown to be of Black river and Trenton age. Prodromites, a New Ammonite Genus from the Lower Carboniferous. In collaboration with J. P. Smith. Journal of Geology, IX (1901), 255-266. Also Contributions from the Walker Museum, I, 31-41, Plates 6-8. Cephalopods with the ammonitic type of suture have previously been recognized in no strata older than the tipper Carboniferous. The genus Prodromites with two species is described from beds of Kinderhook age, and is recorded from Missouri, Iowa, and Indiana. A Preliminary Report on the Palaeozoic For- mations of the Kittatinny Valley in New Jersey. Annual Report of the Geological Survey of New Jersey for 1900 (1901), 1-8. The Palaeozoic formations in the Kittatinny valley are described. They are the Hardiston quartzite of Cam- brian age, the Kittatinny limestone of Cambrian and Lower Ordovician age, the Trenton limestone of Black river-Trenton age, and the Hudson river slate of Tren- ton-Lorraine age. Kinderhook Faunal Studies: III, The Faunas of Beds No. 3 to No. 7 at Burlington, Iowa. Transactions of the St. Louis Academy of Science, XI (1901), 147-214, Plates 12-20. The five faunas Nos. 3 to 7 in the Kinderhook series at Burlington are described and the correlation of the Kinderhook formations at that locality is discussed. The Composition, Origin, and Relationships of the Corniferous Fauna in the Appalachian Province of North America. Journal of Geology, X (1902), 423-432. The northern origin of the Corniferous fauna is dis- cussed and the explanation of various facts in the geo- fraphic distribution of Devonian faunas in North merica is suggested. The Rocks of the Green Pond Mountain Re- gion. In collaboration with H. B. Kummel. Annual Report of the Geological Survey of New Jersey for 1901 (1902), 1-51. Discusses the stratigraphy and geologic structure in the Green Pond Mountain region of New Jersey, and correlates the formations by means of the fossils. H. Foster Bain, Ph.D. 1897 ; Consulting Geologist, Des Moines, Iowa. The Geology of Washington County, Iowa. Iowa Geological Survey, Y (1896), lia-174. The Geology of Woodbury County, Iowa. Ibid., 241-300. The Geology of Appanoose County, Iowa. Ibid., 361-438. The Geology of Polk County, Iowa. Ibid.^ 263^13. Relations of the Wisconsin and Kansan Drift Sheets in Central Iowa and Related Phen- omena. Doctor's thesis. Ibid., VI (1897), 429-476. Also pamphlet, 8vo, 52, Chicago, 1897. The Geology of Guthrie County, Iowa. Ibid., VII (1897), 413-487. The Geology of Madison County, Iowa. In collaboration with J. L. Tilton. Ibid., 489- 542. Machine Coal Mining in Iowa, U. S. A. Pam- phlet. Newcastle-upon-Tyne, 1897. Read before the Federated Institute of Mining Engi- neers, London, June 3, 1897. Sketch of the Geology of Mexico. Journal of Geology, V (1897), 384-465. Nevin Melancthon Fenneman, Ph.D. 1901 ; Professor of Geology, University of Colorado. Development of the Profile of Equilibriiun of the Subaqueous Shore Terrace. Doctor's thesis. Pamphlet, 8vo, 32, Chicago, 1902. Also Journal of Geology X (1902), 1--31. 124 Publications Charles Henry Gordon, Ph.D. 1895; Superintendent of Schools, Lincoln, Neb. Buried River Channels in Southeastern Iowa. Annual Report of the Geological Survey of Iowa, III (1893), 237-256. Describes the occurrence, in Lee county, Iowa, of an extensive channel in the rock underlying the glacial drift representing a former course of the Mississippi river. Geology of Van Buren County, Iowa. Ibid., IV (1894), 197-254. Gives a description of the geological features of the region. Errors of previous writers corrected. Some of the important features brought out are : A revision of the classification of the Keokuk and St. Louis for- mations and the plane of separation between these more satisfactorily defined; the origin of the ox-bow bend of the Des Moines ; the erosion unconformity be- tween the Lower Carboniferous and the Coal Measures. Stratigraphy of the St. Louis and Warsaw Formations in Southeastern Iowa. Journal of Geology, III (1895), 289-311. A detailed study is made of the stratigraphical rela- tions of the different beds and previous erroneous con- clusions noted and corrected. The Warsaw shown to constitute the basal member of the St. Louis formation. The processes of brecciation and dolomitization dis- cussed. Syenite-Gneiss (Leopard Rock) from the Apa- tite Region of Ottawa County, Canada. Doctor's thesis. Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, VII (1895), 95-134. A systematic petrographical study of a vein of rock occurring in connection with the spatite deposits at High Rock mine which on cross fracture shows a net- work of green agite inclosing lumps of coarse-grained feldspar. The rock is shown to vary from a coarse- grained syenite without the anastoneosing angite seams to a well-marked gneiss. A study of thin sections shows the constituents of the green bands or seams to be in a granular condition while the intervening feldspar areas show no indications of crushing. _ Various views are suggested to account for the peculiar structure of this rock and the conclusion drawn that it is an inter- mediate stage in the development of a streaked angite- syenite gneiss through orographic agencies. _ The no- menclature of gneisses is discussed and an improved method of naming gneisses suggested. Reviews of S. Calvin (State geologist), Iowa Geological Survey, Vol. I. First Annual Report for 1892. 840, 472 pp., 10 plates, 26 figrures. American Journal of Science, XL VI (1893), 397-398. Summary of the papers included in the volume. Com- mendable features and important conclusions noted and certain errors pointed out. Post Glacial Submergence in the Region of the Great Lakes. Journal of Geology, III (1895), 349-352. A summary review of papers bv Leverett, Taylor, and Spencer, giving the results or observations on the changes that have taken place in post-glacial times in the great lake region. Thomas Cramer Hopkins, Ph.D. 1900; Professor of Geology, Syracuse Uni- versity. Springs: The Influence of Stratigraphy on their Emergency as Illustrated in the Ozark Uplift. American Geologist, XIV (1894), 365-368. Bedford Oolite and Chicago Dolomite. Min- eral Industry, III (1894), 505-509. The Carboniferous Sandstones of Western In- diana. 140 pp., 3 maps, 9 plates. Twen- tieth Annual Report of the Department of Geology and Natural Resources of Indi- ana, 1895. Abstract in the Seventeenth An- nual Report of the United States Geological Survey. Also in part in Stone, 1896. The Building Materials of Pennsylvania: I, Brownstones. 122 pp., 26 full page plates, 2 maps. Appendix to the Annual Report of the Pennsylvania State College, Harris- burg, 1897. Also in Stone and Stone Trade News, 1897. Kaolin: Its Occurrence, Technology, and Trade. Ibid., VII (1899), 148-160. Cambro-Silmian Limonite Ores of Pennsyl- vania. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 128, 1900. Also in Bulletin of the Geological Society of America, XI (1900), 475-502. A discussion of the distribution, mode of occurrence, and origin of limestone ores of the limestone areas in central and eastern Pennsylvania. Henry Barnard KiJMMEL, Ph.D. 1895; State Geologist of New Jersey. Some Rivers of Connecticut. Journal of Ge- ology, I (1893), 371-393. The broader features of the topography are briefly de- scribed, and the attempt is made to trace the develop- ment of the chief rivers in relation to the past and present topography. Lake Passaic: An Extinct Glacial Lake. Doc- tor's thesis. 8vo, 88, map. Trenton, New Jersey, 1895. The various lines of evidence by which the existence of Lake Passaic, an extinct glacial lake of northern New Jersey, is demonstrated, are given in detail, its history is traced and the subsequent deformation of its shore line is discussed. Depaetment of Zoology 125 Lake Passaic: An Extinct Glacial Lake. In collaboration with Rollin D. Salisbury. (See above.) Abstract of same, Journal of Geology, III (1895), 533-560. Review of J. W. Spencer, Reconstruction of the Antillean Continent. Journal of Geology, III (1895), 364^368. The reviewer qnestions the correctness of the author's conclusions. John Paul Goode, Graduate student. An Inherited Blunder. Science, IV (1896), 115-116. The article calls attention to the conventional error in the representation in pictures and diagrams of ice- bergs in a position of great instability. An Explanation of the So-called Pseudo Au- rora. Ibid., V (1897), 186. An interpretation of a phenomenon sometimes observed in the sub-arid Northwest in winter, in which tall shafts of white light are seen at night over the street lamps, or other source of illumination. XXII. ZOOLOGY Chables Otis Whitman [1892 — ], Pro- fessor and Head of the Department of Zoology. The Inadequacy of the Cell-Theory of Devel- opment. Journal of Morphology, VIII (1893), 639-658. Also Wood's Holl Bio- logical Lectures, II (1893), 105-124. An attempt to show that the whole theory of develop- ment as a process of cell-formation is incorrect, the essential thing being, not the multiplication of cells, but the primordial organization of the egg. The bound- aries of homologous parts do not always coincide with definite cell-boundaries; homology must therefore be defined from the organization standpoint rather than the cell standpoint. Specific forms have their deter- minations in the organization of the egg, the egg being a young organism to start with, and preserving its individuality from first to last, although it is gradually divided up into many thousands of cells. The Metamerism of Clepsine. Festschrift zum siebenzigsten Geburtstage Rudolf Leuckarts, Leipzig, 1892. An analysis of the whole metameric structure, showing that the segments are equivalent morphological units from end to end, each having its own brain, sense organs, nerves, muscles, etc. This view supposed to hold for all segmented animals. A Sketch of the Structure and Development of the Eye of Clepsine. SpengeVs ZoOlogisches Jahrbuch, VI (1893), 616-625. The eyes are shown to have same development as the sense-organs distributed over the whole surface; in other words, each segment is provided with eyes, optic nerves, and brain, and hence may be considered as one of a tfhain of animals. The "eyes" are double sense- organs, i. e.. they are composed of two distinct groups of cells — a group of visual cells (eye projper) and a group of hair-cells (tactual) . A Marine Observatory. Popular Science Monthly, XLII (1893), 459-472. A plea for the establishment of a permanent sea-side station for the study of plants and animals. Dohrn, Carl Vogt, Huxley, Weismann, Leuckart, Gegenbaur, and many other naturalists testify to the importance of such a station. The Work and Aims of the Marine Biological Laboratory. Wood's Holl Biological Lec- tures, II (1894), 235-242. Gives an account of the organization at Wood's Holl, and a list of papers published by members in 1893. Keport on the Marine Biological Laboratory for 1894-95, 104 pp. Boston, 1896. A history of the work and development of the labora- tory. Evolution and Epigenesis. Ibid., 205-224. The chief purpose of this and the two following essays is to define standpoints and theories of development, and thus to correct some current misconceptions. Bonnet's Theory of Evolution. Ibid., 225-240. Also in Monist, V (1895), 412-426. The Egg of Amia and its Cleavage. In col- laboration with A. C. Eycleshymer. Jour- nal of Morphology, XII (1896), 309-354. Contains observations on the breeding habits, nest, eggs, care of nest by the male parent, and care of the young. The egg and its early stages of development are described in detail, and the type of cleavage is com- pared with that of Lepidosteus, the higher fishes, and amphibia. The orientation of the embryo in relation to the first cleavage-planes and the general significance of the type of cleavage are discussed. The Palingenesia and Germ Doctrine of Bonnet. Ibid., 241-272. The Centrosome Problem and an Experimental Test. Science, New Series, V (1897), 235- 236. 126 Publications Some of the Functions and Features of a Bio- logical Station. Ibid., VII (1898), 37-44. The question whether the ideal station should exclude instruction and limit itself to pure research is dis- cussed at length. Lamarck and "A Perfecting Tendency." Jfetd., 99. Chables Benedict Davenport [1899-], Associate Professor of Zoology and Em- bryology. On the Variation of the Statoblasts of Pectina- tella Magnifica from Lake Michigan at Chi- cago, American Naturalist, XXXIV (1900), 959-968. Nine figures. a quantitative study of variation with special reference to skew variation and non-sexual inheritance. Abnor- mal forms of hooks are also described. The Advance of Biology in 1897. American Naturalist, XXXIV (1900), 489-493. Third annual review of progress based on reviews in UAnn^e biologique. On the Variation of the Shell of Pecten Irradi- ans Lamarck from Long Island. Ibid., 863-877. Two figures. A comparison of scallop shells from three localities of Long Island. The relative variability of the two valves. Skew variation. Monstrosities. The Aims of the Quantitative Study of Varia- tion. Wood's Holl Biological Lectures, 1899 (1900), 267-272. Programme of investigations into variation. The Meeting of Naturalists at Chicago. Sci- ence, New Series, XI (1900), 246-253. Secretary's report, with abstracts of papers presented. Investigations at Cold Spring Harbor. Ibid., XII, 371-373. Report on eight researches in progress. A History of the Development of the Quanti- tative Study of Variation. Ibid., 864-870. Traced from its origin in Quetelet's and Qalton's appli- cation to biology of Gauss's Law of Error to modern activity in England, Germany, Holland, and America. The Second Meeting of Naturalists at Chicago. Ibid., XIII (1901), 370-379. Secretary's report, with abstracts of papers presented. Mendel's Law of Dichotomy in Hybrids. Bio- logical Bulletin, II (1901), 307-310. Presentation of the newer quantitative laws of inheri- tance in hybridization. Zoology of the Twentieth Century. Science, New Series, XIV (1901), 315-324. Vice-presidential address before Section F of the Ameri- can Association for the Advancement of Science, pre- dicting the greater application of the experimental and quantitative methods in zoology. The application of statistics to evolution studies illustrated by the au- thor's investigations on recent and fossil scallop-shelli. The significance of skew variation. The Statistical Study of Evolution. Popular Science Monthly, LIX (1901), 447-460. With 13 figures. A discussion of frequency-of-distribution polygons with an attempt at their interpretation. Variability, Symmetry, and Fertility in an Ab- normal Species. Biometrika, I, Part 2, (1902) 255-256. A critical review of a paper by A. G. Mayer entitled : The Variations of a Newly Arisen Species of Medusa. The Animal Ecology of the Cold Spring Har- bor Sand Spit, with Remarks on the Theory of Adaptation. With a map and six half- tone cuts. The University of Chicago De- cennial Publications, First Series, X, 155- 176. The sand spit at Cold Spring Harbor is microcosm where marine and terrestrial species come together. The marine organisms contribute flotsam and jetsam to the upper beach, so that the line of d6bris just above the hi^h-tide line is rich in organic matter, both plant and animal. This line of d6bris, renewed twice each day, is the feeding-ground of a remarkable fauna. Here lives, in a terrestrial habitat, a marine species of am- phipod, and in the same situation are found numerous terrestrial species, such as ants, flies, and beetles. These scavengers, in turn, invite a number of predace- ous creatures — spiders, robber flies, and tiger beetles. Finally these are preyed upon by the swallows. At the tip of the sand spit live certain species that depend upon the currents to bring them their food. These, like the other creatures, are adapted to their environment. The adaptation has been in part brought about by a segre- gation of individuals into the environment to which their structure fits them. Reviews of von Guita, Experiments in Breeding Mice. Biological Bulletin, II (1900), 121-128. von Guita 's results used for a quantitative investiga- tion into laws of inheritance. Propotency of sports. Gardiner, The Fauna and Geography of the Maldive and Laccadive Archipelagoes. American Naturalist, XXXVI, 61-69; 819- 821. Alfred Earl, The Living Organism. Science, XI (1900) 949. Biological Lectures from the Marine Biologi- cal Laboratory at Wood's Holl, 1899. Ibid., XII (1900), 563-564. Frank Kattray Lillie [1892-94, 1900-], Associate Professor of Embryology. A Preliminary Account of the Embryology of Unio Complanata. Journal of Morphology, VIII (1893), 569-578, Plate XXVIII. a preliminary abstract of part of the following paper- Department of ZoOlogy 127 The Embryology of the Unionidae: A Study in Cell-Lineage. Doctor's thesis. Ibid., X (1895), 1-94, Plates I-VI. The cleavage of the ovum of Lamellibranohs is shown to agree with that of Gasteropods and Annelids. The cell-origin of the various organs of the larva is exactly traced, and it is shown that in rate, direction, and place of division the future needs of the larva are antici- Eated. The mesoblast is shown for the first time to ave a double origin. In the second part of the paper the history of the organs is traced up to the complete formation of the Glochidium. Some Notes on Regeneration and Regulation of Planarians. I, The Source of Material of New Parts and Limits of Size. American Naturalist, XXXIV (1900), 173-177. The regeneration of Planaria takes place without refer- ence to growth and proceeds as rapidly in individuals that are dail^ decreasing in size from starvation as in well-fed specimens. Starvation by retaining the Pla- naria in distilled water causes constant reduction in size. A single individual may be starved to 1-100 of the original bulk. In this process of reduction the normal development is reversed and the animal seems to pro- ceed back toward the embryonic state. The most reduced individuals resemble in all essentials just hatched embryos. Organization of the Egg of Unio. Journal of Morphology, XVII (1901), 227-292, Plates XXIV-XXVII. A study of the maturation, fertilization, and early cleavage of the egg of Unio. The thesis is upheld that the cytoplasm of the egg of Unio possesses a definite organization involving bilateral symmetry and certain antero-posterior proportions. Notes on Regeneration and Regulation of Pla- narians. II, Regeneration of the Head of Dendrocoelum Lacteum; III, Regeneration of the Pharynges of Phagocata; IV, Theo- retical and Critical. American Journal of Physiology, VI (1901), 129-141. The diflferentiation of exposed embryonic tissue may be dependent on the external stimuli to which such tissue is exposed. The functional correlations of all the parts of a piece capable of regeneration are the internal fac- tors, and the various stimuli from without thus induced in normal sequence are the external factors which de- termine the location of organs. The case of Dendro- coelum appears to indicate that functional correlation is dependent on the nervous system. The regeneration of a head lateral to the axis of the parent worm in the case of i)arts cut off obliquely is thus explained, be- cause stimuli which normally would fall upon the head are received by the most advanced part, which is lateral to the original axis in the case of such an ante- rior cut surface. The regeneration of a tail is similarly explained. The intestinal system regenerates in rela- tion to the new external parts. Differentiation without Cleavage in the Egg of the Annelid Chaetopterus Pergamenta- ceus. Archiv fur Enturicklungsmechanik der Organismen, XIV (1902), 477-497, Plates XXVII, XXVIII. After being submitted for about one hour to sea water containing certain amounts of KCl, unfertilized or fer- tilized eggs of Chaetopterus may develop certain of the organs of the trochophore without cell-division. The ectoplasm becomes vacuolated like the ectoderm of the trochophore, cUia are formed, and the yolk aggre- gates in a dense mass. In some cases it is even pos- sible to holologize the regions of these unsegmented ciliated e^gs with the regions of the trochophore. The period preceding these differentiations is espe- cially characterized by active amoeboid movements of the protoplasm that partially or wholly replace cleav- age. Fusion of from two to five ejjgs is very common in the KCl cultures ; usually the fusion is incomplete, the constituent ova being separated by cell walls ; but in some cases it is complete. After being in a solution containing also CaCU as many as 100 eg^ may unite in a common mass. During the maturation period the I)ower of resistance of the fertilized egg to solutions continueilly increases. Charles Manning Child [1895 — ], In- structor in Zoology. Preliminary Account of the Cleavage of Areni- cola Cristata, with Remarks on the Mosaic Theory. Zoological Bulletin, I (1897), 71- 85, Figures 1-12. Abstract in Science, New Series, V (1897), 629-631. A r6sum4 of the important features in the cell-lineage of Arenicola cristata, giving in detail the origin of ectoderm, mesoderm, and entoderm, the cell-lineage of the prototroch and paratroch, and the history of the somatic plate. Following the account of the cleavage is a brief discussion of the mosaic theory. Centrosome and Sphere in Cells of the Ovarian Stroma of Mammals: A Preliminary Com- munication. Zoological Bulletin, I (1897), 87-93, Figures 1-5. Abstract in Science, New Series, V (1897), 231-232. An account of peculiar groups of cells in the stroma which show a centrosome and sphere in the cytoplasm although not undergoing mitosis. Some Features of the Oogenesis of Stemaspis. Ibid., VII (1898), 104-105. An account of the peculiar relation of the ovarian egg to the circulatory system and the cytoplasmic struc- ture of the &gg during growth and yolk formation. The Maturation and Fertilization of the Egg of Arenicola Marina. Transactions of the New York Academy of Science, XVI (1898), 387-394, Figures 1-12. Abstract in Science, New Series, VII (1898), 321-322. The paper deals chiefly with the achromatic structures. The cleavage centrosomes are shown to arise de novo. The Significance of the Spiral Type of Cleav- age and its Relation to the Process of Dif- ferentiation. Wood^s Holl Biological Lec- tures for 1899 (1900), 231-266, Figures 1-27. Abstract in Science, New Series, XI (1900), 189-190. A critical discussion of the relations between the spiral type of cleavage and differentiation. The two pro- cesses are regarded as independent though in some cases coincident in time. 128 Publications The Egg of Stichostemma. Ihid., 249-250. An account of observations on the living egg of Sticho- stemma during its maturation, fertilization, and early cleavage. The Early Development of Arenicola and Sternaspis. Archiv filr Entwickelungs- , mechanik, IX (1900), 587-723, Plates XXI- XXV. A detailed account of the cell-lineage of Arenicola cri- stata up to the trochopore stage, and a description of the earlier cleavage of Sternaspis. The significance of the spiral type of cleavage and its relation to differen- tiation are discussed. In a review of the subject of cell homology the position is held that cell homology sensu stricto does not exist. A Specimen of Nais with Bifurcated Prosto- mium. Anatomische Anzeiger, XVII (1900), 311-312, Figure 1. Description of a peculiar abnormality of the prosto- mium in Nais lacustris, resulting from injury. Abnormalities in the Cestode Moniezia Ex- pansa. I, Biological Bulletin^ I (1900), 215-250, Figures 1-23; II, ibid., 261-290, Figures 24rAl, Abstract in Science, New Series, XII (1900), 228. Description of a large number of abnormal proglottids found in specimens of Moniezia expansa. The arrange- ment of the internal organs is shown to be closely cor- related with the form of the proglottid. Part I is devoted to partial and incompletely separated proglot- tids ; Part II to spiral abnormalities. Part III, nowin press, deals with the significance of the abnormalities and their relation to the ^lormal process of proglottid- development. Regulation in Stenostomum. Ibid., XIV (1901), 28. An experimental study of a peculiar form of regulation following section in asexual chains of Stenostomum, consisting of the absorption of whole zoOids or parts by older zoOids posterior to them. Fission and Regulation in Stenostomum Leu- cops. Biological Bulletin, II (1901), 329- 831. An account, based on experimental study, of the nor- mal process of fission and the factors which determine the position of the zones of fission. Review of Oppel, Lehrbuch der vergleichenden mikrosko- pischen Anatomie der Wirbelthiere. Sci- ence, New Series, IV (1896), 729-731. William Laweence Toweb [1901 — ], Assistant in Embryology. Variation in the Ray-flowers of the Chrysan- themum Leucanthemum L. at Yellow Springs, Greene Co., Ohio, with Remarks upon the Determination of Modes. Bio- metrika, I (1902), 309-315. The number of ray-flowers in the heads of this species were found to decrease from a high number at the opening of the season to a low number at the end. This fact is used to show the danger of mode determination from a single set of variates. The meaning and defini- tion of modes is also discussed. Observations on the Structiire of the Exuvial Glands and the Formation of the Exuvial Fluid in Insects. With eight figures. Zoo- logischer Anzeiger, XXV (1902), 466-472. A description of the structure of the exuvial glands in Leptinotarsa decemlineata and the formation of the exuvial fluid. A preliminary paper. On the Origin and Development of the Wings in Coleoptera. Zoologisches Jahrbuch, Abtheilung fur Anatomie und Ontogonie, XVII (1902), 517-572, Plates 14-20. An attempt to settle the homology of the elytra of beetles, in which it was found that the wings of beetles arise from the atrophied spiracles of the last two thoracic segments and in the development are exactly like the wings of other insects and therefore homolo- gous to them. The Development of the Colors and Color Pat- terns in Coleoptera, with Observations upon the Development of the Pigmental Colors in other Orders of Insects. With three litho- graphic plates in color. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Se- ries, X, 31-70. Ontogenetically, color was found to arise in connection with the sclerites and closely associated with muscle attachment. The pigmental colors lie in the outer layer of cuticula. The euticula is in two layers, an outer one related to the chondrins and an inner one a glucoside. The pigmental colors arise in the outer layer as the result of action of enzymes which were iso- lated and named chitases, the pigment seems tobe an oxyazo, diazo, or amido-azo compound according to color and species. Franklin P. Mall [1892-93], Professor of Anatomy; Professor of Anatomy, Johns Hopkins University. (See un- der Anatomy, p. 137.) Henry H.Donaldson [1892 — J, Professor and Head of the Department of Neurol- ogy. (See under Neurology, p. 143.) Jacques Loeb [1892-1902], Professor and Head of the Department of Physiology ; Professor of Physiology, University of California. (See under Physiology, p. 188.) Depabtment of Zoology 129 *George Baur [1892-95], Associate Pro- fessor of Comparative Osteology and Palaeontology. (See under Palaeontol- ogy. P- 14:6.) William Morton Wheeler [1892-99], Assistant Professor of Embryology; Professor of Zoology, University of Texas. The Primitive Number of Malpighian Vessels in Insects. A series of seven articles. Psyche, VI (1893), 457^60; 485-486; 497- 498; 509-510; 539-541; 545-547; 561-564. Figures. Syncoelidium pellucidum, a New Marine Tri- clad. Journal of Morphology, IX (1894), 167-192, Plate VIII. Planocera Inquilina, a Polyclad Inhabiting the Gill Chamber of Sycotypus canaliculatus. Journal of Morphology, 195-201, Figures 1 and 2. The Behavior of the Centrosome in the Ferti- lized Egg of Myzostoma glabrum Leuckart. Journal of Morphology, X (1895), 305- 311. The Sexual Phases of Myzostoma. Mitthei- lungen aus der zoologischen Station zu Neapel, XII (1896), 227-302, Plates X- XII. The Genus Ochthera. Entomological News, VII (1896), 121-123. Two Dohchopodid Genera New to America. Ibid., 152-156. A New Genus and Species of Dolichopodidae. Ibid., 185-189. A New Empid with Remarkable Middle Tarsi. Ibid., 189-192. An Antenniform Extra Appendage in Dilophus TibiaUs Loew. Archiv fur Entwicklungs- mechanik der Oi-ganismen, III (1896), 261- 268, Plate XVI. A Genus of Maritime Dolichopodidae New to America. Proceedings of the California Academy of Science, Third Series, Zoology, I (1898), 145-152, Plate IV. The Maturation, Fecundation, and Early cleav- age of Myzostoma Glabrum, Leuckart. Archiv de biologic, XV (1897), 1-77, Plates I-III. A New Genus of Dolichopodidae from Florida. Zoological Bulletin, I (1898), 217-220, 1 figure. A New Peripatus from Mexico. Journal of Morphology, XV (1898), 1-8, Plate 1, 1 figure in text. George Baur's Life and Writings. American Naturalist, XXXIII (1899), 15-30. The Life History of Dicyema. Zoologischer Anzeiger, XXII (1899), 169-176. Anemotropism and other Tropisms in Insects. Archiv fiir Entwicklungsmechanik, VIII (1899), 373-381. New Species of Dolichopodidae from the United States. Proceedings of the California Academy of Science, Third Series, ZoOlogy, II (1899), 1-77, Plates I-IV. The Development of the Urinogenital Organs of the Lamprey. Zoologische Jahrbilcher, Abtheilung fiir Anatomie und Ontogenie der Thiere, XIII (1899), 1-88, Plates I- VII. J. Beard on the Sexual Phases of Myzostoma. Zoologische Anzeiger, XXII (1899), 281- 288. Caspar Friedrich Wolff and the Theoria Gene- rationis. Wood's Holl Biological Lectures, 1898 (1899), 265-284. The Free-swimming Copepods of the Wood's Holl Region. Bulletin of the United States Fish Commission for 1899 (1900), 157-192, 30 Figures. Reviews of Carri^re and Burger, On the Embryonic De- velopment of the Wall Bee (Chalicodoma 130 Publications muraria). American Naturalist, XXXII (1898), 794-798. Packard, Text Book of Entomology. Science, New Series, VII (1898), 834^836. phology, XIV (1898), 141-180, Plates XIII- XV. A study in Annelid morphology, with special reference to the nervous system and sense organs. The article also includes a discussion of the so-called "lateral line " in Annelids. Sho Watas6 [1892-99], Assistant Pro- f essor of Cellular Biology ; Professor of Zoology, Imperial University of Tokyo. Homology of the Centrosome. Journal of Morphologij, VIII (1893), 433^144. Microsomes and their Kelation to the Centro- some. Science, New Series, V (1897), 230- 231. On the Nature of Cell-Organization. Wood^a Holl Biological Lectures, 1893 (1894), 83- 104. Origin of the Centrosome. Ibid., 1894 (1896), 273-287. On the Physical Basis of Animal Phosphor- escence. Ibid., 1895 (1896), 101-118. Protoplasmic Contractility and Phosphores- cence. Ibid., 1898 (1899), 177-192. Edwin Oakes Jordan [1892 — ], Associate Professor of Bacteriology. (See under Pathology and Bacteriology, p. 154.) Charles Lawrence Bristol, Ph.D. 1896; Professor of Biology, New York Uni- versity. The Metamerism of Nephelis Lateralis. Doc- tor's thesis. Journal of Morphology, XV (1890), 17-72 After a description of Nephelis follows an extended description of the central nervous system, and f rom_ that proceeds a definition of the metameres in the animal, corroborating Whitman's work on Clepsine. A system of peripheral nerves, containing large bipolar cells, is described, which is in intimate relations with the cen- tral nervous system. The sympathetic nerve system in the leech is fully described for the first time. Howard Stidham Brode, Ph.D. 1896; Professor of Biology and Geology, V^hitman College, Walla Walla, Wash- ington. A Contribution to the Morphology of Dero Vaga. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Mor- CoRNELiA Maria Clapp, Ph.D. 1896; Professor of Zoology, Mount Holyoke College. The Lateral Line System of Batrachus tau. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Morphology, XV (1899), 223-258, Plates XVII-XX. The points of especial interest in this paper are those connected with the origin of the lateral line system and the innervation of the organs. Relation of the Axis of the Embryo to the first Cleavage Plane. Wood's Holl Biological Lectures, 1898 (1899), 139-152. Agnes M. Claypole, Ph.D. 1896; Throop Polytechnic Institute, Pasadena, Calif. The Enteron of the Cayuga Lake Lamprey. Proceedings of the American Microscopical Society, XVI (1894), 125-160. The enteron is studied in the larva, the transforming animal, and the adult stage. Some of the profound changes experienced during these transitions are fol- lowed in detail. _ The conversion of a free living inde- pendent animal into an external parasite brings with it considerations of deep and far-reaching interest. Some Points on Cleavage among Arthropods. Transactions of the American Microscop- ical Society, XIX (1897), 1-8. A short consideration is made of the early stages of egg development among the Arthropoda and some transi- tion forms noted. The Embryology of the Apterygota. Zoolog- ical Bulletin, II (1898), 60-76. A summary of existing knowledge in this field. The Embryology and Oogenesis of Aniuida Maratima Gu6r. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Morphology, XIV (1898), 219-300. The adult ovary was studied to determine the steps of development of the egg, the presence of accessory cells, and the manner of yolk formation and the appearance of the shell. Comparisons were made with the Insecta and Myriapoda. The egg was then followed through its cleavage stages, which were found to be transition- ary in character between holoblastic and superficial. The origin of the germ layers and formation of the organs and final hatching were considered. It was found that this lowly insect form had its alliances more with myriapods and Crustacea than with the higher insects. Department op ZoOlogy 131 Elliot Rowiand Downing, Ph.D. 1901; Instructor in Biology, Marquette (Michi- gan) High School. The Spermatogenesis in Hydra. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The Variation in the Position of the Adductor Muscles of Anodonta Grandis Say. Ameri- can Naturalist, XXXVI (1902), 395-400. Minnie Mabie Enteman, Ph.D. 1901; Assistant in Biology, University Sec- ondary School, Chicago. The Unpaired Ectodermal Structures of the Antennata. Zoological Bulletin, II (1900), 275-282. An attempt to homologize certain of the median ven- tral structures, such as the aiKxiemes of many insects, the brood funnels of the Strepsiptera, and the ectoder- mal portion of the reproductive system of some of the more primitive insects. Variations in the Cephalic Crest of Daphnia Hyalina. American Naturalist, XXXIV (1900), 879-890. A description of new varieties of D. hyalina with a con- sideration of the range of variation for a number of lakes in Michigan and Wisconsin. The Behavior of the Social Wasps. Popular Science Monthly, LXI (1902), 339-351. A study of the activities characteristic of the larval, §upal, and imaginal life of the common paper wasp, pecial attention is paid to the instincts of the nowly excluded workers ana experiments are described which determine the nature of its meatal activities. The young worker is shown to possess the instinct of fear, memory, but not the faculty of imitation. The social wasps appear to learn nothing from one another. In- stinct and individual experience account entirely for their complex activities and their apparent co-opera- tion is due merely to the accident of their being born in the same nest. Coloration in Polistes. Doctor's thesis. Un- published. A study of individual variation in several species of Polistes, and these variations related to specific dis- tinctions in order to determine in what sense the color pattern is adaptive. To test the validity of other im- portant theories concerning the origin of species, the ontogenesis of the color-pattern is determined, and the physical and chemical nature of the pigment considered in connection with individual variation and geographi- cal distribution of Polistes and allied genera. Vary- ing climatic influences determine the coloration of the wasp. In any given locality, the race diflFerentiation may be accounted for on the principles of segregation and slight differences in external conditions during the metamorphosis of the wasp, and for the larger geo- graphical areas, the type of coloring is, in the main, due to climatic conditions in conjunction with cumula- tive segregation. Albeet Chauncey Etcleshymeb, Ph.D. 1894. (See under Anatomy, p. 136.) Emily Ray Geegoby, Ph.D. 1899; In- structor in Zoology, V^ells College for Women, Aurora, N. Y. Origin of the Pronephric Duct in Selachians. Zoological Bulletin, I (1897), 123-129. A brief account of the results of a research on young Acanthias embryos, indicating that the pronephros fuses temporarily with the ectoderm, and that the pronephric duct is partly of mesodermal and partly of ectodermal origin, its tip maintaining connection with ectoderm throughout its growth distally. Observations on the Development of the Ex- cretory System in Turtles. Doctor's thesis. Zoologische Jahrbiicher, XIII (1900), 683- 714, Plates 45-50. Besearches made chiefly on embryos of Platypeltis spinifer. The results were as follows : The pronephros of the turtle arises as outgrowths from the posterior somatic region of the somites. The mesonephros of the turtle may extend anteriorly over much of the prone- phric region and fuses with it so that the parts can only be distinguished in the earliest stages. The metanephros has its origin where the ureter branches from the upper side of the Wolffian duct and in the blastema surrounding it. The metanephros arises in essential independence of the mesonephros. Prone- phros, mesonephros, and metanephros are heterodyna- mous, not homodynamous organs, connected alone by their relations to the Wolffian duct. Michael F. Guyeb, Ph.D. 1900; Assis- tant Professor of Biology, University of Cincinnati. Ovarian Structm-e in an Abnormal Pigeon. Zoological Bulletin, II (1899), 211-224. Spermatogenesis in Hybrid Pigeons. Science, XI (1900), 312. Spermatogenesis of Normal and of Hybrid Pigeons. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The usual four types of cells exist in the genesis of the pigeon spermatozoon. Sixteen chromosomes appear in the spermatogonia, eight in the primary spermato- cytes, but the latter are of the bivalent type. Only four chromosomes appear in the division of the second- ary spermatocyte, but they are stiU of the bivalent type. In hybrid pigeons the general plan of spermato- genesis is not essentially different from that of normal pigeons. All hybrids exhibit multipolar spindles and asymmetrical divisions of the chromatin of the germ cells. Infertile hybrids show, in addition, a deformed spermatozoon and often a marked degeneration of the germinal cells. Irregularities in the distribution of the chromatin may be the basis for the variations which occur in the offsprin^r of fertile hybrids. 132 Publications E. H. Haepee, Ph.D. 1902; Professor of Biology, Albion College, Michigan. Regeneration in Nais Lacustris, Science, New Series, XIV (1901), 28-29. Experiments on the regenerative po'wer of sexual and asexual individuals. The disappearance of a zone of fission under the influence of the formation of a regen- erating region. A comparison of regenerative power at different levels in the asexual and sexual forms show- ing the loss or diminution in the capacity to regener- ate in the latter. Fertilization in the Pigeon's Egg. Abstract. Ibid., XV (1902), 526-527. The maturation and fertilization of the egg; poly- spermy; origin of the yolk-nuclei from spermatozoa: mitosis and amitosis in the yolk nuclei; amoeboid movements of the protoplasm in cell division; differ- entiation and orientation of the active protoplasm within the germinal disc during the periods of matu- ration and cleavage. History of the Fertilization and Early Develop- ment of the Pigeon's Egg. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Samuel Jackson Holmes, Ph.D. 1897; Instructor in Zoology, University of Michigan. Notes on West American Crustacea. Proceed- ings of the California Academy of Science, Second Series, IV (1894), 563-588, Plates XX and XXI. Contains descriptions of new and little-known species of Crustacea. Description of a New Schizopod from Lake Merced. Ibid., VI (1896), 199-200, Plate XIX. Preliminary Account of the Cell-Lineage of Planorbis. Zoological Bulletin, I (1897), 95-101. Reversal of Cleavage in Ancylus. American Naturalist, XXXIII (1899), 871-876. Describes the early cleavage which is of the reversed type and discusses the relation of reversed cleavage to the reversed asymmetry of the adult. The Early Cleavage and Formation of the Mesoderm of Serpulorbis Squamigerus Car- penter. Biological Bulletin, I (1900), 115- 121. The Early Development of Planorbis. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Morphology, XVI (1900), 369-458, Plates XVII-XXI. Describes in detail the early cleavage of the egg. The origin of the three germ layers, the formation of sec- ondary mesoblast, the cell-lineage of the prototroch, head-vesicle, foot, brain, apical plate, shell gland, the origin of the larval kidney, and the process of gastrula- tion. In the general part is a discussion of the rela- tion of reversed cleavage and reversed asymmetry, the subject of cell homologies and the general subject of spiral cleavage. Heebebt Paelin Johnson, Ph.D. 1893; Austin Teaching Fellow, Bussey Insti- tution, Harvard University. A Contribution to the Morphology and Biol- ogy of the Stentors. Doctor's thesis. Jour- nal of Morphology, VIII (1893), 467-562; 4 plates, 3 figures. The subject is presented under the following heads : (1) Systematic and Faunistic. One new species (Stentor pyriformis) and one new variety (S. ianeua var. nigri- cans). (2) Morphology, with five sub-heads: Anatomy, Fission, Regeneration, Conjugation, and Teratology. The results under this head are based upon the study of Stentor Coeruleus and S. rceselii. (3) Biology and Physiology, including studies of rate of multiplication, nutrition, rate of pulsation of contractile vacuole, merotomy, etc. The Plastogamy of Actinosphserium. Ibid., IX, 2 (1894), 269-276, 1 figure. The coalescence of two or more individuals is not ac- companied by fusion of the nuclei, or by nuclear changes of any sort. The phenomenon, therefore, is purely the union, either permanent or temporary, of two distinct masses of protoplasm (plastogamy). It is not followed by any special reproductive activity, and is very differ- ent from the karyogamic conjugation of Protozoa and Protophyta generally. Fbank Rattbay Lillie, Ph.D. 1894. (See above. ) Ralph Stayneb Lillie, Ph.D. 1901 ; In- structor in Physiology, University of Nebraska. The Structiu-e and Development of the Ne- phridia of Arenicola Cristata Stimpson. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. The anatomical part of the paper comprises a descrip- tion of the anatomy, histology, and relations of the adult nephridia. The embryological section describes the developmental history of the nephridia from the time of their first appearance in the mes9derm of the posterior growing region to a period at which the adult characteristics are essentially complete. On Differences in the Effects of Various Salt- Solutions on Ciliary and on Muscular Move- ments in Arenicola Larvae. American Journal of Physiology, V (1901), 56-85. Larvae of Arenicola cristata were subjected to the ac- tion of various salt-solutions (sodium, potassium, cali Department of ZoOlogy 133 cium, and magnesium chlorides and mixtures of these) of a concentration approximately isotonic with sea- water. Identical solutions have different effects on ciliary and on muscular activities. Ciliary movement con- tinues for considerable periods in solutions that quickly arrest all muscular activity {.e.g., of CaClj, MgClj: and mixtures of these salts). In the case of pure 5/8n NaCl solutions the reverse is true. Larvee that have lost all power of muscular movement, but still retain posses- sion of their ciliary activity, no longer show heliotropic orientation. > William Albebt Locy, Ph.D. 1895; Pro- fessor of Zoology, Northwestern Uni- versity. The Formation of the Medullary Groove in Elasmobranchs. Journal of Morphology, VIII (1893), 367-378, 1 plate. The Derivation of the Pineal Eye. Anato- mischer Anzeiger, IX (1893), 169-180, 5 figures. Nachtrag zu diesem Aufsatze. Ibid.j (1894), 231-232. Metameric Segmentation in the Medullary Folds and Embryonic Rim. Ibid., 393-415, 11 figures. The Mid-Brain and the Accessory Optic Ves- icles. Ibid., 486-488. The Optic Vesicles of Elasmobranchs and their Serial Relation to other Structures on the Cephalic Plate. Journal of Morphol- ogy, IX (1894), 115-122. Contribution to the Structure and Develop- ment of the Vertebrate Head. Doctor's thesis. Ibid.y XI (1895), 497-594; 5 double plates, 11 text-figures. Deals largely with the question of metamerism of the head and early stages in the development of sense- organs. ViBGiL EvEBETT McCaskill, Ph.D. 1902 ; Professor of Biology, Normal School, Stevens Point, Wis. The Metamerism of Hirudo Medicinalis. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpublished. By a comparison of the head region with the body, it is concluded that the brain is composed of six neuromeres. The sympathetic nervous system, the peripheral sys- tem of nerves in the neuromere, the arrangement of rings and sense-organs in the posterior region of the leech, the position of the nephridia and the sacs of the intestine are described, the theory that the sense-bear- ing ring is the middle ring of the somite, rather than the first ring, as has usually been held, is supiwrted. The nerves form a continuous plexus running in the body muscles from one end of the body to the other ; and there is a remarkable similarity between the earth- worm and the leech in regard to the general feature of the nervous system. Albebt Davis Mead, Ph.D. 1895; Pro- fessor of Comparative Anatomy, Brown University. Preliminary Account of the Cell-Lineage of Amphitrite and Other Annelids. Journal of Morphology, IX (1894), 465-473. Some Observations on the Maturation and Fecundation of Chaetopterus Pergamen- taceus. Ibid., X (1895), 313-317. The Early Development of Marine Annelids. Doctor's thesis. Ibid., XIII (1897), 227- 326, 23 figures. This thesis consisted of observations upon the cell- lineage of several marine annelid worms, mainly of Amphitrite ornata. The original observation compared with similar researches of others led to the general conclusion that the similarity between the cleavage phemonena in the eggs of worms and molluscs could be interpreted as of morphological significance. John P. Munson, Ph.D. 1897; Professor of Natural Science, State Normal School, EUensburg, Washington. The Ovarian Egg of Limulus. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Morphology, XV (1898), 111-220. A contribution to the problem of the centrosome and yolk-nucleus, including an account of the anatomy and development of the ovary, and a history of the egg. Following an account of ecological observations on Limulus, the origin and growth of the egg is described. John McClellan Pbatheb, Ph.D. 1901 ; Teacher, High School, St. Louis, Mo. The Skeleton of Salanx Microdon. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A complete description of the Japanese whitefish, with remarks on its life history, external characters, taxon- omy, etc. The skeleton is arrested in its development at that critical stage where ossification of cartilage has just begun, so that the skeleton of the adult is almost wholly cartilage with vestiges of the membrane bones common to Teleosts. A description of the hypochorda follows with a complete r6sum6 of the literature, and a discussion in which it is shown that the conditions in Salanx favor the view that the hypochorda is trans- formed into the ventral longitudinal ligament of the spine, as held by Klaatsch. A brief account of the sen- sory canal system is also included. 134 Publications Aabon Louis Tbeadwell, Ph.D. 1899; Professor of Biology, Vassar College. The Cell-Lineage of Podarke Obscura. Zoo- logical Bulletin, I (1897), 195-203. A preliminary description of the cytogeny of Podarke (a marine annelid) with a short discussion of the mean- ing of equal cleavage. Equal and Unequal Cleavage in Annelids. Wood's Holl Biological Lectures, 1898 (1899), 93-111. A comparison of the cleavage of Podarke and that of other annelids, and an attempt to show that the form of the cleavage is not necessarily determined by yolk, but has a direct relation to the proportionate size or the parts of the embryo. Tlie Cytogeny of Podarke Obscura Verrill. Doctor's thesis. Journal of Morphology, XVII (1901), 399-478, 5 plates. A detailed description of the cell-lineage of this anne- lid. In this, the most important new observatira is the discovery of a larval mesoblast which has a differ- ent cell origin from that of the permanent mesoblast, and functions as the mesoblast of the larva. From comparisons of this with other annelids the following conclusions are reached: No "law "of cleavage yet formulated is of universal application in dividing eggs. All mesoblast is morphologically a single structure. The form of the cleavage is directly dependent on the relative size of portions of the larva, or the early or late appearance of these in the ontogeny. The number and importance of cell homologies have been over-esti- mated by previous writers, and it seems much more correct to say that we have regional rather than cell homology. In the larval stages of annelids, platodes, and molluscs, we have parts which are truly homolo- gous, but these are homologous areas, and are not con- fined within the limits of single cells. Southeastern United States as a Center of Geo- graphical Distribution of Flora and Fauna. Biological Bulletin, III (1902), 115-131. Southeastern United States has been an area of preser- vation of ancient types and a post-glacial center of dispersal of types. Criteria are formulated for the determination of centers of dispersal. Life areas are considered as centers of dispersal-and origin, and hence dynamically and genetically. The Post-glacial Origin and Migrations of the Life of Northeastern United States. Jour- nal of Geography, I (1902), 303-309. There was a definite "succession of types along definite highways in the post-glacial return of life to north- eastern United States. Most of the southern types came from the southeast. Bennet Mills Allen, Graduate student. The Topography of Organs in Typical Seg- ments of Hirudo. Biological Bulletin, III (1902), 161-164. Wallace Craig, Graduate student. Song in Birds. Science, N. S., XV (1902), 590- 592. Edith M. Brace, Graduate student. Notes on Aeolosoma Tenebrarum. Journal of Morphology, XVII (1901), 177-184. C. C. Adams, Graduate student. Variation in lo. Proceedings of the American Association for the Advancement of Sci- ence, XLIX (1900), 208-225, Plates I-XXVII. A smooth and relatively globular gasteropod shell {lo fiuvialis Say) occurring in the Powell and Clinch rivers of southwest Virginia and east Tennessee was found to intergrade with a very spinose and relatively elonga- ted shell {lo spinosa Lea) found further down stream in the same rivers. Odonata from Arkansas . Entomological News, XI (1900), 621-622. An annotated list of seventeen species of dragonflies collected by McElfresh in Arkansas. Baseleveling and its Faunal Significance, with Illustrations from Southeastern United States. American Naturalist, XXXV (1901), 839-852. Attention was called to the fundamental nature of the law of baseleveling and its influence upon animal habi- tats. The migration of divides, and other expressions of this law were shown to explain some of the faunal peculiarities of southeastern United States, especially the river faunas. W. J. Baumgartner, Graduate student. Spermatid Transformations in Gryllus Assi- milis, with Special Reference to the Neben- kern. Kansas University Quarterly, XI (1902), 47-63, Plates II-III. The chromartin forms a tube-like spermatozoon head, and the remaining spindle and connecting fibres change into a peculiarly "striated" nebenkern. The striae break ecies, and revisions of certain genera. Monograph of North American Umbelliferae. In collaboration with Joseph Nelson Rose. Contributions from the United States Na- tional Herbarium, VII (1900), vii + 256, 9 plates, 65 text figures. In 1888 the same authors published their Revision of the North American Umbelliferae. Since that time the work of botanical exploration has proceeded with such remarkable activity that the new revision, presented in the Monograph, was needed. It contains the presenta- tion of 78 genera and 371 species, and the descriptions of S new genera and 49 new species. Articles " Anhalonium," "Cactus," "Cereus," " Echinocactus." Cyclopedia of American Horticulture, 1, 67; 203-204, 6 figures; 279- 284, 2 figures; II, 512-516, 3 figures, 1900. The Origin of Angiosperms. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, X, 191-198. The statement of a theory based ui)on investigations during several years by various members of the depart- ment. The common or independent origin of Mono- cotyledons and Dicotyledons is discussed, the conclu- sion being reached that they are independent lines. In case the Angiosperms prove to have a common origin, evidence is advanced to show that the Monocotyledons represent a specialized offshoot from the Dicotyledons, contrary to the recent general_ impression that_ the Monocotyledons are the more primitive. The origin of Angiosperms from Gymnosperms is shown to be unten- able; and even such heterosporous Pteridophytes as Isoetes and Selaginella are very improbable ancestral forms. The general conclusion is reached that the Angiosperms have been directly derived from the eusporangiate ferns, the transition forms to the Mono- cotyledons being unknown ; but the transition forms to Dicotyledons being represented by the abundant and problematical " Froangiosperms " of the early Greta- Department of Botany 149 Charles Keid Barnes [1898 — ], Profes- sor of Plant Physiology. The Progress and Problems of Plant Physi- ology. Proceedings of the American Asso- ciation for the Advancement of Science, XLVIII (1899), 263-288. Address as vice-president (presiding oflScer) of the Sec- tion of Botany. Articles "Fertilization," "Flower," "Teratol- ogy." Cyclopedia of American Horticul- ture, II, 579-580, 3 figures; 592-594, 14 fig- ures; IV, 1782-1785, figures. 1900-1902. A Simple Dynamometer. Torreya, I (1901), 47, 70-71. Bradley Moore Davis [1895 — ], Assis- tant Professor in Botany. Fertilization of Batrachospermum. Annals of Botany, X (1896), 49-76, 2 double plates. A description of the cytological features connected with the act of fertilization in this alga. The Development of the Cystocarp of Champia parvula Harv. Botanical Gazette, XXI (1896), 109-118, 2 plates. A study of the fruit development of a certain seaweed. Development of the Procarp and Cystocarp in the Genus Ptilota. Ibid., XXII (1896), 353-378, 2 double plates. A study of the structure and mode of growth of the frond, the morphology and development of the procar- pic branches, the development of the group of procarps, the minute structure of the procarps, and the develoiv ment of the cystocarp ; followed by a general discussion of the character of this type of carposporic reproduc- tion. The Vegetation of the Hot Springs of Yellow- stone Park. Science, VI (1897), 145-157. A description of the bacteria and algae which occur in the hot springs and of the part they play in the forma- tion of lime and silicions deposits. Kerntheilung in der Tetrasporemutterzelle bei Corallina officinalis L. var. mediterranea Berichte der deutschen botanischen Gesell- schaft, XVI (1898), 266-272, 2 plates. A cytological study dealing with the details of nuclear division in the tetra-spore-mother cell. The Spore-mother-cell of Anthoceros. Bo- tanical Gazette, XXVII (1899), 89-109, 2 plates. A study of the cytological events of the division of the mother cell in this liverwort. The Fertilization of Albugo Candida. Ibid., XXIX (1900), 297-311, 1 plate. A cytological study of oogenesis and fertilization in this fungus, suggested by the recent discovery of multi- nucleate gametes in Albugo Bliti, Nuclear Studies in Pellia. Annals of Botany ^ XV (1901), 147-180, 2 double plates. A cytological study of the development and germina- tion of the spores in this liverwort. The Origin of Sex in Plants. Popular Science Monthly, LX (1901), 66-75, 3 figures. An account of the conditions that gave rise to sexual cells of plants. Oogenesis in Saprolegnia. "With 2 lithographic plates. The University of Chicago Decen- nial Publications, First Series, X, 225-257. Describes the process of egg formation in one of the fish moulds. The investigation bears especially on that type of sexual organ termed the coenogamete, which is a multinucleate structure. The physiological condi- tions that lead to extensive degeneration of the nuclei in the oogonia are discussed together with the cytologi- cal events that determine the selection of the nuclei destined to preside over the eggs. These developments are related to the activities of certain cytoplasmic cen- ters termed coenocentra. The events of oogenesis have important bearings on the views of Trow respecting the sexuality of the Saprolegniales and also on the condi- tions in other groups of the Phycomycetes, the Perono- sporales and Mucorales. Recent investigations upon coenogametes in the Ascomycetes are discussed and theories are advanced as to the evolutionary principles that control the origin and evolution of these struc- tures. _ Coenogametes are believed by the author to be the primitive form of sexual organs in the Mucorales, Peronosporales, and Ascomycetes. Charles Joseph Chamberlain [1896 — ], Instructor in Botany. Morphology of Spermatophytes. Part I, Gym- nosperms. In collaboration with John Merle Coulter. (See above.) Methods in Plant Histology. 8vo, viii + 160, with 74 illustrations. Chicago, University Press, 1901. A manual containing directions for collecting and pre- paring plant material for microscopic study. It meets the requirements, not only of the student who has the assistance of an instructor, but also of the student who must work by himself. The Embryo-Sac of Aster-novae-angliae. Bo- tanical Gazette, XX (1895), 205-212, 2 plates. A study of the development of the megaspore, the structure of the mature embryo sac, and the develop- ment of a remarkable antipodal region. Contribution to the Life-History of Salix. Doc- tor's thesis. Ibid., XXII (1897), 147-179, 7 plates. A study of the organogeny of the flower, the develop- ment of microspores, the origin of the megaspore, the germination of the megaspore, the pollen tubes and fertilization, the development of the embryo, and ab- normal structures. 150 Publications Contribution to the Life-History of Lilium philadelphiacum ; The Pollen Grain. Ibid., XXIII (1897), 423-430, 2 plates. A r6sum6 of the history of the subject, followed by a ills, the tetrads, i ' ' spores. study of the mother cells, the tetrads, and the mature Winter Characters of Certain Sporangia. Ibid., XXV (1898), 124-128, 1 plate. A study of various sporangia in the autumn, winter, and spring conditions, showing that very many pass the winter in the spore-mother cell stage. The Homology of the Blepharoplast. Ibid., XXVI (1898), 431-435. After a discussion of the literature of a number of organs bearing a number of names, the conclusion is reached that under all of these names the same mor- phological body Is described. Oogenesis in Pinus laricio. Ibid., XXVII (1899), 268-280, 3 plates. A cytological study dealing with the ventral canal cell, development of the egg nucleus, and the act of fertiliza- tion. The Origin of the Achromatic Figure in Pellia. With 3 lithographic plates. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, X. Deals with the first two nuclear divisions in the germi- nating spore. For comparison, however, mitosis was studied in other phases of the life history. The prin- cipal conclusions are as follows: The stimulus to nu- clear division comes from within the nucleus. The asters are of cytoplasmic origin. The caps come from the outer portion of the nuclear membrane or from a Hautschicht surrounding the nucleus. The appearance and disappearance of the astral rays suggest that they are concerned in the movement of nuclear matter. The centrosphere is formed by the astral rays, not the rays by the centrosphere. The centrosphere or Pellia represents a condition intermediate between the well-defined centrosphere of some of the thallophytes and the centrosomeless con- dition of the higher plants. The spindle fibers, except the mantle fibers, grow from one i)ole to the other. In early stages two half -spindles are often distinguishable. The Physiographic Ecology of Chicago and Vicinity: A Study of the Origin, Develop- ment, and Classification of Plant Societies. Ibid., XXXI (1901), 73-108, 145-182, 35 half- tone illustrations. Plant societies are governed in their development by physiographic changes, hence they should be classified as are the topographic forms upon which they are located. There is a progressive tendency toward a mesophytic level on the part of xerophytic uplands and hydrophytic lowlands. The Chicago region is treated from this standpoint to illustrate the physiographic theory, and the life history of various topographic series is briefly recounted ; the river series with ravine, bluff, and flood plain; the swamp-prairie series; the upland series; the lake bluff series; and the beach- dune sandhill series. The Plant Societies of Chicago and Vicinity. Bulletin of the Geographic Society of Chi- cago, II (1901), 1-76, 38 half-tone illustra- tions, 2 maps. The body of the text is the same as in the preceding article. The introduction treats of recent progress in physiographic ecology, and at the close there is a list of representative localities. The Influence of Underlying Kocks on the Character of the Vegetation. Bulletin of the American Bureau of Geography, II (1901), 163-176, etc., 15 half-tone illustra- tions. After a historical summary in which the chemical and physical theories are set forth and other theories ad- vanced, the various rock types are reviewed as to the character of their vegetation. There is a striking simi- larity in all rock vegetation, and differences arise mainly from differences in the physiographic phase of the rock exposures. Rocks which erode with difficulty long maintain xerophytic floras; rocks which erode readily are soon clothed with mesophytic floras. Henry Chandler Cowles [1897 — ], In- structor in Botany. The Ecological Relations of the Vegetation on the Sand Dunes of Lake Michigan. Doctor's thesis. Botanical Gazette, XXVII (1899), 95-117, 167-202, 281-308, 361-391, with map and 25 half-tone illustrations. After a treatment of the physiographic features of the shore of Lake Michigan and of the various ecologfical factors, the plant societies of the dunes are described. The beach is subdivided ecologically into three zones. Dunes are formed on the beach through the agency of various perennial plants. The active dune complex has phases in which plant life encroaches on the dune, others in which the dune encroaches on the vegetation; some swamp plants survive a partial burial by sand, but most plants are soon destroyed. Ultimately the dunes become established and are tenanted at first largely by Populus and Tilia, later by Pirnis, later still by Querctia, Florence May Lyon [1901 — ], Associate in Botany. A Contribution to the Life History of Euphor- bia Corollata. Botanical Gazette, XXV (1898), 418^26, 3 plates. A study of the inflorescence, cyathinm, organogeny of the flower, development of the megasporangium, mega- spore, microsporangium, and microspore. A Study of the Sporangia and Gametophytes of Selaginelia Apus and Selaginella Rupes- tris. Doctor's thesis. Ibid., XXXII (1901), 124-141, 170-194, 5 double plates. A study of the sporangia, megaspores, female gameto- phyte, archegonia, microspores, and the phenomena of fertilization; followed by a general discussion of the relation of the results to previous knowledge. Depabtment op Botany 151 Habry Nichols Whitfobd [1899 — ], Assistant in Botany. The Genetic Development of the Forests of Northern Michigan: A Study in Physio- graphic Ecology. Botanical Gazette, XXXI (1901), 289-325, 18 illustrations. After a discussion of the factors that influence the de- velopment of trees, there is a description of the suc- cession of plant societies in five situations, sand, clay, rock, swamp, and clearing. In each case it is shown that there is a steady growth toward a climax society which is the maple-beech-hemlock forest. BuETON Edwabd Livingston [1899 — ], Assistant in Botany. The Effect of the Osmotic Pressure of the Medium upon the Growth and Reproduc- tion of Organisms. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 20. Chicago, 1903. Being a chapter from the following Tolome : The Role of Diffusion and Osmotic Pressure in Plants. The University of Chicago De- cennial Publications, Second Series, Vol. VIII. 8vo, x + 144. Part I deals with the purely physical aspects of diffu- sion and osmotic pressure. Herein is made an attempt to bring together all the knowledge of fact and theory in this field which is essential to the practical use of physical chemistry in physiological work. Part II presents the subject in its physiological aspects. The literature is reviewed and digested up to date. On the Natm« of the Stimulus which Causes the Change of Form in Polymorphic Green Algae. Botanical Gazette, XXX (1900), 289- 317, Plates XVII, XVIII. A study of the behavior of a polymorphic Stigeoclonium when grown in nutrient media of differing osmotic pressures. It is shown that varying the proportions of constituent salts does not cause a change in form, but variations in the osmotic pressure of the medium (whether accompanied or not by change in proportion of salts) does bring about a prompt response in the organism. The form of the plant seems to be controlled entirely by osmotic pressure. Further Notes on the Physiology of Polymor- phism in Green Algae. Ibid., XXXII (1901), 292-302. The results of experiments upon Stigeoclonium in solutions of non-electrolytes and upon a merely moist substratum. The results of the previous paper are cor- roborated. In solutions of non-electrolytes, as in those of electrolytes, it is a question of the chemical nature of the solutes. On moist clay and gelatin plates the form of the alga is determined by the concentration of the solution with which the plate is moistened. To these experiments are added the results of determina- tions of the actual osmotic pressure of the mineral solutions previously used. These were accomplished by the methods of freezing and boiling points. While the actual pressure is often different from the calcu- lated pressure, the discrepancy lies always within the limits of the range of sensibility of the organism. Thus the errors of calculation are too small to affect the results of the experiments. The Distribution of the Plant Societies of Kent County, Michigan. Annual Report of the State Geologist of Michigan, 1902, pp. 81- 103, Plate III. This includes a topographical and glaciological study of the county, together with a description of the several plant societies, and a map showing graphically the dis- tribution of the upland societies. In general, the work seems to produce evidence in favor of the idea that the distribution of the different societies is largely depend- ent ui)on the amount of water in the soil, and dependent to a very slight degree upon the chemical nature of the soil particles. The Distribution of the Upland Plant Societies of Kent County, Michigan. Botanical Ga- zette, XXXV (1903), 36-55, with map. A somewhat more technical report of a portion of the survey presented in the above paper. Otis William Caldwell [1897-99], As- sistant in Botany ; Professor of Botany, State Normal School, Charleston, 111. On the Life History of Lemna minor. Doc- tor's thesis. Botanical Gazette, XXVII (1899), 37-66, 59 text-figures. A study of the sporophyte and its vegetative multipli- cation, the organogeny of the much reduced flower, the development of the microspores and their germina- tion, the development of carpel, ovule, megaspore, and female gametophyte, fertilization, and formation of the embryo ; together with ecological notes. William Dayton Mebbell [1897-99], Assistant in Botany; Instructor in Botany, University of Rochester. A Contribution to the Life History of Silphium. Doctor's thesis. Botanical Gazette, XXIX (1900), 99-133, 7 plates. A study of the organogeny of the flower, the develop- ment of the megaspore and embryo sac, the develop- ment of microspores, the male gametophyte, the act of fertilization, and the development of the embryo. William L. Bbay, Ph.D. 1898; Profes- sor of Botany, University of Texas. The Ecological Relations of the Vegetation of Western Texas. Doctor's thesis. Botanical 152 Publications Gazette, XXXII (1901), 99-123, 195-217, 262-291, 24 half-tone illustrations. A discussion of floral elements, climatic relations, physiographic and geologic provinces, and the ecologic characters of the flora ; together with a statement of the profound changes that are being brought about by Otis William Caldwell, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) John Gaylord Coulter, Ph.D. 1900; Instructor in Botany, Government Normal School, Manila, P. I. A Morphological Study of Slum. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. Deals with spermatogenesis, oogenesis, and the devel- opment of the embryo. Henry Chandler Cowles, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) Theodore Christian Frye, Ph.D. 1902; Acting Professor of Biology, Morning- side College, Sioux City, Iowa. Development of the Pollen in Some Asclepia- daceae. Botanical Gazette, XXXII (1901), 325-331, 1 plate. A study of various species of Asclepias and Acerates to discover the development of pollen grains in rela- tion to the pollinium, A Morphological Study of Certain Asclepiada- ceae. Doctor's thesis, ibid., XXXIV (1902), 389-413, 3 plates. The result of the investigation of Asclepiai Cornuti, and the extension of the observations to nine other closely related species. It includes chiefly (1) the development of the floral organs in general with special attention to the formation of the horn and hood ; (2) the development of the ovules and egg, with reference to the reported absence of nucellus and potential megaspores in Cynanchum ; (3) fertilization, with reference to the fate of the male nuclei ; (4) the formation of endosperm as contrasted with that of Casuarina and the formation of flat seed with its ane- mophilous adaptations; (5) the development of the double- walled pod. Anstruther Abercrombie Lawson, Ph.D. 1901; Assistant in Botany, Leland Stanford Junior University. Studies in the Morphology of the Nucleus. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. An attempt to demonstrate that the so-called nuclear membrane may or may not be present, and that it is not to be regarded as an essential feature of the nucleus. Origin of the Cones of the Multipolar Spindle in Gladiolus. Botanical Gazette, XXX (1900), 145-153, 1 double plate. Burton Edward Livingston, Ph.D. 1901. (See above.) Florence May Lyon, Ph.D. 1901. (See above.) William Dayton Merrell, Ph.D. 1898. (See above.) N. L. T. Nelson, Ph.D. 1899 ; Instructor in Botany, Normal and High School, St. Louis, Mo. A Kevision of the Genus Solanum. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. James Bertram Overton, Ph.D. 1901; Professor of Botany, Illinois College, Jacksonville, Illinois. Parthenogenesis in Thalictrum purpurascens. Doctor's thesis. Botanical Gazette, XXXIII (1902), 36a-375, 2 plates. Treats of the development of the megaspore and its germination, and the partheno^enetic occurrence of embrjros ; followed by a general discussion of partheno- genesis in Angiosperms. R. Wilson Smith, Ph.D. 1899; Pro- f essor of Biology, McMaster University, Toronto. A Contribution to the Life History of the Pon- tederiaceae. Botanical Gazette, XXV (1898), 324-337, 2 plates. Chiefly a study of Eichhornia crassipes as to the devel- opment of its microspores and megaspores ; followed by a briefer statement of results in connection with Pontederia cordata and Heteranthera graminis. Structure and Development of the Sporophylls and Sporangia of Isoetes. Doctor's thesis. Ibid., XXIX (1900), 225-258, 323-346, 7 plates. The study of a problematical group, to clear up its homologies, and especially to examine the foundation of a claim made in recent years that it may have given Department of Botany 153 rise to the Monocotyledons. The topics considered are as follows : The stem, the leaf, and ligule, the spo- rangium, later development of microsporangia and megasporangia, the succession of sporophylls, hom- ology of the archesporium, relations of the velum, and affinities of Isoetes. The Achromatic Spindle in the Spore-Mother Cells of Osmunda regalis. Ibid., XXX (1900), 361-377, 1 plate. A cytological study dealing with the origin, structure, and behavior of the achromatic spindle. Frank Lincoln Stevens, Ph.D. 1900; Professor of Biology, College of Agri- culture and Mechanic Arts, Raleigh, North Carolina. The Effect of Aqueous Solutions upon the Germination of Fungus Spores. Botanical Gazette, XXVI (1898), 377^06. The results of numerous culture experiments are pre- sented in a series of tables, and in a brief summary the relative toxic effects of different chemical substances upon various fungi are cited. The Compound Oosphere of Albugo Bliti. Doctor's thesis. Ibid., XXVIII (1899), 149- 176, 225-245, 5 plates. The original demonstration of multinucleate fusion in connection with fertilization, the multinucleate egg being given the name "compound oosphere." The sub-titles are as follows: development of oogonium and antheridium, differentiation of compound oos- phere, simultaneous mitosis in oogonium, maturation of compound oosphere and antheridium, fertilization, and maturation of oospore. Abram H. Conrad, Graduate student. A Contribution to the Life History of Quercus. Botanical Gazette, XXIX (1900), 408-418, 2 plates. A study of the stamens and pollen, the ovule, the arch- esporium, the embryo sac, the endosperm, and the embryo. George M. Holferty, Graduate student. Ovule and Embryo of Potamogeton natans. Botanical Gazette, XXXI (1901), 339-346, 2 plates, 1 text figure. A study of the spikes, flowers, ovule, archesporium, megaspore, female gametophyte, and embryo. William Jesse Good Land, Graduate student. Double Fertilization in Compositse. Botani- cal Gazette, XXX (1900), 252-260, 2 plates. A description of the discovery of doable fertilization in ErigBron and Silphium. A. C. Life, Graduate student. The Tuber-like Rootlets of Cycas revoluta. Botanical Gazette, XXXI (1901), 265-271, 10 text figures. A study of the structural relations between the rootlets of Cycas and the algce and fungi which are associated with the development of the so-called tuberous growths. W. B. McCallum, Graduate student. On the Nature of the Stimulus Causing the Change of Form and Structure in Proser- pinaca palustris. Botanical Gazette, XXXIV (1902), 93-108. The plant is characterized by developing submerged and aerial leaves differing extremely in form and anatomi- cal structure. The shoot may be made to develop either type at will by allowing the leaf primordia to develop in water or in air. A long series of experi- ments was undertaken to analyze the physiological conditions presented by the water medium to the plant, and the effect of each of these on the behavior of the primordia. John H. Sohaffner, Graduate student. Contribution to the Life History of Sagittaria variabilis. Botanical Gazette, XXIII (1897), 252-273, 7 plates. A study of the development of the male cell, egg, and embryo, and the phenomena connected with fertiliza- tion. Contribution to the Life History of Lilium philadelphiacum : the Division of the Ma- crospore Nucleus. Ibid., 430-452, 3 plates. Based upon an account of the results of the author's investigation there is a general discussion of chromo- somes, nucleoli, and cytoplasmic radiation, and spindle threads. The Development of the Stamens and Carpels of Typha latifolia. Ibid., XXIV (1897), 93-102, 3 plates. A study of the development of stamens, microspores, male gametophyte, carpel, megaspore, and female gametophyte. George Harrison Shull, Graduate stu- dent. Some Plant Abnormalities. Botanical Ga- zette, XXXII (1901), 343-355, 36 figures. An account of abnormal development in the leaves of Pelargonium and Hicoria; and in the flowers otLathy- ru8 odoratus and two species of Clematis. 154 Publications Laetitia Morris Snow, Graduate student. Some Notes on the Ecology of the Delaware Coast. Botanical Gazette, XXXII (1901), 384-406. A study of the nnnsual ecological conditions obtaining along the Atlantic coast from Cape Henlopen to Reho- both bay, a region with no outlying chain of islands. The plant formations are considered under the follow- ing heads: Beach, Dune, Swamp and Meadow, Heath, Thicket, and Forest. Jonathan Edward Webb, Graduate stu- dent. A Morphological Study of the Flower and Embryo of Spiraea. Botanical Gazette, XXXIII (1902), 451-460, 28 figures. Treats of the organogeny of the flower, the microspo- rangium, the megasporangium, and the embryo. A Morphological Study of Thuya. Ibid., XXXIV (1902), 249-259, 2 plates. A study of the development of the pollen tube and of the archegonium, and the processes connected with fertilization. E. B. CoPELAND, Ph.D. dent. Research stu- The Rise of the Transpiration Stream: An Historical and Critical Discussion. Botani- cal Gazette, XXXIV (1902), 161-193, 260- 283. A general discussion of the cause of the so-called " ascent of sap," based upon a large number of origi- nal experiments. XXVIII. PATHOLOGY AND BACTERIOLOGY LUDVIG Hektoen [1901], Professor and Head of the Department of Pathology and Bacteriology. Experimental Bacillary Cirrhosis of the Liver. Journal of Pathology and Bacteriology, VII (1901), 214-220. Production of cirrhosis of the liver by a bacillus of pseudo-diphtheria group. The Extension of Aortic Aneurysms Into and Between the Walls of the Heart and Dis- secting Aneurysm of the Heart. Trans- actions of the Association of American Physicians, XVI (1901), 127-139. Description of several illustrative cases. Actinomycosis of the Respiratory Tract. In- ternational Clinics, II (1901), 94-104. A general summary of this localization of actinomy- cosis. The American Text-Book of Pathology. Svo, 1245. Philadelphia, W. B. Saunders & Co., 1901. Co-editor, and contributor of the sections on "General Pathological Pro- cesses," 37-160; " Diseases of the Ductless Glands," 890-924; "Diseases of the Bones and Joints," 662-723. Pathology. Progressive Medicine, 1902, 277- 362. A yearly review of progress. Linnaeus as a Physician. Journal of the American Medical Association, XXXIX (1902), 593-598. Sketch of some of the phases of the medical work and writings of Linneeus. Absorption and Incrustation of Elastic Fibers. Journal of Medical Research, VII (1902), 159-165. A study of changes in elastic fibers within giant cells in inflammatory foci. Edwin Oakes Jordan [1892 — ], Associate Professor of Bacteriology. The Principles of Bacteriology. Translation from the German of Dr. Ferdinand Hueppe. Svo, x-l-467. Chicago, Open Court Pub- lishing Co., 1899. The Habits and Development of the Newt. With plates. Journal of Morphology, VIII (1893), 269-366. Particular attention is paid to the earlier stages of development, and especially to the nuclear phenomena accompanying maturation and fertilization. On the Cleavage of the Amphibian Ova. In collaboration with A. C. Eycleshymer. Ibid., IX (1894), 407-416. A study of the various cleavage forms found in the eggs of Amblystoma, Diemyctylus and other amphibia. Department of Pathology and Bacteriology 155 The Identification of the Typhoid Fever Bacil- lus. Journal of the American Medical As- sociation, XXIII (1894), 931-935. On Some Conditions Affecting the Behavior of the Typhoid Bacillus in Water. Medical News, LXVII (1895), 337. A study of the vitality of different races of the typhoid bacillus in distilled water and in water from Lake Michigan. The "Inheritance" of Certain Bacterial Dis- eases. Chicago Medical Recorder, XV (1898), 82-86. The Production of Fluorescent Pigment by Bacteria. Botanical Gazette, XXVII (1899), 19-36. Precise description of six cultures of fluorescent bacte- ria used in the experiments. Exi)eriments deal with : the influence of the chemical composition of the medium; influence of concentration of the medium; influence of light upon pigment production ; influence of reaction of the medium ; etc. A list of fluorescent bacteria is appended. The Death Rate from Diphtheria in the Large Cities of the United States. Philadelphia Medical Journal, February 18, 1899, 11. A comparison of conditions existing in some of the cities of the United States and in London, Paris, and some German towns before and since the introduction of antitoxin treatment. Illustrated by table showing the improvement since its introduction. Bacillus Pyocyaneus and Its Pigments. Jour- nal of Experimental Medicine, IV (1899), 627-647. A comparative examination of a number of cultures of Bacillus pyocyaneus with special reference to the existence of different races. Some Observations Upon the Bacterial Self- Purification of Streams. Ibid., V (1900), 271-315. The methods employed and results obtained during an investigation of the waters of the Illinois river and its tributaries, made for the Sanitary District of Chicago. The results are presented in tabular form and some general considerations drawn from them. On the Detection of Bacillus Coli Communis in Water. Journal of the Boston Society of Medical Sciences, IV (1900), 153-182. A comparison of the fermentation tube method of detection with that of acid carbol-broth, to the advan- tage of the latter. Notes on Bacterial Water Analysis. In col- laboration with E. E Irons. Reports and Paper of the American Public Health Association, XXV (1900), 564-570. Some of the practical questions connected with water analysis, i. e.. Methods of Transpiortation, especial reference being had to ice-packing; Dilution, intro- ducing a plea for more uniform methods; and Nutri- ent media, including tables in which various standard media are compared. The Relative Abundance of Bacillus Coli Com- munis in River Water as an Indication of the Self-Purification of Streams. Journal of Hygiene, I, No. 3 (1901), 293-320. An examination of the evidence afforded as to the so-called self-puriflcation of streams by the relative abundance of one of the most characteristic of the known sewage bacteria. Notes on the Occurrence and Habitat of Ano- pheles Punctipennis and Anopheles Maculi- pennis in the Valley of the Androscoggin. Plate. Journal of Medical Research, VII (1902), 1-24. The Self-Purification of Rivers. 2 maps. The University of Chicago Decennial Publica- tions, First Series, Vol. X, 79-89. A statement concerning the methods employed and the results obtained in a study of the Illinois river and its tributaries, together with some conclusions as to the kind of evidence best adapted to show the existence of a purifying process. On the Nature of Pyocyanolysin. Transac- tions of the Chicago Pathological Society, V (1902), 175-178. Typhoid Fever, and Water Supply in Chicago. Journal of the American Medical Associa- tion, XXXIX (1902), 1661-1566. Reviews of Frankland, Percy and Frankland, Grace, Pas- teur. Science, New Series, VII (1898), 836. Migula, System der Bakterien, II. Botanical Gazette, XXIX (1900), 146-148. Newman, Bacteria. Ibid., XI (1900), 70. H. Gideon Wells [1901 — ], Instructor in Pathology. Reversibility of Enzymes and Its Application in Physiologic and Pathologic Processes. Journal of the American Medical Associa- tion, XXXVIII (1902), 220-223. The Pathology of the Healed Fibrous Adhe- sions of the Pericardium. American Jour- nal of the Medical Sciences, CXXIII (1902), 241-261. Studies in Fat Necrosis. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, Vol. X, 197-223. A series of exiierimental studies on the pathogenesis of intra-abdominal fat necrosis, of the type foflowing pancreatic lesions, based upon the observation that 156 Publications the typical process can be produced experimentally with dried extracts of the pancreas. This has given opportunity for control of conditions which cannot be attained by the methods previously used, making it possible to approach the question of the causative fac- tor in an exact manner. The study of the thermal death- point of the necrosis-producing element of the pancre- atic extract shows it to be in all probability a ferment. The order of development of the changes in the lesions indicates that the necrosis is primary and the fat-splitting secondary. Lymphoma. Reference Handbook of Medical Science, V (1902), 663-664. William Buchanan Wherey [1901 — ], Associate in Bacteriology. The Distribution of Segmentation and Frag- mentation in the Myocardium. Transac- tions of the Chicago Pathological Society, IV (1901), 133-137. A Case of So-called Malignant Carbuncle (Staphylococcus) of the Upper Lip, Fol- lowed by Pyaemia. American Medicine, III (1902), 28-30. Experiments on the Permeability of the Pasteur - Chambelard Bougie to Bacteria of Small Size. Journal of Medical Research, VIII (1902), 322-328. Ernest Edward Irons [1901 — ], Assist- ant in Bacteriology. Some Observations on Methods for the Detec- tion of B coli communis in Water. Reports and Papers of the American Public Health Association, XXVI (1900), 310-314. Notes on Bacterial Water Analysis. In col- laboration with E. O. Jordan. (See above.) Neutral-Red in the Routine Examination of Water. Journal of Hygiene, II (1902), 314- 319. Mary Hefferan [1902 — ], Curator of the Bacteriological Museum. A New Chromogenic Micrococcus. Botanical Gazette, XXX (1900), 261-272. Variation in the Teeth of Nereis. Biological Bulletin, II (1900), 129-143. Experiments in Grafting Hydra. Archiv filr Entwickelungsmechanik, XIII (1902), 565- 587. An Unusual Bacterial Grouping. Centralblatt filr Bakteriologie, VIII (1902). Abstract. Transactions of the Chicago Pathological Society, V (1902), 63-67. Howell Emlyn Da vies [1900-1901], As- sistant in Bacteriology. The Occurrence of the Typhoid Bacillus in the Urine of Typhoid Fever Patients. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. • Review of Beijerinck. Ueber Regeneration der Sporenbil- dung bei Alkoholhefen, wo diese Funktion im Verschwinden begriffen ist. Botanical Gazette, XXVII (1899), 488-489. XLI. OLD TESTAMENT LITERATURE AND INTERPRETATION (See above, page 39, under Semitic Languages and Literatm-es) XLII. NEW TESTAMENT LITERATURE AND INTERPRETATION (See above, page 46, under Biblical and Patristic Greek) XLIII. BIBLICAL THEOLOGY (See under Semitic Languages and Literatures, and Biblical and Patristic Greek) Depabtment of Systematic Theology 157 XLIV. SYSTEMATIC THEOLOGY Geoege Bubman Fosteb [1895 — ], Pro- fessor of Systematic Theology. The Theological Training of the Times. Bib- lical World, IX (1896), 23-25. The Influence of Jesus on the Doctrine of God. Ibid., XI (1898), 306-318. Kaftan's Dogmatik. American Journal of Theology, II (1898), 802-827. Reviews of Kahler, Der sogenannte historische Jesus und der geschichtliche biblische Christus. Ibid., I (1897), 1079-1082. Strong, Christian Ethics. Ibid., 1089-1093. Kaftan, Das Christentum und Nietzsches Her- renmoral. Ibid., II (1898), 725-726. Domer, Grundriss der Dogmengeschichte. Ibid., IV (1900), 864. Frank, Geschichte und Kritik der neueren Theologie. Ibid., 62^-630. Garvie, Kitschelian Theology. Ibid., 630-632. Liihr, 1st eine religionlose Moral moglich? Ibid., 462^63. Schmidt, Christliche Dogmatik. Ibid., 443-4. Vischer, Ritschl's Anschauung vom evangeli- schen Glauben und Leben. Ibid., 807-808. Gebald Bibney Smith [1900 — ], In- structor in Systematic Theology. Practical Theology: A Neglected Field in Theological Education. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Series, III, Part I. Reviews of Aall, Geschichte der Logosidee in der christ- lichen Litteratur. American Journal of Theology, V (1901), 175-178. Brewster, Aspects of Revelation. Ibid., 826-7. Denio, The Supreme Leader. Ibid., 188-189. Herrmann, Ethik. Ibid., VI (1902), 173-175. Domer, Grundriss der Encyclopadie der Theo- logie. Ibid., 401-402. *Geobge Washington NoBTHBUP [1892 — 1900], Professor and head of the Department of Systematic Theology. The Fatherhood of God. American Journal of Theology, V (1901), 473-495. The Sovereignty of God. 12mo. Part I, 144 pp.; Part II, pp. 65-97; Part III, 61 pp. A Discussion with Professor Robert Watts. Louisville, Baptist Book Concern, 1894. *Ezekiel Gilman Robinson [1892-4], Professor of Ethics and Apologetics. Training Men to Preach. Homiletic Review, XXV (1893), 104-108. Christian Evidences. 8vo, 159. Boston, Silver, Burdett, & Co. 1895, Cabl Delos Case, Ph.D. 1899; Clergy- man. First Baptist Church, Terre Haute, Indiana. The Incarnation and Modem Thought. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpubhshed. The Introduction deals with the modern tendency to minimize the philosopical elements in Christology, and the manifest need of a fresh formulation of Chris- tian teaching in regard to the person of Christ. Part I deals with the New Testament criteria for a Christology as derived from the Christology of Christ, of Paul, of the author of the epistle to the Hebrews, and of the Evangelists. Part II deals with the constructive out- lines of a possible Christology as related to the ideas of divine immanence, divine and human kinship, race solidarity, the evolutionary process, psychological principles, the fatherhood of God, and the life of the Spirit. Geoege Cboss, Ph.D. 1900; Professor of History, McMaster University, To- ronto. The Theology of Schleiermacher. An Inter- pretation and an Estimate. Doctor's thesis. Unpubhshed. Jesus' Thought of Himself. Homiletical Re- view, XXIX (1895), 387-392. An attempt to restate the doctrine of the person of Christ by an examination of his self-consciousness according to the expressions of it ascribed to himself. 158 Publications JuLLiEN AvEEY Herriok, Ph.D. 1900; Clergyman, Bay City, Mich. The Development and Significance of the Leben Jesu Literature. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. A historical study of Biblical criticism culminating in the modern Life of Christ with an estimate of its sig- nificance for apologetics and dogmatics. LORAN D. OsBOEN, Ph.D. 1900; Clergy- man, First Baptist Church, Blooming- ton, 111. The Recovery and Restatement of the Gospel. Doctor's thesis. In press. Part I. The modern spirit and its search for reality ; the historical obscuration and recovery of the Gospel ; the recovered gospel of the New Testament. Part II. The Gospel and Theology : the Gospel restated. Arthur Maxson Smith, Ph.D. 1901; President Oahu College, Honolulu, H. I. The Contribution of Thomas Aquinas to Mod- ern Individualism. Doctor's thesis. Un- published. The germ of the Kantian and post Kantian philosoph- ical and religious point of view and method is shown to have existed in Thomas Aquinas's fundamental distinc- tions between faith and reason. The Lutheran Refor- mation, Protestant dogma, and the development of modern inductive science, are shown to be the necessary and logical sequence of Thomas's fundamental proposi- tions as to Faith, Reason, and the Church. The con- clusion is that at the moment of complete systemiza- tion of the Catholic dogma, it contained in the germ the elements of its own destruction and of a new growth, namely, the Protestantism, the philosophical and scientific procedure of modern times. Hiram VanKirk, Ph.D. 1900; Dean of the Berkeley Bible Seminary, Berkeley, Calif. The Historical Theology of the Disciples of Christ. Doctor's thesis. Unpublished. An attempt to trace the sources of the factors making up the doctrinal tenets of that denomination which arose in America in the first quarter of the nineteenth century under the leadership of Alexander Campbell : also the working out of these factors under the avowed principles of Christian union and the restoration of primitive Christianity in the history of the denomina- tion. XLV. CHURCH HISTORY Eri Baker Hulbert [1892 — ], Professor and Head of the Department of Church History. Revieios of Liebermann, Ueber die Leges Edwardi Con- fessoris. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 828-829. Wakeman, Introduction to the History of the Church of England. Ibid., 1051-1059. Mason, The Mission of St. Augustine to Eng- land. Ibid., II (1898), 426-427. Clark, The Anglican Reformation. Ibid., 430- 432. Church, Occasional Papers. Ibid., 734-735. Biittgenbach, Geschichte des Kreuzes vor und nach Golgatha; and Seymoiu:, The Cross in Tradition, History, and Art. Ibid., Ill (1899), 171-172. Kinloch, Studies in the Scottish Ecclesiastical History in the Seventeenth and Eighteenth Centmies. Ibid., 389-390. Gee, The Elizabethan Clergy and their Settle- ment of ReUgion. Ibid., 808-809. Fairbairn, Catholicism, Roman, and Anglican; Sanday, The Conception of the Priesthood in the Early Church and in the Church of England. Ibid., 837-841. Boissier, La fin du paganisme. Ibid., 854-855. Griffes, The Pilgrims in their Three Homes. Ibid., 855-856. Gasquet, The Eve of the Reformation. Ibid. V (1901), 586-588. Hunt, The English Church from its Foimda- tion to the Norman Conquest. Ibid., 170- 171. Thirreau-Dangin, La renaissance catholique en Angleterre. Ibid., 810-811. Department of Church History 159 Franklin Johnson [1892 — ], Professor of Church History and Homiletics. Quotations of the New Testament from the Old, Considered in the Light of General Literature. 8vo, xix + 409. Philadelphia, American Baptist Publication Society, 1896. Articles on " Apocatastesis," "Apostolic Suc- cession," "Atonement," " Consubstantia- tion," "Christology," " Evidences of Chris- tianity," " Holy Ghost," " Higher Criticism," " Synergism." New American Supplement to the Encyclopedia Britannica, I, 204:- 205, 28^283; II, 799-800, 904-905, 1224- 1226; III, 944^945, 1600; IV, 2842-2843. 1897. Introduction (xi-xiv) to Marsh, The New Tes- tament Church. Philadelphia, Baptist Pub- lication Society, 1898. The Precursors of Christian Science, pp. 75-84 in a Symposium : Searchlights on Christian Science. Chicago, Fleming H. Revell, 1899. The Atonement: A chapter in Theology at the Dawn of the Twentieth Century, pp. 261-273. Boston, Small, Maynard & Co., 1901. Have We the Likeness of Christ? With 16 half-tone illustrations. The University of Chicago Decennial Publications, First Se- ries, III, Part 1, 1-23. A detailed refutation of the view that is widely held that the representations of Christ in early Christian art go back to a painter contemporary with Christ. Reviews of Fisher, History of Christian Doctrine. Ameri- can Journal of Theology, I (1897), 240-243. Gothein, Ignatius von Loyola und die Gegen- reformation. Ibid., 500-502. Benson, Cyprian, his Life, his Times, his Work. Ibid., II (1898), 422^26. Wilkinson, Epic of Paul. Ibid., 715-717. Pariset, L'6tat et les 6glises en Prusse sous Fred6ric-Guillaume P'. Ibid., 916-917. Clos, Kreuz und Grab Jesu. Ibid., Ill (1899), 172-173. Stahelin, Huldreich Zwingli. Ibid., 189-190. Brandenburg, Moritz von Sachsen. Ibid., 385- 387. Richard, Philip Melanchton. Ibid., 853-854. Wolf, Deutsche Geschichte im Zeitalter der Gegenreformation. 813-815. Haupt, BeitrSge zur Reformationsgeschichte der Reichsstadt Worms. Ibid., IV (1900), 252-253. Elze, Luthers Reise nach Rom. Ibid., 669. MacCoU, The Reformation Settlement. Ibid., 650. Mayer, Anerben und Theilungssystem. 907- 908. Kannengieser, Les missions catholiques, en France et Allemagne. Ibid., V (1901), 416- 417. Schmidt, Zinzendorfs soziale Stellung. Ibid., 427. The Autobiography of Charles H. Spurgeon, Compiled by His Wife and Private Secre- tary. J6td., 394r-395. Walker, The Reformation. Ibid., 589-592. Sabatier, Collection de documents pour I'his- toire religieuse et litt6raire du moyen ftge. Ibid., 572-576. Nippold, The Papacy in the Nineteenth Cen- tury. Ibid., 796-798. John W. Monoriep [1894 — ], Associate Professor of Church History. A Short History of the Christian Chiuch. 12mo, 456. Fleming H. Revell, New York, 1902. Reviews of Vincent, The Age of Hildebrand. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 218-219. Lea, A History of Auricular Confession and Indulgences in the Latin Church. Ibid., 829-832. Hauck, Kirchengeschichte Deutschlands. Ibid., 1065-1066. Wells, The Age of Charlemagne. Ibid., II (1898), 912. 160 Publications Waterman, The Post-Apostolic Age. Ibid., Ill (1899), 795-796. Workman, The Church of the West in the Mid- dle Ages. Ibid., 800-801. Lloyd, The Philosophy of History. Ibid.y IV (1900), 562-564. Newman, A Manual of Chiurch History. Ibid., 851-852. Brandl, Die Renaissance in Florenz und Rom. Ibid., 906. Doumergue, Jean Calvin. Ibid., V (1901), 164- 166. Hurst, A History of the Christian Church. Ibid., 576-578. Warren Palmer Behan, Ph.D. 1899; Clergyman, Wealthy Avenue Baptist Church, Grand Rapids, Mich. The Social Work of the Church in Plymouth Colony, Massachusetts, 1620-1691. Doc- tor's thesis. Unpublished. A combined analytical and constructive study from original manuscripts where accessible, of the influence of the Plymouth Colony Church upon contemporary social life. Part I, the theories of the religious leaders of the Colony concerning the elements of social welfare, the forces to be depended upon in the realization of this welfare, and the institutions through which these forces are to operate. Part II, the practice of this church in its effect upon the social life of the church membership, upon the state, the family, education, economics, the poor and suffering, and upon the crimi- nal. Winfred Ernest Garrison, Ph.D. 1898; Clergyman, St. Louis, Mo. Alexander Campbell's Theology: Its Sources and Historical Setting. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 302. St. Louis, Christian Publishing Co., 1900. Development of the problem of unity; philosophical basis; theological heritage; the kingdom of God; authority and inspiration ; faith and repentance ; bap- tism ; the Holy Spirit in conversion ancf regeneration ; the idea of God. Errett Gates, Ph.D. 1902; Disciples' Divinity House, Chicago. The Early Relations and Separations of Bap- tists and Disciples. Doctor's thesis. Un- published. The origin of the Disciples ; Union with the Baptists ; The sermon on the Law: The Debates with John Walker and W, L. MacCalla ; The Christian Baptist ; The status of Campbell's fellowship with the Baptists; The spread of " the ancient order of things" among the Baptists ; The spread of " the ancient order of things " among the Baptists : causes and conditions ; The Sepa- ration: causes. Wallace StJohn, Ph.D. 1900; Clergy- man, Franklin, Ind. The Contest for Liberty of Conscience in Eng- land. Doctor's thesis. 8vo, 155. The Uni- versity of Chicago Divinity Studies, I. Chicago, University Press, 1900. The contest previous to the Stuarts ; the early Stuart period ; period of the commonwealth; the later Stuart period ; the period of political agitation. XLVI. HOMILETICS, CHURCH POLITY, AND PASTORAL DUTIES Galusha Anderson [1892 — ], Professor and Head of the Department of Homi- letics, Church Polity, and Pastoral Duties. The Supreme End of Theological Schools. An Address Delivered Before the Robinson Rhetorical Society at the Semi-Centennial of the Rochester Theological Seminary. 8vo, 16. Pamphlet. 1900. A contention that the ultimate aim in theological teach- ing should not be to make scholars but preachers. The Kingdom that Changed Rulers. Annual Sermon, Preached at the Twelfth Annual Convention of the Baptist Yoimg People's Union of America, in Providence, R. I. 8vo, 15. Pamphlet. 1902. The Elements of Chrysostom's Power as a Preacher. The University of Chicago De- cennial Publications, First Series, Vol. Ill, Part 2, 51-66. Beviews of Briggs, The One Flock of Christ. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 267-270. Depabtment op Sociology 161 Sawin, The Transfiguring of the Cross: Or the Trial and Triumph of the Son of Man. Ibid., 1099-1102. A suggestion as to the reason of Christ's agony in Gethsemane. Newman, A History of Anti-Pedobaptism from the Rise of Pedobaptism to A. D. 1609. Ibid., II (1898), 184-186. The history is an accurate setting forth of facts but lacks perspective and philosophy. Hort, Christian Ecclesia. Ibid., 198-201. A historical study of the word eKK\riSeZ/- Culture Magazine, IX (1899), 270-276. Former and Present Conditions in Education. Thirteenth Annual Meeting of the Ameri- can Baptist Education Society at Spring- field, Mass., 1901, XIII (1901), 16-21. Butterworth, Horace Horizontal Bar. 12mo, 192. Privately printed. Chicago, 1902. How To: A Book of Tumbling, Tricks, Pyra- mids, and Games. 12mo, 155. Privately printed. Chicago, 1902. Caldwell, William The Epistemology of E. von Hartmann. Mind, New Series, II (1893), 188-207. Capps, Edward Social Life in Ancient Greece. Chautauquan, XXIV (1896), 290-295 Social Life in Modern Greece. Ibid., XXIV (1897), 545-549. Excavations of the American School at Eretria. Nation, LIX (1894), 80-81. A New Archaeological Law for Greece. Ibid., LXIX (1899), 88-90. Report of the Dean of the Junior Colleges for the years 1894-1897. The President's Re- port, July, 1897-July, 1898 (1899), 77-98. LiTEEABY, Educational, Miscellaneous 167 Caepenter, Feedeeio Ives Taine as a Critic of Literature. Current Top- ics, I (1893), 263-269, The History of English Literature. Dial, XVII (1894), 285. The Study of Literature. Poet Lore, VI (1894), 378-381. English Literature in Germany. Dial, XXI (1896), 275-276. English Literature in the English Universities. Nation, LXVI (1898), 164-166. Castle, Claeence Fassett An Inductive Greek Primer. In collaboration with W. R. Harper. 12mo, 420. New York, American Book Co., 1893. Exercises in Greek Prose Composition, based on Books I-IV of Xenophon's Anabasis, together with Inductive Studies in the Uses of the Greek Modes. In collaboration with W. R. Harper. 12mo, 128. New York, Amer- ican Book Co., 1893. Chambeelin, Thomas Chbowdee The Problem of Suffering. Biblical World, VIII (1896), 182-197. The Fimction of Scientific Study in a True Education. Elementary School Teacher, III (1903), 337-346. Claek, Solomon Heney Principles of Vocal Expression. In collabora- tion with William B. Chamberlain. 12mo, XX +479. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1897. How to Teach Reading in the Public Schools. 8vo, 295. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1898. Practical Public Speaking. In collaboration with Frederick Mason Blanchard. 8vo, xvi + 301. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 190L Claeke, Heney Love Studies in Plant Development. Pamphlet. Chicago, 1895. The Meaning of Tree Life. American Nat- uralist, XXVIII (1894), 465^72; 572-580. Coultee, John Meele The Proper Use of Science by the Pulpit. Journal of Theology, III (1899), 641-653. Botany in Secondary Schools. Journal of Applied Microscopy, II (1899), 489-490. Plant Societies. Pratt Institute Monthly, 1899, 172-173. Plant Relations. Small 8vo, vii + 264, with 206 illustrations. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1899. Second edition revised, vii +266, wth 214 illustrations, 1901. Plant Structures. Small 8vo, vii + 384, with 289 illustrations. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1900. Plants. Small 8vo, xxiv + 612, with 495 illus- trations. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1900. Plant Studies. 12mo, ix + 392, 336 figures. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1900. Analytical Key of Flowering Plants. 12mo, v+93. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1900. The Mission of Science in Education. Science, XII (1900), 281-293. Some Problems in Education. Educational Journal, I (1901), 405-407; 459-460. The Policy of the Young Men's Christian As- sociation: A Historical Study of Association Relationships. Published by the Secretarial Institute and Training School of the Yoimg Men's Christian Association, 1901. The Student Young Men's Christian Associa- tion as it Relates to the Entire Association Movement. Ibid., 1901. Cowles, Heney C. A. F. W. Schimper. Botanical Gazette, XXXIII (1902), 160-161. 168 Publications Crow, Maetha Foote Will the Co-educated Co-educate their Chil- dren? Fwum, XVII (1894), 582-594. Elizabethan Sonnet Cycles. Edited by: I, Phillis, by Thomas Lodge ; Licia, by Giles Fletcher. II, Delia, by Daniel Darcy ; Di- ana, by Henry Constable. Ill, Idea, by Michael Drayton ; Fidessa, by Bartholo- mew Griffin ; Chloris, by William Smith. London, Kegan Paul, Trench, Trubner & Co., 1896-7. Cutting, Starr W. Should the Elementary Study of German be Chiefly Inductive? Publications of the Modern Language Association, IX (1894), Appendix, XIV-XXIV. Should German be Taught as a Living Lan- guage in our Schools and Colleges? Jour- nal of Pedagogy, XI (1898), 2a-39. Einige Prinzipien des Sprachunterrichts. Ped- agogische Monatshefte, I (1900), 14-22. Damon, Lindsay Todd Composition and Rhetoric for Schools. In col- laboration with Robert Herrick. 12mo, 461. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1898. Re- vised edition, 12mo, 436, 1902. Davenport, Charles B. Introduction to Zoology: A Guide to the Study of Animals for Use in Secondary Schools. In collaboration with Gertrude Crotty Dav- enport. 12mo, xii-|-412. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1900. The Animal Ecology of Cold Spring Beach. School Review, X (1902), 46^7. The Relation of the American Society of Nat- uralists to Other American Scientific Soci- eties. Science, New Series, XV (1902), 241- 255; 299-300. Davenport, Herbert Joseph The Principles of Grammar. In collaboration with Anna Emerson. 8vo, xiv + 263. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1898. Dewey, John The Chaos in Moral Training. Popular Science Monthly, XLV (1894), 433-442. Influence of the High School on Educational Methods. School Review, IV (1894), 1-12. The Primary Education Fetish. Forum, XXV (1898), 315-328. Are the Schools Doing what the People Want them to Do? Educational Review, XXI (1901), 459-474. Academic Freedom. Ibid., XXIII (1902), 1-14. Current Problems in Secondary Education. School Review, IX (1902), 13-28. DixsoN, Zella Allen The Library of the University of Chicago. Library Journal, XVII (1892), 50-51. Departmental Libraries of the University of Chicago. Ibid., XX (1895), 375-377. Comprehensive Subject Index to Universal Prose Fiction. 12mo, 421. New York, Dodd, Mead & Co., 1897. Traveling Libraries of the University of Chi- cago. Public Libraries, II (1897), 50. Teaching Library Science by University Ex- tension Methods. Ibid., 285-289. Cataloguer's Leaflet, No. 1. 24mo, 8. Pam- phlet. Chicago, 1899. Fellows, George E. An Outline Study of the Sixteenth Century. Chicago, Werner School Book Co., 1895. The Relation of Anthropology to the Study of History. American Journal of Sociology, I (1895), 41-49. The Spirit of Tuskegee. Ibid., VI (1900), 281- 284. Goodspeed, Edgar Johnson A Twelfth Century Manuscript of the Gospels. Biblical World, X (1897), 277-280. From Haifa to Nazareth. Ibid., XVI (1900), 407-413. Literary, Educational, Miscellaneous 169 The Acts of Paul and Thecla. Ibid., XVII (1901), 185-190. The City of Herod. Ibid., XVIII (1901), 88- 95 Gray, Clifton Daggett The Historical Background of Malachi. lical World, XVI (1899), 404-411. Bib- Hale, George Ellery Astronomy and Astrophysics. Astrophysical Journal, XIII (1894), 831-835. Spectro - Bolographic Investigations at the Smithsonian Astrophysical Observatory. Ibid , I (1895), 162-166. The Function of Large Telescopes. Annual Address Before the New York Academy of Sciences. Science, New Series, VII (1898), 650-662. James Edward Keeler. Ibid., XII (1900), 353- 356. Stellar Evolution in the Light of Recent Research. Popular Science Monthly, LX (1902), 291-313. Hale, William Gardner The Place of the University in American Life. First Convocation Address of the University of Chicago. Current Topics, II (1893), 477- 490. Should Greek be Required for the Degree of Bachelor of Arts? Report of the National Congress of Education, 1893, 118-142. Re- print, Ginn & Co., 1893. Democracy and Education. Address of the President of the American Philological As- sociation. Proceedings, XXIV (1893), xx- xxii. The Graduate School: An Address given at the Celebration of the One Hundredth Anniver- sary of the Founding of Union University, 1895. Official Report of the Celebration. The American School of Classical Studies in Rome. Harvard Graduates^ Magazine, IV (1896), 569-577. First Anaual Report of the Chairman of the Managing Committee of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome, 1895- 96. American Journal of Archceology, Second Series, I (1897), 5-12. Report of the Director of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome, 1895-96. Ibid., 17-50. Report of the Chairman of the Managing Com- mittee of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome, 1896-97. Ibid., 120-136. Report of the Chairman of the Managing Com- mittee of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome, 1897-98. Ibid., II (1898), 504-513. The Work and Mission of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome. Address De- Hvered at the Classical Conference held at Ann Arbor, March 31 and April 1, 1898. School Review, VI (1898), 455-458. Report of the Chairman of the Managing Com- mittee of the American School of Classical Studies in Rome, 1898-99. American Jour- nal of Archceology, Second Series, III (1899), 687-701. The Qui-Clause with dignus. Latin Leaflet, I, No. 24, 1901. Characterizing Clauses in Latin. Ibid., No. 25. Should the Thesis for the Doctor's Degree be Printed? Journal of the Proceedings and Addresses of the Third Annual Conference of the Association of American Universi- ties, 1902, 16-22. Hancock, Arthur A. Laplace on the Variation of Latitude. Popu- lar Astronomy, II (1895), 349-353. Harper, Robert Francis The Tel-el-Amarna Tablets in the British Mu- seum. Biblical World, I (1893), 50-52. The Expedition of the Babylonian Exploration Fund: Excavations at Niffer during the Season of 1889. I, Ibid., 57-62; II, Ibid., 135-137. 170 Publications The Decipherment of the Assyro - Babylonian Inscriptions. I, Ibid:, 294^297; II, Ibid., 371-373. Notes from London. Ibid., II (1893), 206-209. A Sketch of the Excavations in Babylonia and Assyria. Ibid., VIII (1896), 23-29. Explorations and Adventures on the Euphrates. Ibid., X (1897), 309-310. Nebuchadnezzar, King of Babylon. Ibid., XIV (1899), 1-12. Haepee, William Rainey An Inductive Series of Text Books. General editor of. American Book Co. The ^neid (six books) and Bucolics of Vir- gil. In collaboration with Frank Justus Miller. 12mo, 564. 1892. Xenophon's Anabasis. In collaboration with James Wallace. 12mo, 575. 1893. An Inductive Greek Primer. In collabora- tion with Clarence F. Castle. 12mo, 416. 1893. Ten Orations of Cicero, with Selections from the Letters. In collaboration with Frank A. Gallup. 12mo, 566. 1898. Biblical Terms in the Standard Dictionary of the English Language. Editor in charge of. 1893-95. The First Hebrew Story of Creation. Biblical World, III (1894), 6-16. The Origin of Man and His First State of In- nocence. Ibid., 97-108. Paradise and the First Sin: Genesis iii. Ibid., 176-188. The Fratricide; the Cainite Civilization; Gene- sis iv. Ibid., 264-274. The Long-Lived Antediluvians: Genesis v. Ibid., 326-335. The Sons of God and the Daughters of Men: Genesis vi. Ibid., 440-448. Hebrew Stories of the Deluge. Ibid., IV (1894), 20-31. The Deluge in Other Literatures and in His- tory Ibid., 114-123. Some General Considerations relating to Genesis i-xi. Ibid., 184-201. The Human Element in the Early Stories of Genesis. Ibid., 266-278. The Divine Element in the Early Stories of Genesis. Ibid., 349-358. A Theory of the Divine and Human Elements in Genesis i-xi. Ibid., 407^20. The Foreshadowings of the Christ in the Old Testament. Ibid., VI (1895), 401^11. Outline Topics in the History of the Old Tes- tament Prophecy. Ibid., VII (1896), 39-45; 120-129; 199-206; 273-279; 352-358; VIII (1896), 37-45; 221-228, 280-288; 364-375. The Address of Acceptance at the Dedication of the Haskell Oriental Museum. Ibid., 107-110. The Statement at the Laying of the Corner Stone of the Haskell Oriental Museum. Ibid., 85-86. Child Prophecies of Isaiah. Ibid., 417-422. The Work of Isaiah. Ibid., X (1897), 48-57. Suggestions Concerning the Original Text and Structure of Amos 1:3-2:5. American Journal of Theology, I (1897), 141-145. The Utterances of Amos Arranged Strophically. Biblical World, XII (1898), 86-89; 17&- 182; 251-256; 333-338. Shall the Theological Curriculum be Modified? American Journal of Theology, III (1899), 45-66. The Jews in Babylon. Biblical World, XIV (1899), 104-111. The Return of the Jews from Exile. Ibid.^ 157-163. The Priestly Element in the Old Testament, as Seen in the Laws. Ibid., 258-266. The University and Democracy. Cosmopoli- tan, XXVI (1899), 681-691. Shall the Theological Curriculum be Modified and How? American Journal of Theology, III (1899), 45-66. The Prospects of the Small College. 16mo, 46. Chicago, University Press, 1900. Constructive Studies in the Priestly Element in the Old Testament. Ibid., XVII (1901), LiTERAEY, Educational, Miscellaneous 171 46-54; 121-134; 206-220; 366-381; 450-462; XVIII (1901), 56-63: 120-130; 204-217; 297- 307; 368-379; 468-487. Constructive Studies in the Literature of the Old Testament : The Historical Writings of the Priestly School. Ihid., XIX (1902), 48- 57; 134-145. Constructive Studies in the Literature of Wor- ship in the Old Testament : 1. The Legal Literature: The Deuteronomic Code of Laws; 2. The Legal Literature: Ezekiel's Contribution; 3. The Legal Literature: The Priestly Code; 4. The Historical Writings of the Priestly School. Ibid., XIX (1902), 132-146; 199-208; 300-310; 443-455. Quarterly Keports of the President. Quarterly Calendar of the University of Chicago and University Record, 1892-1902. Hastings, Charles H. Bibliographies published in the Chautauquan : The Philippine Problem, XXX (1899), 17-18; England and the South African Republic, ibid., 129-130; Trusts, ibid., 237-238: Bib- lical Interpretation, or the Higher Criticism, ibid., 356-357; Woman Labor and Child Labor, ibid., 463-464; College, University, and Social Settlements, ibid., 571-572 ; Women's Clubs, ibid., XXXI (1900), 14^15; China and the Far Eastern Question, ibid., 123-124; Systems and Forms of Colonial Government, ibid., 225-226. Heller, Otto Some Aspects of German Education, Pam- phlet published by the Washington Univer- sity Association. Reprinted in Common- wealth, Vol. IX, 1902. Henderson, Charles Richmond Catechism for Social Observation. 8vo, 58. Boston, D. C. Heath & Co., 1894. The Development in the Epistles. Bible Handbook for Young People, VIII. 16mo, 196. Philadelphia, American Baptist Pub- lication Society, 1896. Science in Philanthropy. Atlantic Monthly, LXXXV (1900), 24&-254. Plan and Budget for a Small College. Ameri- can Journal of Sociology, VII (1902), 721-748. ArbeitsgesSnge der Neger in den Vereinigten- Staaten von Nord-Amerika. Collected for Professor K. Blicher's Arbeit und Rhyth- mus, pp. 217-233. Leipzig, Teubner, 1902. Henderson, George The University Extension Division of the Uni- versity of Chicago. University Extension World, I (1893), 27-29. Herrick, Robert George Eliot's Silas Mamer. Edited with Notes and Introduction. 8vo, xxxix-|-224. New York, Longmans, Green & Co. (English Classics), 1895. The Man Who Wins. 16mo, 125. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1896. Literary Love Letters and Other Stories. 16mo, 244. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1897. The Gospel of Freedom. 8vo, 287. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1898. Composition and Rhetoric for Schools. In col- laboration with L. T. Damon. 12mo, 461. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1899. Re- vised edition, 12mo, 436, 1902. Hawthorne's The House of the Seven Gables. Edited with Notes and Introduction. 8vo, 367. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1898. Love's Dilemmas. 8vo, 193. Chicago, H. S. Stone & Co., 1898. The Webb of Life. 8vo, 351. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1900. The Real World. 8vo, 358. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1901. Methods of Teaching Rhetoric and English Composition. 8vo, 22. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1899. Reissued 1902. 172 Publications Introduction to The Abb6 Constantin and A Love Match by Ludovic Hal6vy, 17 pp. For a series entitled A Century of French Romance, edited by Edmund Gosse. New York, D. Appleton & Co., 1903. English Composition and the Quarter System. Educational Review, VIII (1894), 382-387. The University of Chicago. Scribner's Maga- zine, XVIII (1895), 399^17. The Polity of Nature. Lippincott's, LXVIII (1901), 458-471. The Professor's Choice. Atlantic, LXXXVII (1901), 723-732. Hessler, John C. Essentials of Chemistry for Secondary Schools. In collaboration with Albert L. Smith. Chi- cago. 8vo, XX + 405 + 96. Boston, Benj. H. Sanborn & Co., 1902. HoLST, Hermann Eduaed von The Need of Universities in the United States. Convocation Address, January, 1893. Quar- terly Calendar of the University of Chi- cago, II (1893), 3-8. Also Educational Review, V (1893), 105-119. Nationalization of Education and the Univer- sities. Monist, III (1893), 493-509. Shall the Senate Kule the Republic? Forum, XVI (1893), 263-271. Ought the United States Senate to be Abol- ished? Monist, V (1894), 1-21. Are We Awakened? Journal of Political Economy, II (1894), 485-516. Hopkins, Thomas Cramer Geology in the Colleges and Universities of the United States. Reprints from the Report of the United States Commissioner of Edu- cation, 1893-94, 819-878. HouRWioH, Isaac A. The Russian - American Extradition Treaty. Yale Review, III (1894), 68-95. HowERTH, Ira Woods Are the Italians a Dangerous Class ? Charities Review, IV (1894-95), 17-40. Sociology in Om: Large Universities. Charities Review, IV (1894-95), 198-209. The Coffee -House as a Rival of the Saloon. American Magazine of Civics, VI (1895), 589-602. Profit - Sharing at Ivorydale. American Jour- nal of Sociology, II (1896-97), 43-57. A Great Social Need. Open Court, XII (1898), 224-235. An Ethnic View of Higher Education. Educa- tional Review, XX (1900), 345-356. Also Proceedings of the National Educational Association, 1900, 465-473. Brinton's Theory of the Origin of Religion. Monist, X (1900), 293-298. Some Characteristics of Professor Huxley. Open Court, XV (1901), 517-526. Education and Evolution. Educational Re- view, XXIII (1902), 60-81. What is Religion ? International Journal of Ethics, XIII (1903), 185-206. Ingres, Maxime Cours complet de langue franjaise. 8vo, liii+ 314. Chicago, University Press, 1902. James, Edmund James The Training for Citizenship. National Her- bart Society, Third Yearbook, 1897, 101- 116. The Education of Business Men. Svo, 253. Chicago, University Press, 1898. The Kindergarten and the Public Schools. In Appendix B, pp. 195-204, to the Report of the Educational Commission of the City of Chicago, appointed by the Mayor. 1899. Commercial Training and the Public High School. Ibid., Appendix C, 208-217. LiTEBABY, Educational, Miscellaneous 173 Bibliography of Newspapers Published in Illinois Prior to 1860. In collaboration with Milo J. Loveless. Illinois State His- torical Society Publications, No. 1, 1899. Commercial Education. Monograph 13, in Nicholas Murray Butler's Monographs on Education in the United States, Vol. II, 653-703. United States Commission to the Paris Exhibition of 1900, Department of Education. Albany, 1900. Relation of the College and University to Higher Commercial Education. Publica- tions of the American Economic Associa- tion, Series III, II (1901), 114-165. Jameson, John Fbanklin The Twenty-fifth Anniversary of Johns Hop- kins University. Dial, XXXII (1902), lia- 146. The Influence of Universities upon Historical Writing. Convocation address of December 17, 1901. University of Chicago Record, VI (1901), 291-300. Johnson, Fbanklin The Home Missionaries. (Poem.) Privately printed. 1899. Baptism the Door to the Lord's Supper. A chapter in Baptist Principles Reset, by Jere- miah B. Jeter and others. Richmond Re- ligious Herald, 1901, 1902. Should a Divinity School Teach the Student What to Believe, or How to Think? Uni- versity of Chicago Record, I (1897), 543-546. Judson, Habby Pbatt American Politics: A Study of Four Careers (Blaine, Lamar, Hayes, Butler). Review of Reviews, VII (1893), 159-172. Work and Organization of the University of Chicago. Education, XVI (1896), 278-289. Higher Education as a Training for Business. 8vo, 54. Philadelphia, Henry Altemus, 1896. The Latin in English. 12mo, 225. New York, Henry Holt & Co., 1896. The Yoimg American. 12mo, 265. New York, Maynard, Merrill & Co., 1897. The Larger Meaning of Colonial Life. New Unity, XXXIV (1897), 309-311. Imperial Germany. Chautauquan, XXVI (1897), 149-154. The Government of Illinois. 12mo, 265. New York, Maynard, Merrill & Co., 1900. Kent, Chables Fosteb The Present Status of College Affiliation. Uni- versity Extension World, I (1893), 8-11. Bible Study in the West. Ibid., II (1893), 151- 154. The London Oriental Congress. Biblical World, I (1893), 49. The Present and Possibilities of Excavation in Palestine. Ibid., I (1893), 220-225. The Social Philosophy of the Royal Prophet Isaiah. Ibid., I (1893), 248-262. The Duties of Man as Taught by the Book of Proverbs. Ibid., Ill (1894), 198-208. Jonas, Johannes B. E. Secondary Education in France Dm-ing the Third Republic. A translation of an article by Karl Dorfeld. School Review, IV (1896), 698-703. The Differentiation of the Secondary Curric- ulum in France. Ibid., VIII (1900), 244- 253. Lagebgben, Cabl G. Nytt och Gammalt. Betraktelser i religi5sa fimmen. 12mo. Forsta Hfiftet, 64; andra Haftet, 64. Minneapolis, North Star Pub- lishing Co., 1894, 1898. Wayland, Charles H. Spurgeon: His Faith and Works. Translated into Swedish. 12mo, 338. Chicago, E. Wingren, 1892. 174 Publications Triumf singer: Forty English Songs C!ontribu- ted to, in Swedish Translation. 12mo, 40. American Baptist Publication Society, Chi- cago, 1900. Laing, Gobdon Jennings Masterpieces of Latin Literature. With Bio- graphical Sketches and Notes. 8vo, viii-f- 487. Boston, Houghton, Mifflin & Co., 1903. Laughlin, James Laubence The University of Chicago. Nation, L V (1892), 216-217. The National Banking System. Chautauquan, XVI (1892), 32-36. A Monetary Scientist's Analysis. Review of Reviews, VIII (1893), 282-283. Monetary Reform in Santo Domingo. Atlantic Monthly, LXXIV (1894), 107-113. Economic Effects of Changes of Fashion. Chautauquan, XIX (1894), 9-13. Teaching of Economics. Atlantic Monthly, LXXVII (1896), 682-688. Would American Free Coinage Double the Price of Silver in the Markets of the World? II, The Negative View. Review of Reviews, XIV (1896), 308-310. The People's Money-Government versus Bank Issues. Bond Record, IV (1896), 355-358. Facts About Money: a Reply. Quarterly Journal of Economics, X (1896), 337-340. How to Assure the Maintenance of the Gold Standard. Review of Reviews, XV (1897), 46-47. Municipal Ownership. Independent, LXIX (1897), 571. Withdrawal of the Treasury Notes of 1890. Journal of Political Economy, VI (1898), 248-249. Economics and Socialism. Chautauquan, XXX (1899), 252-256. War and Money: Some Lessons of 1862. At- lantic Monthly, LXXXII (1899), 47-54. Address of Welcome to Ambassador von Hol- leben, January 24, 1 900. University Record. Trusts, in Case of Bryan's Election. Review of Reviews, XXII (1900), 443-445. Economics in Schools. Journal of Political Economy, IX (1901), 384-397. Address at the Laying of the Corner Stone of the Press Building. University Record, VI (1901), 81-82. Higher Commercial Education. Atlantic Monthly, LXXXIX (1901), 677-686. Lengfeld, Felix An Experiment to Illustrate Chemical Equi- librium. School Science, I (1901), 209. Moissan's Work with the Electric Furnace. Ibid., 359-362. Lewis, Edwin Hebbeet A First Book in Writing English. 12mo, x -|- 291. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1897. An Introduction to the Study of Literature. 8vo, XXX -f 410. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1899. Linn, James Webeb The Second Generation. 8vo, 304. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1902. The Chameleon. 8vo, 354. New York, Mc- Clure, Phillips & Co., 1903. Lovett, Robebt Mobss Scott's Marmion. Edited with Notes and In- troduction. 12mo, xxxviii + 276. New York and London, Longmans, Green & Co., 1896. Shakspere's Merchant of Venice. Edited with Notes and Introduction. 12mo, 172. Chi- cago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1900. Lyon, Elias P. An Improved Form of Ktihne's Artificial Eye. School Science, I (1901), 19^202. LiTEBAEY, Educational, Miscellaneous 175 Manny, Fbank A, High School Extension. School Review, V (1897), 171-177. Mathews, Albeet P. The Nature of the Nerve Impulse. Century Magazine, LXIII (1902), 788-792. Mathews, Shaileb Studies in the Gospel of Luke. Sunday School Times, December 21, 1895; June 13, 1896. From Jenin to Nazareth. Biblical World, X (1897), 174r-182; 259-271. The Significance of the Church to the Social Movement. American Journal of Sociol- ogy, IV (1899), 603-620. The Church and Social Unity. American Journal of Sociology, V (1900), 456-469. The French Kevolution. 12mo,278. New York, Longmans, Green & Co., 1901. Meyeb, John Jacob Dreihundert Gulden. Sonntagsblatt der New Yorker Staats - Zeitung, October 2, 1898. Bilder aus dem hauslichen Leben: Kindheit und Jugend. Ibid., December 11, 1898; Brautwerbung und Hochzeit, December 25; Hausvaterstand, January 1, 1899; Tod und Bestattung, January 8. Christian und Wagner. Ibid., January 15, 1899. Das Grab am Kassakas. Humoreske, February 19, 1899. Das Urteil des Schemjatka und das Urteil Sol- omonis auf Altindisch. Sonntagsblatt der New Yorker Staats - Zeitung, March 26, 1899. ^sopische Fabeln in altbuddhistischer Fas- simg. Ibid., April 16, 1899. Finlands gr5sster Dichter. Ibid., July 30, 1899. Der Dichter Gnostikus aus dem Norden. Ibid., January 7, 1900. Das Buch der Geburten. Ibid., February 18, 1900. Etwas fiber kubanische Poesie. Ibid., April 8, 1900. Heiland Tod. Ibid., November 4, 1900. Asanka Sudschata Tangara. Gedichte. Lotos- Verlag, Leipzig, 1903. Zwei altindische FreudenmSdchendichtimgen Die Samayamatrika des Kshemendra und das Kuttanimatam des Damodaragupta. Uebersetzt und mit einer Einleitimg und Anmerkungen versehen. Lotos - Verlag, Leipzig, 1903. Millee, Fbank Justus The .Eneid of Virgil. Six Books. In collabo- ration with W. R. Harper. 8vo, x-f 461. New York, American Book Co., 1892. The JEneid and Bucolics of Virgil. In col- laboration with W. R. Harper. 8vo, x + 564. New York, American Book Co., 1893. Introduction to Roman Life. 8vo, 10. Mead- ville. Flood & Vincent, 1897. Dido, an Epic Tragedy. 8vo, iv-|-88. Boston, Silver, Burdett & Co.. 1900. Ovid. Selected Works with Notes and Vocab- ulary. 8vo, 528. New York, American Book Co., 1900. Studies in the Poetry of Italy. I, Roman. 12mo, 168. Cleveland, Chautauqua Press, 1901. A Second Year Latin Book. In collaboration with Charles H. Beeson. 8vo,500. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1902. MiLLIKAN, RoBEBT A. The Teaching of Physics in Lower College Classes. 8vo, 8. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1902. Moody, William Vaughn Milton's Paradise Lost, Books I-III. Edited with Notes and Introduction. Boston, Houghton, Mifflin & Co., 1896. Bunyan's Pilgrim's Progress. Edited with Notes and Introduction. Boston, Hough- ton, Mifflin & Co., 1897. 176 Publications Good Friday Night. (Poem.) Atlantic Month- ly, XXXI (1898), 700-701. Coleridge's Ancient Mariner, and Lowell's Vision of Sir Launfal. Edited with Notes and Introduction. 16mo, 103. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1898. Scott's Lay of the Last Minstrel. Edited with Notes and Introduction. In collaboration with Mary R. Willard. 16mo,211. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1899. Scott's Marmion. Edited with Notes and In- troduction. In collaboration with Mary R. Willard. 16mo, 355. Chicago, Scott, Fores- man & Co., 1899. Pope's Iliad, Books I, VI, XXII, XXIV. Ed- ited with Introduction and Notes. In col- laboration with W. W. Cressy. Chicago, Scott, Foresman & Co., 1899. Road Hymn for the Start. (Poem.) Atlantic Monthly, LXXXIII (1899), 840. An Ode in Time of Hesitation. Ibid., LXXXV (1900), 593-598. Gloucester Moors. (Poem.) Scribner's Maga- zine, XXVIII (1900), 727-728. The Masque of Judgment. A Masque Drama in Five Acts and a Prelude. 8vo, vi + 127. Boston, Small, Maynard & Co., 1900. The Brute. (Poem.) Atlantic Monthly, LXXXVII (1901), 88-90. On a Soldier Fallen in the Philippines. (Poem.) Ibid., LXXXVII (1901). Poems. 8vo, 106. Boston, Houghton, Mifflin & Co., 1901. MooEE, Ella Adams Moral Proportion and Fatalism of Passion in Shakespeare's Plays. Poet -Lore, Henry VII (1895), 75-82; Macbeth, 133-140; Ham- let, 191-197; Othello, 424^128; King Lear, 487-491; Romeo and Juliet, 551-555; An- tony and Cleopatra, 61^619; Coriolanus, VIII (1896), 86-90; King John, 139-145. MouLTON, Forest Ray An Important Method of Solving Kepter's Equation. Popular Astronomy, III (1895), 136-141. A Method of Measuring the Distances, Dimen- sions, and Masses of Binary Systems by the Use of the Spectroscope. Ibid., Ill (1896), 337-343. Some Points which Need to be Emphasized in Teaching General Astronomy. Ibid., IV (1897), 400-407. The Problems of Three Bodies. Ibid., V (1897), 407-411. Where Did Mars Get its Moons? Ibid., IV (1897), 573-574. Perturbations of the Heavenly Bodies. Ibid., VI (1898), 88-101. MouLTON, Richard Green The Modern Reader's Bible: Additional Series for Young Folks. Biblical Masterpieces, 1897, XX + 278; Bible Stories, Old Testa- ment, 1899, xii + 310; Bible Stories, New Testament, 1899, xii + 130. New York, The Macmillan Co. A Short Introduction to the Literature of the Bible. 8vo, vi+374. Boston, D. C. Heath &Co.,190L MuLFiNGER, George A. Lenau in America. A Contribution to Lenau's Biography. Americana Germanica, 1(1897), No. 2, 7-61; No. 3, 1-16. NoRDELL, Philip A. The Story of the Spies. Biblical World, I (1893), 168-183. Payne, "Walter A. Extension Work at the University of Chicago Citizen, IV (1898), 103-106. University Extension and the Public Library, University Record, VI (1901), 217-221. The University and the People. Ibid., VII (1902), 118-120. LiTEBABY, Educational, Miscellaneous 177 Peice, Iba M. Assyro-Babylonian Light on Israel's History. Independent, XLVI (1894), 552-553. Side Lights and Background Articles. A series of 450 articles on " The Books of the Bible, their Literary Character, their His- torical Background, and their Chief Teach- ings." Baptist Union, October, 1894-June, 1903. James Robinson Boise. Biblical World, V (1895), 410-416. Some Queries About the Book of Daniel. Ibid., VI (1895), 264^269. Preparations for the Messiah. A series of thirty articles treating the history prepara- tory to a study of the Messianic features of Old Testament and the Inter-Biblical period. Baptist Union, October, 1895-April, 1896. The Contributions of Archaeology to the Un- derstanding of the Old Testament. Sunday School Times, XXXVIII (1896), 195-196. " Christ," " Messianic Prophecies," " Incidents in the Old Testament Referred to Those in the New Testament," " Passages Quoted or Paraphrased in the New Testament from the Old," contributed to Nelson's IlltLstrated Bible Treasury, 1896. Important Movements in Israel Prior to 1000 B. C. Biblical World, VII (1896), 472-482. Important Movements in Israel 950 to 621 B. C. Ibid.', VIII (1897), 429^42. The University of Paris: Biblical Workers in the Theological Faculty. Ibid., XI (1899), 7-15. The Book of Daniel. Ibid., XII (1899), 27-35. The Exodus Material and the Use Made of it in the Scriptures. Ibid., XIII (1901), 451- 465. Sundry Articles on Biblical History and Arch- aeology in The Jewish Enclycopedia. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1901. Articles on "Assyria" and "Babylonia" in Biblical Encyclopedia, edited by W. W. Davies. Toledo, O., 1903. RiTOHEY, GeOBGE WiLLIS Photographing the Expanding Nebulae About the New Star in Perseus. Photographic Times, XXXIV (1902), 127-130. RoBEBTSON, Josephine Chesteb List of Periodicals Received by the University of Chicago. 8vo, 15. Pamphlet. Chicago, 1900. Also in The University of Chicago Presidents Report, 1898-9 (1900), 121-133. Joint Editor of List of Serials in the Public Libraries of Chicago and Evanston, Com- piled by the Chicago Library Club. 8vo, x + 185. Pamphlet. Chicago, 1901. Root, Theophilus Huntington The Self -Consciousness of Jesus. Biblical World, II (1893), 265-274; 353-362; 412-420! Schmidt -Wabtenberg, Heinbich Runes. Johnson's Universal Encyclopedia. New Edition. VII (1895), 208-209. Germanistische Studien in den Vereinigten Staaten von Nord Amerika. Zeitschrift fiir deutsche Philologie, XXVIII (1896), 425- 427. Schwill, Feedinand General History of Europe. In collaboration with Oliver J. Thatcher. 8vo, xiv-|-613. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1900. See, Thomas J. J. The Services of Nathaniel Bowditch to Ameri- can Astronomy. Popular Astronomy, II (1895), 385-394. Foiuier's Historical Eulogy on Laplace. Ibid.f III (1895), 1-12. The Services of Benjamin Peirce to American Mathematics and Astronomy. Ibid., 49-57. Recent Discoveries Respecting the Origin of the Universe. Atlantic Monthly, LXXX (1897), 484-492. 178 Publications Great Explorers of the Southern Heavens. Ibid., LXXXI (1898), 679-689. The Future of Great Telescopes. Forum, XXV (1898), 693-701. Shorey, Paul To Ancient Greek through Modem? No. Forum, XVIII (1895), 602-608. Can We Revive the Olympic Games? Ibid., XIX (1895), 3ia-323. Present Conditions of Literary Production. Atlantic Monthly, LXXVIII (1896), 156- 168. Discipline vs. Dissipation in Secondary Schools. School Review, V (1897), 217-230. Plato and His Republic. Chautauquan, XXV (1897), 592-596. Pope's Iliad of Homer, Books I, VI, XXII, and XXIV. Edited with Introduction and Notes. 16mo, xxxii + 142. Boston, D. C. Heath & Co., 1899. Small, Albion W. The Sociological Basis of Religious Union and Work. A paper read at the Liberal Reli- gious Congress, May, 1894. Unity, 1894, 179-181. Methods of Studying Society. Chautauquan, XXI (1895), 52-56. American Society. Ibid., XXII (1895), 15-19. The Civic Federation of Chicago. American Journal of Sociology, I (1895), 75-103. Private Business is a Public Trust. Ibid., 276- 289. The State and Semi-Public Corporations. Ibid., II (1896), 399-410. Scholarship and Social Agitation. Ibid., 564- 582. The Meaning of the Social Movement. Ibid., III (1897), 340-354. Fellowship, the Tactics of Progress. Proceed- ings of the Eighth International Conven- tion of the Baptist Young People's Union, 1898, 18-22. Some Undeveloped Resources in the Christian Revelation. Address Delivered at the An- niversary of the Newton Theological Insti- tute, June, 1898. Pamphlet. 8vo, 23. Chi- cago, 1898. Address on Behalf of the University Congre- gation at the Ceremony of Conferring the Degree of Doctor of Laws upon William McKinley. University Record, III (1898), 182-184. Academic Freedom. Arena, XXII (1899), 463-472. The Social Responsibility for Crime. Address Delivered at the Meeting of the Chicago Congregational Club, March 19, 1900. Pam- phlet. 8vo, 9. Printed by the Club. Modem Demands upon Theological Educa- tion. Reform Advocate, XIX (1900), 333- 336. The Chmrch and the Social Problem. Inde- pendent, LIII (1901), 537-539. The Next Step in College Development. Uni- versity Record, VI (1901), 35-38. Address Delivered at the Laying of the Cor- ner-Stone of the Commons. Ibid., 85-86. The Social Mission of College Women. Inde- pendent, LIV (1902), 261-266. Smith, Alexander The Value of Chemistry as Part of a School or College Course. Proceedings of the Na- tional Educational Association, 1897, 946- 951. The High School Course in Chemistry. School Review, V (1897) 497-503. The Articulation of School and College Work in the Sciences. Ibid., VII (1899), 411^17; 453-461; 527-538. Report on Chemistry of the Committee on Col- lege Entrance Requirements. Proceedings of the Educational Association, 1899, 794- 800. The Teaching of Chemistry and Physics. 8vo, 1-129. American Teachers Series. New York, Longmans, Green & Co., 1902. LiTEBABY, Educational, Miscellaneous 179 Smith, Arthur M. Christian Education. 8vo, 53. Pamphlet. Honolulu, 1901. The Life and Teachings of Jesus. 8vo, 29. Pamphlet. Honolulu, 1901. Scares, Theodore G. Hebrew Historiography. Biblical World, II (1893), 178-188. A Chronological Discussion of the Virgin Oracle of Isaiah. Ibid., VI (1895), 58-61. The Religious Ideas of Judaism from Ezra to the Maccabees. Ibid., XIII (1899), 380-388. Ezekiel's Temple. Ibid., XIV (1899), 93-103. The Import of the Chronicles as a Piece of Religio - Historical Literature. American Journal of Theology, III (1899), 251-274. Sparks, Edwin Erle Temporary Patriotism or Permanent Results. Public Opinion, XX (1896), 46-47. The Preservation of Historical Material in the Middle West. Dial, XXII (1897), 239-240. Topical Reference Lists in American History. 8vo, 110. Smythe, Columbus, Ohio, (1893) (1898). The Sentimental in American History Teach- ing. School Review, VII (1898), 536-541. A Fitting Memorial to Justin S. Morrill. The Independent, LI (1899), 536. Colloquialisms in American History. Self- Culture, IX (1899), 371-372. Salt in Early American History. Chautau- quan, XXXI (1900), 382-387. Famous Tours of the Presidents. World Re- view, I (1901), 323-329. A Record of a Lost Empire in America. Ibid., XXXIII (1901), 478-487. Stagg, Alonzo a. A. Scientific and Practical Treatise on American Football. In collaboration with H. L. Wil- liams. 16vo, 274. Hartford, Lockwood &. Brainard Co., 1893. Stabr, Frederick Sketch of Paolo Mantegazza. Popular Sci- ence Monthly, XLIII (1893), 549-551. Anthropology at the World's Fair. Ibid., 610-621. A Visit to the Keller Institute in Denmark. Charities Review, III (1893), 79-84. Costa Rica at the Exposition. Science, XXII (1893), 239. Sign Language in Print. Ibid., 286. Photography in Anthropological Work. Amer- ican Annual of Photography, VII (1893), 210-211. Notes on Color-Hearing. American Journal of Psychology, V (1893), 416-418. What is Anthropology? Chautauquan, XIX (1894), 25-29. Notes on Current Anthropological Literature. Biblical World, V (1895), 45-50. Archaeology in Denmark. Popular Science Monthly, XLVII (1895), 12-22. The Growth of Anthropology. Ibid., 265-267. First Steps in Human Progress. 16mo, 305. Meadville, Flood & Vincent, 1895. Aztec Place Names, Their Meaning and Mode of Composition. Translated from A. de la Rosa and A. Penafiel. Pamphlet, 8vo, 12. 1895. Pygmy Races of Men. North American Review, CLXII (1896), 414r-423. Bibliography of Iowa Antiquities. Proceed- ings of Davenport Academy of Sciences, VI (1896), 1-24. Summary of the Archaeology of Iowa. Ibid., 53-124. A Shell Sorget from Mexico. Ibid., 173-178. Popular 'Celebrations in Mexico. Journal of American Folk-Lore, IX (1896), 161-169. The Davenport Academy of Sciences. Pop- ular Science Monthly, LI (1897), 83-98. Science at the University of Chicago. Ibid., 784-805. Stone Images from Tarascan Territory, Mexico. American Anthropologist, X (1897), 45-47, 2 plates. 180 Publications Study of the Criminal in Mexico. American Journal of Sociology, III (1897), 13-17. A Study of the Census of the Pueblo of Co- chiti, New Mexico. Proceedings of the Davenport Academy of Sciences, VII (1897), 33-44. Notched Bones from Mexico. Ibid., VII (1898), 101-107, 1 plate. A Shell Inscription from Tula, Mexico. Ibid., 108-110 Some North American Spear-throwers. Inter- nationales Archiv filr Ethnographic, XI (1898), 233-235, plate. The Academy of National Sciences of St. Louis. Popular Science Monthly, LII (1898), 629-647. Survivals of Paganism in Mexico. Open Court, XIII (1899), 385-398. Holy Week in Mexico. Journal of American Folk-Lore, XII (1899), 161-165. Catalogue of a Collection of Objects Illustrat- ing the Folklore of Mexico. 8vo, 132, 32 figures. London, 1899. Mexican Paper. American Antiquarian, XXII (1900), 301-309, 8 figures. Notes upon the Ethnography of Southern Mexico. Proceedings of the Davenport Academy of Sciences, VIII (1900), 102-198, 98 cuts and map. Talbot, Maeion History, Aims and Methods of the Association of Collegiate Alumnae. Published by the Association. Chicago, 1893. Present Day Problems in the Education of Women. Educational Review, XIV (1897), 248-258. The Duty and the Opportunity of the Asso- ciation of Collegiate Alumnae. Michigan Alumnus, IV (1897), 3-14. Considerations on the College Curriculum for Women. Association of Collegiate Alum- nae Magazine, Series III, No. I (1898), 26-29. Domestic Science in the Colleges. Table Talk, 1895. A Practical Experiment in the Study of Dieta- ries. Review of Reviews, XIII (1896), 300- 302. Sanitary Science and its Place in the Univer- sity. University of Chicago Record, I (1896), 457-458. Housekeeping Schools in Belgium. Boston Cooking School Magazine, II (1898), 322- 324. Taebell, Frank Bigelow A Signed Proto - Corinthian Lecythus in the Boston Museum of Fine Arts. Revue arcMologique, 3'"« s6rie, XL (1892), 41-46. Terry, Benjamin Young Men in Kecent Educational Progress. . Young Men's Era, 1893. The Place of the Study of History in an Edu- cation. Illinois State Normal School Vi- dette, VII (1894), 1-3. The Professor Studentward. Denison Quar- terly, IV (1896), 26-38. Cosmopolitanism and Patriotism. Proceed- ings of the Baptist Congress, Baptist Congress Publishing Company, XIX (1901), 160-171. Thatcher, Oliver J. A Short History of Mediaeval Europe. 8vo, 325. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1897. A General History of Europa. In collaboration with Ferdinand Schwill. 8vo, xiv -f 613. New York, Charles Scribner's Sons, 1900. Tolman, Albert H. Natiural Science in a Literary Education. Pop' ular Science Monthly, XLIX (1896), 98-103. Triggs, Oscar Lovell Robert Browning as the Poet of Democracy. Poet 'Lore, IV (1892), 481-489. LiTEBABY, Educational, Miscellaneous 181 The Socialistic Thread in the Life and Works of William Morris. Ibid., V (1893), 113-122; 210-218. Walt Whitmaxi. Ibid., 289-305. Browning and Whitman: A Study in Democ- racy. Dilletante Library, 16mo, xii + 145. London, Swan, Sonnenschein & Co., 1893. New York, The Macmillan Co., 1893. Literature and the Scientific Spirit. Poet- Lore, VI (1894), 113-126. Personality in Teaching Literature. Ibid., 389- 393. The Aims of Literary Study. Dial, XVIII (1895), 203-204. New Ideas in Teaching Literature. Poet-Lore, VIII (1896), 452-454. On the Study and Teaching of Literature. University Record, I (1896), 337-339; 345- 346. Democratic Art. Forum, XXVI (1898), 66-79. Democratic Criticism. Sewanee Review, VI (1898), 4ia^32. A Century of American Poetry. Forum, XXX (1901), 636-640. Chapters in the History of the Arts and Crafts Movement. 8vo, 198. Chicago, Industrial Art League, 1902. Tufts, James Hayden James Tufts: A Memorial. Edited by James Hayden Tufts. Printed for the editor by the University of Chicago Press. 8vo, 145, 1902. The Relation of Philosophy to Other Graduate Studies. Handbook of Graduate Courses, 1898-1899, xix-xxxi. University of Chicago Press, 1898. Veblen, Thoestein B. The Economic Theory of Woman's Dress. Popular Science Monthly, XLVI (1894), 198-205. Arts and Crafts. Journal of Political Econo- my, XI (1902), 108-111. VoTAW, Clyde Webeb The Foimding of the Christian Church: An Inductive Study in Fifty Lessons of the Primitive Era of Christianity, 30-100, A. D. 8vo, 344. Hartford, Conn., Student Pub- lishing Co., 1892. The Primitive Era of Christianity, as Recorded in the Acts of the Apostles, 30^63 A. D. 8vo, 122. Chicago, University Press, 1898. The Life of Christ: A Sketch. Progress, HI (1898), 503-524. Present Excavations in Palestine. Biblical World, XIV (1899), 434r-443. The Use of Books in Bible Study. Ibid., XVI (1900), 3-9. Books for New Testament Study. In collabo- ration with Professor Charles F. Bradley, 8vo, 80. Chicago, University Press, 1900. Walkeb, Dean A. Some Notes from Palestine. Biblical World, II (1893), 374-378. The Vapor Bath of Ghantur. Recovery of a Roman Milestone. Ibid., Ill (1894), 53-56. Wateeman, Richabd, Jr. Educational Exhibits at the World's Fairs Since 1851. Educational Review, V (1893), 120-129; 21&-231. The International Educational Congresses of 1893. Ibid., VI (1893), 158-166. Educational Exhibits at the Columbian Expo- sition. Ibid., 268-276. The World's Fair: What it Offers to Univer- sity Extension Students. University Ex- tension World, II (1893), 9-13. Webgeland, Agnes M. The Latest Criticism of America. XXXII (1902), 117-121. Dial, Whitman, Chables O. A Marine Observatory the Prime Need of American Biology. Atlantic Monthly, LXXI (1893), 808-815. 182 Publications Wilkinson, William Cleaver Classic Greek Courses in English. 12mo, 314. New York, Chautauqua Press, 1892. Jesus: A Biography from the Birth in Bethle- hem to the Crucifixion on Calvary. Book XII, 813-950. People's Bible History. 4to, xxiv + 1241. Chicago, Henry O. Shepard & Co., 1896. The Epic of Paul. A Poem in XXIV Books. 8vo, 722. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1897. The Epic of Saul. New edition, revised and enlarged. 8vo, 390. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1898. Foreign Classics in English. Six volumes. New York, Funk & Wagnalls, 1900. Chrysalis (Poem). Century, XLIX (1895), 261. George William Curtis (Poem). Ibid,, L (1895), 339. Glossary of Foreign Expressions. Standard Dictionary, I (1895), 2261-2264. WiLLETT, Herbert A. The Keligion of Israel. Progress, III (1898), 472-501. The Life and Teachings of Jesus. 1898. Sec- ond and third editions, 1900 and 1902. Fleming H. Revell & Co. A New Vocation. Christian Quarterly, New Series, III (1899), 433-443. The Teachings of the Books. In collaboration with Dr. James M. Campbell. 1899. Second edition, 1901. Fleming H. Revell & Co. Our Plea for Union and the Present Crisis. Christian Century Co., 1901. ZuEBLiN, Charles The Lecturer and Laborer. University Ex- tension, III (1894), 213-216. Social Christianity in England. Methodist Review, LXXIX (1897), 51-64. Results and Prospects of University Extension. Dial, XXII (1897), 207-208. Some Municipal Problems and Phenomena. Dial, XXVIII (1900), 283-285. A Decade of Civic Improvement. Chautau- quan, XXXVI (1902), 174-177; also pam- phlet, 16mo, 16. Chicago, Chautauqua Press, 1903. INDEX Abbott, F. P., S7, 165 Adams, C. C, 134 Adams, W. S., 95 AUen, B. M., 134 Allen, P. S., 65, 66 Allen, W. H., 18 Almstedt, H. B., 65, 66 Ames, E. S., 8, 10 Anderson, Galusha, 160 Anderson, Kate, 11 Angell, J. R., 6, 165 Arnold, J. K., 44 Arnolt, W. Muss, 42, 48, 165 Asada, Eiji, 44 Ashley, M. L., 10 Auten, NelUe M., 37 Bain, H, F., 123 Baird, P. C, 44 Balch, E, A., 28 Baldwin, J. F., 28 Barker, L.F., 136, 165 Barnard, E. E., 87, 165 Barnes, C. R., 149, 165 Barrows, D. P., 35 Barrows, J. H., 38, 165 Bftrta, Alois, 44 Batt, Max, 66 Baumgartner, W. J., 134 Baur, George, 129, 146 Bawden, H. H., 10 Bechtel, E. A., 59 Beckmann, F. E., 62 Beeson, C. H., 165 Behan, W. P., 160 Bellisle, R. de Poyen, 62 Bensley, R. R., 137 Bergeron, Eugfene, 62 Bemhard, Adolph, 111 Berry, G. R., 43, 44 Biddle, H. C, 111 Blackburn, F. A., 68, 165 Blanchard, F. M., 165 Bliss, G. A., 81 Bolza, Oskar, 75 Bordes, A. B. de, 62, 165 Boyd, C. E., 23 Boyd, J. H., 80 Bowen, Mary, 71 Brace, Edith M., 134 Bray, W. L., 151 Breasted, J. H., 30, 41, 166 Breckinridge, Sophonisba P., 18, 23 Bridge, J. L., 113 Bristol, C. L., 130 Brode, H. S., 130 Bronk, IsabeUe, 62 Brown, G. L., 81 Bruce, P. P., 45 Buck, A. F., 9 Buck, C. D., 49 Buckley, Edmund, 38, 166 Budgett, S. P., 143 Bulkley, Julia E., 12 Burchard, H. M., 54 Burgess, T. C, 54 Burnham, S. W., 86, 166 Burton, E. D., 46 Bushnell, C. J., 35 Bushong, F. W., 113 Butler, Nathaniel, 12, 166 Butterworth, Horace, 166 Caldwell, O. W., 151, 152 Caldwell, William, 166 Capps, Edward, 52, 166 Carpenter, F.I., 69, 71, 167 Case, C. D., 157 Case, E. C, 147 Castle, C. F., 167 Catterall, R. C. H., 27, 28 Chamberlain, C. J., 149 Chamberlin, T. C, 114, 167 Child, C. M., 127 Cipriani, Lisi, 62 Clapp, Cornelia M., 130 Clark, Hannah B., 85 Clark, H, L., 167 Clark, S. H., 167 Clark, W. A., 12 Claypole, Agnes M., 130 Clement, W. K., 59 Cleveland, F. A., 28 Coffin, F. J., 44 Comparette, T. L., 59 Conrad, A. H., 153 Conrad, Laetitia M., 39 Cooke, Elizabeth, 142 Copeland, E. B., 154 Coulter, J. G., 152 Coulter, J. M., 148, 167 Cowles, H. C, 150, 152, 168 Crabb, W. D., 62 Craig, Wallace, 134 Cross, George, 157 Crow, Martha F., 167 Cummings, John, 16 Curtiss, R. S., 110 Cutler, W. A., 18 Cutting, S. W., 62, 168 Dains, F. B., HI Damon, L. T., 168 Davenport, C. B., 126, 168 Davenport, H. J., 16, 168 Davies, H. E., 156 Davis, Benjamin M., 138 Davis, Bradley M., 149 Davis, Katherine B., 16 Derby, I. H., 109 Dewey, John, 3, 12, 168 Dickson, L. E., 78, 81 Dilthey, Walter, 113 Dixson, Zella A., 168 Donaldson, H. H., 128, 143 Downing, E. R., 131 Dunn, A. W., 37 Dunn, Elizabeth H., 145 Drew, E. R., 104 Earhart, B. F., 104 Eggert, C. E., 66 EUermann, Ferdinand, 95 EUwood, C. A., 36 Enteman, Minnie M., 131 Eycleshymer, A. C, 131, 136 FeUows, G. E., 27, 168 Felton, Katherine, 19 Fenneman, N. M., 123 Fertig, J. W., 28 Findlay, William, 81 Fischer, M. H., 141 183 Fish, A. L., 19 Fite, Warner, 8 Flickinger, R. C, 54 Folin.O. K., Ill Forrest, J. D., 36 Foster, G. B., 157 Fowler, F. H., 50 France, WUmer C, 54, 55 Frank, Tenny, 55, 59 Franklin, F, Q., 28 Freund, Ernst, 22 Frye, T. C, 153 Frost, E. B., 92 Gale, H. G., 102, 104 Garner, J. H., Ill Garrey, W. E., 142 Garrison, G. P., 28 Garrison, W. E., 160 Gates, Errett, 160 Gillespie, William, 81 Gillette, J. M., 36 Goode, J. P., 125 Goodspeed, E. J., 47, 48, 168 Goodspeed, G. S., 25, 38, 40 Gordon, C. H., 124 Gtordon, Kate, 11 Gordon, W. C, 161 Gore, W. C, 10 Gould, E. R. L., 16 Graves, Elma, 37 Gray, C. D., 44, 169 Greeley, A. W., 141, 142 Gregory, Emily R., 131 Guyer, M. F., 131 Hale, G. E., 83, 169 Hale, W. G., 55, 169 Hamilton, Alice, 145 Hammond, Eleanor P., 71 Hancock, A. A., 169 Hancock, Harris, 80 Hardesty, Irving, 138, 145 Harding, W. F., 19 Hardy, Sarah M., 19 Harper E. H., 132 Harper, R. F., 40, 169 Harper, W. R., 39, 170 Harris, Mary B., 50 184 Publications Harris, N. D., 28 Hastings, C. H., 37, 171 Hatai, Shinkishi, 144 Hatfield, Ethel G., 23 Hatfield, H.R., 15, 17 Hayes, E. C, 36 Hefferan, Mary, 134, 156 Hegner, H. F., 37 Heidel, W. A., 9, 55 Hektoen, Ludvig, 154 Hellems, F. B. R., 60 HeUer, Otto, 66, 171 Henderson, C. R., 31, 161, 171 Henderson, George, 171 Henderson, W. E., 113 Hendrickson, G. L., 58 Herrick, H. M., 48 Her rick, J. A., 158 Herrick, Robert, 171 Hesse, B. C, 111 Hessler, J. C, 108, 112, 172 Heuver, Q. D., 48 Hewes, Amy, 37 Hill, William, 15 Hoben, T. A., 48 Holferty, G. M., 158 Holmes, S. J., 132 Holmes, W. B., 109 Hoist. H. E. von, 24, 172 Hopkins, T.C., 124, 172 Hourwich, Isaac, 16, 172 Howerth, I. W., 34, 36, 172 Howland, G. C, 61 Hoxie, R. F., 19 Hulbert, E. B., 158 Hull, G. F., 104 HuUey, Lincoln, 44 Hunter, G. W., Jr., 135 Hussey, G. B., 54 Hutchinson, J. I., 81 Iddings, J. P., 120 Ikuta, Massuo, 111 Ingres, Mazime, 172 Inskeep, Anna L., 23 Irons, E. E., 156 James, E. J., 21, 172 Jameson, J. F., 24, 173 Jeffreys, Elizabeth, 112 Jenkins, T. A., 61 Jewett, F. B., 103, 104 Johnson, Franklin, 159, 161, 173 Johnson, H. ?., 132 Johnson, R. H., 135 Johonnott, E. S., 104 Jonas, J. B. E., 66, 173 Jones, H. E., 44 Jones, Jessie L., 67 Jones, L. W., 109, 112 Jordan, E. O., 130, 154 Judson, H. P., 20, 173 Kellor, Frances A., 37 Kelly, F. T., 45 Kent, C. F., 173 Kent, N. A., 96 Kern, P. O., 65, 67 Kimble, R. G., 37 King, W. L. M., 19 Kinsley, Carl, 103 Klenze, Camillo von, 63 Koch, Waldemar, 141 Kammel, H. B., 124 Kyes, Preston, 137 Lagergren, C. Q., 173 Laing, G. J., 58, 174 Land, "W. J. G., 153 Laughlin, J. L., 13, 174 Laves, Kurt, 93 Lawson, A. A., 152 Lehmer, D. N., 81 Lengfeld, FeUx, 109, 174 Lewis, E. H., 71, 174 Life, A. C, 153 Lillie, F. R., 126, 132 Lillie, R. S., 132 Lindholm, S. V., 19 Lingle, D.J.,141 Linn, J. W., 174 Linscott, H. F., 50 Livingston, B. E., 151, 152 Locy, W. A., 133 Loeb, Jacques, 128, 138 Logan, W. N., 147 Lovett, R. M., 70, 174 Lutz, F. E., 135 Lyon, E. P., 140, 142, 174 Lyon, Florence M., 150, 152 MacClintock, S. S., 38 MacClintock, W. D., 67 MacLean, Anne M., 36| MacLennan, S. F., 9, 10 MacMillan, D. P., 10 Mahood, E. W., 11 Mall, F. P., 128, 137 Manly, J. M., 67 Mann, C. R., 102 Manny, F. A., 175 Maschke, Heinrich, 76 Mathews, A. P., 141, 175 Mathews, Shailer, 46, 175 Maxwell, S. S., 142 McCaleb, W. F., 28 McCallum, W. B., 153 McCaskill, V. E., 133 McClung, C. E., 135 McCoy, H. N., 108, 112 McDonald, J. H., 82 McKee, R, H., 112 McLean, S. J., 17 McPherson, William, 112 Mead, A. D., 133 Meade, E. S., 19 Mebane, W. N., 45 Meek, Elizabeth B., 135 Merrell, W. D., 151, 152 Merriam, C. E., 22 Meyer, J. J., 50, 175 Mezes, S. E., 9 Michelson, A. A., 101 Miller, A. C, 14 Miller, F. J., 175 Miller, J. A., 82 MiUer, M. L., 35, 36 Millerd, Clara E., 55 Millikan, R. A., 102, 175 Million, J. W., 19 Millis, H. A., 17 Mitchell, S. A., 100 Mitchell, S. C, 23 Mitchell, W. C, 16, 17 Moenkhaus, W. J., 135 Moncrief, J. W., 159 Moncrieff, W. F., 10 Monroe, Paul, 36 Moody, W. v., 70, 175 Moore, A. W., 8, 10 Moore, Anne, 142 Moore, C. H., 59 Moore, E. C, 10, 38 Moore, E. H., 73 Moore, Ella A., 176 Moore, J. H., 36 Moulton, F. R., 94, 100, 176 Moulton, R. G., 72, 176 Mulflnger, G. A., 176 Munson, J. P., 133 Nef, J. U., 105 Neff, T. L., 61 NeUson, C. H., 142 Nelson, N. L. T., 152 Nordell, P. A., 176 Norlin, George, 55 Norman, W. W., 143 Northrup, G. W., 157 Osborn, L. D., 158 Overton, J. B., 152 Owen, W. B., 54, 55 Padan, R. S., 17 Parkhurst, J. A., 96 Paschal, G. W., 55 Payne, W. A., 176J Pearce, H. J., 11 Peck, P. F., 29 Perrin, J. W., 29 Perry, H. F., 88 Pickel, F. W., 135 Pietsch, Karl, 61 Piatt, Julia B., 135 Prather, J. M., 133, 138 Pratt, Alice E., 71 Price, I. M., 40, 177 Putnam, T. M., 82 Ransom, J. B., 112 Raymond, J. H., 34, 37 Reese, S. C, 101 Reichmann, F.,104 Revell, D. G., 137 Reynolds, Myra, 68, 72 Rickert, Martha E., 72 Ritchey, G. W., 95, 177 Robertson, Josephine C, 177 Robinson, E. G., 157 Rogers, A. K., 11 Root, T. H., 48, 177 Rullkoetter, William, 29 Salisbury, R. D., 117 Schaffner, J. H., 153 Schlicher, J. J., 60 Index 185 Schmidt, Emanuel, 45 Schmidt-Wartenberg, H., 64, 177 Schneider, E. A., 109 Schoemaker, D. M., 145 Schoolcraft, H. L., 29 Schub, F. O., 67 Schwartz, S. E., 113 Schwill, Ferdinand, 26, 177 Scofleld, Cora L., 29 Searles, Helen M., 51 See, T. J. J., 98, 177 Seidenadel, C. W., 54, 55 SeUery, G. C, 29 Sethre, J. O., 29 Seward, O. P., 67 Shambaugh, G. E., 137 Shepardson, F. W., 26 Shipley, F. W., 60 Shorey, Paul, 51, 178 Shull, G. H., 153 Sidey, T. K., 60 Sikes, G. C, 19 Sinclair, S. B., 13 Skinner, E.B., 82 Slaught, H. E., 77, 82 Slosson, E. E., 113 Small, A. W., 30, 178 Smedley, F. W., 12 Smith, Alexander, lOG, 178 Smith, A. M., 158, 179 Smith, G. B., 157 Smith, J. M. P., 43, 45 Smith, R. W., 152 Smith, W. E., 113 Snow, Letitia M., 135, 154 Soares, T. G., 45, 179 Sparks, E. E., 26, 29, 179 Spray, Jessie N., 11 Squires, V. P., 72 Starr, Frederick, 33, 179 Stagg, A. A., 179 Sterns, W. P., 17 Stevens, F. L., 152 Stevenson, J. H., 45 Stieglitz, Julius, 106 St. John, Wallace, 160 Stokes, H. N., 109 Stone, Isabelle, 104 Stratton, A. W.. 50 Stratton, S. W., 102 Strong, C. A„ 9 Stuart, H. W., 11, 19 Sturges, Mary M., 135 Sturtevant, E. H., 51 Swearingen, G. C, 60 Swartz, S. E., 113 Talbot, Marion, 33, 180 Tanner, Amy E., 9, 11 Tannreuter, G. W., 135 TarbeU, F. B., 29, 52, 180 Terry, Benjamin, 24, 180 Thatcher, O. J., 25, 180 Thomas, W. I., 33, 37 Thompson, Helen B., 11, 145 Thompson, J. W., 27, 29 Thurber, C. H., 12 Tibbetts, W. F., 60 Tolman, A. H., 68, 180 Tower, W. L., 128 Treadwell, A. L., 134 Triggs, O. L., 71, 72, 180 Tufts, J. H., 5, 181 Tunell, G. G., 18 Tunnicliff, Helen H., 23 Van Deman, Esther B., 61 Vandewalker, Nina C, 38 Van Kirk, Hiram, 158 Veblen, T. B., 15, 181 Vincent, G. E., 34, 37 Vos, B. J., 66 Votaw, C. W., 47, 49, 181 Wadsworth, F. L. O., 96, 103 WaUace, Elizabeth, 23, 61 Wallace, M. W., 72 Walker, A. T., 59, 61 Walker, D. A., 45, 181 Watas6, Sho, 130 Waterman, Richard, 181 Webb, J. E., 154 Webster, R. W., 141, 143 Welch, Jeannette C, 143 Weller, Stuart, 121 Wells, H. G., 155 Wergeland, Agnes M., 27, 181 West, Max, 19, 35 Wheeler, H. L., 114 Wheeler, W. M., 129 Wherry, W. B., 156 White, H. K., 19 Whitehead, L. G., 11 Whitford, H. N., 151 Whitman, C. O., 125, 181 Whitton, R. H., 20 Wilkinson, W. C, 182 Willett, H. L., 43, 45, 182 WilHamson, H. P., 61 Willis, H. P., 18 Winston, A. P., 20 Wolcott J, D., 59 Wood, F. A., 67 Wood, R. W., 114 Wright, W. H., 101 Wyckoff, C. T,, 29 Yoong, Ella P., 12, 13 Young, J. W. A., 77 Zoethout, W. D., 143 Zueblin, Charles, 32, 182 AN INITIAL nNE OF 25 CENT_^«„ OVERDUE. 624383 ^^ UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA UBRARY